Skip to main content

Start a Flute Choir

Are you a band director with so many flutes that you often joke that they’re “a dime a dozen”? Starting a flute choir might be the answer to this problem.

Flutes are one of the most flexible musical instruments in your band. The soprano flute’s range alone covers more than three octaves. Add in some lower-range harmony flutes, such as alto and bass flutes, and that range can be increased even more.

Flute choirs can help balance your band’s pyramid of sound and provide extracurricular music opportunities that engage your students while promoting your ensembles as a whole. This specialized ensemble can play scores that were originally designed for full orchestras, choirs or wind ensembles, which is nothing short of amazing! Plus, you only need a handful of flutists — six or more — to get started.

Buying Instruments

piccoloI’ll be honest, flute choirs can be expensive — alto and bass flutes have pretty high price tags. Most of the information below is about the lower-range harmony flutes because many schools have a selection or easy access to higher-range melody flutes (piccolos and soprano flutes).

Once you stock your closet with harmony flutes, you’ll be able to play band pieces with small flute choirs as well. This means that your band can now perform dozens of gorgeous contemporary pieces that would otherwise be off limits. The mysterious “Frozen Cathedral” by John Mackey features alto and bass flute solos. Another excellent piece for winds with harmony flutes is “Kings Go Forth” by Edward Gregson for symphonic wind band.

To get your flute choir started, you will need:

  • 1 Piccolo
  • 3 Soprano flutes
  • at least 2 Alto flutes
  • at least 2 Bass flutes

female playing fluteThis 8-person setup will be enough to get you going.

If you have a well-established band, you won’t need to purchase many sopranos or piccolos. And while there is such a thing as a flute d’amour (a flute between the soprano and the alto), this flute’s range will be covered by the combination of soprano and alto flutes, so it isn’t necessary.

The two lowest harmony flutes are the contra-alto (an octave below the alto) and the contrabass flute. If you have a very large group interested in joining the flute choir, consider getting one more low voice — I recommend the contra-alto, which looks surprisingly like a contrabass clarinet (you can listen to one here). This instrument is very pricey — most start at $20,000 — so if you are set on getting one, prepare for a lot of fundraising.

Curved vs. Straight Headjoints

curved head jointMost flutes come with the option of a curved headjoint. While this is often an adjustment made on soprano flutes for younger students, having a curved headjoint becomes increasingly more common as the flute gets lower. Watch flutist Gina Luciani weigh the pros and cons of straight and curved headjoints.

As Luciani mentions, curved headjoints allow students with smaller hands and shorter fingers to reach all the keys with ease. A curved headjoint also changes where the heaviest part of the flute is, meaning that it shifts most of the weight toward the player’s face, whereas with a straight headjoint, more weight is in the middle of the instrument, near the player’s arms.

Do a trial of different harmony flutes to best determine which type of alto or bass flute — and which headjoint — will best suit your students.

Harmony Flute Accessories

bass fluteThumb Rests: I recommend thumb rests for bass and heavier flutes. Bass flutes often have metal thumb or hand rests that help players balance the extra weight. These are especially handy for students who will be playing for a long period of time but do not plan on playing with a stand.

Bass Flute Stand: If you are adding a bass flute to your ensemble, get a stand. These flutes weigh approximately 5 pounds, which is twice the weight of an alto.

Woodwind Stand: Having a few woodwind stands with pegs for soprano flutes and piccolos with also help out flute doublers.

Harmony Flute Materials

Don’t shy away from all nickel harmony flutes. Solid-silver alto and bass flutes simply aren’t within most school’s budgets. Here are three common types of materials that you will see in harmony flutes.

Copper Alloy: These flutes have a warm and brilliant sound. They are typically made with 70% to 85% copper and have a silver lip plate.

Nickel Silver: This material is an alloy of silver, zinc and nickel. Alto flutes are commonly made of solid nickel silver. This material produces a dark timbre. Oftentimes, nickel silver flutes are silver plated, which better protects against corrosion, but they are usually more expensive. The lip-plate is the most important part to protect against wear, so if you plan on getting a nickel silver flute, try to get one with a silver-plated lip-plate or headjoint.

Black Nickel: This material is used in jazz saxophones, but you can also find it in flutes! Black nickel is simply a plating on the outside of an instrument that makes it look darker. While many woodwind aficionados will claim that lacquer makes a huge difference in the sound, I believe the internal build of the instrument to be much more important.

Ways to Make Ends Meet

Even entry-level harmony flutes are not very economical. The lower in range you go means there is more tubing, and thus, the higher the price. Here are some tips on how to make a flute choir without having to drain the band boosters’ account:

  • Recruit string members from the orchestra: Instead of purchasing lower-range harmony flutes, have double bass and cellos cover the lowest parts. Of course, by adding strings, your ensemble won’t be a true flute choir, but you will still have an extremely unique chamber ensemble with a beautiful sound
  • Get second-hand instruments: You might find alto flutes and sometimes even bass flutes on Facebook pages designed for classical flute players, such as Flutes for Sale or The Flute Classifieds.
  • Arrange the music yourself or have your upperclassmen try their hand at composition: After-school chamber ensembles are the perfect space to start experimenting. If you know a senior who plans to major in music education or composition, have them take the reins and try arranging or composing a piece for the choir. Specialty chamber music can get expensive. Since it is for educational purposes, you can arrange otherwise copyrighted material and perform it with your flute choir.

10 Best Turntable Moments in the Movies

Turntables have made many appearances in films, sometimes even playing a crucial role in the plot, or to the development of central characters.

Surprised? Don’t be. Here are 10 of the best turntable moments in movies.

1. Shawshank Redemption – Opera Scene

In this compelling 1994 drama, Tim Robbins plays Andy Dufresne, a banker who’s incarcerated for a crime he didn’t commit. After years of writing to the state, he’s finally sent crates full of books and records. The delight from the unexpected delivery prompts Andy to lock himself in the warden’s office, where he plays Mozart’s Duettino-Sull’aria — and then broadcasts the aria over the prison’s PA system. As the music plays, all the inmates stop to listen, as Andy gives them a moment of hope and freedom. Check it out here.

2. Good Morning Vietnam – It’s Alright

This 1987 anti-war film stars Robin Williams as Adrian Cronauer, an irreverent, wise-cracking DJ for the Armed Forces Radio Service who is on the brink of having a nervous breakdown. The pounding tones of Adam Faith’s single “It’s Alright” serves as the soundtrack to this riveting scene, with Cronauer tossing records around the control room as he himself begins to spin out of control. Check it out here.

3. A Clockwork Orange – Beethoven’s Ninth

This Stanley Kubrick masterpiece presents a bleak glimpse into the future as we follow the wild adventures and musings of Alex (Malcolm McDowell), a criminal with a keen interest in classical music, particularly Beethoven. His love for the composer is exhibited in this scene, where Alex plays the 9th Symphony (Second Movement) as his inner monologue runs amuck. (True, he’s playing it from what appears to be an early DAT tape, but a garish turntable sits front and center in his onscreen audio system.) Violent and gruesome images follow — a study in contrast to the beautiful musical underpinning. Check it out here.

4. Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade – Bath Scene

What’s a bath without a record playing? In this scene, Dr. Elsa Schneider (Alison Doody) is listening to a phonograph recording of Benny Goodman’s swing jazz tune “You’re a Sweet Little Headache” while supposedly running a bath. However, it’s actually a cover for a raid on Indiana Jones’ (Harrison Ford) room in a search for the Grail Diary. At this point in the movie, Jones doesn’t yet know that he and Elsa aren’t on the same side — and the pair kiss. Check it out here.

5. Mars Attacks – Indian Love Call

Grandma Florence Norris’ (Sylvia Sidney) record player is the only thing stopping the aliens from taking over the earth. In this hilarious scene, Florence is listening to Slim Whitman’s album Indian Love Call through headphones; however, as the Martians attack, her headphones become unplugged. It’s at this moment when the aliens’ heads begin exploding, and the world is safe once again. Check it out here.

6. One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest – Medication Time

In this classic 1975 adaptation of the Ken Kesey novel of the same name, a young Jack Nicholson plays R.P. McMurphy, a new patient at a mental institution. One particular day, McMurphy finds the classical music that the nurses play while giving out medication to be insufferable. He asks Nurse Ratched (Louise Fletcher, who plays the role with just the right amount of self-righteous sadism) to turn it down and she declines … and in a way that’s so patronizing, we can almost sense the battle of wills that’s about to unfold. Check it out here.

7. Almost Famous – “One Day, You’ll Be Cool”

The record player plays a pivotal role in Almost Famous — largely because William Miller’s (Patrick Fugit) mother doesn’t allow her children to listen to music in the house. Feeling suffocated, William’s big sister moves out, telling her brother “one day, you’ll be cool” and leaving him her collection of vinyl LPs, along with a note urging him to listen to the Who’s Tommy because it will let him see his “entire future.” Sure enough, the moment William puts the album on his turntable is the moment he falls in love with rock music. Check it out here.

8. Ghost World – “Devil Got My Woman”

After graduating from high school, Enid (Thora Birch) is trying to figure out what to do with her life. She meets vinyl enthusiast Seymour (Steve Buscemi) at a garage sale, and buys a blues record — Skip James’ “Devil Got My Woman” — from him. Later, she finally gets around to putting it on her turntable … and has an epiphany as she listens to it over and over again. Check it out here.

9. The Mechanic – Car Bomb

He’s a bit of a recluse, but the one mainstay in assassin Arthur Bishop’s (Jason Statham) life is his turntable, which becomes a vital part of his routine. Every time Bishop finishes a job, he goes home and plays a record to unwind. His favorite? Franz Schubert’s Piano Trio No. 2 in E Flat Major — a gentle piece of music that serves to underscore a particularly violent hit. Check it out here.

10. The Royal Tenenbaums – Tent Scene

In The Royal Tenenbaums, the turntable is part of the story from the outset, something that adopted daughter Margot Tenenbaum (Gwyneth Paltrow) turns to for solace and comfort. In this pivotal scene, she and her brother Richie (Luke Wilson) listen to the Rolling Stones song “She Smiled Sweetly” as they have an intimate conversation and reveal their love for each other. Check it out here.

Never a Dull Moment

I recently decided to take the train to meet some of my high school gal pals for lunch. It would be about an hour of travel.

As I got ready to leave, I wondered, should I take my tablet so I could read my book? Does it have enough juice? Where is my charger? Should I bring a portable power bank in case the battery runs low? Hmm.

I could just listen to music on my phone. But is it charged? Oh and … don’t forget earbuds. And are they charged?

You know the drill.

So much mental energy expended on making sure I had the technology necessary to stay connected en-route because heaven forbid I should be …. bored!

Then I had this thought: What if I brought nothing? What if I just looked out the window and watched the world go by? The train runs right by my high school. There are songs inside those memories. Songs I’ll never write if I’m doom-scrolling social media.

Instead of taking the risk of being bored, why not just see what boredom leads to?

Quote from David Bowie: "I don't know where I am going, but I promise it won't be boring".

“I don’t know where I am going, but I promise it won’t be boring,” David Bowie once told a concert audience — a quote that was used as the lead-in to a an article by BBC journalist Clare Thorp about the connection between boredom and creativity. Thorp asserts that it’s when we’re in the state of boredom that we are the most creative — our minds are unoccupied and available for ideas to find us. I can attest to it.

I like to think of myself as a super-busy driven woman. It’s rare when I’m idle. And when I do find myself in pause mode, I’m uncomfortable. Like it’s a waste of time unless I’m getting something done — crossing off tasks from my to-do list. But I’ve come to learn that this kind of thinking is counterproductive.

Two years ago, many creators were reduced to twiddling thumbs and counting months. But as time went by, many of us reconnected with our creativity in ways we hadn’t before. From doing nothing and despairing, we segued into writing musicals. We designed apps. Three of my friends started and finished novels. We embraced the downtime and even came to enjoy it. We came to the realization that silence and stillness was conducive to creativity.

Author Margaret Atwood has spoken of this idea through the lens of birdwatching: “Watching birds takes you out of yourself. It’s a flow state. Writing ideas come in sideways during such states.”

That flow state for me is gardening … even though I can’t make a gardenia bloom to save my life. But my anything-but-green thumb knows that when I’m doing garden work, I’m at peace. My mind makes room. I listen to music and I hear key changes and close-knit harmonies that I consider implementing in the future. Time flies when I’m nurturing my lemon tree. When the sun goes down, there’s a sense of replenishment and calm. Our minds need to rest, just as our bodies need to sleep, to recharge, just like technology.

When my daughter was a child, she used to complain from the backseat of the car that she (too) was bored. “When will we get there?” she asked over and over again. I remember asking my mother the same question, expecting her to save me … from boredom.

Think about what state you were in when you had your last eureka moment. Were you in the shower? Driving? Shopping? Whatever it was, I bet you were doing something without a creative agenda.

No, boredom isn’t something to be avoided at all costs. It’s really a gift. And if I ever sense another dull moment knocking on my door, you can be sure I’ll welcome it in.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings

How to Turn Off Motion Smoothing on Your TV

Imagine this: You’ve just laid out big bucks for a new TV with all the bells and whistles. You get it home, set it up, and decide to celebrate by watching your favorite classic action movie. But when you turn it on, the picture quality looks more like a soap opera.

What gives?

No, it’s not a defect in your TV. To make your movie look more like it does at a theater, all you have to do is change a single setting in the TV’s preferences. However, the mode you need to adjust has different names, depending on the manufacturer. For the purposes of this article, we’ll refer to it generically as “motion smoothing.”

Frame Up

TV manufacturers invented motion smoothing to handle the visual discrepancy between movies and your TV set. As you probably know, a film or video consists of multiple single images that go by really fast to create the effect of motion. Have you ever seen one of those old-time flipbooks? Each page features a single image that varies slightly from the one before, but when you flip through them quickly, it looks like motion.

Videos are shot at various speeds, including 30 frames per second (FPS) and 29.97 FPS; however, most films and many TV shows have long been shot at 24 FPS, which gives content a slightly flickering, cinematic look. (The exception is daytime soap operas, which are often shot directly to video at 60 FPS, giving the impression that everything is either somehow too fluid or is moving in slow motion — an effect called “hyperrealism.”)

TVs have much higher refresh rates — typically 60 Hertz (Hz), 120 Hz or greater. The refresh rate is a measurement of how many times your TV reconstructs the image in one second, so it’s the TV equivalent of frames per second.

If you’re watching a 24 FPS movie on a TV, the discrepancy between the FPS of the content and the TV’s refresh rate creates blurring — also known as “judder” — especially when there’s rapid motion on the screen. TV manufacturers created motion smoothing to address this mismatch. The idea is that as a movie is playing, the TV analyzes the onscreen movement and creates additional frames to match the refresh rate based on what it thinks they would look like. The result is less blurring.

Motion smoothing can work well if the motion in the movie scene is linear and predictable — for example, a roller coaster going up or down. But if the movement is more random, it’s much harder for your TV to make an educated guess about what to include in the frame, which can result in visual distortion, also known as artifacts. The reduced amount of flicker causes 24 FPS content to look like a video shot at a higher frame rate — something known as the “Soap Opera Effect.” Click here for a video that demonstrates why it’s not desirable when watching movies.

Cruise Control

Motion smoothing’s impact on 24 FPS movies and TV shows is not only unpopular with viewers, but with many movie directors too. After all, their whole world revolves around creating a particular look and feel in their films. When a director’s carefully shot movie looks like a cheap soap opera when viewed on a TV set (where much of today’s movie watching occurs), it makes them mad. It’s enough of an issue that several high-profile directors like Christopher Nolan and Martin Scorsese — as well as actors such as Tom Cruise — have asked the public to turn motion smoothing off when they watch movies.

The blowback from the film industry over motion smoothing motivated a group of manufacturers, content producers, studios and technology companies to form an organization called the UHD Alliance in 2019. The Alliance’s main purpose is to urge TV manufacturers to include a comprehensive setting on their products called “Filmmaker Mode” (FMM) so that viewers can watch movies with TV settings optimized for the cinematic experience … which includes motion smoothing being turned off.

It took a while for Filmmaker Mode to catch on, but it’s getting more widespread. According to a recent article in the Hollywood Reporter, “Filmmaker Mode is now available in all-new LG and Samsung TVs as well as select models from Hisense, Panasonic, Philips/TP Vision and Skyworth; projectors from LG, Samsung, Benq and Hisense; and services including Kaleidescape and Prime Video (the first streaming platform to automatically implement Filmmaker Mode for Prime on LG TVs).”

How To Turn Motion Smoothing Off

Although Filmmaker Mode is a heartening development, many people own TVs that don’t include it, instead offering a single control to turn motion smoothing on or off. If your TV falls into that category, simply use the list below to identify the name for motion smoothing that your TV manufacturer uses, then use its remote to navigate to the advanced picture settings menu (where it’s most usually found) and turn it off. (The links provide specific instructions for each manufacturer.)

Without the Soap Opera Effect, you may see more blurring during action sequences, but at least The Godfather will no longer look like The Young and the Restless. Happy viewing!

Case Study: In this Rural Town, Band is Family

Every fall, band director Joel Pohland starts fielding the same question — “When is jazz night?” — from excited members of his community in Pierz, Minnesota. Even though jazz night, which takes place in April, may be at least six months away, it’s still on everyone’s mind.

Now going into its fifth year, jazz night started as a two-hour concert featuring performances by the jazz band from Pierz Healy High School, where Pohland is the band director. Profits from ticket sales benefit the school’s music department, and the event has become one of Pohland’s favorite fundraisers.

In 2020, jazz night was canceled because of the pandemic, so the community was more than thrilled about the return of the performance in 2021. Indoor events were still considered unsafe, so Pohland took jazz night outdoors. This decision became one of the event’s strongest assets. Attendees brought lawn chairs and coolers to the event, and at the end of the night, audience members requested that Pohland hold the event outside the following year as well.

Pohland latched onto that idea and decided to expand upon it. “The 2022 jazz night was held at our golf course, and a local community group provided food,” he says. “Our FFA (Future Farmers of America) team sold ice cream to raise money. Now jazz night has turned into a community event.”

Pierz Healy band on stage The students have fallen in love with the event, too. “I have students who will buy a suit just for jazz night. They get all dressed up, and they’re super pumped,” Pohland says. “It’s turned into way more than I could ever have imagined.”

Jazz night is one of many ways that Pohland gets the Pierz community involved with his school’s music program. He acknowledges that community involvement is one of the keys to growing a strong music department in a rural area.

Pierz Healy High enrolls less than 600 students, but the music program boasts a concert band, symphonic band, two jazz bands, a musical pit band and a pep band. Through fostering an environment of trust and innovation, Pohland creates a big musical impact in this small town.

Music in the Family

One of the keys to building a successful music program in a rural area is to create a tight-knit community and foster familial bonds among teachers and students. For Pohland, this family connection was second nature, as music has long been a part of this family.

Pohland’s father and brother are also band directors. After graduating from Loras College in Dubuque, Iowa, where his father teaches (and where Pohland met his wife, Kaitlin), Pohland sought advice from his own family as he ventured into the world of band directing.

“We all talk once or twice a week,” he says. “We run music by each other and talk about what’s working or what’s not working. The problems I go through, my brother, who’s the band director at New Prague High School, has been through because he’s taught for longer than I have.”

Often, these regular conversations lead to improved experiences for all three directors. “[When] we come across something new, we share it, so when [another one of us] inevitably runs into it, we have some background on it,” Pohland says. “We talk about a new piece of music, a new travel experience, a new festival that we’re planning on participating in, playing the national anthem at a Minnesota Twins game and much more.”

Family in Music

PierzHealy ensemble concertblackHaving open, honest conversations isn’t only beneficial with his own family. Pohland has also found that building personal connections with students helps the program gain a sense of camaraderie. He says that one of the keys to building a trusting relationship with students includes “sharing my stories — sharing why I’m passionate, why I’m energetic about music.”

This may include discussions of off-topic hobbies and interests because the key is to show genuine interest in one another as people. “I love to golf, I love to run, I love to travel, so I share those things with my students,” Pohland says. “Building connections goes beyond just music connections.”

Major life events have also strengthened Pohland’s bond with his students. “My wife and I just adopted a child,” he says. “I shared that entire journey with my students because it was important to me. My students became invested in our story, and they felt like they were part of it.”

While these topics are not related to music class, they go a long way toward building rapport with students. “If you can find ways to connect with students about their personal lives, it’s so much easier to go, ‘Hey, now I need this for us in band. I need us to really step up,’” Pohland says.

As a result, students are often eager to help and more likely to take initiative with tasks like setting up before concerts. The program also has a stronger impact on students’ lives. “If you want it to feel like a family, you have to run it like a family,” Pohland says. “I found that it really works here because we live in a small community, and we have a lot of family connections.”

Building a musical family is a natural step for the students at Pierz Healy, many of whom are literally related. For example, one of the school’s jazz bands has 23 students, with 17 of them related to another student in some way, whether as a sibling or a cousin.

These family connections make for fun photos at school concerts. “We do a mass band concert [with] 300 students performing,” Pohland says. “It was so cool because afterward you see 5th graders to our seniors come together for these giant family pictures.”

Small-Town Challenges

Pierz Healy High School ensemble performingWhile a close-knit musical family may sound like a dream come true, maintaining a music program in a small, rural town comes with its own unique challenges. Some students may struggle to make it to every rehearsal when they have other commitments at home like working on their parents’ farm. Other students may struggle to get to rehearsal on time when driving to school takes 30 minutes or when Minnesota weather rears its destructive head.

Solving these problems requires careful scheduling, coordination and communication. For example, due to other conflicting school activities, Pohland holds jazz band rehearsals at 7 a.m. before school starts. “I have students who live 30 minutes away. They’re leaving their house at 6:15,” Pohland says. “On a night when there’s weather, I have to think about [making] sure students are safe.”

To ensure safety, Pohland offers an open line of communication to his students. He asks that students send him a message if they’re planning to be late and emphasizes that it’s more important to drive safely than to arrive to rehearsal on time.

He also regularly converses with coaches, teachers and leaders of other activities to ensure students get to participate in everything. “We’re limited in numbers. The student body wants to be a part of everything, which is so cool,” Pohland says. “I love that our football captains, the members of the speech team, our drama department, all those kids are in music. It’s something I take a lot of pride in.”

Having overachieving students is definitely a point of pride, but it’s also often a source of scheduling conflicts. “The biggest thing is flexibility and communication,” Pohland says. “We have students who are athletes, and sometimes they’ll shoot me a message the night before saying, ‘Hey, I forgot we have a morning practice. I won’t be at jazz band.’ If I need something, I’ll say, ‘We need to have this jazz rehearsal, can you let your coach know?’”

Pohland often works with coaches directly to coordinate schedules that alternate each side’s give-and-take. “Communication usually fixes everything,” he says.

Reaching Out in a Rural Community

PierzHealyBand GymCommunication goes hand in hand with community outreach. One of the benefits of building a music program in a small community is the ability to get students directly involved with community performances.

In Pierz, the pep band is a community staple. While many people think pep bands are just for football and basketball seasons, Pohland has expanded the Pierz Healy pep band’s reach by having them perform for an array of sporting events, including football, volleyball, tennis, cross country, and both boys’ and girls’ basketball. “We have students who are really enthusiastic about pep band,” Pohland says. “I love pep band. I love being at games. That comes back to building relationships.”

While directing the pep band, Pohland loves when he sees some of his band students competing as athletes on the field or court. “I can say, ‘Nice job at your game last night,’ and they’re excited that I was there.”

Pohland also loves organizing community performances around the holiday season. Every year, the school’s jazz band plays holiday music for residents at local nursing homes. “It’s so heartwarming,” Pohland says. “The students feel amazing, and we get to perform for people who might not have a visitor. This music brings joy to their hearts.”

Viewing music as a universal source for joy and human connection is at the heart of Pierz Healy’s success. By using his town’s small size to his advantage, Pohland has taken his young musicians from merely an ensemble to something much stronger: a family.

Case Study: Tips to Home Grow a High-Quality Music Program

Every day, I feel blessed to go to work, excited to make music with my students. These kids are some of the most humble, diligent and talented young people from some of the most selfless and genuine families I have ever met. There is no group of students I would rather teach or no community in which I would rather serve … but my job is sometimes far from perfect.

Having taught for the last 13 years in a Title I school with next to no feeder system and where the vast majority of the student population is low income, we lack many resources that exist in schools in more affluent communities. Despite some of these obstacles, we have built a thriving instrumental music department. When I began teaching at Dwight D. Eisenhower High School in 2009, I inherited a band program of just over 40 students. Today, that program has turned into three curricular bands, two curricular orchestras, several extracurricular ensembles and a guitar program, now serving more than 300 students.

One aspect of our growth that makes me particularly proud is that most students in our music program begin learning their instrument once they enroll in high school. Some students enter with previous musical experience from their elementary general music classes, but most begin their musical training with me. While I do not claim to be an expert on anything, I wanted to a share a few tips that I have found to be most successful throughout my experiences in home growing a high-quality music program.

Tip #1: Kids Won’t Invest in Learning Music Until They Invest in You

making faces pexelsYou cannot be a wallflower music teacher and expect kids to flock to your class. Be bubbly and personable. Show kids that you are committed to them and that you see and hear them. Make them laugh. Truth be told, I gauge my effectiveness each day based on whether I can get my students to laugh.

One thing I learned from teaching in a post-pandemic landscape is that compassion must come before curriculum. When building a program of first-time instrumentalists, it is imperative that students associate music with positivity. Anyone who has taught beginners knows all too well that some of the sounds kids produce on their instruments are, shall we say — interesting. Embrace it. There will be time for remediation. After all, the more interesting the sound, the higher the potential for observable growth.

Tip #2: Do Instrument Demonstrations Justice!

Imagine you are at a car dealership. You know you want to drive something new off the lot, but you have no idea where to begin. You see sport cars and luxury sedans with the latest upgrades and accessories. A salesperson approaches you and in a confident tone says, “Let’s go for a drive.” He grabs the keys, tells you to hop in and as the car pulls out of the lot, the transmission lets out a deafening grind. The car bumps and jostles. It revs and slows. At this point, you are trying not to get sick! Sure, the car could be a lemon. More than likely, though, the salesperson doesn’t know how to drive a stick shift.

When it comes to attracting beginner instrumentalists, a quality demonstration of proper technique, beautiful tone quality and recognizable melodies on each instrument will significantly help students visualize their potential for success. As a gigging percussionist, I feel extremely confident performing a four-mallet marimba or drum set solo for my students. I might even throw in some stick tricks! However, ask me to demonstrate that same level of proficiency and confidence on a flute solo, and I would instantly become that car salesman who couldn’t drive a stick shift.

female student violinWhile I recognize there is enormous value in practicing instruments outside your primary instrument, as an ensemble director, I simply do not have the time to devote to preparing quality demonstrations on a variety of instruments. Instead, I call upon my colleagues, music major friends from college or, in some cases, former or current students to showcase their talents on various instruments.

If your school does not have a budget to pay for these individuals, try not to worry. Throughout the years, I have paid for countless demonstrations with pizza and beer or have exchanged services where I demonstrate percussion for my colleagues’ groups free of charge. At the end of the day, your kids will get inspired to pick up an instrument that speaks to them by hearing quality live music all while you get to hang out with your friends!

If you work in a small town or rural area, or do not have access to musician friends or colleagues from other schools, community colleges, area universities or the United States Army Field Band feature some outstanding videos of their musicians demonstrating various band instruments on YouTube.

The Berlin Philharmonic’s Digital Concert Hall is my favorite resource for all things orchestra. While they charge an annual subscription fee, you can register for a free trial in the days leading up to your instrument demonstration that gives viewers access to a robust library of content including solo demonstrations and biographies, high-resolution multi-cam angles of decades’ worth of performances under the world’s most iconic conductors, and concert livestreams.

Tip #3: Start Playing Chamber Music as Soon as Possible.

Eisenhower ensemble performanceUnison playing in an ensemble is necessary when students first begin learning a musical instrument. Because novice students’ audiation and tone production are developing, it helps to have everyone play the same melody together for reference. Additionally, playing in unison helps alleviate some of the anxiety students might experience from playing something incorrectly or thinking they sound bad. After all, how many of us sing more quietly in the car once the radio is turned down?

However, too much reliance on unison playing does little to enhance independent musicianship. Students can fall through the cracks rather inconspicuously and mislead you into thinking they understand the concepts because they can demonstrate the skills. Unfortunately, the two are mutually exclusive and both need to be assessed regularly for true learning to take place — especially with beginners at the high school level.

Chamber music takes the necessary elements of a fully orchestrated composition and distills them into individual parts. Each part, whether it is part of a duet, trio or larger chamber ensemble, is required to produce an authentic realization of the composer’s intent. Performing chamber music has myriad benefits for beginners:

  • It teaches students about balance and blend immediately.
  • It places responsibility on members to learn their individual part.
  • It helps teachers assess whether students understand musical concepts and can demonstrate the necessary skills since everyone’s part is different.
  • It diversifies programming and adds breadth to each concert.
  • Best of all, it helps students enter more advanced ensembles with a greater sense of confidence and musical awareness.

Remember, no one is expecting your beginning group to read Mozart’s “Gran Partita.” Performing easy flex arrangements or even creating your own eight-bar duets or trios based on where your students are in their method books will do the trick. I assist my students with writing their own chamber pieces all the time. Remember, the first five pitches of a scale contain enough substance to imply tonic, subdominant and dominant harmony. My advice: If your kids can play through a fifth exhibiting good fundamentals, they can (and should) play chamber music.

Tip #4: Set Everyone Up for Success.

Eisenhower marching bandIf you are tasked with developing beginner instrumentalists to eventually feed your top ensemble(s), promote students based on their demonstration of mastery, NOT on the instrument they play. As someone who spends the majority of his day teaching band classes, I know this can be a tough pill to swallow. Remember though, our role as music educators is NOT to teach a piece of music, but to teach musical concepts and skills. The pieces we program are simply vehicles to determine the extent to which students understand and can demonstrate these musical concepts and skills. This is why your learning objectives and success criteria based on the standards found in your curriculum are so important!

Over my last 14 years of teaching, there have been years when my top ensemble did not have a tuba player. Just this past year, over a quarter of my top band consisted of alto saxophone players. I have had some years when my top ensemble had 60 members, and some years where I had 20. Yet in each of these examples, my groups still performed nationally, still earned Division I ratings at festivals, still received praise and exceptional feedback from clinicians, and still demonstrated an exceptionally high level of musicianship in performance at community concerts, parades and fundraisers.

Did I have to get creative with my programming? Sure. Did I have to rewrite parts and cross-cue lines of music to fit my ensemble? Absolutely. But at the end of the day, I rest easy knowing a successful performance is on the horizon because every kid can hang. When you use standardized criteria to form your ensembles, you set your students up for an experience tailored to both their strengths and their learning needs.

Tip #5: Celebrate the Little Victories … and Often!

Eisenhower mariachiMost ensemble directors have a social media account for their music programs. This is a terrific way to share your students’ accolades with the world. That said, don’t devote the bulk of your social media posts to celebrating only the achievements of your top ensemble(s). Earning a superior rating at a festival is great news worth celebrating — but so is the first time your beginning brass students learn how to buzz! When every student feels celebrated in your program, word travels fast.

Sharing what your kids are doing in class is a great way to create some buzz about your program. Something simple like a class photo with the caption, “Look who learned how to slur today in orchestra!” communicates to parents and other stakeholders that their kids are learning valuable content in a curricular setting.

All great teachers realize that every single student can make an impact, but the most outstanding educators are the ones who help their students demonstrate that impact. Every student, whether they are introverted or extroverted, analytical or artistic, brings an asset to your program. The journey is helping students discover what that asset might be and then using it to benefit everyone in the room.

If you know that a particular student excels in a certain facet of performance, empower that student to help run a sectional that day. If a student has a magnetic personality, empower that student to help you recruit for your program. Approach each student with an asset-based mindset and celebrate them frequently. The more you cultivate their abilities, the fewer liabilities you will encounter.

Case Study: “Grow Your Own” Program Increases Access and Eliminates Barriers

I am the music education coordinator at Tennessee State University (TSU), a Historically Black College and University (HBCU) in Nashville. I oversee the curricular development, instructional delivery, staffing, clinical placement and academic advising for our vocal and instrumental music education students. Annually, we prepare nearly 200 music majors for careers in music, and we offer a variety of degree pathways with several concentrations.

TSU harp ensembleThe music department at Tennessee State University has a rich legacy and a storied history. From our world-famous Aristocrat of Bands marching band to our broad range of music offerings that include everything from modern band to harp ensemble, we both appreciate our traditions while finding new ways to innovate in our programs.

In the fall of 2020, the Tennessee Department of Education awarded our “Grow Your Own” educator preparation program a $2 million grant in efforts to increase access and remove barriers to the teaching profession. With this award, we have revitalized our program in several ways. While we were doing everything we could as an HBCU to help diversify the teacher pipeline within our region, the newly acquired funding has accelerated our work in ways we could have only dreamed of previously. The following initiatives and enhancements detail the work we have been doing in recent years to give our students a world-class music teacher preparation experience.

Global Student Support Services Lab

Our student support lab is the centerpiece of all programming for our educator preparation program. Through the lab, we can provide regular intensive tutorials and mock exams for the Praxis Core (which measures skills in reading, writing and mathematics deemed to be essential for all teacher candidates) and Praxis Subject Assessments (which measure general and subject-specific teaching skills and knowledge). These exams, along with the edTPA (a performance-based, subject-specific assessment), are required for teacher licensure in Tennessee.

Because many of our students are first-generation college students and rely significantly on federal student aid to finance their education, it can be problematic for our students to pay for these tests. We offer fee waivers for students to take their Praxis tests. We also include the costs for edTPA in the total costs of registering for their student teaching course. Since we have been offering these financial incentives, more students have attended the tutorial sessions, received waivers and passed their tests on their first attempt.

Black male teacher pexels

Minority Male Educator Initiative

A comprehensive body of research highlights the need for more minority male teachers in public schools. As an HBCU, we take pride in our commitment to improve the lives of traditionally underserved communities. In our music program, we tend to attract a larger than average number of minority males who are interested in the teaching profession.

My goal is to retain as many of them in the major as possible. With the minority male educator initiative, we have partnered with Metropolitan Nashville Public Schools and paired more than 20 of our minority male education majors with mentor teachers currently in the field who are also minority male teachers. This program has become very popular since its inception in the spring of 2021. It has built a vibrant community of male educators who are empowered and passionate about giving back and helping the next generation of music teachers.

Minority Teaching Fellows Program

One of the most profound ways that we have helped more students remain in the education program is by providing additional funding for school. With the “Grow Your Own” grant we received, we have been able to provide scholarships up to $5,000 per academic year for any minority education major who commits to teaching in the state of Tennessee for one year.

To receive the award, a music education major must submit an application form, maintain a 2.5 GPA and attend school full time (12 credit hours per semester). The award is renewable for each year they are in the program. This program has been immensely impactful in boosting our retention and graduation rates. Prior to this program, we were losing more than 50% of our music education majors within their first two years of study. Many of them were leaving school simply because they did not have adequate funding to pay for college. With these scholarships, we have seen our graduation rate increase by almost 20%. Also, our overall enrollment in the music education program has grown by more than 25% since the fall of 2020 when students began to take advantage of the scholarship opportunity. We hope to be able to increase the scholarship amount in future years.

Curriculum Innovation

Apple LabWith the “Grow Your Own” funds, we have enhanced our curricula in numerous ways. We now offer a Praxis review course, which provides students with a formal class setting that prepares them to pass both the Praxis Core test, as well as the content-specific Praxis Music test.

We have also upgraded our computer labs with Mac computer stations that include industry-standard software. Additionally, we have expanded our music library to include resources and test preparation materials for our department’s major field assessment, Praxis tests and edTPA performance portfolio resources.

Our next initiative is to update our music education laboratory class to include better equipment, instruments, technology and resources that students can use as they complete their field observation hours and student teaching.

International Education

globe pexels pixabay

Though our department was engaged in several activities long before the pandemic, the grant has allowed us to greatly bolster the financial support we can offer for study abroad and cultural exchange programs. Our department sends contingents of students to Colombia, Turkey, Europe, South Africa and East Asia annually. During the pandemic, we could not travel abroad, but we found an opportunity in Soliya Connect, a virtual cultural exchange program that brings together college students from the United States, North Africa and the Middle East for online discussions in real-time.

My music education majors gain significant cultural competency through the international programs we offer, and now that we are able to travel abroad again, we can offer our students more grants for studying internationally.

Together We Grow

Through the Tennessee Department of Education’s $2 million “Grow Your Own” grant, we have been able to take advantage of opportunities and provide resources to our students that were previously unattainable. We can now truly “grow our own” and prepare our students for a career in music education.

For those of you who may be having difficulty finding resources for your programs, I encourage you to reach out to your community partners, the business community and your state and local representatives. At TSU, we challenged our local and state officials to “put their money where their mouth is.” And while the funds do not make up for the numerous inequities that continue to persist in our education system, we now have evidence that all our stakeholders are invested in providing an equitable educational experience for all students.

Recording Acoustic Instruments, Part 1

One of the more challenging aspects of producing music in a home studio is recording acoustic instruments. Without the acoustic treatment and expensive gear you find in a commercial studio, it requires effort and experimentation to get high-quality results.

In the first of this three-part series, we’ll cover some critical concepts; in Part 2 and Part 3, we’ll give you some specific recommendations for how to mic various instruments.

Microphone Options

Let’s start by looking at the different types of microphones available. Condenser mics, which require an external power supply (48 volts of phantom power), are the best all-around choice for recording because they most accurately pick up detail and are especially good at responding to transients — the initial peak of a sound wave.

Condensers fall into two categories: small-diaphragm (sometimes also referred to as “pencil” mics) and large-diaphragm. Small-diaphragm models are particularly good for capturing high-frequency content such as the attack of a pick on a guitar, or a stick striking a cymbal. However, large-diaphragm condensers are better at capturing the sound of instruments that produce a wide range of frequencies, including lots of mids and lows … which is one reason they’re also the preferred type of mic for recording vocals. If you’re only going to get one mic for your studio, a large-diaphragm condenser is the most versatile and therefore your best option.

Closeup of microphone on stand.
A small-diaphragm condenser mic.
Close-up of gray microphone on red background.
A large-diaphragm condenser mic.

Dynamic mics are less sensitive than condensers, so they deliver lower-level signals than similarly placed condenser mics. They are rugged and come in a variety of sizes and shapes, plus they can handle loud sounds without overloading, which is why they are often used for live performance; however, they generally don’t capture as much high-end detail as condensers. That makes dynamic mics less desirable for recording applications, although they are often used on drums and for certain wind instruments.

Four different types of microphones seen in closeup.
Dynamic mics come in a variety of sizes and shapes.

Ribbon mics don’t capture the high-end as accurately as condensers, but they impart a warm tone that can be highly pleasing when used on the right source. However, good quality ribbon mics are generally more expensive than equivalent condensers or dynamics and tend to be somewhat fragile.

A Pattern of Capture

Every mic exhibits a particular polar pattern — a measure of its directionality. A mic with a cardioid polar pattern picks up mainly from the front and rejects sound from the back and sides. Two variations, hypercardioid and supercardioid, are even more directional but pick up a little more from behind. All the variations of the cardioid pattern are referred to as unidirectional mics. You generally want a mic with a unidirectional pattern if you’re pointing it directly at a source.

Omnidirectional (“omni”) mics pick up equally from all around. Most ribbon mics have a bi-directional figure-8 polar pattern, meaning that they pick up equally from the front and back but reject sound from the sides. Many condenser mics offer multiple patterns so you can change them from cardioid to omni to figure-8 with the flip of a switch, making them quite versatile.

Diagram.
Polar patterns define a mic’s directionality.

The Proximity Effect

An important concept to understand about miking is the proximity effect that occurs with unidirectional or figure-8 mics, which causes increased bass response as they are placed closer to the source. You’ve probably experienced the proximity effect with vocal mics. When you put your mouth right up to the mic, your voice gets bassier. (Radio DJs often use this to make their voices sound bigger and more authoritative.)

Although you won’t notice it as much on instruments, it does factor in when deciding on mic placement. Mics with an omnidirectional pattern exhibit virtually no proximity effect, which is something you can use to your advantage in certain situations.

Finding The Sweet Spot

Microphone placement is probably the most critical aspect to successfully recording acoustic instruments. Just putting a mic in front of the source is not enough. You want to find the “sweet spot” — the place where the mic will capture the sound of the instrument with the greatest accuracy.

Finding the sweet spot can be as simple as walking around and listening to the instrument as it is being played — you may be amazed at how different it sounds up close versus a few inches (or feet) away. All you have to do then is to place a microphone where it sounds best. However, if the goal is to record yourself playing the instrument, that’s obviously impossible. A better method is to gain an understanding of how the instrument creates sound. That knowledge will inform you about where to start placing the mic. Some instruments sound fuller if you move the mic back a little. If you put a mic quite close to one of those instruments, you might not be getting the complete sonic picture. On many instruments (most notably, acoustic piano), the sound emanates from their entire body.

You also must consider the circumstances of the session and the acoustics of the room you’re recording in. If there are multiple musicians playing in the same room simultaneously, for example, you’ll have to mic instruments more closely in order to minimize bleed (the sound of other instruments coming into the microphones). This will have the (perhaps unintended) consequence of giving you more direct sound — that is the actual sound of the instrument.

Diagram.
With the mic up close, you get primarily direct sound.

Conversely, moving a mic further back means that you’ll be capturing less direct sound from the instrument and more of the reflected sound coming from the waves bouncing around the room. If the acoustics are favorable, a little room sound can be good. However, in an acoustically challenged room (like one that’s overly boomy or reverberant), the further back you place the mic, the more it will pick up the not-so-desirable room sound.

Diagram.
The further back you put the mic, the more room sound you get.

What Are You Going For?

Last but by no means least, you also need to consider the instrument’s role in the song arrangement and its sonic characteristics — for example, if it’s playing long sustained notes or short accents, or whether the guitarist is playing with a pick or with their fingers.

Let’s say you’re overdubbing an acoustic guitar that’s strumming chords underneath a dense arrangement of many other instruments and vocals. Because it will be serving as a rhythm component and mixed relatively low, you may want to approach it differently than if it’s the only (or the featured) instrument supporting the vocal.

In the case of a strumming guitar, your goal would be to capture the guitar’s mids and highs clearly and cleanly because those are the frequencies that will cut through a full mix. But if a guitar (or piano) is the sole instrument in an arrangement, or part of a duo or trio of instruments without drums — and thus featured more prominently — you’ll want to record a more full-frequency sound. In that situation, you also might consider recording the instrument in stereo.

Doubleheader

Unless you have a purpose-built stereo mic, stereo miking requires two microphones, preferably of the same type. Placement is tricky when you have more than one mic on the same source, and it can create phase problems if you don’t follow specific rules of physics. That’s because, depending on the distance of the mics to the source, the sound of one mic can arrive sooner than the sound coming from the other.

When the timing of the waves on the two tracks is not synchronized, they’re considered out of phase. When that happens, it creates a phenomenon called comb filtering, in which the waves interfere with each other and degrade the sound quality when played back together, particularly when listened to in mono.

One way to avoid phase issues when using two mics on a source is to observe what’s called the 3-to-1 Rule: Make sure that the distance between the microphones is at least three times greater than the distance of each mic to the source.

Diagram.
The 3-1 Rule.

For example, suppose you’re recording an acoustic guitar, and you have one mic aimed behind the bridge and one at the 12th fret, with both mics 10 inches from the guitar. To follow the 3:1 Rule, you’d need to make sure that they were at least 30 inches apart.

There are actually many different stereo miking techniques, the simplest of which is the X-Y method, often used when recording acoustic guitar. A little online research will give you information about other methods, such as A-B, Mid-Side (M-S) and ORTF.

 

Coming in Part 2: Miking strategies for various instruments.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

Case Study: Providing Space for Practice

In 2018, Amanda Schoolland moved to the small community of Metlakatla, Alaska, to be the music director at Metlakatla High School. Although she was new to the area, she noticed that many of her students faced a similar issue as those at her former schools in Colorado — a lack of time or space to practice at home.

Regardless of location, Schoolland’s solution has been the same: Keep the band room open longer. “I make the band room available every day after school,” she says. “It’s not utilized every day, but it is available. It’s marked in my office hours as one hour, but I’ve been known to stay two or three hours if students are really getting into the music.”

Like with any skill, practicing music leads to progress. Since making the effort to provide students with a practice space, Schoolland has noticed students becoming more confident, and, in the case of her program at Metlakatla, exponential membership growth. “When I arrived at Metlakatla, I had four students in the middle school band and six in the high school band,” she says. “My high school band now has 15 students this year, so we’ve more than doubled the program. In middle school, we have about 20, so we’ve quintupled the program!”

Providing that space for her students has led to increased trust and confidence. “The extra practice time fed into building relationships with students,” she says. “They became more confident, and as their confidence grew, other students saw their confidence and were drawn to it. It became a snowball effect.”

An Open Door to the Band Room

Madi Smith practices the trombone. Schoolland first created her open-door band room policy while working at an inner-city school in Colorado. Many of her low-income students struggled with the logistical side of practicing their instruments, such as transporting their instruments to and from school or not having space at home to practice. “I had one student who lived in their car,” she says. “He couldn’t practice trombone in his back seat. That’s where the idea of keeping the band room open after school took root — from the knowledge that not every kid has a safe place to practice outside of school.”

After moving to Alaska, Schoolland made the band room accessible for one hour after school Monday through Friday. She allowed students to come in casually and practice whatever they wanted. “Any student could come by. If they wanted to play piano for the first time, or if they wanted to practice their band instrument, or even if they wanted to try a different instrument, they would have an opportunity to do that in a safe space,” she says.

In Metlakatla, the middle school and high school each have less than 100 total students. Because the community is so small, most students wear many hats. The band members and jocks are often one and the same. “They’re involved in everything,” Schoolland says. “I noticed they were having trouble coming after school when their sports schedule conflicted.”

To solve this dilemma, Schoolland worked with students to get them some practice time during the school day. Students have an independent practice period, which is like a study hall, every day. “Students would ask their independent practice teacher if they could come to the band room and practice during that time,” Schoolland says.

Building Trust and Confidence

Tricia Lindsey teaches Kendall Booth how to play the saxophoneA growing music program requires mutual trust between students and teachers if it’s going to thrive and flourish. Getting students motivated to practice during their free periods or after school also requires that they gain self-confidence in their own musical abilities.

Building a trusting relationship with her students is Schoolland’s top priority. “[Playing music] exposes students,” she says. “We’re literally putting ourselves out there every time we make a sound. Mistakes are things to be overcome and fixed.”

Schoolland explains that students must feel safe to make mistakes during rehearsal and practice time. To create that safe atmosphere, she regularly calls out her own mistakes and shows students how she fixes them. “I resort to humor quite a bit in my classroom,” she says. “Students know that when I make a mistake, I can laugh about it and correct it. I am constantly telling kids, ‘I’m sorry. That was my mistake. Let me show you how I’m going to fix it.’”

Practicing During Quarantine

One of the program’s biggest challenges arose when COVID-19 spread in 2020. Schools everywhere shut down, and Metlakatla was no exception. As the world tried to figure out what to make of the new virus, the school regularly shut down, went virtual and then reopened.

These constant changes made practicing music difficult for many students. “During COVID, we were in and out of school,” Schoolland says. “Kids were having trouble practicing at home. They’d go home, and school would be canceled for a month. They didn’t have their instruments.”

Kalleigh Miller and Kendall Booth at MusicFestBeing a small community worked in Metlakatla’s favor. “We literally know where everyone lives,” Schoolland says. “When we were shut down for more than a couple days at a time, staff members from the school volunteered to help deliver instruments. We were able to get instruments in kids’ hands pretty quickly.”

Once students had their instruments, though, new problems arose once again. Students who struggled to practice at their own houses pre-COVID had the same challenges during quarantine, but no school band room to utilize. Schoolland recalls, “A lot of kids said, ‘Well, I’m staying at my auntie’s house right now, and she has a newborn. Where can I practice?’”

This led Schoolland and her students to come up with some ingenious solutions. Schoolland signed up for MusicFirst to use its virtual practice platform, which allowed students to submit modified versions of practice assignments.

For example, some students just practiced fingerings if they weren’t allowed to make noise at home, and some students sang their parts. “During those times, they got really creative,” Schoolland says.

Amelia Miller, Tyanna Williams and Avienda Cook practice a Tsimshian song.

Juggling it All

In addition to running Metlakatla’s middle school and high school bands, Schoolland teaches computer coding. Juggling a full day of classes and rehearsals with her signature open band room after school, which can run for three hours, requires a mix of passion and organization.

Schoolland doesn’t stay late to keep the band room open every day because she feels obligated to — she wants to be there. “I love my job. I love spending time with my students,” she says.

Additionally, staying organized is key. Schoolland says, “Making lists, that’s how I keep up on my to-do stuff — I’m constantly making lists!”

The biggest factor, though, is a commitment to your work, or as Schoolland calls it, being “all-in” on her job. “I moved to Alaska to work at this school. I feel like it’s my calling,” she says. “

Case Study: Grassroots Funding Through Social Media and Contests

When Heather Taylor became the band director at Lakeshore Elementary School in Rochester, New York, in 2018, she had an $80 annual budget.

“That’s literally less than $1 a kid,” says Taylor who teaches about 140 students in 4th and 5th grades out of 420 students overall in grades 3 to 5. Each band student participates in a full concert ensemble for two days before school and receives small group instrumental lessons once per week during the school day.

Norah Farley wearing medal and holding band pin Instead of lamenting on the small budget, Taylor went to work to find outside funding and has received nearly $20,000 in donations in the past four years.

Taylor had spent the prior nine years moving around Greece Central School District — teaching general music, special education music, instrumental lessons, band and choir to preschool through 12th grade — before landing her dream job at Lakeshore.

“As hard as it was to be in so many different positions in [seven] different buildings, it did help narrow my focus [to find] where my passion was,” Taylor says. “Now that I’m in an elementary setting, I know that this is my niche where I do my best work. I’m starting kids on their musical journey. … I find elementary school to be a much more community-centered learning environment. … [Students] are very eager to learn to make music.”

Community Building

Taylor’s initial priority at Lakeshore was to secure quality instruments. “The equipment I had was in really bad shape — literally duct-taped together — and somebody had written all over the drumheads,” she says. “I had no trumpets, no saxophones and just a few flutes and clarinets.”

Austin McInnis and Tochi Ugochukwu playing saxWhile the school provides students with the larger and more expensive instruments, such as French horns, baritones, tubas and oboes, families are typically expected to rent more popular and smaller instruments like flutes, clarinets and saxophones. However, Taylor says that situation created equity and balance problems.

“It’s difficult to [balance the instrumentation] if I don’t have an instrument, and people can’t go rent,” Taylor says. “I didn’t want students’ home situations to prevent them from participating in music.”

At Lakeshore, 100% of students receive free or reduced lunch. Lakeshore is a designated Community School that provides additional services such as district-level before- and after-school childcare, after-school clubs, mental health services and partnerships with local food and clothing donation centers.

To help level the playing field for all prospective and current musicians, Taylor sought grassroots funding opportunities. She found the school budgeting approval process to be long and arduous. “There’s no part of being in music that isn’t expensive,” she says.

Waiting for funding, equipment and materials using traditional methods wasn’t working, so Taylor sought out unique funding opportunities.

Soliciting funds through external organizations proved to be easier than expected. Through some internet searching, Taylor discovered that the local grocery chain Wegmans supported the community in a variety of ways and welcomed donation and sponsorship requests. Taylor submitted a request for $1,300 to buy instruments and was approved.

From there, Taylor found more businesses, such as additional grocery chains, banks and bigger businesses, that had community development webpages with easy submission processes.

Taylor has since been able to receive enough funds to purchase at least a few of every type of instrument for students to borrow.

#ClearTheList and DonorsChoose

The more that Taylor became involved with community giving organizations, the more that she began following groups, individuals and initiatives through social media. A viral movement called #ClearTheList started by Texas elementary teacher Courtney Jones in 2019 encouraged teachers to create supply wish lists, often through Amazon, for community members to fulfill them. When the movement hit Twitter and became a not-for-profit foundation, it exploded even more.

Charlee Bentley playing mallet percussion instrument Taylor initiated her wish list with requests for mouthpieces, reeds, neck straps, valve oil, cork grease and lessons books. She would always attach a picture of her with the students. “Having an action photo with kids playing instruments tended to grab people’s attention,” she says.

She later added more expensive instruments and equipment, such as a flute, percussion accessories, an amplifier and an office chair. She noticed a tweet from Chip Gaines from the television series “Fixer Upper” that encouraged his followers to help people for the holidays in December 2019. Taylor reached out to him and received a message back through Twitter from his assistant who purchased everything from her wish list. “That’s the first time that my list was cleared,” Taylor says.

T-Mobile also saw one of Taylor’s wish lists and cleared it.

Taylor makes sure to actively thank her donors and to tag them in social media, if possible. To show appreciation to Gaines, she filmed a thank-you video of her students opening the new items and posted it online. “[Chip] liked it, and he might have retweeted it,” she says. “Always thank your donors … because then they’re more likely to [give again]. I always try to have pictures or show through social media that my stuff is being used … by a current student, so they know that they made this positive impact.”

Liam Jerge plays the trumpet with bell cover.Taylor is also active with DonorsChoose and has found a network of music-specific philanthropists with the group Music Makes Our Students Smarter Giving Page (run by retired Indiana music teacher Ellie Henry), which is active on Facebook and Twitter. “I’ve never had a project not get funded … if I tag them in it,” she says.

On DonorsChoose, Taylor focuses on campaigns that have more specific purposes, such as requesting a document camera to teach during COVID, light-up drumsticks to use for cardio drumming, a music stand storage cart, end-of-year awards and instrument repair tools. Taylor says that she keeps most projects under $500, so that they’re more likely to be funded.

Through the years, Taylor has received approximately $10,000 in products from #ClearTheList and at least $5,000 to $10,000 in items from DonorsChoose. “Altogether, I’ve had 16 projects completed [on DonorsChoose] since August 2020.

Taylor advises educators to follow as many people, organizations and companies as possible, even those that are not directly related to their field. For example, Taylor follows science companies and won a projector for submitting a music lesson plan about the Olympic fanfare. “You never know if they’re willing to help,” she says. “Some oddball thing that has nothing to do with music got me a projector for my classroom when I didn’t have one.”

Nationally Recognized, Locally Loved

For all her efforts to enhance her classroom and support her students, Taylor has become a nationally recognized teacher.

The organization EdIncites recognized Taylor as one of 50 #FeelGoodFriday educators around the country in 2020 and was the runner-up for its #FeelGood2020 Educator of the Year contest.  “I was the only music teacher on the featured list,” she says.

Lyla Herzog with music teacher Heather TaylorOf greater impact, Taylor was the Eastern Division recipient of the 2021 Dr. William P. Foster Project Community Development Awards and was recognized at The Midwest Clinic International Band and Orchestra Conference. The contest is organized by the Music Education Alliance, a consortium comprised of Music for All, the National Band Association and the College Band Directors National Association to create best practices, mentorship and awards for music educators. Taylor received her award in person thanks to her school district that fully funded the trip. As part of the award, Taylor received access to clinicians, free software and prizes from various music industry companies to help her classroom. “I’m very honored that I was selected,” Taylor says. “It opened my whole world to more people and more opportunities.”

In addition, Taylor was recognized as one of the Yamaha “40 Under 40” outstanding young music educators in 2022. And Taylor has received additional local awards. Within her own circles, Taylor has become a celebrity. In a 2022 teacher development day, Taylor led a session for approximately 30 music teachers in the district about how to get community grants.

Taylor finds that the awards and accolades make her visible to prospective students. “Every single 3rd grader knows my name and knows that I teach band,” she says. “In the hallways, I say, ‘Hi’ to them; I interact with them. For them to see or hear that I’ve won [these] award[s] is just another way to bring recognition to band.”

In addition, the district shared her awards on social media, and her alma mater Nazareth College in Pittsford, New York, interviewed her for an article. Taylor’s ties to Nazareth is strong. Every semester, she presents her seminar on how to get community grants to aspiring music education majors at Nazareth. “I’ve been very grateful for how nice everyone has been,” Taylor says. “It’s been very humbling. If this in any way helps my [students], that’s what I want it for.”

Student Impact

Indeed, having quality supplies and more resources have made a huge impact on the morale of her students. “They’re going to be way more invested to have a shiny saxophone versus a broken, rusted instrument held together with duct tape,” Taylor says. “The parents are thankful that they have a teacher who is getting their kids what they need and making sure that we have a successful program.”

Lakeshore Elementary band performing at Rochester Red Wings game Taylor says that her biggest recruitment methods are the fun activities within the program itself. Her 5th-grade band students learn “The Star-Spangled Banner” and perform at a Rochester Red Wings minor league baseball game. “It’s a lot of work for a one-minute song, but I feel like it makes the most impact on my program,” she says. “It’s the thing they remember the most. … Just providing something outside of the traditional concert experience helps get some of [the students] to stay in the program or gets them excited to play their instrument.”

Taylor’s biggest piece of advice is to not be afraid to ask for help. While she has received a lot of support, she has also been denied. She makes sure to document all her applications and results. “Sometimes I understand how embarrassing or defeating it can be to ask for help,” she says. “You do a lot of work writing the [requests], and it doesn’t always pan out, but you never know when it will. … I document everything [and] reuse the same verbiage. … I’m very grateful that there are so many people in the world who want to support the arts.”

Help Your Students Discover the “Why” in Music

To really tell the story behind every piece of music, students must know the “why” as well as the “how.” A common example is when students play what the music says because it says to do so. When we ask them, “Why are you playing loudly there?” they’ll likely respond, “Because it’s marked forte.”

In doing so, they are reading an abstract marking, not responding to the musical purpose of that marking.  While it’s important for our students to recognize dynamic and expression markings, it’s even more important that they understand why those markings are there and that they represent musical ideas.

Volume

trumpet unsplashTake dynamic markings, for instance. It’s important for students to understand the purpose of volume in music. It can create tension, lead to resolution or release tension. Volume also is used to highlight musical layers within sections of music.

Students must learn that dynamic markings are relative to the purpose of the music. Rather than asking about what dynamic marking is used on their part, ask students, “How important is your part here?” or “Is the tension increasing or decreasing?”

The latter helps students understand the concept of musical arrival at a point of resolution or climax, while the former may help them determine the appropriate volume for their part, compared to others.

I call this their “me” volume (how loudly they should play) as opposed to our “we” volume (what the overall ensemble volume should be).

Tonal Changes

Accidentals and key changes often alter the tonal center of a section of music. If we provide students with the knowledge of where the harmonic structure is leading, they might be able to better anticipate and understand accidentals that occur in a piece.

For instance, when a melody is restated in the key of F after being played in Eb for most of the work, it usually is heightening the tension and excitement of the piece by raising the tonal center. A lowered third could signal the change of modality from major to minor, thereby altering the overall mood of the piece from light to dark. This may also affect the style being used. Helping students understand the purpose of tonal changes will increase their awareness of accidentals and key changes.

Expressive Articulation

Style and expressive markings give human emotional qualities to music. Students must understand the techniques necessary to produce these articulations, as well as understand why they are being used, so they can apply them appropriately.

Because many of these terms are often derived from a foreign language, it’s important to define them well. For instance, staccato is usually interpreted as “short, light and separated,” but many young musicians will only play the notes short.  Once they understand that the intended emotion is light, like walking on tiptoes or lightly tapping one’s shoulder, they can usually employ the appropriate amount of volume as well as note length.

Similarly, you might try having the students stomp in time to feel and better understand the effect of marcato.

Accents and Emphasis

You can help students understand how accents change the emphasis of a phrase with the following demonstration:

  • pointing finger pexelsWrite the sentence “You must leave now” on the board and ask students to read it aloud.
  • Then underline the word “you” and ask the students to shout the underlined word when reading the sentence. “YOU must leave now” (pointing at them while saying the word).
  • Erase that line and then underline “must” and have them read the sentence again. “You MUST leave now” (shake your index finger for emphasis).
  • Next, underline “leave,” and have students say, “You must LEAVE now” (while pointing at the door).
  • Finally, underline the word “now,” and have them say, “You must leave NOW” (perhaps pointing at a clock or watch).

Discuss how the change in emphasis changes the purpose of the statement, and how in the same way accents can affect musical emphasis.

Melody, Accompaniment and Counter Melody

watch movie unsplashOther important musical concepts for students to understand are melody, accompaniment and counter melody. One example that helps students understand how the elements of melody and accompaniment work together is to watch a movie scene that focuses on one character but has other characters in the background. The main character is usually in tight focus, while the others are not as much. You might also point out that it is the presence of the other characters that fills in the scene. The background elements that are not characters also help to define a sense of place or time. In this way, students can come to understand how background elements of accompaniment and harmonic structure are important to establish the character of a section of music, while at the same time supporting the main character, or the melody.

A similar point can be made with counterpoint by comparing it to a musical conversation that takes place within a scene.

Musical Line

Probably one of the finer skills for musicians to learn is the concept of a musical line. Every line has a beginning, a middle and an end. Every line always comes from somewhere and leads to somewhere else.

I often use the description of a roller coaster ride, even graphically depicting a phrase of music on the board, to help students grasp the overall picture of where they’re taking the music. The more hills and valleys, the more interesting the ride is!

All of this can help students understand that notes and rhythms themselves aren’t music.

Music is what we make of it!

History of the Synthesizer, Part 2

In Part 1 of this two-part series, we explored the origins of audio synthesis. Those early synths were almost entirely of the analog variety — that is, they created sounds with the use of electronic components such as vacuum tubes and transistors.

Over the last half-century, the focus has instead been almost entirely on digital synthesis, where sounds are created from mathematical representations of audio waveforms; in essence, modern-day synthesizers are highly specialized computers. Here in Part 2, we’ll explore their more recent forebears and describe several key technologies that lie at the heart of today’s synths.

Additive and Wavetable Synthesizers

The dawn of the 1980s saw the release of the second-generation New England Digital Synclavier II, which added a simple FM structure (see below) and a 32-track sequencer, making it a full-blown production workstation … albeit a very expensive one. At around the same time, the Italian company Crumar released the GDS Digital Synthesizer, building on work done by designer Hal Alles at Bell Labs, followed two years later by the Synergy, an additive synth that was favored by composer Wendy Carlos for decades.

German musician and inventor Wolfgang Palm’s pioneering work in wavetable synthesis saw fruition with the release of the PPG Wave in 1981. This digital technology used groups of single-cycle waveforms stored in a lookup table, which could be played back, or swept through in real time for a very signature sound. In 1985, the U.S. company Ensoniq released a wavetable synthesizer called the ESQ-1, which used static waveforms and an analog filter to produce a distinctive tonality. The following year, Sequential offered a novel approach to manipulating single-cycle waveforms with the Prophet VS, which used a joystick or other modulators (such as forward/backward looping envelopes) to cross-fade between four waveforms at a time.

Clearly, progress was being made in refining digital synthesis … but it was a different technology altogether that would cause a cataclysmic shift in the industry.

FM Synthesis

Since the mid-1960s, composer and electronic musician John Chowning had been experimenting with ways to shift sound around in a 3-dimensional space. One eventful night in the autumn of 1967, he discovered that modulating one computer-generated waveform with another at high frequency rates (much faster than traditional LFO-based vibrato) produced a timbral shift. His explorations of this technique led to the birth of FM (Frequency Modulation) synthesis. Yamaha licensed and continued developing the technology with Chowning’s help, first implementing it in two preset synthesizers, the GS1 and GS2, both released in 1981.

Print ad.
Contemporaneous ads for the Yamaha GS1 and GS2.

Over the next two years, Yamaha completed development of a voice architecture and user interface for programming FM, and, in 1983 debuted the DX7, which quickly became the best-selling synthesizer of all time.

View of Yamaha DX7 music synthesizer as viewed from above.
Yamaha DX7.

In addition to its velocity- and aftertouch-sensitive keyboard and 16-note polyphony (both radical innovations for the time), the level of timbral complexity and editing capability it provided was unparalleled, giving the DX7 universal appeal to musicians, composers and sound designers the world over. The genie was at last out of the bottle: digital synthesis became the mainstream.

The time was ripe for a technology that would tie it all together, and that would come with …

The Birth of MIDI

The concept of MIDI (an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface) was first announced to the world in 1981 and within a few short years it was adopted by all major synthesizer manufacturers. It was a revolutionary technology that allowed digital instruments — even if they were made by different, competing manufacturers — to communicate with each other in real time using a simple computer language transmitted and received over a single bi-directional cable.

MIDI has grown and evolved over the years, and is today a universal standard for tying synthesizers and computers together — a technology that has even garnered a Grammy® Technical Achievement Award. Its widespread acceptance did much to accelerate the growth of the synthesizer industry throughout the ’80s and beyond, and helped spawn new musical genres such as electronic dance music (EDM), techno, house and synth-pop.

Sampling Comes to the Forefront

As described in Part 1, the CMI Fairlight, introduced in 1979, was the first instrument to use the term “sampling.” Three years later, the Fairlight Series II would improve on the sampling technology and add a sequencing system. It was expensive but successful, and featured prominently in many recordings of the era, including those by Peter Gabriel, Stevie Wonder, Herbie Hancock, Trevor Horn and Jan Hammer.

A more affordable sampling keyboard was released in 1981: the E-mu Systems Emulator, which was capable of recording brief snippets of sounds that were then stored on floppy disk. It was followed in 1984 with the Emulator II, which also saw widespread use in many recordings of the era. The Kurzweil K250 was one of the first keyboard instruments capable of storing sampled sounds into instantly accessible ROM (Read Only Memory), albeit very short ones. But its ability to reproduce the sound of acoustic instruments with great accuracy was heralded, and the system grew in both features and specs throughout the decade.

Other sampling instruments of the ’80s worthy of note include the Ensoniq Mirage and the hugely popular range of Akai S-Series samplers — especially the S1000, which found particular acceptance among the growing number of musicians who were recording in bedrooms the world over, making it one of the most omnipresent samplers of the ’80s.

Over the next few decades, sampling technology would improve by leaps and bounds, moving from 12-bit to 16-bit to 24-bit resolution, with higher and higher sampling rates (44.1 kHz to 48 kHz to today’s standard of 96 kHz), along with more available RAM memory for the storage of sounds.

Sampling and Synthesis Converge

Despite the limitation of needing fast processors and large amounts of memory in which to store data, sampling offered one major advantage: it could easily recreate the complex transients and timbres that were difficult to achieve via synthesis. Roland first came up with the idea of combining both approaches with their D-50, introduced in 1987. Here, sampled attack transients were layered with (or cross-faded into) longer waveforms created with traditional subtractive synthesis methods that employ filters to remove unwanted overtones. The addition of comprehensive onboard digital effects, including reverb, helped to glue the sounds together, and the D-50 soon achieved a great deal of popularity. 1988 saw the release of the Korg M1, which was a completely sample-based instrument with effects and a sequencer. A year later, Yamaha started combining FM and sampled waveforms (commonly called PCM — Pulse Code Memory), first in their SY77, followed by the more advanced SY99 in 1991.

A view of the Yamaha SY77 synthesizer from above.
Yamaha SY77.

More Digital Technologies are Explored

Not all companies utilized PCM as the basis for their oscillator waveforms. Casio CZ Series synths (including the very popular, and very inexpensive CZ-101) built upon FM but used a slightly different type of modulation technology called phase modulation. Kawai chose to explore additive synthesis, first releasing the K5 in 1985, followed by the more advanced K5000W workstation (which combined synthesis, effects and sequencing) in 1996.

Korg further developed the principles first explored on the Prophet VS with their 1990 Wavestation synthesizer, which added a new way of moving through disparate waveforms called wave sequencing. As the instrument cycled through a list (sequence), the waveforms could either be crossfaded from one to the next or could be hard-switched to create distinctive rhythmic figures.

Physical modeling was a technology that had been explored in academia for a number of years, but it first came to market with the 1994 release of the Yamaha VL1. This was a form of digital synthesis that used high-speed digital signal processing (DSP) to recreate the properties and timbral characteristics of known acoustic and physical objects, such as a blown tube, a plucked string, a struck membrane, etc.

Yamaha VL1 synthesizer as seen from above.
Yamaha VL1.

Other companies soon followed. The Korg Prophecy, introduced in 1995, added modeled analog synthesis, bringing new science to the sound and methods of an older form of synthesis. That same year, Swedish manufacturer Clavia released a modeled analog (more commonly called virtual analog) instrument: the Nord Lead. The company has continued to develop and refine the concept throughout the years, as have many others, including Roland with their JP-8000 (1996), Yamaha with their AN1X (1997), the German company Access Music with their Access Virus (1998), and Korg with their Z1 (which was released in 1997 and offered multiple forms of modeling), followed three years later by the MS2000.

Given the faster processors and cheaper memory that became available starting in the 1990s — a trend that continues today — it was perhaps inevitable that all these technologies would converge. Yamaha, for example, created a very powerful multi-technology platform for their EX5, released in 1998 (the “EX” stood for Extended Synthesis). This forward-looking instrument combined FM, AWM (Advanced Wave Memory, a form of PCM), virtual analog, physical modeling, and a new type of DSP the company called FDSP (Formulated Digital Signal Processing). Click here for an extensive description of all these processes, and the ways they interacted with one another.

Yamaha EX5 synthesizer as seen from above.
Yamaha EX5.

Many of the most successful keyboards of the 2000s have followed this “multi-synthesizer” concept. Roland merged PCM and modeling in their Fantom-G series of instruments, and Korg combined many different forms of synthesis in their OASYS and Kronos keyboards. Kurzweil introduced a type of DSP-based synthesis in their K2000 series instruments that was akin to the modular synth designs of old, allowing the user to configure building blocks of sound-producing and modifying functions — including virtual analog and FM — in almost unlimited ways.

Another trend of 21st century synthesizers is their ability to house physical add-on boards. Examples include the Korg Triton Series and the Yamaha MOTIF (the successor to the EX), which offered plug-in boards that added extra synthesis capabilities.

Yamaha Motif music synthesizer as seen from above.
Yamaha MOTIF.

The current Yamaha flagship keyboard synth is MONTAGE, which combines the most advanced implementation of FM along with extremely powerful PCM-based synthesis.

Yamaha music synthesizer as seen from above.
Yamaha MONTAGE.

Software Synthesis

Most digital technologies are created and developed on computers, so it was logical that synthesis would follow. In 1997, a company called Seer Systems released the world’s first commercial software synthesizer — a program called Reality, which combined PCM, wavetable, FM, additive and physical modeling. That same year, German software company Steinberg created the VSTi standard, which integrated software synthesizers into digital audio workstation software.

Software synthesis continued to grow as computers became more powerful, and today it is integral part of most DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) software products such as Steinberg Cubase. It’s also the area where many cutting-edge developments are first introduced, including new forms of synthesis such as granular, where samples are split into small pieces of very short duration that can be layered on top of each other, playing at different speeds, phases, volume, and frequency, among other parameters. Other popular software synth products focus on the physical modeling of electro-mechanical keyboards such as the tonewheel organ and the electric piano.

Old Becomes New (Again)

In recent years, analog keyboards and modular gear have had a major resurgence. Back in 1996, a company called Doepfler Electronics developed a small format for analog modules called Eurorack — a format that thrives today, fed by a large community of boutique developers. Moog Music and Sequential have resurrected some of their historic designs, as have Roland and Oberheim, and Korg has even re-released a few of ARP’s most beloved products.

Today the past lives side-by-side with the future, and there has never been a more active and flourishing environment for cool ways to make new sounds and perform with cutting-edge synthesizer products.

Spotlight on Steinberg Dorico 4

Dorico 4, the latest release of Steinberg’s professional music notation and composition software, provides a powerful means for creating everything from simple lead sheets and small ensemble arrangements to full-blown orchestral scores. It’s available in three versions for Mac® and Windows computers (Dorico Pro, Dorico Elements and the free Dorico SE), as well as a free version for iPad®.

Let’s take a look at some of the main new features it offers.

Intelligent MIDI Transcription

Whether you’re using the Smart MIDI import features or recording a part from a MIDI controller, Dorico 4 automatically separates your melodies, bass lines and inner textures, making the transcription process much faster. As a result, the time it takes to turn a recording into a usable notated part has been dramatically reduced.

More Input Options

Three new on-screen instruments make note input fast and easy. These include a virtual keyboard, a guitar fretboard for inputting tablature, and drum pads for adding percussion. All three are touch-enabled for Windows computers and tablets with touchscreens, allowing you to input notes with your fingers.

Screenshot of app showing written music above and virtual keyboard with keys compressed below.
The keyboard input panel.

MIDI Key Editor

Dorico 4 provides a dedicated MIDI Key Editor that lets you fine-tune performance-related MIDI data such as dynamics, velocities and continuous controllers, making it easy to create realistic-sounding mockups and rehearsal tracks. It also continuously mirrors what’s in the score in the Music Area, always staying in sync so you never get lost.

Screenshot.
The MIDI Key Editor.

Redesigned Play Mode and Mixer

Speaking of the Dorico 4 Key Editor, it’s now available in the newly revamped Play Mode and includes a dedicated Track Inspector that lets you add insert effects on individual tracks, change instrument routing and adjust a volume fader for the selected track. Steinberg also completely rebuilt Dorico 4’s Mixer, and you can now open it in the Lower Zone or as a completely separate window.

Screenshot.
The Track Inspector and redesigned mixer.

Jumping-Off Point

A new Jump Bar lets you access any Dorico command right from your computer keyboard. Simply type “J” and then start typing the name of the command you want; when you hit Return, Dorico will list any that match. You can also use the Jump Bar’s “Go To” tab to navigate to any page or rehearsal mark in your project.

Screenshot.
The Jump Bar provides navigation directly from your computer keyboard.

Insert Scopes

Insert Scopes gives you more options for inserting or removing music without altering what comes after it. This is accomplished by allowing you to set a location in the Flow; any subsequent notes and rhythms will be unaffected by your changes. Four Scopes are available: Voice, which only affects selected voices; Player, which affects only the Instruments and Voices of the selected Player; Global, which affects all Players in the Flow; and Global Adjustment Of Current Bar, which lets you shorten or lengthen a selected measure for all Players in the Flow.

Screenshot.
Insert Scope options.

Easy Melodic and Rhythmic Transformations

Transformation functions allow you to accomplish a variety of common operations for both pitches and rhythms, and they have been significantly enhanced in Dorico 4. You can now choose from seven different pitch transformation options, including Invert Pitches, Reverse Pitches, Reverse and Invert Pitches, Rotate Pitches, Map Pitches, Map Scale, and Repeat Pitches. Rhythm transformation options include Reverse and Rotate. The All Category covers Pitches and Rhythms together and includes Reverse Pitches and Rhythms, Reverse and Invert Pitches and Reverse Rhythms, and Rotate Pitches and Rhythms.

Screenshot.
Pitch and rhythmic Transformations offer time-saving shortcuts.

MIDI Import Gets Smarter

The new Smart MIDI import feature in Dorico Pro and Elements enables you to greatly streamline your workflow. In the past, importing complex orchestral music in MIDI format often required hours of copying, pasting and renaming to ensure the different parts were on the correct staves and correctly labeled. The Smart MIDI import feature intelligently interprets MIDI data during import, thus speeding up and simplifying the import process appreciably.

Screenshot.
Smart MIDI import features.

More and Better Meters

The Pro and Elements versions of Dorico 4 include Steinberg’s SuperVision multi-meter and audio analyzer plug-in — the same one found in Cubase 12 and WaveLab 11. This extremely flexible tool lets you choose from 27 different meter types, including Loudness, VU and Phase. You can open up to nine meters at a time inside SuperVision’s interface and freely configure their placement.

Screenshot.
SuperVision offers multiple meters in custom configurations.

Dongle-Free Existence

If you’re using one of the three Mac- or Windows-compatible versions of Dorico 4, the dongle is now history, thanks to Steinberg’s new Identity-Based License Management system, which allows you to sign on (on up to three different computers) without needing a USB-eLicenser.

Seamless Silicon Support

Dorico 4 runs natively on the new Macs that feature Apple’s M1 chips — the first pro-level notation and composition program to do so. Some of the benefits of running Dorico 4 on an M1 Mac include significantly faster editing operations than Intel-powered Macs and improved energy efficiency.

More New Features

There are lots more new features in Dorico 4. Trying to decide which edition is right for you? Check out the online comparison chart of the main features offered by Dorico Pro 4, Dorico Elements 4, Dorico SE 4 and Dorico for iPad.

Screenshot.
Find out more about Dorico at the Steinberg website.

Consider Context: Make the Invisible Visible

In her memoir “Becoming,” Michelle Obama writes, “Even if we didn’t know the context, we were instructed to remember that context existed. Everyone on earth, they’d tell us, was carrying around an unseen history, and that alone deserved some tolerance.”

This idea of context spoke to me because of my background having grown up with an “invisible illness.” I can say from personal experience that we never really know what’s going on in a person’s mind or body or day — the context of their lives.

Many people look at me and assume that I’m a normal healthy adult, but sometimes I may be suffering physical pain or dizziness that you can’t see. Similarly, a student in your class may have just received some news about a family member, had a disagreement with their best friend or failed a test in the class before yours. When students arrive in your class for orchestra, band, choir or music, you don’t truly know the context of where that student is coming from in that particular moment.

When we enter a rehearsal, we need to find ways to become one entity. This can be very difficult when everyone has a different context for why they are there, what they want to get out of the rehearsal, or even what they can physically or mentally get out of the rehearsal. If you have students who need some extra TLC on any given day, consider the following four concepts.

1. Make Music

male playing violinOne of the most obvious ways to reach students is through the act of making music. Often, we get stuck in the nuts and bolts of rehearsals or stress of prepping for a concert, but it’s essential to take a step back and make sure to spend time each day when students (and you) revel in the joy of music.

Consider playing recordings as they enter class to help get them centered, or letting them play Richard Meyer’s “Dragonhunter” straight through just for fun as a warmup. Sometimes, a simple reminder of the beauty of what you are doing and sharing your passion for creating music can rub off on your students. For many, this is the only class where they can relax. Music can have a dual purpose — to engage students and to distract them from the stresses of the day.

2. Change It Up

Sometimes a student, the whole class or even you just need a distraction. It could be as simple as turning on the latest YouTube or TikTok video to break things up and provide some comic and/or musical relief. Or, do something unexpected like shuffling seat assignments so students aren’t next to the same partner or instrument. Another option: Take a quick trip to the front office to give an impromptu concert.

Try ending rehearsal by playing “hide the bow” (or drumstick), which is essentially a game of “hot and cold” where you hide a student’s bow and the others use forte and piano dynamics to help the student find it. I’ve even taken a class of stressed-out high schoolers outside to play red rover just to remind them that it’s OK for kids to be kids. Of course, we are in class to make music, but we are also in class to create experiences, bond and share joy with one another.

3. Take a Break

Every now and then, we all need a moment. Sometimes it may be obvious — a student is crying or asks to leave the room. However, there are other situations where it might not be clear. For example, students might be acting out or misbehaving because there is something else going on. Give them a water break, offer an ear or use school counselors as resources to help them if needed.

Alternately, instead of a break, distract students with an activity. Engage them in the lesson in a special way or give them a chance to lead the warmup. Do something to allow them to shine and let the weight of their worries disappear for a little while.

chocolate unsplash4. Always Have Chocolate

Chocolate contains serotonin, which helps control mood and generally makes people happy. If a middle schooler is having meltdown (which tends to happen from time to time), I always offer a small piece of chocolate (or an allergy-friendly food item). It’s a nice gesture to show I care, and it always makes them smile — even if just for a second. Whether they take the candy or not, I found that over time, students started confiding in me more, which helped make the invisible visible.

The Big Picture

class singing teacher pianoMusic educators often need to take a breath and consider the context of a situation. It’s easy during concert season to get caught up in the nitty gritty of the technical aspects of the music or the details of an upcoming performance. As a young teacher, I used to get frustrated at students who forgot their bow tie for our state assessment. But I learned to remind myself that 1) we are all human, 2) there may be important context as to why that student did not have their bow tie, 3) it’s not the end of the world and 4) always pack extra bow ties. These apply during concert season but it’s important to have similar reminders for daily rehearsals.

As music teachers, we are lucky to have the privilege of working with students for several years in a row. We encourage them through their elementary years, help protect them in the middle years, and watch them develop from young kids to young adults during high school. Yes, our primary goal is to make music, but we are here for so much more, which is achieved in part by remembering that there is context to every interaction. You may never know the exact context of what’s going on in a student’s life but knowing that it’s there is a huge step forward in connecting with each young musician.

Reboot and Invest in Yourself and Your Program

Being a music educator is all about investing — investing in yourself, your students and your program. I’ve heard from many teachers that they feel exhausted, overwhelmed and less motivated this school year. And who can blame them? We’ve been through a lot these last two years!

However, I’ve also seen some teachers who are on fire! They are trying new things, staying positive and enjoying what they do each and every day. I’d like to offer three suggestions based on the idea of investing.

Focus on Long-Term Gains

plant in hand pexelsThere’s a mentality that we have to “get back to normal” now that COVID-19 is abating (fingers crossed). All music educators suffered playing through the pandemic, losing some great players and seeing a reduction in participation. It’s essential to remember that the work you are doing right now each and every day will probably see a return in several years, not in a few weeks. Like the stock market performance over the past 100 years, we need to be visionaries and focus on the next 10, 25 and 100 years of music education.

So, slow down and make a positive and meaningful experience that your students will remember for their entire lives. Your CURRENT students are the music parents of the FUTURE. Music class isn’t a race to perfect a piece of music, it’s an investment.

Buy Low, Sell High

adult class unsplashIf you have lost some motivation or feel frustrated about your job, you are experiencing a low point — it happens to all of us. This is precisely the time to find some extra time and resources and make an investment for YOURSELF. I recommend taking a professional development class. I teach online classes at VanderCook College of Music, and I assure you that there is a relevant, thought-provoking course for you that will light a fire in your musical soul. Check out VanderCook’s courses.

There is nothing like interacting with a topic that is important to your music program and challenging yourself to do better alongside other music teachers. You’re probably thinking that spending more time on your job can NOT be the answer, but truly, if you are looking to come up and out of the pandemic with a continued passion for music education, you must allow yourself more opportunity to sharpen your mind. Besides taking a class, consider attending a conference or simply meet up with a mentor. No matter what you decide to do, this is a great time to invest in you!

Seek Advice and Share!

Great investors share ideas and numbers, they talk about the market, and they aren’t afraid to ask for help. I recommend that you do the same.

Music teachers tend to keep to ourselves a lot. It’s easy to stay in our corner of the building and keep busy with the thousands of items on our to-do lists. Like the previous suggestion, we need to interact with more people who do what we do.

4 women collaborating pexelsIf you feel like you need help in a particular area, don’t be afraid to ask for help. There are countless online groups that you could consult, or you can reach out to your local music educators association. Another great resource is your local music store/supplier who likely knows great people for you to connect with, but you have to ask!

I suggest making this year the year you bolster up your team! Everyone needs a team of reliable, trustworthy, knowledgeable and passionate people to get them through life. You, as a music educator, are a leader in your community. Great leaders are team players. You need a team! As this school year is coming to a close, focus on building a team for the future — a team full of members who you can learn from and share your great ideas with.

Reach out to me at gschneider@vandercook.edu if you need any guidance. I’d love to connect with you.

20 Best Movie Scores of the Last 20 Years

Behold the power of a great movie score: it takes a picture to new heights and lights up your living room in untold ways, especially when listened to on a quality audio system.

Here we explore 20 of the best movie scores of the last 20 years. If you haven’t yet enjoyed these epic films, what are you waiting for?

The Lord Of The Rings: Return Of The King (2003)

Based on the third volume of J.R. Tolkien’s The Lord of the Rings, this blockbuster film features a compelling score by Howard Shore, performed by the London Philharmonic Orchestra. It won no fewer than 11 Academy Awards®, and deservedly so. Find out where to stream it here.

Pirates of the Caribbean – The Curse of The Black Pearl (2003)

This 2003 fantasy stars Johnny Depp as the pirate Jack Sparrow and was the first in the Pirates of the Caribbean series. The swashbuckling score was composed by Klaus Bedelt, with Hans Zimmer serving as music producer. Find out where to stream it here.

The Painted Veil (2006)

The gentle musical underpinning to this film set in the 1920s was composed by Alexandre Desplat and performed by Chinese pianist Lang Lang, earning Desplat a Golden Globe® Award for Best Original Score. The French composer went on to win another Golden Globe Award, plus an Oscar®, for The Shape of Water in 2018. Find out where to stream The Painted Veil here.

There Will Be Blood (2007)

This movie is loosely based on the Upton Sinclair novel Oil! and stars Daniel Day-Lewis as an oil man driven by an endless quest for wealth. The unrelenting tension is heightened by a Grammy®-nominated score by Jonny Greenwood of the band Radiohead, recorded at the famed Abbey Road studios in London. Find out where to stream it here.

Atonement (2007)

This romantic war drama is an adaptation of Ian McEwan’s bestselling novel of the same name. Italian composer Dario Marinanelli won an Oscar for Best Original Score and the film was nominated for six others. Find out where to stream it here.

The Dark Knight (2008)

This critically acclaimed superhero flick — the second installment of the Dark Knight Trilogy — stars Christian Bale as Bruce Wayne/Batman. It was nominated for eight Academy Awards and features a powerful, speaker-shaking score from Hans Zimmer and James Newton Howard that will test the merit of your subwoofer. An aural highlight: the nine-minute suite that introduces the Joker character, based around only two notes. Find out where to stream it here.

Slumdog Millionaire (2008)

This British comedy-drama tells the story of an 18-year old who dreams of escaping the slums of Mumbai by winning a prize on a TV game show. The film won eight Academy Awards, including one for the soundtrack composed by A. R. Rahman. Find out where to stream it here.

The Social Network (2010)

Adapted by Aaron Sorkin from the bestseller The Accidental Billionaires, this film examines the beginnings of the social networking giant Facebook and the lawsuits that swirled around its creation. Trent Reznor and Atticus Ross (both of Nine Inch Nails fame) composed the soundtrack and won the 2011 Oscar and Golden Globe Best Original Score awards. Find out where to stream it here.

Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows: Part 2 (2011)

This film, the second in the conclusion to the Harry Potter series, is perhaps best known for its epic duel between Harry and his arch-nemesis Voldemort. The accompanying music by Alexandre Desplat was nominated for Best Score Soundtrack for Visual Media at the 54th Annual Grammy Awards. Find out where to stream it here.

Gravity (2013)

This science fiction thriller stars George Clooney and Sandra Bullock as astronauts that are stranded in space. It received 10 Academy Award nominations and won seven of them, including Best Original Score for composer Steven Price. Included in the music are songs from Hank Williams Jr., Juaaka Lyberth, and Charles Scott with Chelsea Williams. Find out where to stream it here.

The Hateful Eight (2015)

The score for this revisionist American western was written by the legendary Ennio Morricone, who composed over 400 films, including Clint Eastwood’s A Fistful Of Dollars and The Good, The Bad and The Ugly. Many regard Morricone as one of the greatest film composers of all time, and with good reason. Find out where to stream it here.

The Revenant (2015)

Set in 1823, this western survival drama stars Leonardo DiCaprio and follows a group of trackers through the wild, mountainous Dakotas. The moody, dark score, written by famed synthesist Ryuichi Sakamoto and German electronic composer Ala Noto (with additional music from Bryce Dessner) fits the emotional cinematography perfectly. Interestingly, the movie was ruled ineligible for the Academy Award for Best Original Score in 2016 because the Academy felt it was “assembled from the music of more than one composer.” Find out where to stream it here.

Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon: Sword of Destiny (2016)

This joint American/Chinese production was directed by Yuen-Woo Ping and written by John Fusco. It’s the sequel to the 2000 film Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon and features a score from composer Shigeru Umebayashi, who at one point was the bass player in a Japanese new wave rock band called EX. Find out where to stream it here.

Blade Runner 2049 (2017)

This sequel to the original Blade Runner (released way back in 1982) stars Ryan Gosling, Harrison Ford, Ana de Armas and Sylvia Hoeks. Composer Benjamin Wallfisch collaborated with Hans Zimmer to handle the music score and the pair made great use of a vintage Yamaha CS-80 analog synthesizer to help evoke the emotions of the era. Find out where to stream it here.

Black Panther (2018)

This Marvel Comics superhero film stars Chadwick Boseman as T’Challa/Black Panther. Score composer Ludwig Goransson went to Africa to conduct research and worked with local musicians to ensure authenticity as he crafted the movie’s powerful musical foundation. There’s also a curated soundtrack produced by Kendrick Lamar. Find out where to stream it here.

The Lion King (2019)

A musical drama directed by John Favreau, The Lion King is a photorealistic computer animation remake of the 1994 film of the same name. Hans Zimmer, who scored the original, returned for this version as well, working in collaboration with Pharell Williams. The movie also features Elton John in a return engagement. Find out where to stream it here.

Avengers: Endgame (2019)

Based on the Marvel Comics Avengers superhero team, this explosive film features an A-list cast and an action-packed score from Alan Silvestri that he’s described as having “thunderous percussion and powerful brass.” Find out where to stream it here.

Joker (2019)

This psychological thriller based on DC Comics characters stars Joaquin Phoenix, who gives a tour de force performance as the Joker — a failed clown who creates a dark revolution in Gotham City. The score, composed by Icelandic cellist Hildur Guðnadóttir, snagged an Oscar and a Golden Globe award, and the movie’s soundtrack also includes classic songs such as Steven Sondheim’s “Send In The Clowns” and “White Room,” performed by the legendary British rock trio Cream. Find out where to stream it here.

Soul (2020)

A computer-animated comedy-drama from Disney/Pixar, this engaging flick features the voices of Jamie Foxx, Tina Fey and Phylicia Rashad. It centers on a music teacher (Foxx) who is trying to reunite his soul with his body before getting his big break to become a jazz musician. The original music score was written by 2022 Grammy superstar Jon Batiste, with Trent Reznor and Atticus Ross of Nine Inch Nails handling the ambient sound. Find out where to stream it here.

Dune (2021)

This critically acclaimed remake of the 1984 science fiction classic features an ensemble cast that includes Timothée Chalamet, Oscar Isaac, Josh Brolin and Rebecca Ferguson. Shot in Hungary and Jordan, it was scored primarily by Hans Zimmer, who spent a week in the desert to help incorporate its ambiance into the atmospherics of the music. Find out where to stream it here.

Five Tips For Playing Rock and Roll Piano

Back in the 1950s, a number of seminal pianists developed the core vocabulary that we use to this day for playing rock and roll music. I’m thinking of people like Jerry Lee Lewis, Little Richard and Fats Domino, whose influence can be heard in the songs and performances of artists like Elton John and Dr. John, as well as contemporary musicians like Ben Folds and Jamie Cullen.

In this article, I’ll give you five tips that will help you learn this style of playing.

1. Rely on Repeated Chords

To match the driving rhythm of the rock and roll drumbeat (hi-hat or cymbal playing eighth notes; kick drum on beats one and three; snare on the two and four), pianists would hammer eighth-note repeated chords in the right hand, like this:

Musical annotation.

Try this foundational exercise slowly at first, using your wrist to slightly pump up and down, then start raising the tempo faster and faster, focusing on keeping your timing precise and unwavering. Pay attention to not tensing up your arm, and be sure to keep your shoulders and neck relaxed as well.

Here’s another example, using a dominant seventh voicing:

Musical annotation.

When you apply this technique to a chord progression, be sure to use good voice leading, which means moving to the closest notes possible in order to form the new chord, like this:

Musical annotation.

… or this:

Musical annotation.

2. Keep Those Figures Moving

Once you’ve mastered the basics, try adding a little melodic movement while still keeping the steady driving rhythm. Here’s one way of doing this:

Musical annotation.

This figure just alternates between the fifth and the sixth of the chord (G to A), and is a common approach that both guitarists and keyboardists take when playing rock and roll. In the audio clip, I also added a little syncopation by holding the chord in the middle of the second measure for an extra eighth note.

Alternatively, you can play an inverted F chord instead of just moving the top G in the C chord up to A:

Musical annotation.

As you can hear, I added a little more rhythmic variation, with the syncopation happening between bars 1 and 2, and then moving up to the dominant seventh (the B-flat). There are many ways of tweaking these basic figures, so be sure to experiment.

Instead of just playing constantly repeated chordal figures, you can alternate notes within the chord voicing to make things a little more interesting. The example below is based on the fifth going to the sixth (as in the previous audio clip), but is played in broken chord style, where the notes contained within a chord are played separately, or in small groupings. (An arpeggio is a form of a broken chord.)

Musical annotation.

Here’s another approach, played in a more straightforward rhythm:

Musical annotation.

And one more common variation:

Musical annotation.

3. Add Some Crushed Notes

Technically, a short note preceding the main note you intend to play is called a grace note, but when this is done within a chord or chordal figure, I prefer to use the term crushed note instead, since it seems to quickly get absorbed into the chord that follows.

Crushed notes work really well for rock and roll piano. In the first bar of the example below, the repeated figure is not a full triad, but is instead an octave with the fifth in-between. In the second bar, there’s a quick F-sharp crush note, played by slightly flicking the F-sharp with your second finger just ahead of playing the G chord. In the third bar, the F-sharp is played in place of the G altogether. These kinds of rhythmic additions may be simple, but they add a nice accent that helps put some of the “rock” in rock and roll:

Musical annotation.

To vary those accents, try playing crush notes in different places. You can also apply this technique to the melodic figures discussed in the last section. In the following example, we flick/crush from E-flat into the E for the C triad chords, and then flick/crush from the F-sharp into the G for the C seventh chord:

Musical annotation.

The following example combines a grace note approach (in the beginning of each measure) with a more melodic use of the movement in the middle of the bar:

Musical annotation.

4. Keep the Left-Hand Patterns Simple

Rock and roll piano is characterized by simple left-hand patterns, which contrast nicely with the busier right-hand parts. Here are two of the most common left-hand patterns, using the fifth to sixth figure we discussed earlier:

Musical annotation.

In the first two bars, strong quarter notes serve to define the basic feel; in the next two bars they are doubled up to eighth notes to give the playing a little more drive.

Here’s a similar approach, with the dominant seventh note added:

Musical annotation.

You can also choose to play a walking bass line with your left hand, such as this:

Musical annotation.

Or you can always opt for this extremely popular walking bass part:

Musical annotation.

It’s worth noting that many rock and roll left-hand patterns first came from the boogie-woogie style of piano-playing; for example:

Musical annotation.

5. Put Those Hands Together

Once you’ve decided on the patterns you want to use for each of your hands, you can work on putting them together. As with most piano-related exercises, the key is to start out slowly, increasing the tempo only when you’re feeling comfortable. Here are four possible combinations you might try:

Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.

Bonus: Some Great Performances To Enjoy

Jerry Lee Lewis

Little Richard

Fats Domino

Johnnie Johnson (Chuck Berry)

Dr. John

Leon Russell

Elton John

Chuck Leavell

Billy Powell (Lynrd Skynrd)

 

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

A Brief Guide to Piano Tonewoods

The acoustic piano is an incredibly complex musical instrument, with thousands of moving and resonating parts. The vast majority of those parts — up to 85% — are made of wood.

Even with the benefit of centuries of design history and refinement, piano makers have the important task of choosing those woods that provide just the right properties and characteristics to deliver a pleasing sound. Let’s take a look at the tonewoods commonly used in pianos, and the reasons why they are selected.

Cross-sectional diagram of a grand piano with specific parts identified and labeled.
Some of the many components in a grand piano.

The Soundboard

By far, the most important part of the piano as it relates to sound is the aptly named soundboard, which is always made of wood. In fact, without a soundboard, you would barely hear anything at all! After a key is depressed and the corresponding hammer strikes the string, the soundboard’s job is to vibrate sympathetically and amplify the sound coming from the strings. For that reason, it’s almost always made from a soft wood. Most piano manufacturers use spruce for their soundboards, but cedar, alder or ash are also sometimes utilized. The main differences in the soundboards used in grand pianos versus upright pianos is their size and shape.

Yamaha has their own lumber mill and processing facility, Kitami Mill, located in Hokkaido, Japan, a region that has the perfect climate for wood treatment. There, the company’s highly skilled artisans inspect and choose only the finest cuts of wood, with only around 10% designated for use as soundboards. Depending on the model, Yamaha uses European, Asian or North American spruce. These woods are chosen because of their pliable nature, which gives them the ability to keep vibrating for a long time, even after the long decay of the struck string dies away. They also slightly attenuate the highest frequencies/harmonics, which helps to produce a warm, pleasing tone.

The wood used for constructing soundboards is first cut into long planks before going through various stages of drying. Typically, it’s air dried for anywhere from six months to two years, then dried further in a kiln. (The kiln in the Yamaha Kitami facility is believed to be the largest in the world.) This process is overseen by experts, who constantly check the wood for moisture and eveness of drying; without this monitoring, the wood may be susceptible to warping and cracking. Once the drying stage is complete, the planks are glued together and joined with wood strips called ribs. These help reinforce the wood and distribute the vibrational energy throughout the case and into the performance space.

Sheets of wood used for a piano soundboard.
A grand piano piano soundboard.

The Bridge

The vibration of the strings are transferred to the soundboard by blocks of wood called the bridge. There are actually two different bridges in a piano: a long bridge for the middle and upper strings, and a shorter one for the bass notes. There are hundreds of pounds of pressure exerted on these bridges by the taut piano strings — especially the very thick bass strings — and withstanding that pressure and transferring the vibrational energy without any loss requires a very dense, hard wood. For that reason, most piano makers use maple, or a mix of maple and beech for their bridges; Yamaha uses hard maple, as it is 25% denser than regular maple.

Wood parts used for the bridge of an upright piano.
Upright piano bridges.

Related to the bridge and strings is the pin block, which holds the pegs that the strings are wound around. Again, hard woods are essential here, and Yamaha uses maple for its density and strength. While most pin blocks use a laminated wood process for increased grip, Yamaha is unique in that they also use threaded pins for improved stability.

The Rim

The body of the piano is called the rim. Because the inner part of the rim (the inner rim) is attached to the soundboard, it effectively acts as an extension of the soundboard, reacting to the vibrations of the strings by bouncing them back — a critical part of the amplification process that has a big impact on the tone of a piano. The outer rim encases the inner rim and soundboard and adds further reflection of the tone, as well as becoming the outer cabinet of the piano after being covered with a final cosmetic wood veneer.

Piano rims are created from 6 to 10 layers of wood that are glued together lengthwise. For a grand piano, those layers are glued and laminated together to make a single long board, which then gets bent into the distinctive grand piano shape. (The process of constructing a grand piano rim is one of the most interesting aspects of the craftsmanship that goes into building a piano.) The process is a bit simpler when making an upright piano. Since the rim shape in those types of pianos is a rectangle, it can be constructed from four thicker blocks fitted together.

Several grand piano rims.
Grand piano rims.

Piano rims are often made of maple and/or maple and mahogany laminate, though sometimes spruce is used. The rims in Yamaha pianos are mostly made of hardwoods such as mahogany or beech, with hard maple and even ash used at times. In some Yamaha grand piano models, the wood is specially aged after traditional drying using a patented A.R.E. (Acoustic Resonance Enhancement) process, which helps to increase the wood’s resonant qualities as if it were aged for a hundred years or more … but accomplished in a fraction of the time. This type of treatment has been used to improve the sound of guitars and violins, but Yamaha is the first manufacturer to apply it to piano design.

The Keys and Hammers

The types of wood used for piano keys and hammers are particularly important because they provide important tactile, and therefore emotional, feedback to the player. The keys, for example, serve as the main interface between the player and the instrument. They need to provide a good “feel,” which means they must have some mass, and offer just enough resistance to allow the pianist to control the sound, but they also must be light enough to provide very fast repetition response. For similar reasons, the wood used for hammer shanks needs to have a certain amount of elasticity and resonance — something that’s especially noticeable when doing fast repetitions.

A piano craftsman adjusting a hammer on a key assembly.
Adjusting a hammer on a key assembly.

Many manufacturers use fir, sugar pine or bass wood for their piano keys; Yamaha uses Sitka or Japanese spruce — the same wood as is used in the soundboards of certain model pianos. These are more expensive than other woods, but are virtually free from warpage and have an excellent strength-to-weight ratio that provides a fast but durable action.

Light woods such as walnut, mahogany and hornbeam are commonly used for hammers. The lighter the wood, the faster the hammer can accelerate, so in general those kinds of woods are preferred.

A Commitment to Sustainability

Yamaha makes a conscious effort to operate in ways that do no harm to our environment. This sense of personal responsibility permeates every aspect of the company’s design and manufacturing processes. For example, every year their Kitami Mill holds a tree planting festival, adding more Sakhalin spruce to their forest so they can maintain a zero-loss of deforestation. In addition, working with local universities, Yamaha invests in research to help increase the yields per tree of many of the species it uses from around the world. Climate change is, of course, also having a major effect on tree growth and Yamaha is working with suppliers to safeguard the quantity and quality of the woods being grown.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha grand pianos.

Click here for more information about Yamaha upright pianos.

Click here to locate your local authorized Yamaha piano dealer.

5 Ways to Use Synthesia

Synthesia is a MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) piano software that visually cues students when to play each key with a series of descending squares. Through color coding, students can see which hand plays each key, while the length of the colored square indicates duration.

The software comes with over 100 royalty-free songs that are categorized by difficulty as well as dozens of scale exercises to promote dexterity. Many of the songs provided match the popular beginning piano method books, allowing for parallel assignments or digital grading if you’re teaching online.

Assessment Modes

Synthesia offers three modes for assessment.

  • “Practice the Melody” waits for the student to press the correct piano key without any concern about the tempo. Students are then scored on how many correct notes they pressed, and if they matched the duration accurately.
  • “Practice the Rhythm” allows students to slow down the tempo but they are judged on their accuracy with the metronome.
  • “Song Recital” judges the accuracy of rhythm, tempo and duration at full speed.

screen shot of boomwhacker video using SynthesiaEach mode can be split into left, right or both hands. The grade is presented in a fraction of correct notes over possible notes and is color-coded for quick visual assessment.

These features are enough to get a student started, but the fun really begins when you import your own MIDI files. If you are creative and like to compose your own etudes, you can create MIDI files using notation programs like Finale, Dorico or Sibelius, load them in Synthesia and have students take assessments that you find to be the most helpful.

Teachers and students can search for MIDI files online for any song that they would like to learn. Every music teacher has been surprised by a sudden song request, such as “We Don’t Talk About Bruno,” and a quick internet search for the midi file can get the student playing new material in just a few minutes.

“Free Play” Mode

Synthesia’s “Free Play” mode shows colorful squares ascending out of the pressed keys allowing students to see where the hand was (instead of where the hand should go in the three assessment modes). This is a powerful visual for teaching keyboard in a classroom where students wouldn’t be able to see the teacher’s hands otherwise. Teachers and students are given the ability to play freely with every note represented visually for the rest of the class to track on a smartboard or television. Students can record their “Free Play” as well as multitrack with different sounds, which opens the door to peer collaboration, arranging and composition.

Boomwhacker Drum SeaShanty“Free Play” is a great space to explore the labels that Synthesia offers. Students can choose to have the keys on the screen labeled with the note’s letter, solfege (fixed or movable) or scale degree. The same labels can be applied to the moving squares, allowing students to mix and match. A great way to relate fixed Do and letter names would be to have the keys labeled with letters and the moving squares to be labeled with solfege. Students could then explore the relationship in a low-risk environment.

The coolest feature, in my opinion, is chord recognition. After you press two or more keys at the same time, a chord name appears in the upper left-hand corner. This would have been an invaluable tool for me in my early days of composition and could become an integral part of any theory course.

Creating Online Piano Tutorials

Students who want to learn the latest musical trends flock to YouTube for piano tutorials. YouTubers Patrik Pietschmann, Rousseau and Amosdoll Music combine for over 2 billion views on their piano tutorial channels. Though they each choose different musical content, they all use Synthesia to visually display their performances. By combining real footage of their hands and the visuals from Synthesia, viewers are met with a stunning hybrid performance of acoustic and MIDI elements. Though their success may suggest market saturation, there is a large gap between the beginner and the difficulty level of their content.

That’s where music teachers come in! There is an open market for serial music lessons that aid students in their journey from Alouette to Blue Rhythms. Synthesia is the perfect visualizer of your favorite tips and tricks for the beginning student and your YouTube video may be the perfect next step in a student’s journey. Another motivator might be YouTube’s monetization after you reach 1,000 subscribers and 4,000 watch hours.

Body PercussionCreating Classroom Play-Along Videos

Though Synthesia is intended for piano education, there are infinite applications for the falling squares and what actions those squares can trigger. I adapted the falling squares to cue my students when to play their boomwhackers in this video and later had students playing body percussion in this video.

The versatility of Synthesia stems from the visual ability to anticipate a note or an action. Traditional sheet music notation allows the musician to anticipate what happens next when they read from left to right. Synthesia’s approach allows for the same anticipation but from the top to the bottom of the screen.

The piano at the bottom of the screen can be cropped out and replaced with any images of instruments, body percussion or maybe even something I haven’t imagined yet. Once you have an instrumentation in mind, create a MIDI file that reflects when you want those instruments to play. Screen record Synthesia playing your MIDI file using your favorite video editor or OBS, a free screen recorder. Use the video editor to replace the keyboard at the bottom with pictures of your preferred instruments, and let the fun begin!

My experience is that these videos are the fastest way for students to create polyphony in mixed ensembles. On an Orff level, students can combine boomwhackers, xylophones, rhythm sticks, drums and body percussion to create a full ensemble. I playfully challenge you to create something that I haven’t even thought of!

Teaching Piano Virtually

During the COVID-19 quarantine, my private lesson studio went entirely online. I was able to continue supporting students through Synthesia by coaching with the visual aid of “Free Play” and creating custom MIDI files that matched my students’ ability levels. Though some of my students were able to aim a webcam at their keyboards, the others were a USB cable away from being able to show me what they were playing through the Synthesia software. The free version has a time limit on the “Free Play” mode, but it was long enough for student to show me what they were working on, allow me to make comments and start over again. Some of my students’ parents purchased the $29 Synthesia license, but the free software still gave me an advantage in teaching online.


Your Choice

Boomwhacker Metallica

I can sincerely say that Synthesia made teaching a more enjoyable experience during a time when teaching was not so fun. Now that my school district is back in person, I have pivoted to creating engaging videos that wouldn’t be possible without this software. Synthesia has been around for 15 years, but I didn’t find it until I absolutely needed it.

I’ll leave you with this fun fact: The original title for Synthesia was Piano Hero because they were so inspired by the popular video game Guitar Hero.

Share your Synthesia experiences by messaging me @SwicksClassroom on Instagram or email educators@yamaha.com. If you’d like to see more of my play-along content, search Swick’s Classroom on YouTube.

10 Reggae Albums You Need to Hear on Vinyl

With its warm rhythms and distinctive sonic textures, reggae is one of those genres that just sounds better on vinyl. And of course, the enjoyment of vinyl records necessitates a top quality turntable.

Here’s a list — in no particular order — of 10 reggae LPs you have to hear on vinyl.

1. Legend (Deluxe Edition) – Bob Marley and The Wailers

Bob Marley and The Wailers are arguably the most well-known reggae artists of all time. The deluxe version of their 1984 album Legend (released three years after Marley’s death) includes many of the beloved singer’s biggest hits: “No Woman, No Cry,” “Three Little Birds,” “Could You Be Loved” and “Is This Love,” to name just a few, with the shimmering guitars and Marley’s buttery voice sounding even more crisp when you listen on vinyl.

2. The Harder They Come Soundtrack – Various Artists

Singer Jimmy Cliff not only starred in the hit 1972 crime film The Harder They Come, he also performed the title track as well as three other songs. The rest of the soundtrack was rounded out with contributions from other popular Jamaican artists of the time, including Toots and the Maytals, The Melodians, The Slickers, DJ Scotty and Desmond Dekker — in other words, a veritable Who’s Who of reggae. The vinyl release of this pivotal work is a great way for those new to reggae music to immerse themselves in the genre.

3. Funky Kingston – Toots and the Maytals

This album marked a seminal moment for reggae on the world stage, popularizing the genre for the masses. The recording revealed what life was truly like in Jamaica in the early 1970s — both the ups and the downs — and showed that the residents of the tiny island nation chose to celebrate life, no matter what they came up against. One of the album’s standout tracks is “Pressure Drop,” a song about karmic justice — the idea that if you wrong someone, then karma will find its way to you.

4. Marcus Garvey – Burning Spear

Burning Spears’ Marcus Garvey, is another groundbreaking work in reggae music … and a political statement as well. It was named after the legendary Jamaican political activist of the early 20th century, a man who aimed to unify and connect the African diaspora throughout the world. The opening title track is a sobering testament to Garvey, with the guitars and horns almost melancholic as they lament over why the activist has been forgotten — an injustice that the rest of the album serves to rectify by memorializing his legacy and roots.

5. Labour of Love – UB40

Unusually, this fourth studio album from the UK group UB40 was a collection of cover songs, including Neil Diamond’s “Red Red Wine,” all done in a reggae style — a tactic that gave the genre another global boost. In fact, UB40 first heard “Red Red Wine” through reggae singer Tony Tribe, and not Diamond. Their version earned the group their first No. 1 single, so if you want to hear the real deal, be sure to check out the 45 RPM vinyl release.

6. Conquering Lion – Yabby You and The Prophets

Yabby You may not be a household name, but he was another pioneer in reggae. Born Vivian Jackson, he earned his nickname with the title song for this 1975 album, where he sings “Be-you, yabby-yabby-you” repeatedly — a haunting turn of phrase that eventually transforms into a lo-fi chant. Yabby turned to a music career after leaving his family at the age of 12, only to suffer a bout of malnutrition that left him disabled in his late teens and unable to work. Conquering Lion was the result, a project that authentically reflected his day-to-day struggles in Jamaica.

7. Exodus – Bob Marley and The Wailers

Exodus has a much more relaxed sound than Bob Marley and The Wailer’s previous work, relying on themes of religion, politics and sex to tell a story. Recorded in London, England following an assassination attempt on Marley’s life in 1976, this is the album that brought international success to the beloved Jamaican singer/songwriter — not least because it includes a number of his biggest hits, such as the effervescent “Jamming” and “Three Little Birds,” with the latter featuring the catchy “every little thing is gonna be all right” lyric that Marley is perhaps most famous for.

8. Rebirth – Jimmy Cliff

As the name suggests, this 2012 collaboration between reggae veteran Jimmy Cliff and Tim Armstrong, frontman for the punk band Rancid, is meant to be a reawakening of the genre. Sure, there are moments when the pair brazenly combine traditional reggae rhythms with rock — on The Clash’s “Guns of Brixton” and Rancid’s “Ruby Soho,” for example — but there are other moments when Jimmy intuits the textures and styles of his peers like The Wailers and The Sensations. Perhaps the album’s most classic reggae track is “One More,” in which Cliff reflects on what he has to give in this life.

9. Welcome to Jamrock – Damian Marley

Bob Marley’s youngest son Damian carried the torch for his father by stepping into a music career — albeit one with a unique spin — that continued to give a voice to the Jamaican people. Still active today, his take on reggae is a bit more upbeat than his father’s, and rife with hip-hop influences. Welcome to Jamrock, released in 2005, laid the foundation for what has become to be known as reggae fusion. The title track provides a good example of the marriage of the two genres, with Damian’s half-sung, half-spoken vocals flowing in and around a backing track comprised of staccato guitar and sparse drums, anchored by a heavy bass.

10. Distant Relatives – Nas and Damian Marley

Five years later, Damian would collaborate with rapper Nas on Distant Relatives, an album that provided further proof of the younger Marley’s comfort level with hip-hop. It also served to further break the mold on what reggae could be, as the two artists — both of Garvey’s African diaspora — connect in a musical conversation about the discrimination and hardships of their people. The standout song “Patience” is a reminder for us to do just that — a weighty track that sees Damian and Nas urging their listeners to exhibit patience and spread truth.

 

Check out these turntables from Yamaha.

Case Study: 8 Keys to Successfully Build Culture through Strategic Planning

Hard work is an essential component of a thriving program, but your plan for how you strategically achieve it can make all the difference. As a doctoral student, I took some courses in human resource management, educational leadership, and policy studies and learned about the importance of a strategic plan.

I decided to craft and implement a strategic plan when I stepped into my current role as the director of choral activities at Wylie East High School in Texas. I was amazed at how easily I incorporated the strategic plan into my program, and I truly believe that this is a fabulous model for music educators to shape their programs.

My model focuses on eight key steps for success, but there are many ways to approach building a program. This is simply what has worked for me, my staff and my students. I share it with you in hopes that some or all of this can inspire reflection and action for you, your students and your program.

Key #1: Be Led from Within to Lead Out — Define, Refine and Articulate Your Mission

The leader must be led from within in order to effectively lead others. Educators should ask themselves: “Why do I do what I do?”

What propels you to inspire others, gives you the fuel during challenging times and keeps you coming back to school each day? Strive to define your philosophy of music education, revisit it often (refining as needed), and articulate it into a mission for your program that serves as the foundation for a logical, grounded and sequential plan.

In the simplest of terms, my philosophy is to inspire all students through a comprehensive choral music program that teaches them to not just be outstanding musicians, but to develop community among one another, all while serving the community in which they live and those with whom they come in contact. This articulated in a mission statement reads:

The Wylie East High School Choral Department is an organization that strives to deliver a choral music education to all students through outstanding musicality, career and community development, and service to the school and community. 

WylieEastChoir2

Key #2: Build Your Army — Strength, Creativity and Inspiration through Numbers

While building a dynamic program begins with you, your ideas and your mission, one person cannot do it all. If you’re a proud Type A personality like me, it’s easy to shoulder all of the responsibility, take the blame when things come up short and enjoy the fruits of your labor when things go well. However, there is an unintended consequence of this do-it-yourself tactic — you will burn out.

Trust me, I learned this lesson the hard way. I used my youthful exuberance and energy to teach and grow a middle school choir program, and while success was plentiful, it became unsustainable and I was exhausted. I was forced into a different approach, which I now see is critical to long-term success: strength in numbers.

Before you dive into the strategic planning process, involve your feeder school directors, student leadership teams, parent boosters and volunteers, and when needed, your campus administration. Ask the difficult questions. What is going well? What needs refining? What goals and visions do they have for the program?

Key #3: Dream Big — Needs Assessments through Optimistic Reality

One of my favorite TV personalities is Dr. Phil with his no-nonsense approach of “getting real.” My students know this about me, and they know that I am unafraid to tell them when we have work to do. I say this because this step can get ugly because it exposes things about your program that are less than desirable. However, approaching this step through optimistic reality can help you frame your thinking away from pure adjudication to that of a dreamer.

Draw two columns in a notebook, and look at your program as a whole. Determine what you like about your program and then ask yourself: “If we could only…”. Based on your responses, create a list of ideal needs for your program and students. Dream big! Some examples that I have used, organized by difficulty, include:

    • Create a new choir logo and branding proposal for marketing purposes
    • Expand the vocal solo collection library
    • Inventory housed equipment for condition, repair or replacement + articulation of needs through capital outlay
    • Maximize existing classroom, office, storage and library space to accommodate large classes
    • Assess budget spending and fundraising to increase campus activity fund, and involve booster clubs to fund offerings for students
    • Upgrade and purchase uniforms for all choirs
    • Imagine, plan, design and articulate needs for a new facility

Key #4: Think of Big Ideas — Set Overarching Strategic Goals.

Plan chalkboardThis step takes time to complete. I like using the Goldilocks approach to get it just right. Think of three BIG ideas that can fuel your plan. One way of thinking about this is to go back to your mission. Generally, your mission can be pared down to three or four big ideas. Use those as the backbone for your overarching goals. For me, they are creating great musicians, developing a community within the program and its ensembles, and to serve others through what we do. Written as strategic goals, they read:

  • Strategic Goal 1: Outstanding MusicalityDevelop exemplary musical skills at all choral levels, including tone, timbre, dynamics, etc. in both the individual and choral group settings. Demonstrate through performance(s) and participation/success in competitions.
  • Strategic Goal 2: Career and Community DevelopmentEstablish an inclusive environment for all Wylie East High School students through an aligned program of expectations and traditions that is both sustainable and collaborative.
  • Strategic Goal 3: Service to the School and CommunityEnhance presence within the school and community through active participation, travel and the “Wylie Way” district character-building connections.

Key #5: Set Different Levels of Goals — Strategic Action through Macro- and Micro-Level Goals.

Now, it’s time to get the hamster in the cage, introduce it to the wheel and let it run! The often-used phrase by Stephen Covey, “begin with the end in mind,” is so appropriate for this “exercise class.”

What does a musician in your program look like after four years? At the end of the year? What do you want your ensemble to sound like? Creating these macro-level (4- and 1-year) goals along with the micro-level goals of how you will achieve them through concerts and lessons will help you craft a logical action plan. Included is a copy of one of my strategic plans that gives the scope of my chosen, measurable and achievable actions. Here’s an example of a goal-setting process:

    • Strategic Goal 1: Outstanding Musicality
      • Subset to Goal 1: Repertoire Selection
        • Macro-Level Goal 1 (1-Year): Students will perform a diverse and comprehensive set of choral literature that spans different genres, time periods and languages, as well as incorporates accompanied and a cappella singing.
          • Micro-Level Goal 1 (Fall Concert): List of repertoire chosen

WyleEastChoir1 boys choir

Key #6: Start the Avalanche — Achieve Success through Quick Wins

A strategic plan can be incredibly valuable, but it also can bog you down in overly theoretical ideas that get you nowhere. One of the best strategies for finding success is to start the avalanche through quick wins.

Essentially, let your students find success and garner enthusiasm through activities that create excitement within the ensemble. Some of our quick-win first-year activities included creating a new choir logo, developing an overarching theme for the year, reorganizing the choir space, assembling and training a choir leadership team, and reimagining our back-to-school events to be more impactful and involve all students. Build these small wins into larger, more visible wins and watch your program thrive.

Key #7: Slow and Steady Wins the Race — Attack  Macro-Level Goals through Objectives and Measures

Your quick wins give you momentum to attack your macro-level goals through the meat of the strategic plan: your objectives and measures. As a program, we attack our macro-level goals through an overall theme. We have used themes such as “Elevate” for increasing musicianship, “Ignite” to build intrinsic motivation and participation, “Odyssey” for navigating the unknown, and “Breaking Ground” for building new foundations.

Before you set out on your objectives and measures, know this: Many music educators are competitive, especially with themselves, but it must be said, there is no perfect plan. You will not hit every goal. You will fall short and that’s okay. Remember to zoom out and look at the progress you are making as a whole rather than the things you miss.

Key #8: Build an Empire — Expand Your Army through Specialization

One of my favorite parts of this process is the ability to specialize in the things in which I excel and delegate other things. Music educators wear many hats, from conductor to accountant, counselor, copy repair technician and more.

I always say, “it takes a village to raise a choir,” and in this case, it’s about defining roles within your army and empire. I am a proud analyst. I like colored spreadsheets, objectivity and logistics. Having a clear-cut plan helps me to be organized, and then the creativity follows. I am not successful as a “forced creative,” so I have defined my role as the program’s teacher-administrator, and I have shaped my role to fit my strengths. At Wylie East High School, we are blessed with three staff members and in addition to splitting our choral ensembles, we split our administrative duties as well:

  • Nathan and Ashley, choral directors at Wylie East High SchoolMy specialties include communications, financial management, booster club, calendar and facilities, travel arrangements, student leadership and serving as department chair and vertical team lead.
  • My wife and co-director, Ashley Dame, specializes in marketing, social media, service projects, concert logistics and lighting, musical, lesson plan creation and choreography.
  • Our third director, Sara Rond, plays the role of chameleon and handles a variety of tasks, including solo and ensemble, digital learning platforms, attendance and uniforms, to name a few.

While I am, indeed, fortunate to have a three-member staff in place, I have taught in situations where I was the only director with over 300 students as well as working as a split-campus director teaching both middle and high school.

In these circumstances, it is more important than ever to involve parents and student leadership teams to help shoulder responsibilities where appropriate. I successfully delegated several duties, such as helping take attendance in large classes, organizing the music library, managing uniforms, organizing social events, gathering volunteers for trips and managing money through booster clubs.

Being the only director is difficult but getting everything done is possible! Focus on being an advocate and educating administrators and parents about your program’s mission and needs.

Related Benefits of Strategic Planning — Connecting the Dots

One of the best parts of having a strategic plan is seeing its related benefits, particularly in recruitment, retention, leadership and motivation. When directors set up a strategic plan that is well thought out, contains quick wins, and carefully increases rigor and involvement, students will experience success, which encourages them to remain in the program, and they will be your best recruiters.

Recruitment and retention connect strongly to our program’s mission of finding musical success (kids want to be a part of something good), visibility (kids are drawn to programs that they see being successful) and strong relationships with students.

My hope is that students are inspired and motivated by your plan. At first, students find extrinsic motivation through you, your lessons and the plan you have created, but over time, that drive morphs into intrinsic motivation with students finding value in what they are doing each day. It’s a cycle that is fun to watch and well worth the time and efforts spent on the front end of the planning process.

Trust me, it works!

Looking to Hide Cables, Cords and Wires? Here’s How.

Let’s face it: You’re a binge-watcher. There’s nothing you love more than turning the lights down low, settling into a comfy sofa and watching your favorite movies and TV shows. You’ve subscribed to every major streaming service and have carefully selected your audio and video components, so everything sounds and looks great.

There’s only one problem: When you turn the lights back on, your room is a mess, with audio and video cables, power cords and wires everywhere — to and from your TV, game console, streaming device, AV receiver, sound bar, speakers and subwoofer, hanging off of shelves and end tables, perhaps even (gulp!) snaking across the floor.

Surely there has to be a better way!

Turns out that there is. And in this article we’ll give you some tips for making your viewing room look as impressive with the lights switched on as it does when they’re turned way down low.

Take Advantage of Open Spaces

When it comes to hiding cables, the first rule is: Always take full advantage of any available open spaces. If you have an attic above your viewing room or a crawlspace below it, they’re perfect for keeping cabling out of sight. If you’re renting (or if the thought of drilling into ceilings or floors makes you uncomfortable), fear not: just buy some wire covers (sometimes called “cable ducts,” “cable runners,” “cable raceways” or “cable concealers”). These allow you to easily hide a bundle of cables in a neat conduit that can be stuck to a baseboard or wall with adhesive or dual-sided tape — no tools required. Many are even paintable, so they can easily blend into your room décor.

Two images of a television and sound bar interconnected with wires; the image on the left shows the wires hidden by a cover.
Wire covers are simple to install and do a great job of hiding cables.

Use Your Room’s Trim

Trim elements like crown molding and baseboards run around a room, so you should utilize any small gaps they may provide, such as behind the molding or underneath the baseboard. If your home entertainment room does not have either, you can always install foam crown molding or foam baseboard molding and hide wires behind or under them. As with wire covers, many foam moldings are paintable, making them unobtrusive as well as decorative.

Closeup of crown molding along the top of a wall.
Wires can be hidden behind or under crown molding.

Run Flat Wire Under Carpeting

If your viewing room is carpeted or has throw rugs or runners, you can run flat wire underneath them; these won’t create an annoying bump like standard cabling will. Bear in mind that fishing flat wire underneath wall-to-wall carpeting requires the use of specialized tools called fish tape pullers. There are also some super-thin flat speaker wires on the market designed to be affixed to a wall with adhesive. For a smooth finish, just apply some joint compound to integrate the wire into your wall, then sand and paint. As a bonus, this type of wire will even work underneath wallpaper.

Utilize Lighting Coves or Install Light Strips

If your room has a lighting cove or strip lighting, take advantage of these spaces to tuck wire underneath. If not, you can install some adhesive LED light strips (which are very low wattage and often made of heat-resistant materials) and hide wiring under them.

Cable Clips are Great Organizers

Even if you can’t completely hide the wires in your entertainment area, you can at least organize them with the use of handy (and inexpensive) cable clips. As shown in the photo below, these do the important job of bundling wires together, thus minimizing the amount of electronic spaghetti that may be cluttering up your room. Some are even self-adhesive, making it easy to attach them behind your entertainment center, to the backs of tables or underneath existing molding, making your cabling a lot less obtrusive.

Five wires of different colors channeled through a bar style cable clip.
A cable clip keeping wires together.

You Can Never Have Enough VELCRO® or Zip Ties

When it comes to hiding cables, VELCRO wraps and zip ties are your best friend — the installer’s equivalent to duct tape. They come in a variety of lengths and thicknesses and provide an inexpensive and easy way to neatly bundle and manage cables behind cabinets and between shelves. Our advice: stock up on a supply of both. You’ll always find a use for them!

Closeup of hook and loop style wraps around a group of cables.
Velcro wraps make it easy to bundle and manage cables.
Different colors and sizes of cable ties bundle as groups with like sized ties.
Cable ties come in a variety of sizes …
Large bundle of cables with multiple ties keeping them closely bound together much like a rope.
… and can be used to organize even large bundles of cables.

Apply Music Learning Theory Principles in Your Teaching

The beloved television icon, Mr. Rogers said, “Play is often talked about as if it were a relief from serious learning. But for children, play is serious learning. Play is really the work of childhood.” (Heidi Moore, “Why Play is the Work of Childhood,” Fred Rogers Center, 2014.)

I would venture to guess that we all know that young children actively use all their senses to engage with and learn about the world around them — my 11-month-old puts everything in her mouth for that exact reason. But how do we transfer that idea to the piano lesson?

What is Music Learning Theory?

AnthonyI first became familiar with Music Learning Theory in graduate school at the University of South Carolina. I used the Music Play curriculum to play with children age 5 and under. One of the students who really helped me grow as a human, a musician and a teacher was a boy named Anthony who has autism (pictured to the right). Through my lessons with Anthony, I learned to really listen and react to the musical responses of each child, and I learned to improvise and create my own music based on these responses.

Quite simply put, Music Learning Theory tells us how children learn when they are learning music. Through years of research, Dr. Edwin E. Gordon discovered that we learn music in the same way we learn language and that the best way to develop musical potential (which everyone has!) is through active participation: singing, listening, moving, playing, imitating and creating.

Sidenote: Victor Wooten has a wonderful TED Talk about Music as a Language.

reading pyramidLet’s think about how children learn language. First, they absorb through listening then they babble — nonsense syllables at first and then slowly, through imitation, a real word or two start to emerge. Even when the sounds are unclear, adults or older children give clarity and meaning to those words. Words turn into sentences, and soon, the child is thinking fully through language and holding conversations with other people. After years of practicing how to listen and talk, we then teach the child how to read and write.

We all know the educational guide, “Sound Before Symbol” by Maria Kay. Unfortunately, in music lessons, teachers often rely on a method book to guide the structure and curriculum of a child’s musical journey, thus skipping several steps in the learning process.

Listening

I always use 3/4 meter as an example of what can happen if a child does not have a firm listening foundation. Most songs played on the radio are in 2/4 or 4/4 time, so students generally know the feel of these meters. However, I’m sure you’ve had students who dropped or added a beat in 3/4 without noticing that anything was wrong. Just as young babies learn the natural inflection of their birth language(s), children (and adults) learn their musical language and the natural inflection of a style, meter or composer through listening before trying to play.

During the listening stage, I play patterns or small groups of notes for my students and ask them to identify if my two patterns are the same or different. There is a Music Learning Theory saying: “We know what something is by knowing what it’s not.” (Edwin E. Gordon, “Learning Sequences in Music: Skill, Content, and Patterns,” Chicago: GIA Publications, 2003.)

If the student cannot identify that a pattern in 3/4 sounds different than a pattern in 4/4, they are not ready to move on in the learning sequence.

Movement

I challenge you to listen to any upbeat song by the Beach Boys, Beatles or BTS and try not to move. It’s impossible! And that’s a good thing. Music and movement are meant to be intertwined. I write about this in more detail in “Use Movement to Fix Rhythm,” but I will give an example here.

After my students have listened to many songs in 3/4 meter, I invite them to move while I play a piece in 3/4. If they can keep the macrobeat and microbeats steady, I know that they are audiating in the meter. If they cannot, then I know that they need more time listening.

Improvisation

child playing piano unsplashNext, I give my students a chance to babble or talk on their own and improvise at the piano in 3/4 meter. I will keep the parameters simple: Put both hands on a D pentascale and improvise a piece in 3/4. I usually allow students to play on their own before I add an accompaniment pattern. Again, if my students stay in 3/4, I know they understand and are audiating triple meter. If they are struggling to play with consistent macro- and microbeats, we will spend more time listening and moving.

At this time, I also revisit the same/different game, but now I allow students to be the teacher and ask them to create patterns. Then I will identify if they are the same or different. (Students always love a chance to reverse roles!)

Reading

Depending on the student, I may do some rote, or imitation, teaching before we move on to reading notation. When I transfer to notation, I again go back to my patterns and teach the notes and rhythms in relationship to each other and the keyboard, rather than just focusing on the note or rhythmic value names — see my article, “Note-Naming ≠ Music-Reading.

Most method books introduce a half note as getting two counts. However, knowing that a half note gets two counts in some meters is a different skill from knowing what that half note will sound like in context.

I believe it is our responsibility to create musicians, not just great piano technicians. Through the tenets of Music Learning Theory, children and adults can expand their musical horizons and come much closer to reaching their full musical potential.

Music Learning Theory reminds me of this famous quote that has been credited to Benjamin Franklin: “Tell me and I forget. Teach me and I may remember. Involve me and I learn.”

Focus on the Focus Switch

Every year, musical instrument manufacturers release exciting new innovations in digital technology — things like processors that replicate analog devices with stunning accuracy, or recording interfaces that capture audio at resolutions the human ear can’t even detect.

If anyone had told me a decade ago that I’d completely replace my tube amplifiers with digital emulations of them, I’d say they were crazy! However, some years ago, I started performing live and doing recording sessions with a processor called Helix®. This amazing device from Line 6 provides hundreds of modeled amp/speaker configurations, plus every guitar effect you’ll ever need … all in glorious stereo. I actually think this technology sounds better than anything I’ve ever used before.

Similarly, just when we thought the six-string guitar had reached the pinnacle of its evolution, Yamaha introduced a complete range of TransAcoustic guitars that provide onboard reverb and chorus without the need for an amplifier! Skeptics may call this “sorcery,” but guitar players the world over are basking in the magnificent glow of those ambient acoustic tones.

Early in 2022, the company’s second-generation Revstar electric guitars were unveiled, with three levels of models (Professional, Standard and Element), all featuring acoustically tuned, chambered mahogany bodies. This new technology reduces body weight while increasing musical resonance and sustain. By simply placing your ear on the back of the instrument, you can experience how single notes and chords “blossom” within those chambers.

And the advancements didn’t stop there. Professional and Standard models also got an upgrade in the form of a five-way pickup selector switch. Position one (bridge pickup only), position three (bridge and neck pickups) and position five (neck pickup only) all function as you’d expect. Position two on the selector switch combines the bridge and neck pickups, but slightly delays the output of the opposite pickup to create an extremely desirable “out of phase” sound reminiscent of single-coil guitars. Position four replicates this tonality, but in reverse.

The Focus Switch

As if this wasn’t more than enough “cool” for a new guitar, Yamaha added a pull-pot feature to the tone control of Professional and Standard models called a “focus switch.” This passive circuitry (no battery needed) smooths out the treble frequencies while boosting the lows and mids for a more defined (“focused”) sound.

Closeup of the body of an electric guitar with knob indicated.
The focus switch.

The focus switch can be engaged on all five pickup options, for a total of ten tonal variations on a two-pickup guitar! Yamaha describes the effect of this new innovation as the sound of an overwound pickup. Overwound pickups have a higher output volume and generally find favor with rock guitar players looking for a more aggressive sound. I love how the focus switch enhances every style of music I play, and have found that it gives me a tonality I like without needing to use an outboard equalizer to fine-tune the frequencies.

The Video

Of course, the best way to evaluate and demonstrate the effect of the focus switch is to hear it. For those of you who don’t have access to a second-generation Revstar guitar, I created the video below so you can listen to how it affects the various pickup selections.

Here, I’m playing an RSS20 Standard Revstar through a Line 6 Helix processor. The backing track was recorded using the bridge pickup only, without the focus switch engaged. The solos you see me playing on top use all five pickup selections, and I indicate when I add the focus switch.

In the process of filming the video, I discovered my favorite settings. Position two (out of phase) with the focus switch engaged gave me that harmonically rich lead tone that has become part of my signature sound. The notes sustain with natural compression and start to feedback mildly, adding musical dimension, like a halo glowing around the notes.

Position four (also out of phase) with focus engaged gave me the sweetest of blues rhythm and lead tones. Complex chord voicings remain clear and defined yet take on a warm breadth that just makes you want to keep playing.

Of course, the resonance of the body chambers, along with the pickup selection and the use of the focus switch, are all working together to create these tones. It’s a sum of these parts interacting with the player’s technique that creates such a vibrant palette of world-class guitar tones.

Wood body of an electric guitar with the inner construction (without the electrical elements) visible.
Second-generation Revstar body chambers.

If you’d like to hear more tones using the focus switch, check out this video, and this one, both included in my recent blog article spotlighting second-generation Revstars. The latter video also demonstrates the effect of the “dry switch” — a bass filter found on Revstar Element models such as the neon yellow RSE20 I’m playing there.

The Wrap-Up

Gone are the days when a guitar player needed racks of gear, walls of amps and a stack of guitars to create the textures and tones needed for a tour or recording session. Portable, programmable effects devices can store all our favorite sounds, and one modern guitar may well be versatile enough to cover almost any genre and musical situation. The challenge for guitar players these days will be keeping our chops up to date, and worthy of this incredible new technology.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

5 Experimental Pieces Every Concert Band Should Play

What is experimental music? According to Wikipedia, it is a “general label for any music that pushes existing boundaries and genre definitions. Experimental compositional practice is defined broadly by exploratory sensibilities radically opposed to, and questioning of, institutionalized compositional, performing, and aesthetic conventions in music.”

So, just because a piece wasn’t written by a composer from The New York School, a group of artists that actively sought to widen the consciousness of Americans in the 1950s through poetry, art and music, doesn’t mean it isn’t innovative and experimental!

Why Play Experimental Music?

Experimental music teaches students unique and valuable musical skills: Experimental music exposes students to contemporary composing techniques as well as new types of notation and different instruments. While Handel’s “Water Music” is timeless, if we only play classical music from the classical era, our students will never learn techniques from the 20th and 21st centuries. I never learned how to flutter tongue in high school, so when I joined an audition-only wind ensemble in college, I had a bit of a problem. I was a principal flutist who hadn’t learned any extended techniques! Contemporary pieces were quickly something I learned to fear. A small percentage of your students will go on to perform in college, too, so introduce them to extended techniques before they leave your classroom.

orchestra overhead 4TNd3hsW3PM unsplashExperimental music will excite the audience in ways that classical-era pieces simply can’t: My dad isn’t the biggest fan of classical music. So, when one of my ensembles put on a spooky modern Halloween concert instead of a traditional concert with “Danse Macabre,” he couldn’t stop talking about the performance. We played “Voodoo,” a piece for winds that called for singing and flex time.

Every high school band should try out an experimental piece at least once a year. Here are five, which are experimental in either composition or instrumentation, that I find to be educationally valuable. Mix things up and try one! Your students will thank you.

1. “Godzilla Eats Las Vegas” by Eric Whitacre

JW Pepper describes this piece as “Eric Whitacres famous work for concert band” — and it’s true! While many band and orchestra directors know Whitacre for his gorgeous voice leading and chord planing, most people know him for “Godzilla Eats Las Vegas.” The composition, which was commissioned by the University of Nevada, Las Vegas in 1996, is a sound story of Godzilla. The piece has a wide range of sound effects, from dog barks and chilling vocal “oohs” to bomb-drop sounds performed on flute headjoints. It is truly a wild ride that many bands will enjoy.

While this particular video shows a version of “Godzilla Eats Las Vegas” that is performed with a full choir, you can also assign the vocal parts to the members of your band.

2. “Through the Looking Glass Falls” by Jennifer Jolley

I discovered the work of Jennifer Jolley when I was working at a New Music Festival that she visited as a guest composer. I consider her “Through the Looking Glass Fallsto be experimental because of its unique composition. In some moments, it feels like bleep-blop, and in other moments, it is flowing and smooth. This piece is like water! Flowing, dripping, falling.

Through the Looking Glass Fallswas based on drawings elementary students made after listening to Ravel’s “Jeux d’eau.” I was lucky enough to see the original drawings alongside the composition during a workshop with Jolley.

This piece is a grade 5, and I recommend it for audition-only bands because it is quite difficult. The piccoloist needs a lot of rhythmic independence. In fact, the whole band will need confidence for this one given its pared-down parts.

Watch the Detroit Symphony Youth Ensemble perform “Through the Looking Glass Falls” in this video.

Another great piece by Jolley is “Motordom.” It is very different in texture and has a lot of forward motion. It was based on a light installation with the same name at the Caltrans headquarters in downtown Los Angeles. Listen to “Motordom” here.

3. “Electricity” by Daniel Bukvich

electric current pexels pixabayThis piece by Daniel Bukvich is a level ME, which makes it accessible to younger bands. “Electricity” is split into three movements: Power, Black-Out and Incandescence.

The thick and raucous percussion at the beginning will get your students excited. But just wait until the end when the cacophonous extended bass technique sounds like a hundred bees or flies or perhaps an electrical current, which would be quite fitting given the composition’s title. But I’ll let you decide!

4. “Country Band March” by Charles Ives

You might be surprised to see a march on the list, but this isn’t just any march. It’s two marches, at the same time!

Country Band March” is actually a musical joke. It is a parody of performing street musicians who make their fair share of mistakes. The musicians are playing two entirely different pieces, far too close to one another.

Charles Ives composed this piece in 1903. While it is cacophonous, it somehow works. There is also a moment where the band sounds like a train.

While there are no extended techniques in “Country Band March,” it’s definitely not something you hear every day.

5. “Voodoo” by Daniel Bukvich

The creative composer Daniel Bukvich made my list twice! If you are looking for new and innovative compositions, I would highly recommend looking into more of his pieces.

flashlight pexelsAs I mentioned earlier, I didn’t stumble upon “Voodoo” until college. That being said, this work is very accessible for high school bands. Unlike “Electricity,” “Voodoo” best suits mature high school wind ensembles. This piece is based on the African religion Hoodoo, and it’s a treat not only for the ears but also the eyes. The score includes parts for flashlights, which are paired with eerie percussion, whistles, extended techniques in the winds and vocal noises — combined, they create a spooky experience.

Another notable facet of “Voodoo” is that it is written entirely in open score and must be memorized before the performance.

Spotlight on Steinberg WaveLab 11

With the release of WaveLab 11, Steinberg added over 40 new features and enhancements to its flagship audio editor. These additions beef up WaveLab’s already prodigious toolset for mastering, audio for video, podcast production and more.

Space doesn’t allow covering all the new capabilities, but let’s take a look at some of the highlights, starting with those common to both the Elements and Pro versions.

Clean and Enhance Track Inspector Windows

The new Clean and Enhance windows in the Track Inspector provide convenient real-time processing of individual tracks. Clicking on the Track Effects shortcut brings up two distinct sections: Clean and Enhance, each with on/off buttons and one-knob controls.

The Clean section features three effects: DeHummer, DeNoiser and DeEsser. All have a Reduction knob for controlling the amount of processing, along with a Listen knob for monitoring the part of the signal removed by the effect. The DeHummer offers options for removing 50 or 60 Hz hum, while the DeEsser has a Character Control for differentiating between male and female voices.

The Enhance section offers four more effects: Voice Exciter with Amount and Clarity controls; Reverb with Size and Mix controls; EQ with Low, Mid and High-frequency knobs, as well as a Low Cut filter; and Maximize with an Optimize control.

Screenshot.
The new Clean and Enhance effects.

Multicore Processing

WaveLab 11 supports multicore processors for Audio Montages, making its performance even faster. If you’ve got a session with many tracks, clips and plug-ins, you’ll notice a speed boost if you’re working on a fast computer. The program also can suspend processing on plug-ins when they’re idle, saving CPU resources.

Replace Audio in Video

You can now replace part or all of a video’s audio track from within WaveLab, without affecting the video quality. Once you’ve finished editing the audio, you can render the video in its original format.

Direct Podcast Uploads

WaveLab 11 adds a powerful feature to speed up and simplify your workflow when creating and editing podcasts: the ability to upload content directly to directories like Spreaker, Podbean, Soundcloud, Buzzsprout and Castos. WaveLab 11 also includes all the features of Steinberg’s dedicated podcast production software WaveLab Cast.

Simplified Ducking

In podcasts and other productions featuring spoken words, it’s often necessary to duck the music at times to let the voices come through. The new auto-ducking feature in the Audio Montage window allows you to set the voice track (or any other track) as a modulator that will automatically duck another track. Several adjustable parameters allow you to fine-tune the ducking behavior.

Extended Multitrack Support

Support for multi-channel interleaved files has been expanded, with WaveLab Pro supporting up to 22.2-channel surround layouts of WAV files, and WaveLab Elements supporting up to 5.1 surround. In both, you can freely create Channel Clusters from two or more channels and process them independently, plus you can open, save and edit multi-channel files just as you can with stereo or mono files; you can also select specific channels to open in external audio editors.

New VST-3 Plug-ins for WaveLab Elements

The Elements version of WaveLab 11 received a VST-3 plug-in infusion from Steinberg, including DeEsser, for getting rid of sibilance on vocals; Expander, for reducing the level of unwanted audio or gating it out; Mix6to2, for downmixing surround mixes to stereo; the self-explanatory Mono to Stereo; and Ping-Pong Delay for stereo delay effects.

Screenshot.
PingPong Delay enables stereo delay effects.

New VST-3 Plug-ins for WaveLab Pro

The processing options in WaveLab Pro 11 have been expanded even more, with the addition of seven VST-3 plug-ins. DeReverb allows you to remove ambience from a recording; LinPro is a dithering plug-in featuring the latest technology from MAAT; Frequency 2 is a powerful eight-band equalizer with a switchable dynamic mode on each band; Squasher offers multiband compression — both upward and downward — and features comprehensive sidechain control; Imager allows you to adjust the stereo image of a track or clip in four independent frequency bands; Quadrafuzz V2 is a versatile multiband processor that lets you choose one of five different distortion flavors for each band; and MixConvert V6 enables you to monitor a surround mix in a stereo playback environment.

Screenshot.
Squasher provides multiband upward and downward compression.

Automate Plug-In Parameters with Clip Envelopes

WaveLab Pro 11 gives users the ability to automate VST-3 plug-in parameters using clip envelopes. These are similar to volume and pan envelopes, but are used for controlling effects in an Audio Montage. They can be managed from the Automation Envelope Panel in the Inspector, where you can easily assign them or turn them on and off; you can also text-edit envelope points.

Screenshot.
Adjust effects parameters with clip envelopes.

Track Groups

WaveLab Pro users can also freely assign tracks to Track Groups for added routing and processing flexibility when working on multitrack projects. Each Group resides before the Master or Montage outputs in the signal chain and has independent gain and pan controls; in addition, it can receive its own effects processing. A Track Group Editor lets you name and assign colors to Groups and move them using drag and drop.

Screenshot.
Track Groups provide new routing and processing options.

Track Lanes

Within each track in WaveLab Pro 11, you can now create up to eight lanes in which you can host additional audio clips — a feature that greatly enhances stem creation and is also handy for layering audio for sound design. Each Lane offers independent effects and gain controls and can be muted or soloed. You can also show or hide the Lanes and convert tracks to Lanes or Lanes to tracks.

Screenshot.
Track Lanes allow you to stack clips inside a track.

SuperVision for Audio Analysis

WaveLab Pro 11 includes SuperVision, a highly flexible multi-meter plug-in with 27 different meter types, including Loudness, VU, Phase, Spectrum, Ambisonics and many more. You can open up to nine meters at a time inside SuperVision’s interface and freely configure their placement.

Screenshot.
SuperVision provides extensive metering capabilities.

On a Clear Day You Can Create Forever

You know you’ve got the gene. The DNA. The write stuff. You know this because you’ve witnessed it in yourself before, and once you have it, it doesn’t go anywhere.

But we can get mired into thinking that our creative “stuff” is displaced. Not quite writers block, or a specific song you can’t finish, but rather a temporary malaise or brain fog from, well, two years of being less connected with actual humans or the stress of worrying about when we’ll get back to performing live again. There are unlimited reasons. Life is messy.

Been there, done that. And I’ve learned a few lessons along the way. Here’s a list of things I’ve found that can help burn through the mist and allow you to start seeing clearly again.

1. Don’t give your malaise the power.

Look it in the eye and let it know who it’s dealing with. And then walk away. Do something else. Come back later and ask it if it’s changed its mind. Treat it like a game you played with a high school boyfriend/girlfriend. Tell him/her it’s over. Pretend you mean it. See what happens.

2. Wear something out of character.

Try an outfit that makes you feel like someone you’re not — an actor in someone else’s shoes. Literally. Go to the supermarket in workman’s boots, or to the gym in heels. I realize this sounds silly. But silly is good. Silly loosens us up.

3. Read a novel and try writing something from the main character’s perspective.

This can work especially well if you feel that you have nothing left to write about from your own perspective. The idea that anyone can run out of things to say is preposterous, of course, but remember, this is an exercise, not a way of life!

4. Listen to something out of the ordinary.

I suggest trying a score from an iconic musical because it can elicit all kind of unpredictable emotional responses you didn’t feel beforehand. For example, last summer I heard the LA Philharmonic perform “Somewhere” from West Side Story at the Hollywood Bowl on a beautiful night under the stars. I wept uncontrollably. My friend was concerned. I, on the other hand, was relieved. That’s what music is supposed to do. If I had to write a song on the spot that night, I could have.

5. Flip through old journals.

I have about 50 of them, dating back to when I was 12 years old. Sometimes I come upon a thought and marvel at how intuitive and concise I was back then — wise beyond my years, I like to think — only to conclude that it was because I didn’t have any excessive baggage yet and the naked truth wasn’t obfuscated by self-conscious prose or pressure to write well. Revisiting our innocence connects us with that unguarded honesty that listeners will relate to, perhaps because they’re having trouble accessing their own.

6. Bond with your instrument.

Tell it, swear even, that you’re just flirting — loosening up before a 5K run or vocalizing before a recital. Record yourself as you play (just in case something falls from the sky) and then forget about it. I’m not suggesting that something magical will fall from the sky during these practice sessions because then you’ll expect it to … and that’s exactly what you don’t want.

7. Give yourself a break.

I can tell you with complete assurance that all successful songwriters, composers, lyricists and musicians write appalling songs once in awhile — they just don’t share them with you. (For obvious reasons.) But if they’re your true friend, they should be able to admit this. (Like I am doing. ????) Because I’m your friend!

8. Go back and listen to material you’ve written before that made you proud.

Appeal to your intelligence, not to your emotions. Because you know deep down this is temporary. Time can be a frightening four-letter-word because time … well, it takes time! And patience. It’s the cure-all, however, for just about everything. Especially working through the fog. So have faith in it. Don’t stop. Don’t give up. Because on a clear day you can create forever.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

10 Best-Sounding Open World Games

For many video gamers, “open world” options are some of the most fulfilling. These titles allow players to freely explore a virtual world by using their instincts as compasses, rather than following a more stringent and traditional side-scrolling, level-oriented map. Open world games give players the ability to work towards their goals in less structured ways, deciding when and where they’d like to act.

Such an approach delivers a great sense of autonomy and self-determination, and can also provide a more satisfying sonic experience, especially when enjoyed on quality headphones, speakers and sound bars. Soundtracks and sound effects can pop up seemingly out of nowhere, making them that much more memorable and tantalizing. Here’s our list of 10 of the open world games that offer the best soundscapes.

1. THE LEGEND OF ZELDA

For those looking to relive their childhoods, hearing every song, enemy, coin acquisition and boomerang throw is crucial in this title. While this game may have originated some 35 years ago, it’s as pleasurable as ever to play (try to do so without dying even once!). Remember that little ditty when you discovered a secret staircase with a candle flame? Remember the sound of a fairy filling your hearts? It’s just not the same on mute (or when listened to on an outdated audio system). Check out the evolution of this series here.

2. TOEJAM & EARL

Here’s another classic, with one of the most beloved bass-driven soundtracks of all time. It’s funky, percussive and will stick in your memory for, well, decades! It’s particularly important to be able to clearly hear every sonic nugget in the later levels, as your protagonists — the three-legged ToeJam or the hefty Earl — attempt to dodge any number of foes on their way to collecting strewn ship pieces on their hopeful way home. Check out the trailer here.

3. HORIZON FORBIDDEN WEST

Looking for a truly cinematic experience? This game delivers. Players are exposed to ambient sounds of the jungle and other unpredictable locales, as well as key bits of dialogue that offer hints at what’s next to come. These are certainly not to be misheard or ignored! To be fully immersed, it’s important to listen to each deep breath, every mosquito buzz and bird chirp. They get your heart pumping and your fingers flying, ready for serious battle. Check out the trailer here.

4. RED DEAD REDEMPTION II

Here’s a game that allows you to hop on your metaphorical horse and explore every inch of the Wild West in the late 1800s. Around every corner, you’ll find yourself walking though sticky mud, getting into saloon fights, crashing through windows and dodging the bullets of six-shooters going off all around you. Nothing about being an outlaw is easy, of course! Check out the trailer here.

5. THE WITCHER 3: WILD HUNT

Ever wonder what it would be like to move through a world-class painting, with every intricate element coming to life? That’s exactly what happens in this imaginative game, only here those animated objects include the monsters of the land, which you, the Witcher, have to slay. As you ride your steed through the rolling hills, pay attention to the flute music from the townspeople, the songs of birds and the screeches of seemingly unstoppable foes, which include angry warriors and flying griffins — not to mention the gurgle of the water you must swim through to achieve your missions. Check out the trailer here.

6. ELDEN RING

What do spells sound like? That’s what you’ll find out when you play this elaborate game rooted in medieval aesthetics. Claps of thunder, the roar of dragons and the sickening thud of sharpened swords piercing scaled flesh come from all around as you manifest glowing blue magic arrows, galloping horses and a will to survive. Trust me, you won’t want to miss a single note or clash of steel against armor. Check out the trailer here.

7. GENSHIN IMPACT

This anime-style title takes a bit of a cutesier approach than some of the other ones mentioned in this article. Here, the protagonist worries about stomach cramps and can fly with wings that resemble a hang glider. There’s less carnage and more cartoonish fun. But don’t let that mislead you — there’s also plenty of action, from hand-to-hand combat to important conversations and item discovery. Not only does this game’s soundtrack excite, it also puts a smile on your face. Check out the trailer here.

8. ASSASSIN’S CREED VALHALLA

This title is one of several in the vaunted Assassin’s Creed franchise, and it’s also one of the best in the lot (to date, anyway). As the name suggests, the game involves mythology as much as it does a quest for truth and treasure; there’s dancing, combat, dialogue and massive hunts. But there are also spells, blizzards, sailing and swimming in cold, cold waters (so frigid you can see your breath). Transport yourself to this snow-covered adventure and immerse yourself in a world only dreamed of until now. Check out the trailer here.

9. GHOST OF TSUSHIMA

Perhaps the most realistic of all the titles listed here (and that’s saying something), this is as much an exercise in getting your heart pumping as it is a testament to the thrill of victory. Swords slash through armies, gunpowder explodes and horses whinny as blazing fire lights up the darkened sky. For those who want to hear each drop of blood splattering, this is your game! Something is always moving, changing or kicking up dust. Check out the trailer here.

10. GOD OF WAR: RAGNAROK

Like its predecessors in the God of War series, this soon-to-be-released sequel takes place in the world of Norse mythology and features battles with fearsome creatures and gods like Thor and Odin. In those dangerous moments, keeping your senses razor-sharp is imperative. That’s the basis for this video game’s soundscape: Know when your adversary is nearby; discern your enemy’s last breath in the winter chill. Without the ability to take note of each such sonic intricacy, you might as well give up, dead in the metaphorical water. Check out the trailer here.

What’s the Difference Between Baritone Horn and Euphonium?

For young people starting out on brass instruments, the baritone horn and the euphonium are two of the most popular choices. Both are sizable (read: hard to lose) and offer distinctive low-register sounds without being unwieldy like a tuba or sousaphone. Both the baritone horn and the euphonium are also relatively easy to learn to play, especially when compared to the more difficult French horn or trumpet, and are commonly found in brass ensembles, marching bands and orchestras. In this article, we’ll examine what they have in common, as well as what makes each unique.

SIMILARITIES

A horn shaped like a snake.
A serpent horn.

Both the baritone horn and the euphonium have their origins in early musical instruments such as the snake-like “serpent” horn, which was able to produce low-register notes due to its tube length.

One major similarity is that they are the same size. While each is shaped differently (see below), both instruments are made with the same nine feet of tubing; as a result, they have identical tonal ranges. And, while some varieties of brass instruments (like the four types of tubas) are pitched differently, both the baritone horn and euphonium are pitched to B♭. In addition, they are both “transposing” instruments (which means that music for each can be written in either bass or treble clefs) that have piston valves, though some rotary valve versions do exist. Generally speaking, baritone horns have three valves while euphoniums have four; however, there are three- and four-valve versions of each instrument.

In both instruments, sound is created when a player blows into a large cup mouthpiece by buzzing or vibrating the lips, with the resultant pitch determined by the combination of valves being pressed.

DIFFERENCES

One of the most significant differences between baritone horn and euphonium is the shape of their bore. The tubing of the baritone horn widens ever-so-slightly towards the bell, although the main body of the instrument essentially remains cylindrical throughout. The tubing in a baritone horn is also thinner than that of a euphonium. As a result, the baritone horn produces a brighter, more direct sound than the euphonium. That’s one reason why it is more often found in orchestral brass sections than in marching bands.

Silver color baritone horn with bell at top and mouthpiece and valves at be held vertically.
Yamaha YBH-301S baritone horn.

The euphonium, which is sometimes known as the B♭ tuba or “tenor tuba,” has tubing that is much more conical in shape. As a result, its bore becomes wider as it extends toward the bell. The euphonium’s bell is also decidedly larger than that of the baritone. This means that the sound the euphonium produces is generally fuller, rounder and more mellow than that of the baritone horn. As a result, composers tend to use euphonium for main melody or countermelody, as opposed to baritone horn, which often is called upon to play percussive parts.

A silver euphonium with the mouthpiece on the right.
Yamaha YEP-321 euphonium.

Some musicians find the euphonium more difficult to play than baritone horn due to its conical shape. While that’s debatable, it is true that a stronger lung capacity is required to produce a sturdy sound with the euphonium. The instrument is also slightly wider and heavier than the baritone horn and thus it can be a little more challenging to maneuver in a marching band situation.

OTHER VARIETIES OF EUPHONIUM

Under the euphonium umbrella are several less-common variations, including the “compensating euphonium,” which utilizes a three-plus-one valve system. This “compensating” valve uses extra tubing to achieve a lower range on the instrument.

There is also the “double-bell euphonium,” which offers players a second, smaller bell intended to sound like a trombone, likely intended for performances where trombones were not available. Over the years, however, these have become less commonplace.

And, while most euphoniums are equipped with four valves (or, less commonly, three), five-valve options do exist too, though they are also extremely rare. These offer players two additional valves off to the side of the instrument that effectively change its tube length and extend its pitch range.

How to Create Lo-Fi

If you search online for “Lo-Fi production tips” or “creating Lo-Fi tracks,” you’ll find websites touting production and arrangement approaches that vary quite a bit. As with many musical styles these days, there are many variations of Lo-Fi. And, as is pointed out in our blog article What is Lo-Fi?, Lo-Fi techniques  can be applied to any genre of music.

This article will focus on one of the more prominent ones: Lo-Fi hip-hop, also known as “ChillHop.” However, the methods described for reducing audio quality can be used in any Lo-Fi style.

ChillHop (which is referenced on YouTube as “Lo-Fi beats to study to”) is considered a form of the broader “Downtempo” category of electronic music. Accordingly, its tempos are slow — usually between 70 and 90 bpm. Chillhop music is almost always instrumental (though some pieces utilize vocal samples), and it typically has several key ingredients. Let’s look at some of the most common ones.

Ethereal Chords

Many ChillHop productions are based around a reverb-y ambient-sounding electric or acoustic piano, or a clean jazz guitar, typically playing a hypnotic progression of sustaining chords. For ultimate flexibility for editing it later, I advise that you record this as a MIDI track, as opposed to audio.

Screenshot.
Lo-Fi music is often based around a repetitive chord progression.

If you’re using guitar for this purpose, try recording an electric guitar DI and use an amp modeler such as VST Amp Rack in Steinberg Cubase, being sure to select a clean-sounding amp emulation. You can also consider using an audio loop for the piano or guitar if you find one you like.

Processed Samples

Another way producers construct Lo-Fi beats or songs is to base them around a sample from a section of a memorable song (hip-hop, R&B, jazz, etc.). They’ll process it heavily to make it fit the Lo-Fi vibe, and it will serve as the foundation of the track (the “beat”) in the same way the ethereal chords do.

Bear in mind that, if you’re sampling other peoples’ music, you have to either use material that’s in the public domain or is royalty-free (for example, the samples offered on Landr.com), or you’ll have to get clearance from the copyright owner if you intend to distribute it publicly. (Search “copyright clearance for music” on the web to find sources for getting such permissions.)

In addition to the song’s chordal or sampled “bed,” there’s also often an instrument playing a simple melody on top. If you base your track around piano chords, that melody could be part of the piano part or it could be played by a different sound altogether — the choice is yours. If the latter, you’ll probably want to go for something jazzy-sounding, such as sampled vibes, sax, clarinet or acoustic piano. You don’t often hear synthesizers used as melody instruments in ChillHop.

Down Below

The bass track in a Lo-Fi track usually consists of a basic synth or sampled bass. Compared to those used in hip-hop, ChillHop basses tend to have a little more upper-mid and high-end information, though they still often contain sine waves like hip-hop basses. You can probably find an appropriate sound in one of your DAW’s synths or samplers. In Steinberg Cubase, open Loops and Samples under the Media tab in the Right Zone, then scroll down to the Lo-Fi Dreams collection. There, you’ll find a selection of one-shot low-fi bass notes. Once you find one you like, simply create a Sampler Track and drop the sample in. Here’s a bass line created from one of Cubase’s Lo-Fi Dreams bass samples.

Of course, you’ll have to make sure that the sample plays in tune and is in the correct octave. This might involve making some adjustments in Cubase’s Sampler Control (accessed from the tab at the bottom of the Lower Zone, as shown below), such as turning on AudioWarp. You can get a pretty decent bass sound if you keep this sampled bass within about an octave either way of the root note. Of course, because this is Lo-Fi, you don’t want it to sound too good!

Screenshot.
Sampler Control in Cubase (highlighted).

Stick to It

The drum tracks in ChillHop music are usually relatively simple, and they often don’t start playing until after several intro measures of the main (unaccompanied) chordal instrument. The drum samples used are generally acoustic and tend to be dry-sounding and reminiscent of hip-hop drums in tone. Avoid super busy parts like hi-hats playing sixteenth notes.

Lo-Fi drum parts are typically looser rhythmically than in other genres, so you don’t have to quantize them precisely to the grid. One way to get a loose feel is to use MIDI drums and play the parts in from your controller. These drums can be constructed from drum loops, a sampler loaded with a kit or individual samples, or a drum instrument like Steinberg’s Groove Agent SE. You can also find quite a few snare parts that use a sidestick for a more mellow, clicky sound rather than full snare hits — something that’s popular in Lo-Fi, especially on the backbeats.

Screenshot.
You can find some great Lo-Fi drum sounds in Groove Agent SE.

What’s That Noise?

Another popular Lo-Fi technique is to layer in a sound effect such as vinyl crackle, rain, a waterfall, a forest ambience or any sustaining sound that’s predominantly in the upper-mid to high frequency range. Such a sound bed adds a location vibe to the song and also restores some of the highs to the mix that might be lost due to the various methods for degrading audio discussed in the next section. One way to accomplish this is with the Grungelizer plug-in in Cubase, which lets you add elements like crackle and noise — even air conditioner hum (in your choice of 50 or 60 Hz!) — that will play indefinitely.

View of control panel.
Add some noise to your Lo-Fi track with Grungelizer.

Crushing It

We struggle to make everything sound as good as possible for most musical styles. In Lo-Fi, the bar for what is “good” is different, and lower. The idea is to evoke the sound of tape-era fidelity, so Lo-Fi music doesn’t have the crisp and present high-end that we’re used to hearing in modern-day digital recordings. This means you’ll usually have to reduce the quality of your tracks to achieve the desired sound.

One of the best and easiest ways to do this is to use a bitcrusher plug-in, such as the one provided by Cubase (shown below). These kinds of effects reduce the bit depth; that is, the digital resolution of the sound you’re processing. You can think of a bitcrusher as a technology time machine that lets you dial back your audio to the bad old days of 12-bit or 8-bit sampling. If you make the settings too extreme on a bitcrusher, you’ll hear audible distortion, and the transients (particularly those on the drums) will get softer and less powerful, so you should be subtle with this effect.

View of control panel.
Reduce bit depth with a bitcrusher plug-in.

To demonstrate, let’s start by listening to a “clean” drum track created using sounds from Groove Agent SE:

Here’s that same track with the Steinberg bitcrusher plug-in applied, set to 8-bit, with the Sample Divider knob (which sets the amount of effect) on 6:

Narrowing the Range

Another way to reduce a track’s fidelity is with equalization and filters. You can easily do this by opening an EQ plug-in and using its high-cut (“low-pass”) filter. For Lo-Fi, try setting it to roll off everything above 2 or 4 kHz.

You’ll have more control if you apply equalization and filtering to individual tracks rather than the full mix, although you could do it that way too, if the material lends itself to such major surgery. Experiment with the frequency settings and the steepness of the filter slope until you find a setting that evokes low fidelity without sounding just plain bad.

The Magneto II plug-in included with Cubase lets you target a frequency range for its tape saturation effect, and it has a Solo button for auditioning purposes. Normally, you’d check your setting in Solo and then turn it off. But if you leave it on, you’ll get significantly reduced fidelity at the plug-in’s output, in addition to tape saturation — a hack that’s perfect for Lo-Fi.

Screenshot.
Magneto II with the Solo button (top right) on.

To demonstrate how this works, start by listening to this rhythm guitar playing a jazz chord progression. It was recorded direct, with Cubase’s VST Amp Rack providing a clean amp sound.

Here’s that same track run through Magneto II with the solo button in and the highs set to 2.2 kHz, the lows set to 140 Hz.

Up, Down and Around

Another hallmark of bad fidelity is warbly pitch, such as that produced by the “wow and flutter” introduced by a warped vinyl record or a cheap or poorly maintained tape machine. You can simulate that with a chorus effect. Keep the speed low and the width (“depth”) pretty high. Adjust until you hear slow warbling without the track sounding egregiously out of tune.

Here’s another tip: Try using a pitch correction plug-in to destabilize the pitch on a chordal or melody instrument. In Cubase, insert Pitch Correct on the track and set it for extremely light correction. This will not only introduce pitch modulation but also create digital artifacts that dirty up the sound in a good way for Lo-Fi.

Screenshot.
Use a pitch correction plug-in to add warble and artifacts to an instrument.

To demonstrate, here’s an electric piano playing a ChillHop part:

Now, here it is with Steinberg’s Pitch Correct plug-in inserted as well as the Frequency equalizer plug-in. The former has a very light setting and the latter has a low-cut filter set at 1.31 kHz, rolling off everything above it.

Copy Then Go

One last piece of advice: If you want to produce tracks that will attract fans of Lo-Fi, start by trying to emulate the sound and vibe of whatever Lo-Fi subgenre you’re into. Once you get the hang of it, nothing is stopping you from injecting your own creative variations into the music.

 

Producing Lo-Fi music? Be sure to check out the free Steinberg LoFi Piano VST instrument.

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

Observing Score Details

Students often focus on accuracy of pitches and rhythms because they want their playing to sound correct, and achieving this type of precision can provide them with a sense of success.

However, a successful performance does not begin and end with correct pitches and rhythms. Students must go beyond the initial stages of learning and incorporate other score indications made by the composer in order to bring a piece to life. Some of the most common interpretational details that students overlook are dynamics, pedaling, articulation, tempo markings and tempo changes. Without these aspects of musical understanding, a performance can lack character and expression.

It is also important to note that there are some score details related to accuracy of pitches and rhythm that students can overlook. The most common elements are accidentals and rests. It is crucial that these errors are prevented from the beginning stages of learning a piece as they can be difficult to correct when polishing repertoire for a performance.

In this article, we will look at some ways to help students observe all score indications so that they can create successful and artistic performances of repertoire that are true to the composers’ intentions.

Don’t Wait Until the Final Stages of Learning

overhead shot man playing piano pexelsSometimes we can get in a rut of making sure all pitches and rhythms are correct before adding the expressive layers of dynamics, articulation and other interpretative devices. However, if we wait until the final stages of learning, it can be too late. By this time, our students’ habits for a particular piece are already ingrained in their minds and muscle memory, and they may not be able to make the changes consistently and successfully to their playing.

Therefore, I often like to include some of these details in the early stages of learning. In essence, it involves incorporating the details into the student’s original conception of the piece early on rather than adding them in (sometimes weeks) later. When students are first learning a piece, I have them sing the melody line before they actually play it. I find this early stage an excellent opportunity to incorporate articulation and possibly even some rudimentary dynamic levels. That way, when they take it to the piano, they are already thinking of the melody line with the appropriate articulation and dynamic variation, and it does not have to be added during a later lesson. Watch this type of sequencing in this video.

Don’t Do Too Much at Once

While it is important not to wait until the last minute to add interpretational aspects of a performance, it can also be difficult for students to absorb everything in the early stages of learning. It is crucial for teachers to plan out when it is most appropriate to introduce certain musical characteristics of the piece and to sequence these elements accordingly. For example, if an elementary-level student has not used the damper pedal in their playing a lot, you may want to have them focus on developing dynamic contrast in their first weeks of learning a piece before adding the use of the pedal. Another example is if a piece has a tricky rhythm and a lot of accidentals, you will want to ensure that those fundamentals are secure before moving on to other musical aspects of the piece.

Don’t Rely on Repetition

Repetition can be a great way to help a student establish a change in their playing or learn something new, but it is not the only way. Mindless repetition can be boring. Without being intentional about what must be changed or fixed, it can be a waste of time.

annotating score pexelsPrior to asking students to “drill” a passage a certain number of times, make sure they can play it accurately and independently. A helpful way to make sure this happens is by assisting them with mental study. Create a copy of their score and then have them use colored pencils, markers or digital ink to annotate the music and highlight certain score details that they may easily forget. By having the students write in the scores themselves, they are more likely to remember those specific musical markings. By using different colors, there is a higher chance they will accurately visualize the score without having the physical book in front of them.

For things like tempo changes, you may want to try singing and conducting with the student away from the piano. This will help them to internalize the change of speed and how it can be musically incorporated into their performance.

We can help students be thoughtful and observant musicians by paying close attention to musical scores. This will help them learn to capture the character and mood of pieces as well as adhere to the intentions of the composer. By sequencing our introduction of these musical elements and finding creative ways to in

5 Student-Led Recruitment Strategies That Work!

It takes an all-inclusive and eclectic approach to recruit and retain students from a wide range of backgrounds and experiences. I believe that it starts with building authentic relationships and establishing trust.

Before my work in higher education, I was a middle school and high school band director in Title I schools for 10 years. Early in my career, I realized that maintaining high enrollment in my classes was essential to program sustainability. In an effort to increase membership and empower my students to take more ownership of the program, I worked closely with each of our community stakeholders — students, parents, colleagues, administration and community partners — to build sustainable recruitment and retention systems. Not only did this make recruitment and retention more rewarding, but it also made it fun!

Here are what I believe to be the five essential strategies for effectively recruiting and retaining student musicians. While these tips are easily adaptable to secondary school ensemble settings, I have continued to use many of these strategies as a college professor and believe that they are just as transferable to higher education music programs.

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Energize your creativity as you build your music program!

1. Student Empowerment

It has been my experience that when I give my students more of a voice in all aspects of the program, recruitment and retention almost take care of themselves. In every setting I have taught, I have created student committees for music selection, clerical tasks, halftime show planning, dance routine/choreography, arranging music, trips, fundraising, recruitment, social media and more.

Each year, I would administer an end-of-year survey to my students to gather their feedback, and they would consistently share how much they enjoyed being a part of the planning and organizing phases of the program. Allowing my students to compose their own pieces and conduct their compositions at concerts, write arrangements and chart drills for halftime shows, create visuals and choreography for competitions and propose pieces to perform for performance assessment, made them feel  like they had true ownership in the program.

2. Buddy System

two happy female students LIaLQ2SIQuk unsplash

In my programs, it was understood that “no member would be left behind.” As soon as potential members expressed interest and filled out a recruitment form, we would pair those students with a current band member who they would get to know, ask questions and build a bond.

Over time, I found that this process was most effective when a student was paired with a buddy who shared common interests. So, as a part of our recruitment form, we added a few questions like “what do you like to do in your free time” and “what is your favorite genre of music” so that we could help new members transition more smoothly into the program through the buddy system.  

3. Community-Building Activities

One of the most important factors to keeping students satisfied with the program was building a sense of community. I found that my students needed to form bonds not only through rehearsals and performances, but also through the non-music activities we provided, such as Rubik’s cube clubs and video game tournaments to weekend cookouts, retreats and ice cream socials.

four band members

It was important for our students to feel welcomed and valued at all times. We even encouraged them to bring friends and siblings outside of the program to events. This became another great recruitment opportunity, and once these friends and siblings saw how much fun we had, they were eager to sign up, too!

4. Peer-to-Peer Recruitment

A key factor to recruitment and retention success involves making students full participants in recruitment efforts. We would often go to perform and recruit at our feeder schools. During those visits, not only would I bring a group of students to perform, I would also make time for my students to talk to potential members. We would do meet and greets, Q&A sessions and even instrument demonstrations!

At our yearly cluster concert, I would have students read program notes for the pieces we were playing and, at various points of the program, have a few students briefly share their experiences in the music program. My seniors especially looked forward to the opportunity to reflect on what the program meant to them.

5. Social Media Collaboration

Though I consider myself a digital native, it is difficult for me to stay current on the latest trends in social media. And, by the time I learned about the latest trend, my students and their peers have already moved on to the next thing. I believe that we must have our students involved in how we craft and disseminate news, information and events via social media (with oversight, of course). This allows for our reach to grow and for our program to have a broader impact in our community. Social media can also serve as an excellent recruitment tool and increase the “cool factor” even more.

A Win-Win Situation

It is essential to empower students to lead the charge in our recruitment efforts and make them the face of the program. In many ways, our students are brand ambassadors and become the most critical point of contact for new members. The peer-to-peer interactions we foster can provide numerous benefits to all. If we intentionally and consistently engage our students in all aspects of the program, I am confident that it will lead to new opportunities for student growth and success.

History of the Synthesizer, Part 1

The development of the synthesizer has spanned many decades, with roots that date back to the early 20th century. In this article we’re going to trace that path from its origins to the dawn of the digital era age in the 1970s (Part 2 will cover the 1980s to the present day), but first let’s agree on what a synthesizer is.

There are two main criteria to defining a musical instrument as a synthesizer, versus other types of keyboards. They are:

1. It must produce its basic sound via electronic or digital means. So electromechanical devices that produce their sound mechanically or acoustically and are then amplified (such as organs or electric pianos) do not count.

2. It must give the user significant control in shaping or modifying the sound being produced, beyond basic EQ or the addition of effects.

With those assumptions in place, let’s go forward into the past!

Early Precedents

Back in 1915 an instrument called the Audion Piano marked the first time vacuum tubes were used to create sound. That technology would power most of the electronic musical instruments for the following 50 years, until the emergence of transistor technology. Other tube-powered instruments included the Theremin (1924), the ondes Martinot (1928) and the Trautonium (1930). Also in 1930, an instrument called the Coupleux-Givelet Organ was the first keyboard to give the user the ability to add and subtract harmonics from the sound — a precursor to the synthesizer filter.

Vintage image of man in suit using the Audion Piano. which look like several rows of dials above a small piano keyboard.
The Audion Piano.

A couple of instruments developed by German engineer Harald Bode established design principles that would become the foundation of the synthesizer as we know it today. His Warbo Formant Organ (1937) included switches for filter envelope shapes and a rudimentary method of providing preset voicings. Much later, his Sound Processor (1960) defined the concept of using separate sound producing and modifying modules to create tones.

Vintage organ synthesizer.
Harald Bode’s Warbo Formant Organ.

The vacuum-tube RCA Music Synthesizer, unveiled in 1955, was a joint experiment in sound production and manipulation between Princeton University and Columbia University … and it was also the first instrument to call itself a “synthesizer.” Looking like an analog computer with no musical keyboard, the notes to be played, along with their tonal characteristics, were entered using punched paper tapes that were fed into the device. Upon playback, the user could further control aspects of pitch, octave, envelope, timbre and volume using analog switches.

With these precedents in design and function established, the world was ready for the modern synthesizer.

The Birth of Analog Synthesis and Modular Synthesizers

In 1964, electrical engineer and music aficionado Robert Moog presented a paper titled “Voltage-Controlled Electronic Music Modules” at the Audio Engineering Society (AES) convention in New York. This landmark document built on the work of Bode but described the concept of interconnecting individual audio generating and sound processing modules with control-voltage (CV) technology rather than vacuum tubes. Moog was invited to show his prototype components at the convention, which received a very positive reaction from attendees. In 1967 he began to produce the Moog Modular Synthesizer, which integrated multiple CV components (“modules”) together, connected by short cables called “patch cords” that could be plugged in and out as the player desired. The instrument was embraced not only by the avant-garde electronic musicians of the time, but by many pop groups such as The Beatles, the Monkees and others. When, in 1968, composer Wendy Carlos featured the instrument on her hit album Switched-On Bach, the world accepted that Moog’s invention could be used for highly musical and expressive performances. Prog-rock keyboardist Keith Emerson would later tour the globe for decades with his massive custom modular Moog system. Moog’s designs set a number of standards for the synth industry, such as 1 volt per octave CV control, and pulse triggering signals for connecting and synchronizing multiple components and modules.

At the same time, on the West Coast, Don Buchla was also experimenting with these concepts, but taking a different approach, foregoing a keyboard altogether and focusing instead on unique timbral and gestural control. His instruments (the first being the Buchla Series 100, or Buchla Box) were nowhere near as commercially successful as Moog’s, but were nonetheless quite innovative and would come to be used by cutting-edge composers like Terry Riley and Steve Reich.

In the UK, a developer named Peter Zinovieff had founded a small facility called Electronic Music Studios (EMS), where he created a complex music system involving multiple mini-computers and some analog gear, along with custom software. In 1971, EMS released a miniaturized version called the EMS VCS3. This small modular synth was quickly adopted by many of the top British performers of the day, including Pink Floyd, Brian Eno, Robert Fripp and The Who.

Back in the U.S., a company called ARP (named for designer Alan R. Pearlman) debuted a large voltage-controlled monophonic modular synth called the ARP 2500 in 1970. Similar to the EMS, it used a matrix system for interconnecting modules, although it employed sliding switches instead of the pins used on the VCS3. The ARP 2600, a more portable (and only semi-modular) synth that combined patch cord interconnections with sliders controlling many hard-wired choices, followed in 1971. The 2600 received widespread use by many artists of the era, including Stevie Wonder, Edgar Winter and Pete Townsend of The Who.

Synthesizers for the Performing Artist

In 1970, the RA Moog Company (later Moog Music) unveiled a watershed instrument in the history of synthesizers: the Minimoog. An internally pre-wired synth (it needed neither patch cords nor a matrix system for interconnections), the Minimoog was aimed squarely at performing musicians. It introduced two real-time controllers that have since become standard on synthesizers everywhere: the pitch bend wheel and the modulation wheel. And while it had a very basic voice architecture with limited modulation capabilities, the three-oscillator design combined with 24 dB per octave filters produced a characteristically rich sound.

Numerous performance synthesizers followed. ARP released the programmable Odyssey and the preset Pro-Soloist in 1972. The Odyssey provided a sonic alternative to the Minimoog and was used by Herbie Hancock, Jon Lord (Deep Purple), George Duke and others, while the preset Pro-Soloist found favor with artists such as Tony Banks (Genesis), Billy Preston and Tangerine Dream. At around the same time, two Japanese companies entered the market, with instruments akin to the Pro-Soloist: the Korg miniKorg and the Roland SH-1000, each with its own unique sound albeit limited programming capabilities, but with easy-to-access modulation effects and presets that made them appealing for live performance.

In 1974, American engineer Tom Oberheim founded Oberheim Electronics and unveiled the SEM (short for “synthesizer expansion module”), which had a simple voice architecture but a characteristic warm sound, along with a highly flexible 12 dB per octave multi-mode filter. Multiple SEMs were later coupled with a keyboard and a sequencer to create the TVS-1 (Two Voice) and FVS-1 (Four Voice) synths.

Yamaha Enters the Arena

That same year, piano and organ giant Yamaha entered the arena with a (mostly) preset synth called the SY-1. It offered several unique features such as Attack Bend, which manipulated both the pitch and filter envelopes to produce a slight pitch and timbral change when keys were pressed, along with a variety of preset envelope shapes. But the most innovative feature for the time was its keyboard, which provided both velocity and after-touch sensitivity for increased expressivity.

Vintage Yamaha SY 1 synthesizer keyboard.
Yamaha SY-1.

This was followed in 1975 by the SY-2, which added some features and came with a flight case and removable legs to make it transportable and easy to set up.

At around the same time, Yamaha had been working on a behemoth electronic organ called the GX-1 “Dream Machine.” Looking back today, it’s clear that the GX-1 was actually a synthesizer, and it likely was the first true polyphonic synth developed. The instrument has become legendary, and was used by artists such as Keith Emerson, John Paul Jones of Led Zeppelin, Stevie Wonder and ABBA’s Benny Andersson.

An all in one synthesizer with a bench.
Yamaha GX-1 “Dream Machine.”

In 1977, Yamaha created one of the all-time great analog synths, the CS-80. It actually had two layers of 8-note polyphony, unheard of for its time. Along with velocity sensitivity, the CS-80 provided individual pressure response per key, another innovation. A long ribbon strip above the keys enabled the user to add all sorts of modulation and expression. And, despite the fact that it was produced before the age of digital patch storage (see below), it came equipped with four analog memory locations, each utilizing mini-sliders that mimicked the layout of the main controls on the top panel. The CS-80 quickly became a favorite of many top musicians of the era, including Eddie Jobson (UK), Steve Porcaro (Toto) and composer Vangelis, who said of the instrument, “It’s the most important synthesizer in my career — and for me the best analog synthesizer design there has ever been.”

Yamaha vintage synthesizer.
Yamaha CS-80.

The Dawn of the Digital Age

In 1978 a new American company called Sequential Circuits released a break-through instrument, the five-note polyphonic Prophet 5, which was the first “hybrid” synth, combining analog sound production with digital control in the form of preset memories. While not as complex as the CS-80, it hit a price/performance sweet spot and became a huge success. At around the same time Moog unveiled their fully polyphonic Polymoog, and other synths with memory storage soon followed, including the Oberheim OB-X and the Roland Jupiter-4.

At the end of the ‘70s several new instruments would point the way to future trends in synthesis. A company called New England Digital released the Synclavier I, which utilized FM (Frequency Modulation) synthesis for the first time, followed by the Synclavier 2, which incorporated a 32-track sequencer. A German company called PPG debuted their Wave Computer 360, the first in a series of Wave instruments and the first commercially released synth to use wavetable technology. In 1979 an Australian manufacturer released the Fairlight CMI (Computer Music Instrument), which heralded in the use of sampling technology — digital recordings of instruments, voices and other sounds.

Although the primitive digital-to-analog converters (DACs) of the era limited the sound quality of these early synths, one thing was clear: Digital was here to stay.

 

Ready to learn more? Join us next month for Part 2 of this series, which will cover the development of synthesizers in the 1980s and beyond.

The Honor Band Experience

One of the highlights of a middle school or high school musician’s year is being selected for and performing with an honor band or orchestra.

It’s also a highlight for directors. Over the last 10 years or so, I have had the pleasure of conducting honor bands from local school districts and our regional music educators association. I even conducted one virtually over Zoom! These rehearsals and performances are always special for me, and while each ensemble is unique, they all carry the responsibility of providing the best experience for the students.  As a director who has contributed students to honor groups, I always appreciate it when rehearsals are organized and rewarding for my students (and a well-polished final performance is always great, too!)

What is the honor band experience like for a young musician? It elevates the student’s performance level and musical knowledge, and it increases their interest in making music.

When looking at the honor band experience, consider the contributions of these three entities: 1) the sponsoring district or association and its directors, 2) the participating students and 3) the conductor. Having a specific expectation for each of these will help to establish a meaningful and well-run honor band experience.

For this article, “honor band” is defined as a select ensemble from a district or region where the students have been chosen by audition or selected by their band directors. It should be noted that there are often two distinct types of honor bands — one where the best students are selected, no matter where they’re from, and the other where each participating school is evenly represented. Both are valid, but the composition of each may affect the literature choices and tone of rehearsals.

honor band Wv88h0iXc8 unsplashThe Sponsoring Organization

The guest conductor for an honor group is usually chosen from candidates submitted by district directors or the governing board of a host association. The sponsoring entity (school district, state or local music educators association, etc.) should be responsible for setting the rehearsal schedule — dates, times and location — once it has confirmed the conductor’s availability. The sponsor is responsible for securing the venue and all necessary equipment (and venue staff, if required) for the performance.

The sponsor auditions or selects participants and should communicate with the director on the ability level of the students. The more detailed this information, the better the conductor can tailor the experience to meet the students’ needs. The sponsor also determines the instrumentation of the ensemble, which may affect the literature selection. Oftentimes (but not always), the sponsor selects some or all of the performance literature, or at least makes some suggestions. In some situations, this is left entirely up to the guest conductor. Once music is selected, the sponsor usually provides the conductor with scores.

One of the added bonuses of sponsoring an honor band is that the directors have the opportunity to watch the conductor at work! There is usually some representation of directors at honor band rehearsals, and it’s even more helpful if they serve as section coaches, helping to rehearse a specific section for part or all of a rehearsal. A percussion manager is vital to assure that parts are properly assigned and the necessary equipment is readily available. It has always been very rewarding for me to have the opportunity to work with students at this level as a section coach.

Another highlight for directors is having an opportunity to socialize (often over a meal or beverages) with the guest conductor after the performance.

honor band overhead 4TNd3hsW3PM unsplash

The Performers

The performers are expected to be prepared for audition (or recommendation), and they must show up with their instrument, pencil and music (if provided beforehand). It is very helpful if the audition includes an excerpt from the concert program, as this helps students to be more prepared ahead of time. Students should receive their acceptance within a reasonable amount of time, usually one to two weeks following auditions. It’s essential to be clear on your expectations for the students during rehearsal — that they be attentive, engaged, courteous and on time. Prior to accepting their spot in an honor group, the students (and their parents) must be able to commit to all rehearsal and performance dates, as well as the required practice time outside of rehearsals.

The students’ honor band experience should be different from their daily rehearsals at school. They will be surrounded by equally talented, hard-working musicians, and they should experience accelerated ensemble musical growth. For some, it may be the largest or most complete ensemble they have yet performed with. A successful honor band experience should send the students back to their own schools with new musical ideas, techniques or expectations for excellence.

The Conductor

The conductor determines the tone and success of the ensemble.

honor band conductor pexels 2102568

It is helpful for the conductor to be involved in the literature selection. Often, conductors have some tried-and-true selections or new works that they are quite familiar with that will work well for the ensemble. It is often helpful to have more pieces selected than what is actually intended for the performance. I usually recommend having one slightly easier and one more challenging piece in the folder. Once literature has been selected, the conductor is responsible for score study and being adequately prepared to rehearse each piece.

The efficient use of rehearsal time is a key to a successful program! Honor group rehearsal schedules can vary greatly, from a one-day rehearsal and performance to four rehearsal days plus a performance date. The conductor must be aware of the timeline and plan appropriately. A sample rehearsal plan for a three-day honor group might go as follows:

    • Day 1 — Get to know the ensemble and let them adjust to the conductor. This usually is a part of the warm-up process. Utilize a tutti section of one of the mid-level pieces to establish the ensemble blend and balance. Play through each piece and solidify rhythmic concepts, tempo changes, percussion assignments, and have the students mark significant musical elements.
    • Day 2 — This is where the real work usually happens. It is the last chance to find the most challenging moments of each piece and carefully work through them. It is a time for adjusting balance and intonation issues, and solidifying pulse in all pieces.
    • Day 3 — This is the final preparation for the concert. It is a time for solidifying any tempo changes or critical moments that have not yet come together. Discuss concert etiquette. Always include a full run-through of all selections.

During every rehearsal, it is expected that the conductor will be personable and utilize humor and storytelling as they share his or her knowledge of musical literature and the composers, engaging students in conversations about why the music was written the way it has been.  Throughout every meeting, the conductor is expected, of course, to exhibit exemplary musical and pedagogical knowledge.

The concert should be a culminating event that is both a destination and celebration of the musical journey preceding it. Some conductors may wish to address the audience at some point in the performance, but it is always helpful to have an emcee present to welcome the audience, make initial introductions and perhaps read program information between selections.

It is customary for the conductor to thank the audience, the directors, administrators and students for their part in making the event come together, and it is always appreciated if they also make a point of telling the parents how vital and important participation in musical ensembles can be to the students’ education!

With careful planning and support, appropriate repertoire, a prepared and engaging conductor and eager students, the honor band experience can be a great experience for the local ensembles and the directors, as well as the students!

Creating Sonic Ambiances in Office Spaces

Vinyl has enjoyed a remarkable resurgence in recent years as people reconnect with albums old and new. It’s a refreshing change for audio enthusiasts — one that has inspired a fun, engaging mode of home entertainment.

But why save all that enjoyment for weekends and after-hours? Why not also spin vinyl at the office, where many people spend the majority of their time?

These were the thoughts of Yamaha Content Marketing Specialist Ted Goslin when he recently decided to install a MusicCast VINYL 500 Wi-Fi Turntable at the company’s corporate headquarters in Buena Park, California and link it to MusicCast wireless speakers positioned throughout offices, conference rooms, and other common areas in the building.

A turntable in an office.
MusicCast VINYL 500 turntable at the Yamaha office.

He had, he readily admits, some trepidation. How would his co-workers react to being surrounded by music? How would it impact their morale, and how would it influence their creativity? Would music make a real difference to productivity and efficiency, or would it fall on deaf ears?

Connecting, Sharing and Reminiscing

For the first few days, Ted kept the turntable spinning with his own picks. “I tried a variety of different albums to see what resonated,” he says.

Then something remarkable happened. People started talking. They began connecting, sharing and reminiscing. “The walls of the office figuratively came down,” Goslin says. “That turntable inspired some great conversation and a real sense of community. After months of isolation and working remotely, it helped bring our staff back together and generated a rapport that we all had come to miss so much.” And because it is based on Yamaha wireless multi-room MusicCast technology, the installation paved the way for even more engagement, allowing employees to selectively stream music to speakers via their own mobile devices and operate the system via voice commands.

What’s Old is What is New

Listening to music while working is nothing new. A Pandora survey of over a thousand employees in various industries found that roughly 42% listened to music throughout the entire workday, with nearly four out of five believing that it helped them get more done. This likely hasn’t changed. But what has changed is how music is delivered and consumed. Just as music playback has shifted from physical media to digital streaming, music listening has evolved from a solitary activity enjoyed by donning earbuds or headphones to a communal sensory experience that can be broadcast throughout an entire home or office via an audio distribution system similar to the MusicCast setup at Yamaha headquarters. And as people return from remote work-at-home to shared in-person offices, music has become the ultimate ice-breaker.

The positive effect this has had on Yamaha employees may be purely anecdotal, but it aligns with all the scientific data about music’s impact on office employees. A landmark study published in 1972 was one of the first to suggest a direct correlation between music and productivity. It showed that factory workers performed at a higher level when upbeat, happy tunes were played in the background.

But it’s not just productivity that improves. Background music also reduces stress and anxiety, elevates mood, and establishes a healthier, more enjoyable work environment. “We definitely noticed that the day went by faster and that we had more fun at work when music was playing,” Goslin says. “It also seemed to spark creativity and improve concentration.”

Taking it to the Next Level

But getting the most out of music at the office involves more than simply hitting play and walking away. The volume, cadence and style of music influence its overall impact, as does when and where it’s played. Goslin discovered this first-hand. “People seemed to work better when listening to classical music rather than songs with heavy vocals, especially first thing in the morning,” he says. “Livelier music and movie soundtracks, meanwhile, seemed to be a good pick-me-up in the afternoons.”

Although Goslin hasn’t yet gone so far as to curate and automate the delivery of custom playlists to keep pace with the mood of the office, it’s a step some companies are starting to take. They, like Yamaha, recognize that tailoring music around work activities and the time of day yields better results than distributing random songs at the same volume level to every huddle space, conference room and cubicle. An intelligent, programmable audio system goes several steps further, altering what, when, where, and how the music plays to evoke the ideal ambiance for better health and wellness, productivity and efficiency, collaboration and communication, along with job satisfaction and retainment.

An office’s “sonic signature” can take many forms. While the employees of one company might like to start the day with a compilation of quiet, relaxing sounds, those at another place of business might work better when the tunes are lively and energetic. The music needs to align not only with the preferences of employees, but with the design of the office as well. Here’s where a multi-zone audio system like MusicCast can help. It allows different streams of music set at different volume levels to travel simultaneously to different areas, so, while collaborative spaces can be filled with instrumental background music, loudspeakers in the lobby can simultaneously broadcast a series of warm, inviting tunes; high-traffic areas and break rooms, meanwhile, can resonate to the sounds of upbeat, invigorating pop songs.

Then there are individual employee offices. Being able to synchronize their own playlists with the system allows the occupants to play what they want, when they want it, on their own speakers. Some systems are so smart, they can kick-start the perfect piece of music automatically as employees enter a room, then turn it off when the room empties. This capability, along with pre-scheduled and zoned delivery, affords a slick, fresh, modern approach to office audio that seamlessly establishes the right mood, ambiance, and energy.

Achieving this level of audio sophistication doesn’t happen via Wi-Fi connectivity alone. There are a number of acoustical parameters and technological details that need to be explored and mastered for optimal performance. Professional AV integrators possess the necessary specialized knowledge and have the skills to turn planning into reality, making them a key part of the design, programming and installation process. These professionals can recommend the right system, configure and install it properly, and transform ordinary office spaces into engaging and inspiring work environments.

So what are you waiting for? If you’re looking to improve productivity in your workspace, try adding some music to your day.

 

Click here for some recommended Spotify playlists to listen to while you work.

Layering Digital Keyboard Sounds

One of the great things about electronic keyboards is that you can play a wider variety of sounds than any acoustic keyboard (such as a piano) can produce, and that includes the ability to layer sounds together. Let’s explore some of the most popular blends.

Acoustic Piano With Strings

The most common addition to the sound of an acoustic piano is strings. There are a few different types of string sounds that are used; the most common is a smooth string section that doesn’t have an aggressive attack, usually named something like “Legato Strings.” The blend of the two will undoubtedly sound very familiar to you:

If you are going to be playing chords in a rhythmic fashion, you might want to opt for a string sound with a stronger (i.e., faster) and more pronounced attack; these are usually called “Marcato Strings.”

For a smooth and romantic sound, layer a softer string sound that has a slower attack and a longer release. This type of sound is generally called a “pad” because it’s especially effective when playing long sustained chords. There are actually many synth sounds that are called pads, but for the purposes of this discussion the best choice(s) in your keyboard may be called “Analog Strings” or “Pad Strings.”

Acoustic Piano with Other Sounds

Vocal sounds blend nicely with acoustic piano. Whether it is full choir sounds, pop vocals or vocal-like pads, these types of blends are fun to play and are often inspiring too.

You can also try combining acoustic piano and electric piano sounds. Choose the more traditional “tine” electric piano sound to emulate the type of blend that artists such as Bob James and Jeff Lorber favor, like this:

Or go with the FM electric piano sound invented by Yamaha, which will act like a time machine that places you firmly back in the ’80s, as exemplified by the sound of many of the hit pop ballads of the era.

It can also be very effective to blend together acoustic piano and pipe organ, especially if you play worship and praise music. If your keyboard can layer more than two sounds, consider adding some strings, brass or choir as well.

If you play gospel music, try layering piano with a tonewheel organ sound:

For powerful rock and pop music, you can’t go wrong with a blend of acoustic piano with the sound of a brass section or “sawtooth”-type synth:

Playing cool jazz or lounge music? Try layering vibes on top of your piano:

Many synth pad sounds also blend wonderfully with acoustic piano, especially when they are kept low in volume.

Electric Piano Plus

Like acoustic piano, electric piano goes well with a lot of sounds — strings and vocals, for example:

Many synth pads also work nicely with electric piano:

Some musicians like to blend mallet sounds with electric piano (especially FM piano) to accentuate the attack characteristic even more. So try marimba and/or xylophone, mixing in their level to taste.

Orchestral Blends

When you are playing orchestral music, be it classical or Broadway/theater music, layering allows you to imitate many of the most commonly used blends, such as:

Strings with Brass

Strings with Voices

Strings with Marimba/Xylophone

Strings with Bells

Strings with Woodwinds

Brass with Voices

Jazz and Big Band Blends

The most common blend used in these genres is a brass section with a sax section:

If your keyboard has a sound called “Scat Voices” or something similar, it will probably work nicely with brass or woodwind sections:

Single Note Melody Blends

If you’re playing as part of a duo or small ensemble in church and many other situations, you may be called on to just play a single-note melodic part. There are so many sounds that combine nicely when playing these types of passages. Here are just a few suggestions:

Piano and Flute

Piano and Trumpet/Muted Trumpet

Flute and Marimba/Xylophone

Muted Trumpet and Vibes

Oboe and Violin

Soprano Sax and Voices

Try Some Simple Edits

Most keyboards allow you to edit your layered sounds to some degree. They’ll almost always allow you to adjust the volume of each of the layered sounds, plus perhaps their tuning (meaning that they don’t have to necessarily be played in unison) and timbral quality. Sometimes you’ll be able to adjust the attack and/or release of the sound as well. Changing the attack allows it to “speak” right away or more slowly, and changing the release causes it to either stop cleanly when you lift your fingers from the keys, or ring out afterwards.

So you can take a Marcato String sound and, by slowing down the attack a little, you can make it more legato, or you can turn Legato Strings into a pad-type sound by making it less bright and slowing down both the attack and release. A little experimentation here is very much in order — depending upon the particular digital keyboard you are using, you might be pleasantly surprised at how much you can alter the tonality of layered sounds, giving them even greater utility.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515, often in conjunction with sounds from Steinberg Cubase.

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Teach Student Leaders to Teach

I highly recommend engaging and empowering your student leaders to be instructors for music, marching  or even as peer tutors for other academic subjects. When your student leaders begin to take more ownership of your program, the overall culture and morale will improve.

The Value of the Student Leader as a Teacher

The first step in empowering student leaders is to recognize their value. They want to serve their peers and make a difference.

I know this firsthand because I was a drum major of the South Brunswick (New Jersey) High School band in 2002 and 2003, and then a drum major for the Crossmen Drum Corps from 2005 to 2007. My instructors regularly spoke about the importance of servant leadership and working hard to manage logistical aspects for our organizations.

two female clarinet studentsWhen we opened Claudia Taylor Johnson High School (CTJ) in 2008, one of our band directors, Mr. Manuel Maldonado, regularly discussed the role of student leaders at his prior campus, Cedar Park High School (in the Leander Independent School District). He explained that there were many different tasks that student leaders managed. Maldonado, who also instructs student leadership workshops for SASI, one of the most popular companies for student leadership in the country, is a master at motivating students and managing logistics. He created a structure at CTJ that we still utilize today.

CTJ student leaders set up rehearsals, clean the band hall, manage on-campus events, conduct music pass-offs, run sectionals, develop bonding experiences for their peers, and even help with academic tutoring. Maldonado is a firm believer that the more invested students are in managing the program’s day-to-day operations off the field, the more it would improve their buy-in when it came time for rehearsals and performances. And he was right!

Over the past 14 years, we have turned over many aspects of managing CTJ’s band program to our student leaders, and it has had a profound impact on so many levels. For schools with a single director, utilizing student leaders as instructors could provide the director with an “army” of junior teachers to enhance the overall program.

Score with SCORE (Student Care of Resources and Equipment)

While student teaching at Ronald Reagan High School, which is in the same district as CTJ, I observed many ways that student leaders helped run logistical aspects of the program and mentor and teach students. Reagan utilized a system with section leaders and line leaders. These leaders would take their smaller group from the basics block and spend 10 to 15 minutes of rehearsal working on visual and musical assignments. These included more straightforward exercises like taking a single step, posture or horn moves, as well as musical assignments like a few measures of the show that the section was struggling with. I was so impressed with the Reagan student leaders’ intensity, professionalism and detail.

CTJ band winds ensemble wearing masksReagan also had a logistical team called SCORE, which stood for Student Care of Resources and Equipment. This team included 10 to 15 students who were dedicated to keeping the band hall clean, setting up for rehearsals and managing events. Line leaders and section leaders were often members of SCORE as well. The Reagan students were so motivated to serve the program, and because they had a voice in the process, they took ownership of all tasks, big and small.

This kind of dedication is not unheard of. In many schools in Japan, students maintain their classrooms, serve lunch to their peers and even clean the toilets. These students focus not only on academics but also on how to be good citizens.

Student leaders in many Japanese programs also manage logistics for band. Teaching and instructing their peers is seen as rewards for student leaders’ efforts at maintaining facilities. We have adopted this system at CTJ after seeing it work in many other programs.

As you increase student leaders’ role as instructors, you will provide an incentive for them to participate in the less visible behind-the-scenes tasks.

Structure of Student Leadership

At CTJ, our student leadership hierarchy is divided into elected officers and appointed leaders. Elected  , which are voted on by the students in the spring for the upcoming academic year, include:

    • Vice President of Music Library
    • Vice President of Logistics
    • Vice President of Uniforms
    • Vice President of Special Events
    • Secretary
    • Freshmen Class Representative (elected during Band Camp)

These students serve on the Student Executive Board and are involved in various decision-making processes throughout the year, including trips, budgetary expenses, band banquet, volunteer opportunities and overall culture-building exercises. The board manages the quartermasters, music librarians and logistics team. All the board members, as elected officers, provide a voice for the students in band and also serve as teachers and mentors.

Elected officers may also serve in a section leader role or another position, but they would be required to participate in the teaching workshops if they pursue an appointed role. The Student Executive Board does not include the section leaders or drum majors, only those in elected positions.

Appointed positions at CTJ include:

    • Drum Major (also serves as our Band President)
    • Assistant Drum Majors/Conductors
    • Captains
    • Section Leaders
    • Quartermasters (usually 3-4)
    • Music Librarians (usually 3-4)
    • Members of SCORE (usually 10-15)

CTJ Bethany teaching horn sectionStudents in appointed positions apply each spring and submit a resume, portfolio and teacher references, and they go through an interview process and teaching audition. Drum major candidates also complete a conducting audition. Appointed positions are selected by a committee that includes band directors from the high school and middle school, private lesson teachers, former student leaders and several guest panel members, including marching techs or visitors from another district school.

Students in appointed positions conduct sectional rehearsals over the summer, during band camp and do music pass-offs during the marching season. They are the go-to mentors for our younger students who need additional help with marching responsibilities in the fall. Appointed student leaders also serve as peer tutors for their sections in the spring.

Teaching Workshops

At CTJ, we expect all our student leaders to teach or serve as teachers at some point. It is a prerequisite that they participate in a teaching seminar before serving in one of our roles. This means that the directors need to teach students how to teach.

During the spring semester, before applications are accepted for appointed positions, we conduct several teaching workshops, where we introduce and practice four areas of teaching: 1) planning and process, 2) content and vocabulary, 3) execution and pacing, and 4) reflection.

Planning and ProcessFor our purposes, student leaders create lesson plans to teach four different topics for marching season: posture, breathing, taking the first step and breaking down a difficult passage of music. Students plan for a five-minute lesson that can eventually grow into a 10- or 15-minute sectional, and finally into a 45-minute sectional. Lesson plans include objectives/goals, time spent on each objective and specific techniques/verbiage to help. We are looking for what their process will be during the time they teach.

Content and Vocabulary — As capable as our student leaders are, band members will likely not react or respond to issues with them the same way they would with an experienced educator. However, student leaders can learn to correct specific details and processes. They can be trained as taskmasters to combine limited feedback with maximum repetition. Sometimes the feedback can be as simple as “play together” or “that’s too long/short/loud/soft.” Student leaders can also correct body posture, rehearse horn moves and provide feedback to help their peers execute cleaner. It is critical to train student leaders early on to use the right vocabulary and have meaningful content in their lessons to avoid any discomfort or awkwardness as they take charge of their rehearsals.

male and female students with saxophonesExecution and Pacing — In our teaching workshops, student leaders break into groups of 10 to 12 to practice teaching with one another. Each student will inform the others in the group what he or she plans to do, take them through the lesson and then receive feedback from a director or coach on improving the lesson. Student leaders learn pacing, time management and how their peers respond to feedback. This is where directors work with student leaders to develop patience, kindness, compassion and confidence. Topics we focus on during this process:

  • Speaking Voice— A great instructor must project and speak loudly enough for all students to hear instructions and feedback. Student leaders must practice speaking louder than they are comfortable with.
  • Poise and Pacing— Student leaders must avoid mumbling and using filler words like “uh,” “um” or “” They must practice balancing verbal instruction and movement during a lesson.
  • Is the student engaging?— Frankly put, can the student leader hold the attention of the group? Is the lesson engaging? Does the time seem to fly by?
  • Appropriate Feedback— After completing a rep, can the student leader see what is wrong and provide a proper correction?
  • The Awkward Factor — Does the lesson feel awkward? Is the leader awkward? Long pauses in delivery, awkward jokes, uncomfortable silences lead to a sense of discomfort for the group.
  • Setup of the classroom” — Standing in a block works but is not necessarily the best way to keep students engaged. Does the student leader setup the classroom to best reach his/her group?

Reflection — We will discuss as a group how the process went and highlight examples of successful teaching, as well as areas to improve. By watching their peers, student leaders can learn what to do as well as what not to do. The directors and staff at CTJ work hard to create a safe environment where student leaders are supportive — not judgmental — and truly want to see everyone succeed.

Ultimately, the success of peer teaching hinges on how the director or staff carefully mentor and monitor the process. As the primary leader of the organization, the director can provide the best guidance for eager student leaders.

Do the elected positions also take part in the teaching workshops? I can see a band member who is extremely organized be great at overseeing the music library, but perhaps not at teaching his/her section.

Top 10 Bass Effects

Today’s bassist can choose from a wide array of effects specifically designed for the instrument. These can be used for everything from subtly spicing up your sound to modifying it dramatically. In this article, we’ll take a look at the top 10 bass effects, with descriptions of what they do, as well as audio examples so you can hear how they alter the sound.

1. Compression

Compression is perhaps the most subtle, yet most important bass effect there is. Some players use it to smooth out their dynamics; others lean on it to create a consistently beefy sound with gobs of sustain. Either way — especially if you’re recording or playing in a band situation — compression is a must.

To demonstrate, here’s a bass line completely dry, without any compression (or any effects of any kind). We’ll be using this as the basis for all the audio examples in this article.

Here it is with some judicious compression applied:

2. Distortion / Bit Crusher

When you play your bass too hard, push your amp beyond its capacity or use speakers that can’t handle your amp’s power output, you get bad distortion. But intentional distortion can be your friend. Maybe add a hint of grit based on the sensitivity of your attack, like in the Yes song “Heart of the Sunrise,” or try slathering on a layer of harmonic fuzz to boost a bass solo, as in “Dance to the Music” by Sly & the Family Stone:

Alternatively, you can dial in some heavily saturated sludge to take things to 11, like Muse’s “Hysteria”:

A subset of this is the bit crusher effect, which is a relatively new entry to the world of distortion — one that proves the axiom that less is more. It works its magic by reducing sample rate and resolution to degrade your sound by degrees until it literally becomes harsh and potentially unrecognizable. As an example, listen to “Davidian Dream Beam” by The Black Heart Death Cult.

3. Chorus

This effect subtly delays the timing of your original signal, then modulates the delay repetitively with a low frequency oscillator (LFO). In small doses, chorusing adds a secret sauce of depth and thickness to your sound without calling attention to itself. When pushed hard, chorus becomes almost breathy and metallic in a quintessential ’80s rock way, as embodied by Peter Hook’s bassline on New Order’s “Age of Consent.”

4. Flanger

Similar to chorus, but with shorter delay times, a flanger creates a duplicate version of your original signal, then varies the pitch. Faster flanging speeds result in a more dramatic sweeping sound. Check out Tool’s “Forty Six & 2” for a full-on flanger attack.

5. Phaser

Phasing is what happens when you take two identical signals and delay one of them slightly. To my ears, using a phaser adds a gentle psychedelic sweep to whatever you’re playing, and works best on repetitive phrases when the rate and depth roughly match the tempo of the song. I particularly like the gummy sound that’s created when the sweep reaches its maximum point and spins back around for its return trip. Looking for a masterclass in using phaser on bass? Listen to The O’Jays “For the Love of Money.”

6. Octave Divider

This takes your bassline and adds one or even two octaves above and/or below what you’re playing. On some older octave pedals, when you turn off your dry signal completely and only use the wet signal, the resulting sound is similar to a ’70s monophonic synth, as you can hear on The Kandinsky Effect’s “Somnambulist.”

It is, however, easier for octave dividers to faithfully track higher notes than lower ones, where there can sometimes be a slight delay or even a failure to track the note at all. To some players, that quirkiness sounds like an unacceptable mistake; to others, it’s an idiosyncrasy that adds flavor to a bassline. No matter what your tastes are, keep in mind that most amps and cabinets struggle to reproduce super-low frequencies (say, those below 30 Hz), so you need to use this effect sparingly when you start thumping around below low G or no one — including you — will hear it. And your speakers will likely suffer for it too.

7. Harmonizer

This effect adds an interval (major, minor, second through seventh and even octaves) above and/or below whatever you’re playing. When overused, a harmonizer can turn into a distraction, but when used tastefully it can turn the bassist of a power trio into a veritable string section. If you’ve ever worried that your bass sounds thin, a harmonizer might just be the missing link you’ve been searching for to put a little more backbone into your sound. That’s how a two-piece bass and drums outfit like Royal Blood can sound like an army on a track like “Out of the Black.”

8. Delay

Delay comes in many flavors. All are based on the concept of creating a copy of the original signal, and as a rule, most give you control over parameters that affect the speed, depth, tone and repetition of the delayed signal.

Short delays work well on bass, adding a nice sense of space, as you can hear in this audio clip:

That said, I’ve always been a sucker for reverb, which is a specific type of delay (or more correctly, series of delays) that emulates the natural sound bouncing around a room. My personal favorite is plate reverb — the result of a signal exciting a large metal plate — but you have to be cautious in its use, since too much reverb of any kind applied to bass can quickly muddy up a mix … unless you play fretless solos or are a member of an indie shoegaze band, in which case reverb is pretty much expected on everything.

In some circumstances, a better bet might be to use a digital emulation of a vintage analog tape delay machine. These relics of the recording studio used the time delay between the record head and the play head on a tape machine to create cool dub effects and relied on speed imperfections and tape saturation to create warbly delay effects. However, to use this effectively (pardon the pun), you need to be in a situation with lots of space to let the delays “breathe” and not obscure one another. You can find a good example of the use of tape delay applied to bass on the Pink Floyd track “One of These Days,” which was recorded in 1971, long before the days of digital.

9. Ring Modulation

If you love unearthly, grainy sounds, ring modulation may be your ticket to ride. But to understand how it works, please pull out your trigonometry calculator and sit up straight in your seat. Ring modulation takes your original bass signal (the “modulator” wave) and combines it with a “carrier” wave (generated by the effect itself) to create two new signals (the sum and the difference between the modulator and carrier waves), then subtracts the original signal from the mix. Does your head hurt? Mine too.

But don’t focus on the what or how, just know that ring modulation can create gripping, otherworldly tones that can’t be created any other way. However, the line between magic and tragic here is very fine; the trick is to blend in its output sparingly with your original signal. Listen to the song “Alpha and Omega” on Donny McCaslin’s album Casting for Gravity for an example of how to use ring modulation tastefully.

10. Envelope Filter

This highly responsive and complex effect is synonymous with funk and disco, and in the right hands (and even the wrong ones, sometimes) it sounds like a bass trying to speak actual words — skrank, mwowt-mwowt — even though the words would be considered nonsense. (Check out Thundercat’s “Them Changes” for a dose of funky gibberish.)

Numerous controls for various parameters make this challenging to quickly explain, but basically, envelope filters take what you play and how you play and use that information to control how certain frequencies pass through a sweeping filter while others are removed by it. As with ring modulators, don’t let the science scare you off. Once you balance the sensitivity of the effect with your bass signal and your overall attack, all the other controls start to reveal themselves. And, as a bonus, this is the only bass effect that, when used correctly, allows the player to wear ridiculous outfits onstage without actually being ridiculed. Trust me, it’s worth it: that resonant sound is unlike anything else.

Any of these effects can be used in combination with one another for even more complex tone shaping. Try, for example, applying some reverb to a chorused bass, or adding a touch of distortion to a harmonized bass sound before routing the signal into an envelope filter. You may need to do some experimentation to set levels correctly, and determining the order of the effects in your signal chain is a whole other topic for discussion. But don’t be timid about trying things out; after all, beautiful accidents are how new sounds are discovered. The only limit here is your imagination!

The History of Yamaha CF Grand Pianos

The grand piano is a marvel of engineering. It contains thousands of parts, and its development spans over 300 years. While the early history of the instrument has its roots in Europe, it may surprise you to know that Yamaha has been manufacturing pianos for more than a century, and long ago (1965 to be exact) became the top supplier of acoustic pianos in the world. The company builds upwards of 100,000 pianos every year and has shipped well over eight million of them to date.

To some, these impressive numbers might evoke images of large factories with automated production lines churning out pianos with little human involvement. But every CF Series grand piano Yamaha makes is crafted by a group of skilled artisans, who oversee all the critical steps of turning wood and metal into the highly refined and expressive instrument that the modern grand piano represents. Let’s take a look at the history of this famed instrument, favored by top concert pianists the world over.

Yamaha Pianos Through the Decades

Company founder Torakusu Yamaha, an avid student of Western science and technology, designed and built his first upright piano in 1900, followed by a grand piano in 1902. These instruments were sold only in Japan, but Torakusu was invited to send his grand piano to the 1904 St. Louis World’s Fair, where it won an Honorary Grand Prize.

Over the following decades, the company avidly studied European piano design and production techniques. In the mid-1920s, aided by expert German piano technician Ale Schlegel, Yamaha produced a grand piano that was acclaimed by such notable artists as Artur Rubinstein, considered one of the twentieth century’s most talented pianists, as well as Russian virtuoso Leo Sirota, who wrote, “I have played the Yamaha piano many times and have come to the conclusion that this instrument is equal to the best pianos from Germany and America. It has an astonishingly beautiful tone, not to mention an excellent mechanism. It allows me to play however I desire.”

Vintage photo in black and white with man in suit sitting at a Yamaha piano but looking at the camera.
Leo Sirota.

In 1965, Yamaha began working with lauded Italian piano technician Cesare Tallone. Together they explored all aspects of piano design, creating many prototypes that were evaluated by world-class artists and then refined further. This valuable real-world feedback resulted in the creation of the first CF Concert Grand piano, unveiled to the public in November of 1967 with a performance by German maestro Wilhelm Kempff. After the concert, he expressed his appreciation for the instrument, saying, “Today, I played a Schubert Impromptu — a formidable test for any piano. This instrument passed with flying colors. Yamaha has surely made one of the top pianos in the world.”

Worldwide Acclaim for CF Grand Pianos

CF pianos were soon adopted by leading artists, international festivals and competitions. At both the 1968 and 1969 Menton Music Festival in France, four out of the five pianists chose it for their performances, including virtuoso Sviatoslav Richter.

A man playing a piano on a concert stage.
Sviatoslav Richter.

Legendary Canadian pianist Glenn Gould purchased two CF pianos, recording his last three albums on them, including his historic reworking of Bach’s Goldberg Variations in 1981. Gould was taken with the instrument, enthusing, “This piano has the finest action in the world. I have never before played an instrument that reflects my desires so perfectly.”

A Legacy of Innovation Continues

One might imagine that with such success and acceptance, Yamaha would sit back and simply enjoy the fruits of their labor. But instead, the company constantly questioned how they could improve aspects of the touch, the sound and the dynamic range of their pianos, all in search of an even higher level of expression for the performing artist. From this they created the C Series of studio and home pianos, which would become the most recorded piano in history.

By the early 1980s Yamaha was determined to develop an even more powerful-sounding concert grand — one that would be worthy of the best concert halls the world over. Once again, they gathered feedback from top artists and developed many prototypes before they unveiled their next-generation CF piano in 1983: the CFIII Series concert grand piano. And once again, Yamaha delivered an instrument that the musical world accepted with open arms.

The CFIII was designated as the sole official piano of the International Johann Sebastian Bach Competition in Germany, the official instrument of Poland’s International Chopin Piano Competition and official piano for the prestigious International Tchaikovsky Competition in Russia. Further refinements led to the CFIIIS, released in 1991, which underwent improvements and advancements in 1996 and 2001. Favored by prominent artists, concert halls and educational institutions worldwide, the CFIIIS was the piano of choice at over 20 festivals and competitions.

Man intensely playing a Yamaha concert grand on stage.
A Yamaha CFX grand piano being played at the 2015 International Chopin Piano Competition.

The Pinnacle in Piano Design

Despite this success, Yamaha was not content to rest on its laurels. An incredible 100 prototypes were developed over 19 years before arriving at the next instruments worthy of release in the ongoing evolution of the “Yamaha sound”: the Yamaha CF Series, led by the majestic CFX 9-foot concert grand piano released in 2010. In October of that year, Russian pianist Yulianna Avdeeva won first prize at the 16th International Chopin Piano Competition playing a CFX — the first time a pianist won playing a Japanese-made piano.

All CFX grand pianos are crafted by hand, using the finest materials Yamaha has sourced or developed themselves. As a result, the range of expression and tonal colors possible have evolved to a new level … and artists around the world have recognized that fact. Here is a sampling of some of their endorsements:

Tony Desare: “If I had to make a wish list of all the things I wanted in a piano as a player, as I explored the CFX they all revealed themselves. The CFX is the piano player’s piano. To me, it’s really taken the last several 100 years of piano-making and distilled it down into the best of the best.”

Billy Childs: “It has such a great, clean action, a beautiful tone; I can play soft and hear the integrity of every note. And when I play loud it still retains that warm, beautiful sound.”

Gerald Clayton: “It really gives you the ability to play with the warmth that I desire in a piano. But you can also cut through and get that brightness if you need it … it’s got so much range.”

Michael Shinn (Piano Faculty, The Juilliard School): “There’s a subtlety and diversity in the softer dynamics: it of course has an incredibly huge sound, and one that’s never abrasive. But I find there’s so much nuance I can get from the softer dynamics that I can’t get from any other instrument.”

Anne-Marie McDermott (Artistic Director, Bravo! Vail Music Festival): “[The CFX] gives you everything you want, from the most subtle, soft, silky and buttery colors to this monstrous, big, fat growling sound.”

Jerome Rose (Piano Faculty, Mannes School Of Music): “The CFX is an extraordinary instrument. It has many unique qualities: the clarity of sound, the projection of sound, the blending of tones … it allows an artist to be the utmost of their capabilities.”

The Quest Continues

Over the course of more than 100 years, Yamaha has built a solid foundation by investing enormous human and material resources and carrying on large-scale, far-ranging technological research and development. The company’s remarkable success is also testament to the efforts of the many skilled craftsmen who breathe life into each and every instrument.

Man carving piece of a piano.

Not surprisingly, Yamaha continues their quest to refine and improve their grand pianos. Today, the company holds over 5,000 innovative patents on acoustic piano materials and design/manufacturing processes. Several of their most recent design breakthroughs have been integrated into their newest line of pianos, the next-generation CFX Concert Grand.

Yamaha concert grand on a stage.

In a grand piano, once the hammer has struck/excited the string, both the soundboard and the case of the piano itself act as resonators to amplify and produce the tone that we hear. Knowing how critical this is in shaping the sound, Yamaha has been exploring ways to enhance this important characteristic. To this end, they developed a technology called Acoustic Resonance Enhancement (A.R.E.), which is a method of treating the wood in the instrument to enhance and solidify the vibrations that are integral to a piano’s tone. The company also hand-selects the woods used for the rim and back posts, and have developed new ways to connect the joints to minimize vibration loss. Finally, they completely redesigned the all-important soundboard, using the top one percent of European spruce, and reshaped it to improve the mid-bass frequencies, which are crucial to producing a warm, rich and resonant tone.

Man working on building a piano.

In addition, with the goal of connecting even the slightest variation in the player’s touch to the sound produced, Yamaha has long been refining the complex action of a grand piano to deliver increased dynamic range (the variations from the softest to the loudest playing), and increase what players call the finger-to-sound connection. Their new “Unibody Concept” design process involved looking at every aspect of their design, materials and methods, working in conjunction with a team of artists and engineers to better achieve that nuanced, expressive control. One seemingly small, but ultimately important design change was to — for the first time in a Yamaha piano — add a music stand that is perforated, so the sound comes back clearly to the performer without being blocked by a solid slab of wood. This increased clarity allows the performer to better shape their performance, and to hear even the slightest variation in their touch and tonal shading.

Merged image of someone building a concert grand piano next to someone playing a completed one.

Spotlight on Steinberg Cubase 12

Steinberg Cubase 12 DAW software offers an abundant haul of innovative features for music production and film scoring. Some of the additions are only for Cubase Pro, but many are available in the Cubase Artist and/or Cubase Elements versions as well.

Let’s dive right in and take a look at what’s new:

Dongle-Free Zone

One of the first things you’ll notice is that you no longer need a dongle to install and run Cubase. Thanks to an entirely new copy-protection system, you can unplug your USB eLicenser and set it aside for good (unless you need it for other Steinberg products).

More Power for All

You’ll find many new and useful workflow features in all versions of Cubase 12. For example, volume automation is now sample-accurate and no longer impacted by buffer size. Not only do you get more precise automation, but you can set the buffer to a high setting if you have a lot of tracks and effects in your Project, without adding latency to your automation. Windows 10 users will be happy to know that Cubase 12 supports MIDI over Bluetooth®, and Mac® users will appreciate the support for Apple®’s new Silicon-based computers.

Screenshot.
Volume automation is now sample-accurate.

Additional workflow improvements include new key commands for the Range Selection tool, slipping event content and adding fades, as well as a new Nudge Grid feature.

Screenshot.
The new Nudge commands.

Automatic Controller Mapping

Cubase 12 also makes it easier than ever to use an external MIDI controller thanks to a new MIDI Remote Integration feature. When you plug a controller into your computer or interface, Cubase automatically detects it and maps its controls using a MIDI Remote Script. If none exists for your particular controller, you can use the MIDI Controller Surface Editor to create a new script, along with a Mapping Assistant to assign various Cubase functions to knobs, faders or switches.

Screenshot.
The MIDI Mapping Assistant.

Audio to MIDI Chords

A new Audio to MIDI chords feature gives Cubase 12 the ability to analyze an audio file, detect the chords, and write them to the Chord Track. In fact, there are two different ways to do so: One is to simply drag an audio file into a Chord Track. Alternatively, you can select the audio in a Chord Track and go to Project/Chord Track/Create Chord Events.

Screenshots.
Dragging audio into a Chord Track.

Scale Assistant for VariAudio

The Scale Assistant feature in the Pro and Artist versions of Cubase 12 can now be applied to not just MIDI tracks, but audio tracks too. Open an audio track in VariAudio, and you’ll see the Scale Assistant’s controls. Choose a scale in any key from a comprehensive drop-down list, or have the Scale Assistant suggest a scale for you based on its analysis of the audio. Once the key and scale are set, you can use the Quantize Pitches feature to snap all notes to the nearest scale tone. Having the Scale Assistant under your fingertips significantly increases your audio editing power for both corrective and creative applications.

Screenshot.
VariAudio Scale Assistant.

FX Modulator

The FX Modulator plug-in included with the Pro and Artist versions of Cubase 12 makes it easy to modulate up to six simultaneous effects independently in order to creatively tweak your tracks to add extra movement and excitement. You can choose from a list that includes Flanger, Pitch Shifter, Reverb, Compressor, Pan, Bit Crusher and eight other effects, then apply modulation curves to each, using one of the 16 factory curve presets or custom curves you create. Each effect can have its own filter setting, and you can even apply a sidechain signal.

Screenshot.
FX Modulator.

Raiser’s Edge

Another new plug-in offered by the Pro version of Cubase 12 is a limiter called Raiser. It can be applied to individual tracks or to complete mixes and masters, with fast attack times that make it easy to increase level without losing punch or having the track sound squashed. Raiser also offers significant control over release times, with a choice of six different release modes, including Aggressive, which simultaneously applies aggressive limiting, preserves transients and deters pumping. If you’re preparing a master for streaming, the Detect Intersample Clipping option eliminates intersample distortion that can be problematic for music destined for streaming services. As a bonus, activating the Compare button evens the level between the processed and unprocessed signal, making A/B comparisons more useful.

Screenshot.
Raiser.

Once More, with Verve

If you’ve never heard of a felt piano, it’s an acoustic piano equipped with extra felt between the hammers and strings to create a more mellow sound with reduced resonance. The Pro and Artist versions of Cubase 12 include Verve, a new felt piano for HALion Sonic SE that was sampled in Yamaha Studios in Los Angeles, with a large selection of presets that show off its smooth and silky tone.

Screenshot.
Verve.

Improved AudioWarping

The Pro and Artist versions of Cubase 12 offer a more powerful AudioWarp feature, giving you additional ways to edit audio timing. For one thing, you can now adjust audio directly in the Project window. In addition, a Group Editing mode allows you to adjust multiple tracks simultaneously. And when working in the Sample Editor, you’ll find new AudioWarp grid options and zoom modes.

Screenshot.
The new AudioWarp in the Cubase 12 Pro and Artist versions.

SuperVision Gets More Super

The Pro and Artist versions of Cubase 12 add several new meters to the highly flexible and powerful SuperVision metering plug-in. These include a VU meter, Spectrum Keyboard, Level and Loudness Histograms, and Phase Balance.

Screenshot.
Some of the new SuperVision modules.

Straight Out of Nuendo

Nuendo is Steinberg’s DAW designed for professional post-production work, and several of its most potent features have been migrated to Cubase 12 Pro. You can now have two video tracks open at the same time, along with up to four MixConsoles. What’s more, you can export multiple events simultaneously. Steinberg also beefed up the Logical Editor for both audio and MIDI and added a new set of Presets. You’ll also find further support for importing Tempo and Signature tracks from other Projects.

Screenshot.
The beefed-up Logical Editor in Cubase 12 Pro.

How to Level and Position Your Turntable

Listening to vinyl records is a great way to enjoy music, but to get the most from an audio system that includes a turntable, it’s important to follow positioning guidelines. Turntables have sensitive mechanisms that won’t perform optimally if not set up correctly. In this article, we’ll show you a few simple steps to optimize both performance and sound quality.

Good Spin

For context, let’s first quickly review how a turntable helps create sound. It starts by “reading” the grooves on the surface of a vinyl record. The grooves represent vibrations from the sound waves of a recording that were cut into a master disc by a lathe during the mastering process. This master disc was then used to create a “stamper” for pressing copies of the record from molten vinyl in a pressing machine.

As a turntable spins, its stylus (needle) vibrates in the grooves, and the cartridge it’s attached to converts those vibrations back into an electrical audio signal that is routed from the turntable’s output to an amplifier or receiver, and then on to speakers or headphones.

For this process to accurately reproduce the music from the original recording, the turntable needs to spin at the correct speed (usually 33 1/3 RPM), and the stylus and cartridge need to accurately translate the information in the grooves into electrical energy.

Bad Vibrations

So far, so good. But external vibrations can compromise the ability of your turntable to accurately translate the information in the grooves into an equivalent (“analog”) electrical signal and can also cause noise. The chief culprit for such vibrations are your speakers and, especially, subwoofers, because low frequencies cause the most extreme vibrations. Ironically, by working as they’re supposed to, speakers and subwoofers can hinder the performance of your turntable.

The solution is to find a place to put your turntable where the speaker vibrations won’t impact it. So rule number one is to put the speakers on a different surface from the turntable. You wouldn’t want to, say, put both on the same table, nor should you stack the turntable on top of a speaker or subwoofer. Ideally, the turntable should be placed on a solid, heavy piece of furniture that sits firmly on the floor and doesn’t wobble. A stereo cabinet is a good choice, or a heavy wooden shelf unit.

You can also reduce speaker vibrations by using dedicated speaker stands or speaker isolation pads, which go between the speakers and the surface they’re on. If you have no choice but to put the turntable on the same surface as the speakers, consider using a turntable isolation platform, a relatively inexpensive tabletop device made of sound-absorbent material.

Rule number two is: You should avoid stacking your turntable on top of a receiver or stereo amplifier. That’s because blocking the airflow that the receiver/amplifier needs for ventilation can cause the unit to overheat or result in damage to its circuitry over time. It’s especially important not to block any air vents that may be on the top of a receiver or amplifier.

Turntable manufacturers are aware that not everyone will know about, or follow, these rules. That’s why they do all they can to isolate their products from vibrations. The base of a turntable is called the “plinth.” Often made of wood, the thickness of the plinth helps reduce external vibrations. Mass is the best way to stop sound waves, so the heavier and denser the plinth, the better the isolation. The substantial plinth on the Yamaha GT-5000 turntable, for example, greatly reduces susceptibility to vibration.

Turntable without cover.
Yamaha GT-5000 turntable.

On the Level

Another essential part of setting up your turntable is to make sure it’s level (which is rule number three). If it’s not, the stylus will exert extra force in the downhill direction (due to gravity), potentially affecting the rotation speed. Playing vinyl on a turntable that’s not level can also cause the stylus to contact the grooves at an incorrect angle, which will wear your records unevenly and eventually cause distortion in the signal.

Many turntables (such as, for example, the Yamaha MusicCast VINYL 500) have adjustable feet for leveling purposes. To do so, you’ll need a small bullseye-style level; alternatively, you can use a level app on your smartphone. Start by placing it on one side near the outer part of the platter (the spinning part of the turntable) and then again on the opposite side. (Make sure there isn’t a record on the turntable when you do this!) Next, move the level by 90 degrees and do the same thing. Try these measurements both with the turntable off and with it spinning. That should give you a good indication of which leg or legs need adjustment. Then it’s just a matter of rotating those legs clockwise or counterclockwise until the bulls-eye or app indicates that the turntable is perfectly level.

Turntable with clear cover closed seen from side.
Yamaha MusicCast VINYL 500 turntable.

Setting up a sound system that includes a turntable requires some forethought and attention to detail. It’s certainly not as simple as placing other audio components, where reducing vibration and leveling are non-issues. But if you care enough about sound quality to listen to vinyl, you’ll want to spend a little extra time to optimize your system. Your ears — and your record collection — will thank you.

Instrument Repairs, Hacks and Fixes

We’ve all encountered this scenario: The baton is up, the group is ready to play, the downbeat almost hits the air, and then a hand goes up. You respond, “Yes?” A student says, “My instrument isn’t working.”

You spend the next 10 minutes trying to figure out what’s wrong. Then the rest of the group comes back into focus and you finally say, “We’ll have to send this to the shop. See if there’s another instrument somewhere or just finger along.”

Instrument repairs can be costly in both time and money. Surprises like the situation above can derail an entire rehearsal. Here are some common techniques, alternative approaches and money-saving tips to deal with instrument issues.

Understanding Your Options

If an instrument is repairable, you have two options: 1) fix it yourself or 2) send it in for repair. There are pros and cons to both approaches.

If you fix it, the instrument will get back in the student’s hands quicker. It will also cost less than paying for the repair in the shop.

However, most music teachers do not have access to the vast array of tools that an instrument repair technician might have, nor do most music teachers have the trade experience.

When Should I Not Repair an Instrument?

You Don’t Have the Right Tool: Nothing is more frustrating than trying to fit a square peg in a round hole. I love the sense of accomplishment when I successfully “MacGyver” something, but I also have to realize when sunk-cost fallacy comes into play. Sometimes, if you don’t have the proper tool to fix something, the answer is simply “no.” Send it to the shop.

A related scenario is that you have the right tool, but someone else might have a better tool. I can change the oil in my car at home, but it involves quite a bit of work, plus I have to carve out time to properly dispose of the oil. Or, I can pay the local mechanic to do it in about 20 to 30 minutes. If I have the funds, I almost always choose the time-saving option.

I would be remiss if I didn’t mention super glue. Avoid using super glue at all costs. There are quite a few reasons why, but the most important is safety. Repair technicians often operate with flames to repair some instruments. Super glue + flame = noxious fumes.

You Might Make it Worse: I’ll work on students’ personal instruments, but only to a certain point. Once I get into uncharted territory, or I have to use anything that resembles force, I’m out. For school-owned instruments, I’ll work a little further.

Stripping screws are my most common mistake. Once I’ve stripped a screw, it requires much more time and sometimes a specialized tool to extract it. I’ve learned to know when to give up on these instances.

You’ve Never Done the Repair Before: If you’re confident in your skills and it seems like a no-risk or low-risk repair, consider going for it. However, if it’s something you’ve never done before or you’re not sure how the repair might turn out, you can either send the instrument to the shop or you can practice. I have practiced some minor repairs on decommissioned instruments in the past. Practicing gave me confidence and experience to tackle the repair on a functional (well, almost functional) instrument.

hour glass pexels

The Cost of Your Time

It seems like things always take at least three times longer and twice the amount of money to complete than you expect. I’ve had instances where sending an instrument to the shop would have made much more sense, but I’m a fixer, and I will spend hours on a minor repair — especially since I’ve already spent two hours on it.

At this point, it’s OK to abandon the repair and send it in. Think about all the things you’ve said “no” to during these two hours.

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

Essential “Tools”

Once you’ve determined that you’re going to attempt a repair, what tools do you need? I’ve had the most success when I buy an instrument repair kit from music dealers. They can be costly, but they include most items you will need for essential to intermediate repairs. Listed below are a few other things to add to your repair toolbox.

broken drumstick pexelsBroken/Old Drumsticks: I’ve used these for everything from removing stuck slides to rolling out small dents on a brass instrument. Sand down any rough edges before using.

Contact Cement: One of the most common repairs is cork replacements on clarinet and saxophone necks. Have a small supply of contact cement and corks on hand so you can tackle these repairs on your own, which saves money and time. Make sure to complete these repairs in a well-ventilated area or you may see visions of musicians from the past!

Pantyhose: You can save so much money on timpani mallets by using pantyhose. This tip comes from Kevin Lepper, former director of percussion at VanderCook College of Music. Cut stockings to size and place them over the head of the timpani mallet and secure them with a rubber band. Pantyhose eliminates the static electricity that pulls the material away from the mallet head and makes the head last for as long as the pantyhose does. Plus, you get to send out an email to your band parents with the subject line “Pantyhose Needed” — an unforgettable experience!

Spring Hook/Crochet Needle: Needle spring adjustments are extremely common on woodwind instruments. Buy a spring hook or a small crochet needle to make quick adjustments.

straws unsplashEyeglass Screwdrivers: A set of small screwdrivers are always helpful in a pinch. I also have some longer screwdrivers on hand, which can help to loosen some stuck screws. Warning: Don’t force screws too much because a stripped head is a more significant repair.

Plastic Drinking Straws: This quick fix was a particularly fun one. We were at a festival, and the snare strainer broke. A percussionist and I went to the concession area to get a few plastic straws. We put these in place, screwed the bracket over them, cut off the excess and were able to get through the performance. The drinking straw repair is a good temporary fix until you can repair the instrument.

Instrument Graveyard

My band program is 110 years old. We have an inventory of some old, beautiful, classic instruments. We also have some junk. Ask for student volunteers to strip down out-of-commission clarinets and saxophones for parts. These extra screws and springs come in handy for some minor repairs. We’ve also salvaged some third valve slide trumpet rings, brass valve guides, water key springs and similar items.

Some Additional Tips

Ask Your Parents/Custodians/Community Members to Contribute: Many community members are willing to donate to your cause, especially if you are specific with your wants and needs. Consider sending a call out for materials. Here’s a sample script:

Dear Community Member:

The Jennifer Garner band and orchestra programs are looking for instrument repair items. These items will help save time and money and help our students learn even more skills to fix common instrument issues themselves.

toolbox pexelsWould you consider donating to our program if you have any of the items below in your garage, basement or workroom?
        • Toolbox/tacklebox
        • Plastic organizers
        • Eyeglass screwdrivers
        • Needle-nose pliers
        • Rawhide hammer
        • Sandpaper/nail files

We would love to recognize you in our program for our next concert if you can donate. Please get in touch with me to discuss this further.

Hire an Hourly Repair Person: Talk to your instrument supply company and see if they have a repair tech who would be willing to come to your school for a few hours to do some repairs. We have hired a repair tech to come to our school for three to four hours at a negotiated hourly rate. A significant number of instruments were repaired and students were able to watch the repair tech work.

two people laptops budget unsplashExplore Other Options

Here’s a final tip for those of you who may not have enough money in your budget to afford costly repairs. Talk to your administration to explore other repair accounts in the school, such as a building repair budget. Some of these funds are available to repair capital outlay assets (think large items that cost at least $500 or more, although this may vary by school).

Finances are certainly a decision your administration must make, but you can always provide information that proves that instrument repairs fit the bill. An $1,800 student string bass that is property of the school could qualify as a capital asset, allowing other budgets to cover the repair cost legally.

What other instrument repair tips or hacks do you have? Send them to educators@yamaha.com.

Note-Naming ≠ Music-Reading

“The name of a note is the one thing we do not have to know, and yet some teachers spend more time on this aspect of note reading than any other,” said renowned piano teacher Richard Chronister, as noted in “Creative Piano Teaching” by James Lyke, Geoffrey Haydon and Catherine Rollin, Stipes Publishing, 2011, Pg. 55.)

Collins English Dictionary says that “if you can read music, you have the ability to look at and understand the symbols that are used in written music to represent musical sounds.” More musically put, you have the ability to audiate or hear the music in your head, and you know what technical and musical tools you need to employ to get the sound you are hearing internally.

score study pexelsWhy then, do so many people equate music reading with note naming?

Chronister goes on to say that for pianists, “note reading is the ability to see any note on the staff and simultaneously play its corresponding key on the keyboard.” Knowing the name of the note unfortunately is a very limited piece of information and does not help with this. Nor does it help the student understand how notes are related to each other, how to recognize patterns and chords, etc.

This is a very lengthy topic, and rather than focus on the musical hierarchy of “Listening, Playing, Reading, Writing” (a topic that I will discuss in another article), which should provide the foundation for everything we teach, what I would like to focus on for now are some tips for music reading that are easy to incorporate into lessons.

Intervallic Reading

Humans can typically remember five to seven bits of information at a time. When students are focused on one note at a time, their brains get overloaded very quickly. It is much more beneficial to teach students how to chunk and how to recognize patterns. The key to both of those is through intervallic reading.

noteWhen students are focused on note-naming, they would look at the notes to the right and say, “C, E, G.” That is three bits of information that really serve no musical purpose. When we emphasize intervallic reading, the student recognizes that these three notes, built up in skips, create a C major chord — one bit of information. The student can audiate that chord, the hand automatically knows what shape to create to play the chord and the knowledge is easily transferable to other keys.

Make Good Use of Flashcards

Raise your hand if you own flashcards (maybe multiple, colorful sets?). Now, raise your hand if you use flashcards with your students on a regular basis.

Teachers often use flashcards as a break from playing or as a vocabulary-type speed drill. Unfortunately, this offers the student no connection to their actual repertoire or music-making as a whole. What students really need to know is what piano key is represented by the notehead on the staff. For example, you might have a student who can whiz through the flashcards and get all the note names correct, but still struggle to play a single five-finger pattern line of notation or a student who can sight-read a line beautifully, but hesitates when asked the letter names.

This does not mean that you should get rid of your flashcards – absolutely not! We just need to use them in ways that help students transfer the information they are memorizing on the flashcards to the repertoire they are playing. These tips will also provide music teachers with a more accurate assessment of your students’ understanding of specific concepts.

Demonstrate: This one seems pretty obvious and simple, but we are assessing if the student actually understands the correlation between the symbol on the flashcard and what they play. Choose a few terms, rhythms or notes and have them play what is written on the card. You can make this more challenging by having students play a harmonic line at the same time. Can they remain focused on their line?

Improvise: I am a strong believer in encouraging and building students’ creativity through improvisation, but classically trained teachers are often uncomfortable teaching improvisation. Flashcards are a really easy way to incorporate improvisation or composition into lessons. As an extra benefit, improvisation is also a great way to assess what a student understands.

Choose a few flashcards to serve as guidelines. The student could choose a key signature flashcard and instead of shouting out D major, which doesn’t actually allow the teacher to assess whether or not the student understands what notes are in D major or what dominant and tonic are in D major, have the student do a short improvisation in D major. It could be as simple as root and 5th in the left hand (demonstrating understanding tonic and dominant) and right-hand improvising in a D five-finger pattern (does the student remember F#?).

You can add more guidelines, such as a specific meter (3/4, 5/8, 4/4), dynamics, terms like ritardando, rubato or andante.  You can even add rhythm flashcards as a left-hand ostinato or a melodic rhythm.

Sing: Again, choose a few flashcards and lay them out for the student. This time, rather than having the student play the pattern, ask them to sing the pattern for you. The student must be audiating the pitches in order to sing them correctly.

pointing music sheet unsplash

Find: Have the student find the answers in their pieces. This takes more planning by the teacher because you need to have the appropriate flashcards chosen ahead of time, but this can really help students make the connection between flashcards, which can seem very separate from a musical activity, and their music-making.

Create: While it is very easy to buy ready-made flashcards, have students make their own cards at home. The actual process of writing down the symbols or terms and definitions or letter names can help to reinforce concepts.

Teach Students to be Independent Learners

The great pedagogue Frances Clark said, “My primary goal as a piano teacher is to create a climate in which my students can experience continual musical, intellectual, and emotional growth, and to become increasingly dispensable to them in the process.” When we focus on music-reading, rather than note-naming, we allow our students the opportunity to become independent learners and you might find that your students play more musically and are more engaged along the way.

Ask for Help and Improve Your Teaching

During my first five years of teaching, I could have benefitted from some real help. Unfortunately, I was petrified to have my high school and college band directors come out to watch my rehearsals.

My former teachers were incredibly kind and willing to help me, and they told me they would come out at a moment’s notice. But I just never felt like I had things in good enough shape for them. In hindsight, I wish I had just asked them come to my school. I don’t regret working hard on my own, but I could have saved so much time and improved more quickly if only I had set aside my fear and ego and asked for help.

The key takeaway is: You are not alone, and you don’t have to do this yourself. With a bit of initiative, you can find ways to directly improve your teaching and expand your networks outside of your once- or twice-a-year professional development conferences. The following suggestions are real situations where I forced myself to go beyond my comfort zone to grow personally and professionally.

Don’t Wait for an Invitation

The music teaching field is remarkably helpful, but it’s also hectic. If you wait for an invitation to observe or help out another program, you’ll be waiting a long time. Instead, take the lead and just reach out.

four friends get together unsplashAt the beginning of my career, I contacted a few well-known directors and asked if I could observe an evening rehearsal. The response was almost always a “yes” or a “yes, but would another time of year work?” Bring a notebook, jot down some thoughts and just take it all in. The next day, try something new in your classroom that you observed the night before. It might work or it might not — but it’s another tool in your bag.

Observing other teachers also expands your network. I’ve made countless friends and connections by observing programs and taking the teacher out for coffee afterward to talk. These can also be social events. I’ve scheduled time with three or four friends to watch another colleague’s rehearsal. This allowed for some much-needed social time with discussion revolving around what we just saw and what we could implement into our own classrooms.

* Please note: many schools are more cautious due to COVID and other safety issues. Make sure to go through proper channels to visit other programs or invite visitors to your school.

Take Control of Your Own Evaluation

In my more than 15 years of teaching, I’ve only been evaluated by an actual music teacher twice. Both times were extremely helpful. The other evaluations were completed by math, English and PE teachers. I certainly received some valuable information from these evaluations, but I missed out on some of the nuances that veteran music teachers can provide. If you are lucky enough to have an evaluator who is well-versed in music, take advantage of the situation and really absorb all their comments and advice. But if you’re in the same boat as me, consider scheduling an additional unofficial evaluation for yourself.

I have invited clinicians to my school to work with my group, but I never had someone come out to really dig into my teaching and conducting. I immediately thought of two music teachers who I would be most fearful of watching me teach — my high school band director, Mr. Ted Lega, and one of my mentors, Mr. Mike Fiske. After pacing around the room for a bit, I gave them a call. They agreed to come out the following week.

After many sleepless nights, the day came. I taught, and they watched without interruption. After the rehearsal, we had some time to sit down. I let go of my fear and ego and just listened. This turned out to be a transformative experience for me. I received so much practical advice, reinforcement of what was working, and suggestions for what needed to be changed to push myself forward. Some advice was simple, such as alternative approaches to setting up the band so certain sections could hear each other. Other suggestions were more significant. I had a lot of work to do with the tone of the group. They also suggested that we work toward an articulation that the entire group could agree on. It didn’t have to be the perfect articulation, but rather, consistent.

contemplate unsplashFigure Out What You Need First

I knew that I needed significant help during my first few years of teaching, but I wasn’t sure about which specific areas. My goal was to have my group sound better — something we all want.

I had to do a little digging and self-reflection before asking for help. I eventually determined that I had some issues with teaching proper techniques for tone, intonation and articulation. I wrote down the different things I had tried and reflected on why they did or did not work so far. Then, I reached out to some colleagues and provided them with this information. This helped them tailor their advice to my specific needs so they could provide some practical advice on what could be added, tweaked or deleted from my approach. Furthermore, I hoped that this showed that I was willing to put in the effort and that their advice wouldn’t be wasted on me.

Try It for 30 Days

You have a couple of options once you receive advice from a friend, colleague or mentor. The first is to simply ignore it. The second is to try it out. After all, if you want different results, you have to do something different. Sometimes new methods, techniques and thought patterns take some time to work.

I will never forget a time in high school band when we sight-read a piece and it sounded pretty awful. One student said, “I don’t like this piece.” Without missing a beat, my band director, Mr. Lega, said, “Well, no one likes it the way we just played it.” We all laughed. A few weeks later, the piece turned out to be one of our favorites. It just took some time, discipline and consistency.

month calendar pexelsMy general rule for a new technique or approach is to try it for 30 days. Sometimes, I record our first day trying out the new suggestion out, and then compare it to how the band sounds 30 days later. If I followed the technique correctly, and the group sounds better, we kept it.

If not, we evaluate why it didn’t work. We either change something and try again or we move on to something else. I know that 30 days can be a long time to stick with something initially. I often get bored and want to abandon something new by day 15, but I work with my students on this, and we keep each other accountable. We understand that boredom and monotony can be a valuable part of the process.

The hardest thing to give up is our emotional attachment to warm-up exercises or rehearsal techniques that we grew up with. As a student, my band warm-ups were always an F Remington, scales and Mayhew Lake’s Bach chorale number 12. It took some rewiring of my brain to conclude that although these pieces felt good to me because they were familiar, it was not the only solution for my kids and my current teaching.

I teach at Joliet Central High School, the school I attended as a teenager, but the area has changed significantly. We now have band students from nearly 10 different sender schools in six districts and this doesn’t count the students who move in from other cities or states. I had to find and develop techniques and methods for the kids in front of me, not the bandmates I sat next to in the 1990s and 2000s.

Consider Multiple Mentors for Multiple Areas

Mentors are not one-size-fits-all. In fact, I have found it incredibly useful to have multiple mentors.

man two women pexelsMy mentors are great overall, but some excel in specific areas. When I have a marching band question, I contact a particular person. When I have a question concerning a situation specific to my school, I reach out to a friend who also works in a low-income/underserved school. I have another friend who doesn’t even work in music but who has been incredibly helpful with financial advice.

Thinking about changing jobs? Contact someone who has worked in a few different places. Maybe you have a work-life balance question. A colleague you know may have some helpful feedback in this area. Do you want to commission a piece for your ensemble but don’t know where to start? Take a look at some state and national convention programs and see who is premiering some commissioned pieces. Then, just email or call them with your questions.

Be careful about getting too many opinions about one area. I had questions in the past about some pretty big life decisions (or what I thought were big life decisions at the time…), and I contacted nearly everyone I knew. I wanted one answer, but I ended up getting more confused with feedback overload.

Ultimately, decisions regarding career choices, changing schools, family, etc., are up to you. Mentors, colleagues and friends can undoubtedly serve as a sounding board, but be careful of getting too much information, leading to paralysis by analysis.

Build Your Network

You are the one who has to do the work. However, you don’t live alone on an island. Ask for help because you don’t get more credit for figuring it out on your own. Expand your circle, seek specific feedback and implement advice from colleagues and mentors — you’ll find that with help, you can improve quicker than if you did this alone.

A Primer on Video Game Subscription and Streaming Services

The internet is a major part of our day-to-day lives, yet existence with the vast digital realm continues to be much like living in the Wild West. New options, new spaces, new ideas and new services seem to pop up on an almost daily basis. From the early days of email to the modern era of high-speed streaming, the internet is always evolving.

One of the most recent trends is the availability of video game subscription and streaming services. These give gamers the opportunity to access dozens (or even hundreds) of titles at any given time … usually for a fee. The games are streamed in real time, but some platforms also offer players the ability to download titles to their devices and continue to access them as long as they continue to subscribe. With a streaming service, one can theoretically play any game on any compatible device at any time — much like watching a TV show on Netflix® whenever you like via your phone, tablet or television.

We covered the pros and cons of discs versus game downloads in a previous posting, but there is much more to consider when discussing subscription and streaming services. In this article, we’ll describe the main features offered by several prime options. First, however, let’s start with some background.

THE EMERGENCE OF GAME STREAMING SERVICES

The first major video game streaming service was Google Stadia™, which was released in November of 2019. It offered gamers the chance to play anywhere via any device, dictated by Google’s servers. Ultimately, though, the venture failed to make the impact the company hoped, and was recently abandoned.

To date, no company has quite conquered the world of video game subscription and streaming services. Gamers, though, remain confident that one or more companies will eventually emerge as the leaders in the field, much like the most popular television and movie streaming services we have today. For now, though, internet speeds and limited controller compatibility are the main limiting factors. That said, let’s take a closer look at the main players in this arena.

Xbox™ Game Pass

This affordable service (packages start at just $9.99 a month) boasts a large library, which even includes titles from outside publishers. Subscribers can download both new and older games onto their Xbox One’s storage device, which means that, once the game is downloaded, even compromised internet speed is no longer a hindrance to gameplay. New games are made available immediately and the service is compatible with both Xbox consoles and personal computers. Soon, experts say, Game Pass users will be able to access and play these games seamlessly on cell phones and other devices as well.

Sony™ PlayStation® Now

Like Xbox Game Pass, this subscription service costs about $10 monthly and offers many legacy games that players will already have familiarity with due to Sony’s decades in the market. Subscribers can opt to stream or purchase games and they are compatible with PlayStation 4 (or higher) consoles and PCs. As with Game Pass, gamers can download titles onto their system, so they don’t have to rely on internet speeds for results.

Amazon Luna

The retail giant’s hat is officially in the ring. While this streaming service currently only offers fewer than a hundred games, it does offer some new titles and the “early access” price is just $5.99 a month. (Those interested in grabbing that deal will have to get an invitation to join.) While Luna has yet to gain much traction with gamers, that’s not to say Amazon won’t corner the market at some point in time.

Apple® Arcade

So many of us have Apple devices in our pockets. That’s why it was a no-brainer for Apple to create a service for gamers that’s compatible with those mobile devices. With over a hundred titles from well-known publishers, this is an easy-to-use and popular (almost by default) option that allows users to play games easily on their iPhones® and iPads®.

NVIDIA GeForce Now

Unlike other services that have their own library, this one is BYOG: bring your own game. It’s not a content service; instead, users must purchase games through a digital store like Steam or Uplay. The catch is the super-high-speed internet connection required for gameplay. But GeForce’s cloud-based processors allow gamers to run the title on any device, no matter their specs (old computers welcome!) — and in addition to subscriptions that start at $49.99 for six months, there’s also a free option, albeit with session length limited to an hour.

AntStream Arcade

Known for its retro gaming, this free streaming service is perfect for those players who never left the 1980s and its cherished arcades. Antstream offers a giant library of more than a thousand titles that can be played on your computer or on a smart TV equipped with an Amazon Fire Stick, NVIDIA Shield or Atari VCS™, as well as on the go via an Android™ mobile or tablet device. So take a walk down memory lane while you fight 8-bit ghosts and goblins!

Nintendo Switch Online

Here’s another streaming service that offers a nostalgic library. While it may not be as vast as some Nintendo fans may want, it only costs $20 per year — total. The service is compatible with the popular Nintendo mobile gaming system, the Nintendo® Switch™, which is a plus for many.

Humble Choice

This strictly PC-compatible subscription service is a favorite amongst gamers-in-the-know. This outfit is adept at finding and offering its users diamonds in the rough — those lesser-known, smaller games that sometimes end up as favorites — as well as bundles of games, books and software. It’s a tastemaker service as much as anything else, and socially responsible too: 5% of the affordable subscription fee ($11.99 monthly or $129 annually) goes to charity.

Google Stadia

As mentioned previously, this early offering gave users the ability to stream games on any device, from phone to television. In this way, it subverted and made unnecessary the traditional console. But it was also ahead of its time and has yet to catch up with expectations. Rumors abound about Stadia’s possible connection to YouTube in the future. The problem is that, to date, users need super-high-speed internet, with Ethernet, not Wi-Fi, recommended. That said, some believe both its service and slim gaming library will improve soon.

Netflix Games

Launched in November 2021, this could be the one everyone’s been hoping for — the service that puts all of the best aspects of the others into one perfect model. For one thing, gamers simply need a Netflix subscription to get started. For another, the titles are mobile-friendly (compatible with both iOS and Android devices) and are offered in many languages, defaulting to the user’s Netflix settings. Some require internet connection and others do not, but they are all child-safe (i.e., they’re not available on kids’ profiles unless you enter an overriding PIN). What the future holds for game streaming could well be wrapped up in Netflix … stay tuned to this space!

Respect: Honoring the Great Woman Songwriters of Our Time

Carole. Aretha. Dolly. Stevie. Joni. Carly. Ellie. Chrissie. Cynthia. Laura. Karla.

These women songwriters, with their stellar bodies of work, made unforgettable names for themselves. So much so that we’re actually able to identify them on a first name basis.

OK, with a few exceptions, perhaps. “Cynthia who?” you may be wondering. That would be Cynthia Weil, who wrote one of the most performed pop songs in history, “You’ve Lost That Loving Feeling,” with her life partner Barry Mann. You might not know her name but you know her songs. To me, she is royalty. As is “Karla” (Karla Bonoff, who penned a number of my favorite Linda Ronstadt songs) and “Laura”: Laura Nyro (“Save The Country,” “Eli’s Coming”).

If you happened to be around in the ’60s and ’70s when these gals stormed onto your favorite radio station and claimed their rightful territory, they most likely influenced the trajectory of your life and how you would come to regard things like unconditional love, jealousy, ego, motherhood, joy, heartbreak, make-ups, breakups, the passage of time, yellow taxis, working 9-to-5 and landslides. (And even if you weren’t there, you probably still feel their influence today.)

I know that they opened my eyes wider. They filled me with a sense that there’s something deeper than skin that we need to examine within ourselves.

I learned from them through their songs. For instance:

Carole (King) impressed upon me how necessary it would be to find a partner with whom I didn’t have to put on pretense because “natural” is the best way to feel with someone. That message, especially when belted out by Aretha (Franklin), was quite compelling.

And speaking of Aretha … she got me telling the people I love to call me the moment they get to wherever they’re going. We sleep better knowing they’re safe.

In words and melody, Dolly (Parton) painted a picture of how a girl might drop her defenses when her crush simply smiles that smile. That’s all it takes sometimes. And Dolly broke it down in a simple universal fact. Thanks, Dolly. I will always love you!

And let’s not forget Stevie (Nicks), who, in one of her many prescient moments, touched on the idea that even when we think we’re older we’ll look back one day and realize we were young. But time has a way of making us brave. It’s true. Thank you, Stevie, for your clarity and brutal honesty.

Joni (Mitchell) helped me look at love and life from all different angles, whether I was up in the clouds or driving across a parking lot in search of paradise. She also got me thinking about how the seasons come and go like carousels going ’round and that there’s nothing we can do to escape time.

Time, of course, is a popular subject for wise women, and Carly (Simon) taught me that anticipation is a lustful place. What would life be without something to look forward to? That’s a concept to which I was introduced via a song on a boombox in 1971: The state of longing is a luxurious window.

“Be My Baby,” my favorite Ellie (Greenwich) song, brought me so much joy singing in my car (along with the Ronettes) as soon as I got my driver’s license — top of my lungs, windows down. You can still catch me on the freeway doing the same when it comes on an oldies station.

Did someone say Chrissie? Chrissie (Hynde) has been rockin’ it for decades. Never gives up. Never gives in. Says and sings what’s on her brassy mind. I have extra special affection for Chrissie because anyone who can write their own massive hits and still choose to record a song I wrote gets extra worship. Thank you, thank you, thank you Chrissie.

These are the women whose voices were a profound influence on my personal coming of age. Whose vinyl I wore out (and sometimes bought two copies of). Who left an indelible impression on my youthful self and on the woman I was to become. Who formed the soundtrack of my life.

There’s a commonality here. These are all deep-thinking women, with rich histories they longed to share. In many cases, they faced uphill battles but they were persistent and had an unfailing belief in themselves. They had fires in their hearts and a desire to reach people like me, and to touch us with their unique view of the human condition.

You may have your own list of women songwriters whom you cherish and who will live on in your psyche as trail blazers and torch carriers — the ones who shape your universe. Taylor, Beyonce, Xtina, Mariah, Gaga. They’re also recognizable on a first name basis. That says something.

Let’s honor them all. Not just during Women’s History Month, but every month of every year.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

What are the Different Kinds of Tubas?

When it comes to brass instruments, there seems to be something of a hierarchy. Trumpets are bright and authoritative, always right out front. With their long slides, trombones are both visually arresting and fun to play. But tubas? Too often they are thought of as the kid Little League coaches stick out in right field. But, in actuality, the lowest-pitched instrument in the brass family plays a vital role.

There are concert tubas, marching band and jazz ensemble tubas; tubas with bells pointed upward, backward and frontward; tubas of different finishes and tuned to different pitches. In this article, we’ll describe the difference between them all … but first, a look at their origins and similarities.

ORIGINS

Tubas have a long and fascinating history. The first example of the instrument — the basstuba — was patented on September 12, 1835. However, there was a milestone event that predated this: the invention of valves in the 1820s. These allowed the player to easily change the length of internal tubing and thus significantly extend note range — a technological breakthrough that was not only swiftly incorporated into existing brass instruments like the trumpet and French horn but also led to the creation of several new instruments, including the tuba. The original basstuba incorporated five valves that were similar to modern piston valves (see the next section for more information).

The word “tuba” comes from the Latin word for “tube.” (The term has also been used for an ancient bronze instrument used in Greece and Rome, as well as a blanket term for any horn.) The original was called a “basstuba” since it offered a lower register than other horns of the era. Before the invention of valves, lower-register (valveless) instruments included the ophicleide, a long wide brass instrument invented in 1817 that used metal caps called “keys”; and the serpent, a long, windy tube-like instrument. Adolphe Sax’s low-register “saxhorns” were also popular around the inception of the basstuba. During the American Civil War, for example, saxhorns were common. Saxhorns that still exist today are the flugelhorn, baritone horn, the alto/tenor horn and the euphonium (more on those below).

PISTON AND ROTARY VALVES

When it comes to tubas today, there are two main types of valves: piston and rotary. Each alters the length of space that the air (or breath) must travel, which then has an effect on both the pitch and timbre of the note being played.

Rotary valves change the angle of a given tube, resulting in more internal space. Piston valves act much like the pistons in a car engine. Top-action piston valves move vertically and front-action piston valves move more horizontally. The advantage piston valves offer is “half-valve” playing, which experienced players can use to create “in-between” notes — something that’s almost impossible with rotary valves. The downside to piston valves is that they require more maintenance and regular oiling to keep freedom of movement consistent.

Most modern tubas offer three to six valves, with a few rare exceptions. Three-valve tubas are often used by beginners. The sousaphone (see below) also has three valves. More advanced tuba players use four- or five-valved instruments.

Yamaha offers many varieties of both rotary- and piston-valve tubas, including the YBB-641 B♭ tuba (which has rotary valves) and the YCB-822 C tuba (which has piston valves).

YBB 641
Yamaha YBB-641 B♭ tuba.
YCB 822
Yamaha YCB-822 C tuba.

SIMILARITIES

Tubas are most often made of brass that’s either unlacquered, lacquered or plated with another metal such as nickel, gold or silver. Sound is produced by buzzing your lips into the mouthpiece. Anyone (with normal lung capacity) is encouraged to give it a try!

The instrument is comprised of lengthy tubing and is made with a conical bore, meaning the tube’s diameter widens as it moves towards the bell. Tubas used in military bands historically had bells that pointed backwards. Tubas used in recording studios have bells pointed frontwards and tubas used in orchestras have bells pointed skyward.

Showing the scale based on a piano keyboard.

Today, the most common tubas are found in four pitches: B♭, C, E♭ and F, with each variety determined by the instrument’s tube length. Most modern music composed for the tuba is written in the bass clef, though some, like that for British-style brass bands, can be written in the treble clef.

B♭ TUBA

The tube of a B♭ tuba is the longest of the varieties listed here — it measures 18 feet (5.5 meters) long — and therefore it’s the lowest-pitched of the four. B♭ tubas are common in marching bands and full orchestras and are the instruments most beginners start on. However, they come in a range of weights, so factors like a player’s size and strength can determine which to choose. But no matter which he or she does, the tone and depth of sound of a B♭ tuba (also known as a BB♭ tuba) is unmistakable.

Tuba in brass.
Yamaha YBB-621 tuba.

C TUBA

While the B♭ tuba is the most common of the four, the C tuba comes in as a close second, and is mostly found in orchestras and wind ensembles. Its tube is 16 feet (4.9 meters) long and so a C tuba is a bit smaller and pitched slightly higher than its B♭ counterpart. Compared to B♭ tubas, C tubas (also known as a CC tubas) have a faster response time and a clearer tone. Both B♭ and C tubas can also be known as “contrabass tubas.”

C Tuba  YCB 826S
Yamaha YCB-826S C tuba.
C Tuba   YCB 621
Yamaha YCB-621 C tuba.

E♭ TUBA

The tube of an E♭ tuba is 13 feet (4 meters) long. As a result, the instrument often plays an octave above the BB♭ tubas. It is used in brass bands and some military bands, and is prized for its extended note range. The E♭ tuba is also a good solo instrument for experienced professional players who want an instrument that is even more responsive and clearer tonally than a C tuba.

Tuba in silver finish.
Yamaha YEB-321S tuba.

F TUBA

With an interior tube measuring 12 feet (3.7 meters) long, the F tuba is the shortest, clearest and highest-pitched of the four. Because of its high range, the instrument is often used by professional players as a solo instrument. In Europe, the F tuba is a standard orchestral staple. An F tuba is sometimes equipped with a fifth or even sixth valve to assist in attaining a lower range of notes.

Tuba with brass finish.
Yamaha YFB-621 tuba.

OTHER SIMILAR HORNS

Euphonium

This is a smaller instrument than any of the four tubas and offers a higher range than its counterparts — it’s essentially a B♭ tuba pitched an octave higher, but with a conical inner tube. The euphonium is also known as a “tenor tuba,” though traditionally tenor tubas are thicker and more tapered.

Baritone Horn

Usually equipped with three piston valves, this B♭ horn has the same tonal range as the euphonium; however, the timbre is brighter largely because a baritone’s inner tubes are considerably thinner. In the U.S., a euphonium with the bell and pistons facing forward is sometimes called a baritone to differentiate it from a true euphonium.

Sousaphone

Created by the famed American conductor and composer John Philip Sousa , the sousaphone looks much like a tuba and is featured prominently in marching bands, usually pitched to B♭. It’s a large, heavy instrument that wraps around a player’s body. The sousaphone incorporates three valves and has a large forward-facing bell that rests over the player’s right shoulder.

Cimbasso

Rare today, this historical instrument looks almost like a trombone bent at a 90-degree angle. It has the same range as an F tuba, though other versions exist to fit the range of BB♭, CC and E♭ tubas.

Subcontrabass Tuba

Even larger and weightier than BB♭ contrabass tubas, these varieties offer the lowest range, but are extremely rare.

Promotional banner.

How to Succeed as a Sole 6-12 Music Educator

You have been hired as the new high school band director — congratulations! It’s probably the beginning of summer, and you are about to start the process of building your marching band show and learning the ins and outs of football season at your school.

However, in addition to being the high school director, you are also the middle school director. The middle school stuff can wait until August, right? The answer is “no” … and, at the same time, “yes.” I have been a band director for 10 years in Alabama, and in seven of those years, I have been the sole band director for grades 6-12. I also work with a choir director who covers middle school and high school, too.

In my state, the majority of music programs are in this same situation; most are in rural or underfunded areas. As a result, there are a number of uphill battles that are immediately presented to you as a director. The main one being an underdeveloped program. Past directors, no matter how talented or hard-working, were usually in the job for a year or two at most, which means programs have to restart/rebuild every few years.

So, what can a sole director do? You must invest, plan, build and then invest again. If you go through these steps, you might be able to rest a little easier during that first year, and, most importantly, you will see the value of your hard work. Every student deserves the same musical and educational experience regardless of the number of directors, financial opportunities, program size or location.

Emotional Investment

Shelby County Winds EnsembleThe first thing you must do as a new director is to learn about the community, students, stakeholders and the general dynamics of the school. That’s what I did when I accepted the job at Shelby County High School in 2018. I soon discovered that I was in a great situation because my community is very tightknit (most music educators in small or rural areas will experience the same thing).

You might hear that too much community involvement is a bad thing, but that will only be the case if you allow it to be. If you go into the investment phase with the mindset that your program is the only thing that matters, you will be run out of town quickly. I was in charge of two schools with a total population of just under 1,000 students, and I knew that we would have lots of crossover with other programs, athletics and academics, which is wonderful! Your ability to work and collaborate with others will lead to a better program for your students.

My first few days on the job were critical. I set up meetings with my principals and band boosters, and I held a general meet-and-greet event where folks could get to know me and put a face with a name. These simple interactions gave me a better understanding of the community and the wants and needs of the program. My community had a rich tradition of band excellence, which they naturally wanted to continue, but what I heard most from students and parents was that they wanted newer things. Not necessarily new items, but new ideas — a freshness to the program.

Plan, Plan, Plan

After the initial investment phase, you then enter the planning phase. And let me be clear, planning never stops. When you plan for a school year for two schools with students at four to seven ability levels, you must always think about the next step and then have two or more backup plans. It’s challenging, but not impossible. Here are a few ideas I use when creating my plan for my program.

Music First — Always invest the majority of your planning into finding music that serves two purposes. The first is educational — the music should meet the needs of your program and your students. Secondly, the music must be engaging for your students and for you. I have selected music off a list of “essential” pieces, and they are usually the ones I dread teaching, which results in an underdeveloped plan and a poor performance. Choose music that you and your students will enjoy and that meets your educational goals.

perform nursing homePerform Often — No matter the age of your students, they should be performing. The typical model of fall, holiday, performance assessment and spring concerts truly doesn’t meet students’ ability to perform. It also leads to performance anxiety. To eliminate this, I try to schedule at least one performance each month after students’ first year of instruction. This could be as simple as a chamber group performing at a nursing home. The more students perform, the better they become at performing, and it increases their music-reading skills. My high school students will perform 12 times in various ensembles from November to January, and only one of those times is a full ensemble concert. These include multiple jazz performances at nursing homes and community events; our marching band performing in the city Christmas parade; and our chamber ensembles performing at the Alabama Music Educators Association conference in January. With each performance, your program’s footprint and advocacy expand. Every school board member and our superintendent know me because our music students are so visible in the public, and they often attend our full concerts. And we all know that their presence at concerts leads to more opportunities and more experiences for our students.

Trophies Do Not Matter — It will take some time for you and your students to accept this idea.  The final group to understand this will be the parents. The outcome or success of a performance should not be gauged by awards or trophies. If your students have progressed in their learning from where they started, then you have won. In 2019, our last full year before the pandemic, the band won almost every competition and scored higher than some of the top programs in the state. For the 2021-2022 school year, our return to a normal marching band season was incredibly difficult. More than half the band members were first-year performers, and many had never performed in a full concert. We received lower scores than in the past, but students began to buy into the idea of improvement as the ultimate goal. As a result, students who fought through the adversity of the pandemic have a greater love and appreciation for band and music.

Build Your Program

I am a firm believer that in order for your program to thrive, everyone must speak the same language. You must develop a system from the top down. What you want the top of the pyramid to know must be taught at the bottom of the pyramid, or at the beginning of the process. My hometown is known for high school football, and the reason for its success is that the youth teams run the same plays as the high school. Kids grow up within the culture, using the same language as the high school football system. When they make it to the high school team, they already know the playbook. Of course, there are variations of complexity of plays as they progress, but the basis is the same.

ShelbyCountyHigh performanceBuild Your System — The same concept works for music as you develop your own system. Being the only 6-12 director, using the same language from top to bottom makes my life easier. For example, I use the same method book series from beginner band all the way through high school. I also use the same methodology for counting rhythm. Whether you choose to count in the traditional method, Eastman Technique or in any other form, you must make it the same from bottom to the top. I started this process during my first year at SCHS, and now four years down the road, all grade levels count using the same system. Our rhythmic integrity has greatly improved and our students’ abilities have increased. This is part of building your system.

Call-Time System — When it comes to rehearsals and performances, I use a call-time system, where the call time is 15 minutes before the actual event. If call time is 3:30 p.m., then rehearsal begins at 3:45 p.m. This gives me and students leaders 15 minutes to do things such as begin sectional times, take attendance, make sure the facilities are ready for whatever activity we are about to do. We also use call time for travel. If we are departing at 6 p.m., then everyone is there no later than 5:45 p.m.  It took a few years to get everyone on board, but now it is second nature to the students. It has allowed for less stress on times we are leaving campus or when we are performing, which leads to less performance anxiety. This is part of building your system.

Open-Door Policy — Everyone says that they have an open-door policy, but my door is literally open all the time. My students know that my office is their safe place. My schedule works out so that I have lunch period off, and our school is split into three lunch waves. During all three lunch waves, there are anywhere from five to 15 students in my office eating lunch. We rarely talk about band, although music theory topics have come up; instead, we talk about their history, math and English classes, and we talk about life. I tutor kids on assignments they didn’t quite understand. I also just sit back and observe how they interact with each other. We laugh, we cry and we eat. We become a family. While this has nothing to do with the notes on the page, it means more than any time of the day for the development of the system. With this stronger connection to each other, we are able to work later in the day on music but do it with greater human interaction.

Recruit All the Time — The other way to build your program is to recruit every day. I make sure students know who I am by being present throughout the year. I visit our three elementary feeder schools three to four times a year, and each time I bring something different but deliver the same message: Join the band! The first time I visited an elementary school, there were a few “hey, I know you” moments. By the time students choose an elective for 6th grade, I know some of their names.

Spread the Word About Your Program — I also regularly post on our band’s social media accounts (Instagram and Facebook), which is another way to expand the footprint of our program. All my posts are positive about student achievements, and I tag all local accounts. As a result, I often have people in town say that they know what’s going on with the band because of social media. I also pitch everything we do to our local reporters. Last year, the band program was in the newspaper and on our local TV stations numerous times, including an interview with me on our ABC affiliate (Teacher of Month Interview). All this has brought us positive momentum. Currently, 20% to 30% of all incoming 6th graders join the band. By the start of the next school year, we should have 15%-20% of the middle school enrolled in band, which will only lead to an increase in high school participation in the future.

Investment for the Future

I was always told to “never smile your first year,” which is the worst attitude to have. There is good in everything that we do. You must find a way to smile, or you will soon be looking for another job. In a small community, find joy in the little victories, and they will lead to bigger victories. With that being said, I do apply the adage, “never take no for an answer,” but I have tweaked it to “never accept no as the only answer.”

Matthew Martindale wearing senior pins With every big decision I have taken to our administration, I always have a back-up plan. Your administrators are there to support you, not to fight with you, and if they are fighting against you, then you might need to look in the mirror. Your top priority is your program, and you must fight for it. But you must realize that you are just one program at your school. If your plan is rejected, don’t be discouraged. Have a back-up plan or be willing to work with administrators on a revised plan. Or, come back at a later date and say, “Remember when I wanted to do XYZ — what are your thoughts on it now?” You may be shocked, as I have been, at how administrators are more willing to approve, or at least discuss, the original plan. Team-building and collaboration are essential.

This past season at the Alabama Marching Championships, I spoke with another director who is in the same situation as me. She, however, has been the director at her schools for almost 15 years. We agreed that our jobs as the lone director is hard … really hard, but our conversation was more about the positives of it all.

As the sole director, you can shape your entire program, see students grow up, learn family members’ names and stories, and ultimately, you are more than a director/teacher. You are a part of the community!

Whenever I am struggling with hardships and the workload, I think about that conversation and know that I am not alone. We still have the best job in the world, and there are a lot of us out there teaching all grades all day. Let’s boost each other up and let our students flourish in a positive musical experience!

Dollar Store Manipulatives for Elementary Students

It’s no secret that elementary school music teachers are usually on a tight budget. But before music teachers throw their hands up in the air, they should add these music manipulatives into their classrooms. The following DIY learning tools are economical and can provide countless hours of instruction.

Because of inflation, many of us now call these discount retailers “Dollar Twenty-Five” stores; however, these items are still good deals for your classroom.

Rhythm Flashcards

Rhythm cards can be made with oversized flashcards and a Sharpie. For younger elementary students, start with ta, ti-ti, and ta-a flashcards (quarter note, eighth note and half note cards). Because the large flashcards are so sturdy, they will last the entire school year without having to laminate them.

ball string unsplashString

String? Yes, you read that right. String can be used in spider games, such as the song “Little Spider Spins All Day.” I don’t remember where I found this song and activity, but it’s a fun one!

The song goes like this: “Little spider spins all day, spins while all the others play”

Solfege: DRMFSLS SLSFMRD

Students form a circle and start to sing the song. The teacher should hold on to the end of the string and hand the ball of string to a student, or spider. He or she will take the ball of string and go across the circle (i.e., spinning a web) and will hand another student the string. Then, the students switch places. The first spider takes the string while the other spider takes the ball of string to give to another spider on the other side of the circle. Each time the song is sung, another student will “spin” his or her web. By crisscrossing the circle, the students are creating a physical web.

Make sure to tell the students to hold on to their piece of string tightly, otherwise, you’ll end up with a tangled mess! After all the students have had a turn, they lay down their “web,” and step back and look at their creation.

Solfege Flashcards

Similar to rhythm cards, oversized flashcards can also be used to make simple solfege manipulatives.

For kindergarten, start by doing high and low, or sol and mi. For every grade level, add a few new notes from the scale (refer to Orff’s pedagogy for which ones to add).

Music flashcards are one of the easiest manipulatives that can be added to your classroom’s daily music warm-up routine. These exercises can even be student-led by the time it hits mid-year. While each grade level will have a different set of flash cards, student-lead solfege quizzes can be beneficial from kingergarten through 6th grade.

Make-It Blocks

Make-It Blocks are similar to Legos. With a permanent marker, draw rhythms that are one beat on each block. Your students can build rhythms as they connect their blocks together.

Plain wood blocks can also be used, but they are easily knocked over.

Letsplaykidsmusic.com has a great demographic that shows examples of what you can draw on the blocks:

Magnets

Magnets are one of my favorite tools to use in primary school when teaching the concepts of high and low. Unlike stickers or Velcro, magnets are much more sturdy and will last for years.

Some teachers like to draw or paint the solfege syllables directly on the magnets, but I prefer to keep them plain so that any magnet can be placed in any spot on the staff. One game I play with kids is for them to place the magnets on the whiteboard based on what I sing (“Was it high-low-high or low-high-low?”).

Pointing Stick

Don’t underestimate the power of a tool as simple as a pointing stick. Pointing sticks can be handed to students who are on their best behavior. They will get a chance to keep time in front of the class or lead other music-related activities. It is the best manipulative and classroom management tool I have found at the Dollar Store, hands down.

popsicle sticksPopsicle Sticks

Popsicle sticks can be used for rhythm-building exercises for mid- to upper-elementary schoolers. To use the popsicle sticks for rhythms, use one single (vertical) popsicle stick for a quarter note. For eighth notes, use a horizontal stick to form note beams. Check out this YouTube video of a popsicle sticks rhythm game.

Plastic Hand Clappers

These loud and goofy gag gifts can be used in your classroom. And while you may not like them because they’re so loud, having a bright neon clapper in each student’s hand makes it very obvious who is and isn’t participating.

Plastic hand clappers can be bought as a class set and used to read rhythms. Put the rhythms on your whiteboard or smartboard and guide the students as they clap along. Clappers make a great assessment too, as you can easily tell who is missing the rests and who is getting the entire rhythm correct.

You can also use hand clappers to teach proper concert etiquette. Practice by showing your students a classical, multi-movement work. You can teach students that an end of a movement is more like a comma, and the end of the piece is like a period. Hand clappers are an excellent preparation for a symphony field trip.   

playdough unsplashVisual Music: Play Dough, Styrofoam Putty and Pipe Cleaners

What do play dough, slime and pipe cleaners have to do with music? They can be used to create visual interpretations of sound.

Have students make play dough and putty sculptures in response to a piece of music. Pipe cleaners, on the other hand, can be used to create a melodic shape, which can then be interpreted by the teacher or even sung by the class. As the pipe cleaner goes up, voices go up, as it comes down, the voices go back down, and so on.

This energetic video by Angie McDaniel is a great way to prep students for using pipe cleaners as a vocal warm up.

Props

Some props at discount retailers can be used for singing games. For example,

Costumes

While you likely won’t be able to meet all your costuming needs at a Dollar Store, you can find more than you might think! The last time I was in my local store, I saw animal masks (dogs, foxes, cats) and butterfly wings. If you are practicing for an upcoming musical, get your costumes early! The more practice you have with them, the better.

Regular classroom lesson plans can also incorporate costumes. My students loved reenacting “Peter and the Wolf.

Oftentimes, costuming is incorporated into the state standards. If you are looking to make your own costumes for an event, you can also find small T-shirts in different colors. Use your sewing machine and get creative!

slinky pexelsSensory Tools

Apart from manipulatives, discount stores are excellent sources for sensory tools that you can use to make a sensory station. Items such as Slinkies, squeezable toys, bubble poppers and pop tubes can all be found for about $1.25 each.

Go Shopping!

You don’t need a big budget or fancy equipment to make your classroom an engaging space that is full of hands-on learning tools. The next time you are running low on ideas and petty cash, check out your local discount retailer and try out the above ideas!

10 Micropractices for Better Mental Health

Influential architect Ludwig Mies van der Rohe famously said, “Less is more.” And luckily, this phrase is as helpful to busy music educators as it is to minimalist midcentury architects.

As nice as it would be to stretch through a 90-minute yoga class, luxuriate during an hour-long massage or even escape on a week-long retreat to Costa Rica, these options aren’t realistic for many people. That’s where micropractices come in. These short, super-easy practices are designed to provide uplifting energy, release anxiety and disrupt negative patterns. View them as little mental-health snacks, if you will.

1. Hum

The vagus nerve, also called cranial nerve X, runs from the brain down the neck and chest to the heart, lungs and into the digestive tract. It’s responsible for heart rate, among many other roles, and stimulating the vagus nerve helps the body know it’s okay to relax. Humming and singing both stimulate this nerve, creating a simple way to relieve anxiety, stress and fear. Here’s a video that explains how to activate the vagus nerve using humming with “mmm,” “ahh” and “ooo” sounds to induce a relaxation response.

2. Drop 3

People often hold tension in three key areas: the jaw, shoulders and abdomen. Focus on these spots by “dropping 3.” Inhale deeply and then as you exhale, release any tension you are holding in your jaw. Then do the same for the remaining two areas.

3. Stare at a Wall

According to Rahaf Harfoush, author of the creativity-based book “Hustle & Float,” our minds need more real rest than we give them. “What our brains actually need is periods of destimulation, which means no screens, no emails, no audiobooks. Your brain needs a second to breathe, to catch up, to integrate all the content that we’ve consumed,” she told NPR. She suggests literally staring at a wall now and again, for up to 15 minutes.

woman jogging4. Take a Trot

If staring at a wall for 15 minutes doesn’t sound appealing, try a 15-minute jog. According to a 2018 research study led by Fabien D. Legrand, this brief period of exercise boosts energy, memory, mood and cognitive function. The research was done on “moderate intensity” jogging, but lots of other research says that a good walk is helpful, too. Walking reduces stress, anxiety and fatigue, and may ward off depression, according to the British nonprofit organization Walking For Health.

5. Get Specific

Researchers like Robert Emmons, Ph.D. have explored gratitude and found it leads to better sleep, heart health and even obtaining goals. Turbo-charge a short gratitude practice by being super-specific. For example, if you keep a journal, you might write one sentence, such as “I’m grateful for all the beautiful azalea blooms I see on my way to school.” This helps keep a daily gratitude practice fresh, rather than just another thing to get done on the to-do list.

6. Declutter One Drawer

If you think your messy desk is a sign of genius, well, who I am to argue? But according to research by Stephanie McMains and Sabine Kastner, visual stimuli — like cluttered surfaces — compete with our brain’s processing ability, making it literally harder to think. Truth is, our brains like order and the ability to focus, and having a cleaner space around us lowers cortisol, the stress hormone. Since redoing your entire life is a tall order, create just one “zone of tranquility” at a time. Maybe it’s the produce drawer in the fridge, a toiletries drawer in the bathroom or your top desk drawer at school. Then take on one cabinet shelf, etc. Steadily, your home or classroom will become tidier.

stack books unsplash7. Put Down that Book

Reading for just six minutes can reduce stress levels by 68%, according to cognitive neuropsychologist David Lewis’ research at the University of Sussex. However, some people struggle to read for an interesting reason: They feel guilty not reading a book all the way through and get stuck. It’s better to spend your precious time reading books that are either pleasurable or are sparking your true interest. Still feeling bad? Librarians gave six reasons why it’s fine to stop reading a book and move on to another.

8. Breathe Some Fire

Pranayama, or manipulation of the breath, has been shown to decrease stress and improve cardiovascular function. There are many ways to practice pranayama, such as slow alternate nostril breathing, deep breathing or panting like a dog. Here’s one to try: Breath of Fire, popular in Kundalini yoga teachings, can be done in as little as a three-minute session. Here’s a video tutorial on how to do Breath of Fire properly and safely.

9. Roll on a Spiky Ball

Keep a spiky massage ball under your desk, and during breaks, give a quick roll to massage your feet. Physical therapists use these balls to relieve issues such as plantar fasciitis, but according to the Mayo Clinic, “Several studies indicate that reflexology [applying pressure to the hands or feet] may reduce pain and psychological symptoms, such as stress and anxiety, and enhance relaxation and sleep.” You can also use a tennis ball, golf ball or small foam roller. Spend 2 to 3 minutes per foot, applying as much pressure as is tolerable.

blow bubble pexels10. Chew a Piece of Gum

Violet Beauregarde, a character in “Charlie and the Chocolate Factory,” gave gum-chomping a bad rap. But she may have been on to something, as chewing gum reduces stress, according to research. “Overall, it would appear that chewing gum attenuates the sensory processing of external stressors and inhibits the propagation of stress-related information in the brain,” explains one published study by Andrew P. Smith. So, chew a piece of sugar-free gum for a quick blast of relaxation. Blowing a big pink bubble the size of your face, however, is probably best done after band practice.

The 10 Best Basketball Movies of All Time

With March upon us, it’s time for some basketball fun. Break out the snacks and beverages and fire up your home theater, because it’s not only about the tournaments, it’s also about some great hoop-related movies. Here are 10 of the best of all time.

1. Space Jam

This live action/animated comedy stars none other than the great Michael Jordan playing himself. In addition to supporting roles from Theresa Randle and Wayne Knight, you get to hear the voices of Danny DeVito, Billy West and Kath Soucie. The movie takes a fun look at the period between Jordan’s retirement in 1993 and his return in 1995, but this time around he enlists Looney Tunes characters in a basketball game against visiting aliens! Find out where to stream it here.

2. Hoosiers

With a score by Jerry Goldsmith, this 1986 release stars Gene Hackman as a new basketball coach with a troubled past. Co-star Dennis Hopper received an Oscar® nomination for his role and Barbara Hershey helped round out an exceptionally strong cast. Hoosiers has been recognized by the United States National Film Registry as a “culturally, historically or aesthetically significant” movie. Find out where to stream it here.

3. Love & Basketball

Produced by Spike Lee and Sam Kit, this cult classic from 2000 tells the story of two Los Angeles neighbors who are chasing careers in basketball. The main characters, Quincy McCall (played by Omar Epps) and Monica Wright (Sanaa Lathan) intertwine struggles in life with their love for the game … as well as their love for each other. Find out where to stream it here.

4. He Got Game

Another film from director Spike Lee, this 1998 sports drama stars Denzel Washington and Ray Allen. Washington plays Jake Shuttlesworth, whose son (played by Allen) is the top-ranked basketball prospect in the country. Shuttlesworth is in prison for accidentally killing his wife, but is released on parole in order to convince his son to play for the governor’s alma mater. Interestingly, football legend Jim Brown plays a parole officer. Find out where to stream it here.

5. Hoop Dreams

This compelling documentary follows two African American high school students as they are recruited by a high school with a top-flight basketball program and given the opportunity to pursue their dreams of turning pro. Back in 1994, when the film was first released, critics Gene Siskel and Roger Ebert gave it “Two Thumbs Up” and the New York Times added it to their Best 1000 Movies Ever list. Find out where to stream it here.

6. Glory Road

This sports drama is based on the true story of the events leading to the 1966 NCAA® Division Basketball Championship between the University of Kentucky and Texas Western College. Starring Josh Lucas, Derek Luke and Jon Voight, it explores the race relations of the era. The film won a 2006 ESPY Award for Best Sports Movie and featured a soundtrack from musician Trevor Rabin. Find out where to stream it here.

7. Semi-Pro

Sometimes you just need a good laugh and Semi-Pro delivers just that, with an all-star cast that includes Will Ferrell, Woody Harrelson and Andre Benjamin. The plot revolves around singer Jackie Moon (Ferrell), who buys a basketball team with money from his one hit song. This fun film features lots of cameos, too, from the likes of Patti LaBelle, Kristen Wiig, Jason Sudeikis … and a 700-pound grizzly bear. Find out where to stream it here.

8. Coach Carter

This 2005 film, starring Samuel L. Jackson, is based on the true story of Ken Carter, a Richmond, California high school basketball coach. The real coach Carter made the news in 1999 for suspending his basketball team, which was undefeated at the time, for bad academic scores. His new contract with the team required a C+ average from his players and a requirement that they sit in the front row while attending classes. The movie version is all about team pride and is an inspirational and entertaining view. Find out where to stream it here.

9. Blue Chips

Directed by William Friedkin, this 1994 release stars Nick Nolte as a college coach doing whatever it takes to get new players for his team. Shaquille O’Neal makes an appearance as a blue chip prospect that Nolte is after, along with Anfernee “Penny” Hardaway. Lots of action and drama ensues with a nationally televised game against college basketball legend Bobby Knight’s Indiana team. Find out where to stream it here.

10. BASEketball

This wacky comedy, directed and co-written by David Zucker, stars Trey Parker, Matt Stone, Jenny Parker and Ernest Borgnine, and features guest appearances from great sports figures like Reggie Jackson, Kareem Abdul-Jabbar and Dale Earnhardt. It follows two slackers who, after being shunned at a high school reunion, invent a game that combines baseball and basketball. The adventures begins when a local businessman helps the two create the National BASEketball League (NBL). Find out where to stream it here.

 

Ready to watch some great basketball-centric TV shows? Check out this blog posting.

Spotlight on Second-Generation Yamaha Revstar Guitars

I love demonstrating the latest Yamaha guitars at trade shows. These events allow me to interact with the Yamaha, Line 6 and Ampeg teams, as well as with dealers and fellow guitar players. At the 2020 Winter NAMM show, I was invited to a private gathering to “test drive” some prototypes for a planned new series of Revstar guitars. It was exciting and inspiring to get a sneak peek at what lay ahead, but details of those new implementations could not be discussed with anyone … until now.

I’ve been working with the original Revstar guitar lineup since 2017, so I feel I have a unique perspective. Having just spent a couple of weeks playing and recording two of the new second-generation models, I’d like to share with you my impressions of these exciting upgrades. First, though, let’s talk about the new features.

New Revstar Features

Staggered rows of beautiful electric guitars laying flat with strings up in a variety of colors.
The new Revstar lineup.

The Revstar line has been streamlined into three main categories: Professional (RSP20), Standard (RSS20) and Element (RSE20).

All second-generation Revstar models feature chambered mahogany bodies, mahogany neck-through body design, rosewood fingerboards, jumbo frets (stainless steel on Professional and Standard models), humbucking or P90 pickups, new gloss finishes and satin finished necks that match the body color. They also all sport a set of lovely ivory-colored tuners that complement the unique headstock shape and striking Yamaha logo.

RSE20 HEADSTOCK Resize L
RSS20 HEADSTOCK Resize R

The RSP02T and RSS02T Professional and Standard models feature the original 02T tailpiece, and there are also left-hand Element and Standard models available (the RSE20L and RSS20L).

Electronics

Revstar Element models retain the first-generation “dry switch” feature on the tone control. This pull-pot effectively filters low-end frequencies for a cleaner tone. I particularly like this sound for rhythm guitar parts.

Closeup of the body of an electric guitar.

Professional and Standard Revstars employ a new five-way selector switch (shown above) in combination with a unique passive boost on the tone control. When the tone control is pressed in, the five-way selector switch toggles between the bridge and neck pickups. However, positions two and four engage a capacitor circuit that slightly delays the output of the opposite pickup, resulting in a subtle phase shift. The resulting tone is similar to the familiar “out of phase” sound we often hear from guitars with single-coil pickups, but rarely found on instruments with humbucking pickups.

Pulling up on the tone control engages the “focus” switch — essentially a passive boost that cuts the highs while boosting the low and mid frequencies to produce a sound similar to that of overwound pickups.

New Finishes

Colors in the Standard line-up include Black (shown below), Flash Green, Swift Blue and Vintage White. The tailpiece edition of the Standard lineup (the RSS02T) clocks in with Black, Hot Merlot, Sunset Burst and Swift Blue. (The latter two colors are also available in Professional Series Revstars.)

Beautiful electric guitar propped up on a leather chair in a sound studio.
RSS20 in Black.

All Element models feature matte-finished double-stripe “café racer” detail through the middle of the gloss-finished body — a subtle but unique addition. These guitars come in four new colors: Black, Vintage White, Swift Blue and Neon Yellow (shown below).

Striking neon yellow electric guitar propped on leather chair with sound studio in background.
RSE20 in Neon Yellow.

My Impressions

The body dimensions in all second-generation models are slightly larger than the original solid-body Revstar. This allows the guitar to balance well and reduces some of the overall weight. Even when played for extended periods of time, the instrument never feels too heavy or uncomfortable.

The new neck profile and stainless-steel jumbo frets are some of the best I’ve ever encountered. The string spacing seems perfect for my hand size and personal playing style. Navigating the length of the fretboard is super-fast and smooth due to the “dryness” of the satin landscape.

The tuned, chambered body actually resonates like a semi-acoustic guitar, adding a nice “bounce” to the picking attack and a roundness to the tonality. Chords ring longer, and single-note passages generate pleasing upper-harmonic content within the sustaining tones. The humbucking pickups articulate dynamic touch, and faithfully reproduce what you feel and hear from the acoustic resonance of the guitar.

I like the simplicity of three-way switching and the bass filter (dry switch) on the Element guitars, but the new five-way pickup selector and focus switch on the Professional and Standard Revstars add a beautiful set of twenty onboard tonal variations. My favorite tones were with the focus switch engaged, as I prefer the softening of the upper frequencies along with the pronounced mid-range and low-end bump those settings produced.

I really appreciate the tuning stability of these new Revstar guitars too. The carbon-reinforced neck on my RSS20 allowed for prolonged bending and perfectly intonated complex chords, as you can see and hear in the videos below.

The Videos

These two videos will give you a good sense of how the new Revstar guitars sound, along with a feel for how they can sit in the mix with other instruments. (The only piece of outboard gear used is a Line 6 Helix modeling processor.) The isolated clean crunch and bluesy pickup tones show off the unique character of the guitar, and I also demonstrate the various switching options for rhythm and lead guitar playing.

The Wrap-Up

Revstar guitars hold a special place in the hearts of guitar players looking for a unique and expressive instrument. I certainly became an advocate and poster-child for the RS720B and RS502T, my favorite first-generation Revstar models.

The second-generation Revstars retain the essence of that legacy, but refine, define and elevate the original visual appeal, playability and tonality to a whole new level. I think there’s a Revstar in the new lineup for any discerning guitar player looking for something special.

Personally, I have my eye on the RSP02T in Swift Blue. Just sayin’!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

What is Lo-Fi?

The events of the last two years have revealed a dichotomous new musical era. In one way, technology has never been more prevalent. At the same time, people have never been more isolated. But that reality has a silver lining: it’s helped create a renewed love affair with Lo-Fi.

The crackle and delightful imprecisions of the music of the past is drawing millions of new listeners. In this article, we’ll tell you exactly what Lo-Fi means, why it’s so popular and where it came from … as well as where you can find the best examples of these kinds of sounds.

WHAT DOES LO-FI MEAN?

“Lo-Fi” is simply short for “low-fidelity” — a term for music in which the listener can hear imperfections like crackles, scratches, pops, out of tune strings or other things that might otherwise be considered imperfect. These have always existed in older recordings or, more recently, in DIY recordings. But today, there is a renewed appreciation for them.

Many associate the resurgence in Lo-Fi fandom to the renewed popularity of YouTube™ communities like Chillhop, LoFi Girl, and Oldies playing in a coffee shop and it’s raining, as well as Spotify playlists like lofi hip hop music. These online resources play popular contemporary music as well as oldies; not only are fans drawn to familiar sounds, in the case of the latter they enjoy the memories associated with them too.

Many of these YouTube channels can stream lo-fi music in real time, like a traditional radio station. They also offer the added bonus of an online forum in the comments section where fans can “hang out” together, talk about the music and share personal stories. Because the music is often instrumental and calm, it doesn’t distract from a passive chat.

THE HISTORY OF LO-FI

Lo-Fi sounds have their origin in both old-time radio and in outdated audio formats like cassette tapes and 8-track cartridges. In the waning years of the 20th century, some musicians began to tend toward earthier sounds, rebelling against the synthesizer-saturated ’80s and the oncoming computer domination of both audio and modern culture in general. Punk, grunge, hip-hop and other subgenres all embraced that sonic sensibility.

It’s important to understand that “Lo-Fi” is not a type of music unto itself. For that reason, it can be applied to nearly every genre; for example, there’s Lo-Fi rock, rap, hip-hop, even jazz. Modern hip-hop producers like J Dilla and Q-Tip have helped to make these fuzzy, nostalgic sounds popular for contemporary audiences.

In this context, Lo-Fi refers to how the music was recorded or mixed, which can involve the use of rudimentary equipment, the creation of purposeful “mistakes” and the addition of ambient environmental sounds like a crackling fire or raindrops on a window. There are even “bit crusher” plug-ins for DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) software that reduce the resolution of digital recordings so they sound more like they came from the 1980s than the 21st century.

Today, Lo-Fi music, especially when it comes to hip-hop-oriented sounds, often features drum loops, jazz chords and recognizable vintage song samples. Songs recorded in the first half of the 20th century are also popular — genres like swing and Dixieland jazz — especially when combined with ambient sounds from the era. Some YouTube playlists earn millions of streams.

HOW BEST TO ENJOY LO-FI MUSIC

One of the most beloved aspects of these playlists, particularly those that are broadcast in real-time, is the community that has organically amassed around them. These provide calming, supportive, like-minded spaces to engage with other music fans while enjoying Lo-Fi. Especially in times of stress, the familiarity and nostalgia found in these sounds soothes and comforts.

Another reason people flock to Lo-Fi music is that it can be enjoyed passively, while doing other things. The songs are familiar, the recordings often mild and mellow, so there is nothing the brain needs to pay direct attention to if a listener is otherwise occupied. That means you can listen to Lo-Fi while studying, working, cooking or when doing other things around the house. Some therapists are even suggesting that their clients take advantage of the calming nature of Lo-Fi.

As a bonus, many of the YouTube Lo-Fi channels incorporate familiar, simple imagery: a couple sitting at a diner counter; someone sleeping cozily in their bed; a “LoFi girl” studying with her cat on the window (a meme created by Colombian artist Juan Pablo Machado). Last but not least, engaging with the beloved sounds of the past can offer a unique type of music education: learn while you listen instead of the more usual “listen while you learn.”

 

Looking for more Lo-Fi? Check these out:

Chill LoFi Sound Jazz Hip Hop Beats Radio

Chill Vibes – Lofi hip hop mix

Oldies playing in another room, it’s a great night

Oldies music playing in another room and it’s raining

The Advantages of Parallel Processing

We’ve covered the basics of compression and saturation in previous Recording Basics blog postings. This time around, let’s look at an alternative way of applying such effects — a technique called parallel processing. We’ll discuss how it works and when it’s good to use it, and we’ll provide step-by-step instructions for setting it up yourself.

Not All Wet

When you apply an effect to a track or group of tracks (a Group Track in Steinberg Cubase), you have a couple of different ways to do so. One option is to open the effects plug-in on an insert slot on the track itself. That’s referred to as serial processing. The term comes from the fact that audio is fed directly from the track through the effect, which processes 100 percent of the signal, as shown in the illustration below:

Graphic illustrating concept.
Serial processing.

Alternatively, you can use an auxiliary send (a feature found in all DAW mixers) to route signal from the source channel to a dedicated effects channel called an auxiliary return (also known as an “aux” return or, in Cubase, an FX channel). Here, unlike an insert, you’re not processing 100 percent of the audio. Instead, you’re able to use the send and return controls to blend in as much or as little of the effect as you want along with the original dry track:

Graphic illustrating concept.
Parallel processing.

In a parallel setup, if the plug-in you’re using has a mix control (wet/dry knob), be sure to set it to 100 percent wet:

View of front panel with dial indicated.
In a parallel setup, set the mix control to 100%.

Things like compression and saturation are most commonly configured as serial effects because they’re meant to change the character of the entire sound. Reverb, delay and modulation effects are more likely to be applied in parallel because you typically want to blend only a little bit of their signal along with your source track. However, that’s not always the case. Let’s take a look at the exceptions to this “rule.”

Parallel Compression

Parallel compression — sometimes called New York Compression because it originated on the New York City studio scene — is a simple enough concept. Instead of inserting a compressor directly on a track, you put it on an auxiliary return like you would with reverb or delay. That means you’ll be blending the uncompressed dry audio with the compressed version rather than compressing the entire signal.

The basic purpose of compression is to attenuate any audio that goes above a certain level, known as threshold. By squashing down the peaks, you’re reducing the track’s dynamic range — the difference between the loudest and softest parts. Doing so lets you turn the track up higher because the reduced peaks are no longer as loud in comparison to the rest of the track.

Those peaks are the transient portion of each sound or hit — the “attack” portion of an audio event like a note or a drum hit. With the transients lowered, the sound will be less punchy and, therefore, less impactful … but with the reduced dynamic range, you can turn the instrument higher in the mix and accentuate the more “roomy” parts of the sound that occur after the transient. However, particularly if the attack time of the compression is too fast, the sound can almost get a little “mushy,” When applied to drums, they can start to sound as if they were being played by a soft beater rather than a hard wooden drumstick.

Parallel compression helps alleviate this issue. By blending heavily compressed audio with uncompressed audio, you can reduce the dynamic range while maintaining more control over the transients. When applied to percussive sources like drums, you can create a more aggressive and ambient sound.

Let’s have a listen to how this works, starting with an uncompressed stereo drum mix:

Compare it to this clip, where the drums are processed with parallel compression. Notice that the sustain portion of each hit is accentuated without losing the punch of the transient:

Three Parallel Compression Configurations

There are three different ways of setting up parallel compression. The first, as previously mentioned, is by using an aux send and return. This is a good approach to take if you want to parallel process multiple tracks. Here’s how to do it:

1. Create an aux return track (FX track in Cubase) and insert a compressor on it. Set the compressor for extremely heavy compression (low threshold, high ratio, fast attack time).

2. Configure an aux send and route it to the aux return track on the channel or channels that you’re going to compress. Many DAWs have the aux sends already configured; you just have to route them to the aux return channel you’re using.

3. Turn up the aux send until you’re hearing the desired amount of compression.

The second way of achieving parallel compression is to use a duplicate track. This is the preferred method if you’re applying the effect to multiple signals, where using aux sends could create a clutter of extra tracks. Here’s how to do it:

1. Make a copy of the source track and start with its fader down all the way.

2. Insert a compressor on the duplicate track and crush it with a heavy setting.

3. As you’re playing back the song, slowly raise the level of the compressed track until you hear the desired sound.

Screenshot.
Duplicate a track and heavily process the copy.

Finally, if your compressor has a mix control, such as the Vintage Compressor in Cubase, you can accomplish parallel compression by following these steps:

1. Insert the compressor on the track.

2. Create a setting that’s overly heavy with a lot of gain reduction (try -15dB to -20dB) and a relatively fast attack.

3. Turn down the mix control as the song plays until the balance between the compressed and uncompressed sound is to your liking.

This “mix knob” method is particularly handy for parallel processing an entire mix on the master bus.

Parallel Saturation

Saturation effects such as overdrive, distortion or fuzz benefit from parallel processing in much the same way: they allow you to keep more of your transients while still bringing in the saturated sound.

The setup is identical to parallel compression, except that you’ll be using a saturation plug-in instead. Note that saturation by its nature reduces transients to some degree, so you’re getting some compression as well.

Here’s an example using a recording of a cajón — a box-shaped wooden percussion instrument played by slapping the front or rear faces with the hands. This first audio clip is without any distortion:

Here’s that same track with a distortion plug-in inserted:

Finally, here’s the track with parallel distortion from a plug-in on an aux track:

It’s a subtle difference, but you can hear more of the transients on the parallel distorted version — especially if you listen on headphones.

Another place you might want to try parallel saturation is on the master bus. This will give your whole mix just a tiny bit of saturation to make it feel more energetic. However, you have to go easy when using it that way, or your mix will lose punch.

Over and Out

Parallel compression and saturation aren’t superior to their serial counterparts, they’re just different. Sometimes the difference is subtle, but sometimes — particularly when you’re trying to preserve transients — it can be significant. Experiment with both methods, and you’ll get a feel for which approach works best in various mixing scenarios.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

 

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Build a Culture of Excellence

Students who believe in their ability to perform at a high level are more likely to achieve remarkable things.

When students see results as a performer, they develop trust in their instructors. Music educators’ ability to take their students to a level that they may not even see as possible hinges on committing to a process that requires patience and delayed gratification. Directors may not see instant results, but if they can see progress over the long term or find fulfillment in the total impact, that sense of accomplishment will continue to breed success down the road.

“The Little Blue Band That Could”

The Little BlueBand That CouldIn 2008, Claudia Taylor Johnson High School (CTJ) in San Antonio, Texas, opened, splitting from Ronald Reagan High School shortly after its band placed second at Bands of America Grand Nationals. Many of our upperclassmen did not have a choice to remain at Reagan, and they were highly discouraged moving away from such an incredible band program to start over at a new school with so many unknowns.

Although the first two seasons were challenging, the younger students in the band who did not have the same connection with Reagan were endlessly optimistic. Many underclassmen nicknamed the marching band “The Little Blue Band that Could,” playing off the classic children’s book, “The Little Engine that Could.” As the band improved during those early years, the energy and enthusiasm spread quickly. While the students weren’t chanting “I think I can, I think I can,” our staff made a collective effort to build up our students to move from thinking they could be great to knowing they could.

The Big Picture

To build a culture of excellence, we constantly met with students in those years to talk about specific big picture ideas, including:

  • The importance of structure and organization: Protocols, policies and procedures can help students thrive in rehearsals and around the band hall. Have a process for everything students do. Consider smaller details like how they line up water jugs and instrument cases along the front sideline of the field to larger details like what they do before they play, such as a “set” or “ready” position. The structure will help keep rehearsals moving forward during the more challenging months of the year and will also maintain a professional environment.
  • Claudia Taylor Johnson High School band's first rehearsal What excellence looks and sounds like: Consider watching videos or playing audio recordings for students of professional groups, as well as great groups their own age. Students will learn to admire professional recordings, but they can learn as much from listening and watching great examples of their peers performing.
  • Why commitment is important: Students must learn to finish what they start. Help students learn to rest when they get tired, not to quit.
  • What it means to push through boredom: As Joe Dixon, one of CTJ’s brass instructors, often reminds us, “Children need to learn to be bored.” Students have phones at their disposal all the time and can instantly entertain themselves with video games or social media. Working through the challenges of playing an instrument and perfecting music can seem boring in comparison, and students must learn how to push through this boredom to achieve success.
  • How to follow through and develop a “stick-to-it” attitude: This is tied to the two prior points —commitment and learning to be bored. Students who are committed will follow through and find success through delayed gratification. Students who learn patience through band will ultimately translate this practice to other endeavors or pursuits in their lives.
  • Overcoming failure: Students must learn how to bounce back when they don’t achieve a goal or don’t get what they want. Learning to cope with failure is a powerful way to grow an organization because students will likely fall three times before they are on their way.
  • The rewards of hard work: The final concerts and performances of a school year are some of the very best rewards for hard work. Students also learn time management, bond with their peers and develop conflict resolution skills through their hard work and participation in band.
  • The sense of accomplishment when achieving goals: Celebrating success is more fun when you do it with others. In this case, students learn how special it can be to celebrate victories large and small with their peers.
  • Teamwork: Teamwork makes the dream work. Students learn that many hands make light work, and they learn how to function in a hierarchy of leadership. Sometimes students will be the queen bee and other times, the drone.
  • Faith, Honor, Love: Most importantly, students learn to have faith in one another and in the process. They learn the value of keeping their word and honoring those who have come before them. And they learn to love their teammates, their school, their community and their family.

Claudia Taylor Johnson High School Marching Band Getting our students to a place where they were excited to be great together and to believe in the journey was a process! It was paramount for us to have the values listed above in place before we ever attempted to improve as musicians and athletes.

In 2010, when CTJ made finals at its first regional and advanced to the state marching contest for the first time, our senior class who had started their band journey at Reagan was so satisfied to see the CTJ band improving quickly. It went beyond placement and was all about progress.

And four years later, the freshmen who helped start the band at Johnson made finals at Grand Nationals as seniors, with their bandmates from the prior three years celebrating the rapid ascent of “The Little Blue Band that Could.”

Changing Jobs, Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs

People change jobs for various reasons. When the time comes to change jobs, business and stress can take over. As with many new experiences, there isn’t always an owner’s manual for what to do.

Furthermore, emotions on different sides cloud judgment and make the process even more difficult. Below are some things to consider when pursuing or accepting a new job.

Can You Keep a Secret?

Leaving a position can be difficult, while starting a new job can be exciting. Many people want to share the news. My advice is to keep it to yourself as long as possible, and when you start to tell anyone, start with your inner circle.
I subscribe to the thought that only one person can keep a secret. One time, I met with a trusted administrator, asked them for a letter of recommendation, and requested that they keep this under wraps. They assured me that this would be confidential. By the end of the day, the entire admin team and most teachers knew that I was applying for another position. I then had to deal with some additional meetings, rumors and other distractions that took away from my primary focus.

Emotions Can Cloud Your Judgment

We are working for businesses that don’t want to spend more money than they deem necessary. Do your research before becoming emotionally invested in a potential new job. For example, the new job may start you at the bottom of the pay scale. Also, look at the max number of years of service credit the school offers — on the high end, this might be 15 years. Run some financial projections on what you would be making, gaining or losing, and determine what you can handle before getting too excited about the new position.

Salary and personal/professional satisfaction do not always go hand in hand. There are certainly schools that may pay you more, but schedule, benefits and overall building climate are less than ideal. In other cases, the work environment is excellent, but the pay is low. Ideally, you want great pay and a great working environment, but you may have to choose. Ask yourself which is more important.

There isn’t much room to negotiate in terms of education pay and benefits in public schools, but you can always ask about years of service. I have heard of some districts granting teachers all their years of service.

friend group g1Kr4Ozfoac unsplashFriend Groups Might Change

Some loneliness can set in at your current job after you announce that you are leaving. Your colleagues will undoubtedly care, but they also have to continue their careers and life paths as well. I have had coworkers stop talking to me once they learned that I was leaving. You may find that some colleagues will be upset with your decision to leave. Their attitude may be because your resignation or other choice reflects on them, and they may subconsciously question their own decisions. Their attitude doesn’t matter because they aren’t paying your bills. Continue on your path — not everyone will understand.

Remember that oftentimes friendship is easy when it’s convenient. In other words, it’s easier to be friends with people who are physically close to you like colleagues and neighbors.

Don’t be surprised if you have little interaction with people from previous jobs who you thought were good friends. It will be on YOU to continue fostering these relationships if you choose to. These people are not bad — you have exited their environment, and many relationships rely on convenience and proximity.

Changes in friend groups can be difficult to deal with. Luckily, a new job comes with so much responsibility that you may be too busy to suffer the loss. And, a new job comes with new people. Luckily for you, people always want to meet the new music teacher.

It’s Tough Being the Rookie … Again

One of my mentors, Mike Fiske, retired director of bands at Joliet Central High School in Illinois, offered the best advice about changing jobs: “When you leave and go somewhere new, all of your credibility is left behind.” This can be a tough pill to swallow when changing positions, especially if you were successful at your previous school.

Parents and students at your new school will test you — don’t take it personally. Like you, they are also dealing with change. It would be best to play by their rules before establishing new traditions or bringing new flavors to things.

teacher standing in front of room Students might challenge many of the changes you want to implement. It helps to be aware of the teacher you are replacing and the program’s history. If the program was successful and everyone loved the previous director, don’t change too much at first. If you do, be ready to hear complaints from students and parents. Again, it’s not personal — people tend to think about what they’re losing rather than what they will be gaining. Be patient and guide them through this.

Even with many years of teaching experience, you’ll feel like a rookie at a new job. However, you’ll be able to navigate the waters quickly. I’ve worked at four schools. They all had different procedures for securing buses, entering financial transactions and requesting field trips, but the process for each was the same. (And most of these things will be covered in the new teacher training.)

Ask questions, be aware of the process and use the new school’s procedures. Many people waste a lot of mental energy wishing the new procedures were the same as the old, familiar processes. Acceptance is the way to move past this.

When I started my first teaching job, I didn’t know the answers to questions, and I didn’t know what questions to ask. In the next two to three years, I still didn’t know the answers to questions, but I did know what questions to ask. In other words, during the first few years of your teaching career, you don’t know what you don’t know.

Your Letter of Resignation

Administrators at your current school may want to quickly start the hiring process to find your replacement. They have a lot of work to do, so I don’t blame them for this. However, you need to do what is best for you. Do not get rushed into submitting a letter of resignation until after you are board-approved by your new position.

When I changed jobs the first time, I wasn’t sure how to “quit” my job. I stressed about writing the perfect letter of resignation. In reality, the letter serves to leave the job and protect your remaining pay and benefits. My advice is to be direct, to the point and give a quick thank you for the opportunity.

Here’s a sample script:

Dear Principal and Board of Education:

Please accept this letter as my resignation as band director, including all stipend and volunteer positions associated with this role, effective at the end of my contract on July 31.
I thank everyone in the school and community for their support of the band and me. In my years at this school, I always felt a great deal of respect from the administration and faculty toward the music program, and I will never forget my time working with these great students.

Sincerely,
Donald Stinson

Submitted on May 25

Let’s break down a few things with this letter. I resign from the position at the beginning of the letter. I then provide a heartfelt, but brief, thank you. I don’t burn any bridges, nor do I make any demands. I did the job, my time doing the job is coming to an end, and the letter is making it official.

But the crucial part is the date. As long as you are switching jobs in the middle of the school year, date your letter on the last day of your contract. If you’re unsure of this date, look at your contract or ask a trusted colleague. Why is this important? Benefits and access to your data. How do I know this? Because one time, I made the mistake of resigning from a position “effective at the end of the school year.” The school board accepted this and notified me that they would pay me to the end of my contract but that my insurance benefits would expire in May. My insurance benefits with my new job would not begin until August/September. My wife was pregnant, and we were extremely anxious about going three months without insurance. After some phone calls to the HR department, administration and countless other helpers in my current district, I was allowed to submit a corrected letter of resignation dated to the end of my contract. Correcting my error took a lot of extra work, but I greatly appreciated my current district administrators and staff for helping me — they didn’t have to do this.

When You Leave, All Your Files and Emails Go Away

When leaving a position, back up important files to a few different mediums, including online cloud storage, hard drives or thumb drives. Once these files are gone, it is challenging — and sometimes impossible — to get back.

If you have files on an online drive, make sure to copy them or change ownership of the drive. I have lost essential files because the school shut access to my old email address, and that was the only account registered to the files.

Usually, school districts will close your email either near the end of your contract or sometime soon after. If you have important emails that you would like to save, forward them to another email address. You can download some large files, but these can be difficult to open on different programs.

Finally, ensure that you leave access to essential files for your replacement. Documents such as your instrument inventory, music library and any crucial templates are extremely helpful to an incoming teacher. You don’t have to go overboard with prepping materials for your replacement, but try not to make the job harder for them.

Your Students and Their Emotions

One of the hardest things to work through when you leave a position is your students’ emotions, which are amplified for a teacher who has taught students over multiple years or has spent extended time with them in extracurricular musical groups. Your students will go through the entire emotional spectrum when a change happens.

I was prepared for students to be sad when I announced that I would be leaving, but I was not prepared for their anger. The students who were angry later told me that they felt abandoned and didn’t know how to deal with this. Yet, they pulled through and are doing OK. This is the important part — they will be OK. They are just emotionally invested in their program and YOU.

The Final Months in Your Old (Current) Job

If you secure a new job before the end of the school year, you might be witness to a new candidate going through the interview process to replace you. This process could be anything from interviewing in a committee to doing a conducting interview in front of the ensemble. Be prepared for this. Although you are leaving the school, it can be tough watching the process of filling your position.

Push through to the end! When something new and exciting is on the horizon, you may feel motivation drop in your current position. Think about what you would tell your students and expect of them. I always want to be remembered as someone who didn’t “check out” before the school year was over.

When your last day comes, try to schedule some time for yourself at the school. Double-check that you have all your things, and before turning in your keys, spend some time reflecting in your soon-to-be former classroom. And when it’s time to leave, go and start your next chapter.

man sitting with head in his handsBuyer’s Remorse

Another emotional situation to be aware of is buyer’s remorse. Buyer’s remorse often sets in when things are tough at the new job during the first few months, and you miss your old colleagues and the sense of familiarity at your old school.

Everyone is different, but for me, November usually marked the time when I came to accept that I made the right move. After winter break, I still had some work to do, but the second semester reset undoubtedly helped with this.

However, in one job, I could not convince myself that I had made the right move.I gave this position a two-year shot, but it was not the best move. I felt like I was stuck. However, …

You’re Never Stuck Anywhere

Another one of my mentors, Dr. Charles Menghini, the former director of bands at VanderCook College of Music in Chicago, always told me, “It’s a job, not a life sentence.” You’re never stuck.

He was right. The more experience you have, the more difficult it may be to leave a job based on pay, location, etc., but there is always a choice. It just may be a difficult choice. In the situation described above, I chose to leave and find a position that I could be more comfortable with. This may seem like a short time to be at one position, but ultimately it was what was right for me.

You go in, you do the job and then you leave. Leaving may mean retiring after 35 years, or it may mean seeking a new job after two years. Don’t focus on whether you are blissfully happy day in and day out — every job has its ups and downs — instead, ask yourself if you are in a place where you can progress and make an impact on yourself, the students and the community. If you are, then consider yourself lucky!

Do you have any additional advice for music educators who are looking to change jobs? Email your tips and suggestions to educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 1: Tips to Improve Your ResumePart 2: Interviewing Tips and Part 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers.

Changing Jobs, Part 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers

During an interview, you’ll be asked a battery of questions, but remember that it’s essential for you to ask the interview committee questions, too.

The primary reason is to find out information to help you determine whether the employer, school and program are a good fit for you. The secondary reason is that by asking meaningful questions, you will appear prepared and invested in the job that you have applied for.

Prepare 10 or so questions, and bring the printout to the interview. If you are interviewing with a panel of people, have more questions ready. Sometimes you will be told ahead of time who will be interviewing you, and other times, you won’t know until you walk into the interview room. I’ve interviewed for jobs with one person running the interview all the way up to a panel of 15 people

If you don’t have the information on the interview committee ahead of time, you can make some reasonable assumptions. I always have prepared questions directed toward administrators, teachers, parents and students. Furthermore, I have questions for music specialists and non-music specialists.

interview panel Dx6lpoMAG Y unsplashAdditional tips on questions for the interviewer:

  • Only ask questions that you can’t find answers to on your own. For example, don’t waste a question asking about school enrollment because you can probably find this information online.
  • Remember, you can ask a few additional questions over email after the interview. I have included a follow-up question or two in my “thank you” email that I send to each person on the interview panel.
  • And if you are offered the position and accept it, you can ask even more questions to prepare for your new job.

I will assume that you are comfortable preparing questions related to music or your specific content, so many of the questions below are more general.

Questions for Students

Some interview committees include current students. I’ve seen too many interviewees tell the panel that they are student-centered, yet they never engage with the students sitting in front of them.
If there are students on a panel, I address them first. I want the committee to see how I interact with students. From a more realistic standpoint, schools don’t exist without students, so that’s where my primary focus goes.

Consider some of the following questions directed toward the current students:

  • What are some of your favorite and the most important traditions in your music program?
  • Besides being an effective rehearsal technician and conductor, what do you want from your director?
  • Your current director is a great teacher and a great person, and I know he/she will be missed. What do you think the new director can do to ease the transition and help your music family continue to succeed?
  • Do you have an example of a piece, lesson or experience in your music class that has really stuck with you?
  • What input do you expect to have in your music program?
  • You are the most consistent part of the music program. What do you think the new director/teacher needs to know when stepping into this program? How would you be able to help the new teacher? (This is an excellent question to direct toward a program that might have a revolving door of teachers/directors.)

Questions for Parents

Some interview committees include band/orchestra/choir parents. As with the students, make sure to engage with the parents. This is another opportunity for the administration or interview head to see you interact with key stakeholders. Consider directing some of the following questions toward the parents:

  • What do you think this program means to your student?
  • What do you think your student will remember most about this school and this program when he/she has graduated?
  • What do you want from your child’s music teacher?
  • What input do you expect to have in your music program?
  • When talking to parents from other schools, what is the first thing you tell them about your music program?
  • What do you see as the ideal relationship between director and parent organization for those involved in the parent booster organization?

Questions for Faculty Committee Members and Administration

Many of these questions could be used when speaking to either teachers or supervisors/administrators.

  • closeup hands pexels 3760067

    How does the administration measure the success of the department?

  • What are the most critical skills and attributes you are looking for in filling this position?
  • What are you looking for in a colleague?
  • At my current position, we encourage the students to become successful musicians, not just music, choir or orchestra members. What opportunities exist for students to branch outside of their specific music, orchestra or choir world? Are these curricular or extracurricular?
  • What do you think the new teacher needs to do in the first six months to make the most significant impact on students?
  • Besides the goals outlined in the strategic plan, what life application skills and values do you expect students to achieve from the music department?
  • How does the administration feel the music program should support the community?

Additional Questions

The questions listed below are part of a document I have when preparing for job interviews. I pick and choose from this list depending on the job I’m applying for. Some questions can quickly be answered by an online search or phone call to someone familiar with the program. Others may be good questions to ask during your interview. Use your best judgment to determine what fits best.

  • Where has the emphasis of the program been?
  • How does the student body feel about the music program?
  • What are the conditions of the instruments, music library and uniforms?
  • What are the rehearsal facilities like (indoor/outdoor)?
  • Are rehearsals in the curriculum?
  • What is the current performance schedule?
  • Is there a booster organization in place?
  • Would the administration like to see the booster organization be more or less active?
  • How many students are involved with the music program?
  • When do the beginners in the district start?
  • What is your contact with the feeder schools?
  • Where do you see the music program in 3 to 5 years?
  • Is there a current budget for the music program? Can you share this information?
  • Is there a budget in place for instrument repairs?
  • Do you have a copy of the music library?
  • What is the school and program’s philosophy on competitions and festivals?
  • Is there a transportation budget for the program, and is the director in charge of it? Or is the district/building responsible for this?
  • Do students participate in solo and ensemble events?
  • Do students take private or group lessons? If not, would the district entertain a proposal for a private lesson program?
  • Are music parents supportive of their children in all activities, not only music?
  • Is there a summer program or music camp?
  • If I were fortunate enough to land this position, when could I begin to prepare (regardless of contract)?
  • Can new teachers serve on faculty committees? (I ask this on almost every interview, and the committee always gets excited about this. Only ask this if you are serious, as they will take you up on this offer).
  • If you could advance one thing about the music program, what would it be?
  • Is there a school newsletter/email in place for the parents? If so, Is the music program included in this paper regularly? If not, is it possible to create a music newsletter?
  • Is there a mentoring program in place for teachers new to the district?
  • Does the music program have a social media program manager in place?
  • Has the district implemented any programs or procedures to help teachers support students in the area of social and emotional learning (SEL)?
  • How has the district supported inclusivity and diversity in the fine arts?
  • Why is the position open? Has there been consistency, or is there a revolving door? (Don’t ask this in the interview; instead, find this info out behind the scenes.)

listen take notes WZROBIlY8Rg unsplashSome Other Thoughts

While your questions are being answered, listen actively and write down some notes. Some responses may need clarification. Be prepared to ask a follow-up question or restate and further explain the original question.

If you feel that a prepared question may come off as judgmental, trust your gut instinct and don’t ask it. Either rephrase it or move on to another question.

Some interview committees will tell you how many questions you can ask. Others will not. If you aren’t given a set number, look for non-verbal cues. If responses from the committee members become shorter or if you notice people looking at their watches or getting antsy, start wrapping up.

It’s impossible to get answers to everything during an interview. You are looking for a snapshot of whether this position is a good fit for you. Formulate and select your questions to give you the best chance of making this decision. I have turned down second interviews because the initial answers to my questions during the first round did not sit well with me.

What questions do you ask during interviews? Do you have other tips or recommendations on interviewing for a job? Email them to us at educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 1: Tips to Improve Your Resume, Part 2: Interviewing Tips and Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs.

Changing Jobs, Part 2: Interviewing Tips

Interviewing for a job can be stressful, especially during the early years of your career. Below are some tips taken from my experiences as an interviewee and as an interviewer.

You Don’t Have to Memorize Anything

I brought notes and printouts with crucial information highlighted when I interviewed for jobs. This allowed me to refer to important school information, such as mission statements and goals. This info sheet included some information about me, including career highlights and meaningful experiences relevant to the position. You would think you could speak about yourself and your accomplishments off the top of your head, but in the heat of the moment, it’s easy to become flustered.

I also recommend having  the school report card printed out so you can share some fast facts about your school and the music program (read my article, “Dig Deeper: How to Read Your School Accountability Report Card”).

When answering questions, you can refer to your notes and the school accountability report to help refine and clarify your responses.

Keep Busy

Some great advice I received was to keep busy during the interview. A notebook and a pen allow you to have something to do with your hands — take notes! — during the interview. This shows that you are taking the interview seriously, and you can jot down the answers to any questions you might have had.

Also bring a bottle of water, which is yet another thing to do with your hands if you get nervous. This also allows you to have an excuse to take a “dramatic pause” before answering a question.

interview 2men pexels 5439438Have Your Elevator Pitch Ready

Almost every single job I’ve interviewed for began with “so, tell us about yourself.” Early on, I gave them my life story, goals, aspirations, dreams, favorite sports teams, social security number and my thoughts on the recent episode of whatever TV show I was watching. Later on, I streamlined this to relevant information that was true to me. Your answer doesn’t have to be the most creative or unique thing ever. It just has to be true.

Here’s my current answer: “I’m Don Stinson. I’m a music educator in the Chicagoland area. I have the drive to work with students and parents to help provide musical experiences that we could otherwise not do on our own. My focus is to help all students push themselves from wherever they are. My background and experience help students from low-income and underserved backgrounds push themselves toward success. I’m here today because I’m highly interested in discussing how my skillset and experiences could fit into your program, school and community.”

If you have a fascinating fact about yourself that you can pepper in, go for it. This can show some personality and set you apart. I once helped out with a choir performance in California and met Julie Andrews. This is a fun one to include, especially if any music teachers are on the committee.

Call Back on Your Experiences

During an interview, you will be asked several situational questions — what you would do in certain situations. If you’ve had an experience relevant to the question, you can refer to what you did (or what you wished you did!).

However, if you’re a new or newer teacher, you may have to answer hypothetically. Consider starting off with, “in this situation, I would…” and then respond. There’s a good chance that you will get questions regarding parent organization groups and out-of-school trips if you’re interviewing for a music teacher position. Questions regarding conflicts with colleagues with more experience have often come up as well. These are certainly points to ponder when preparing for the interview.

Then there are the questions that really threw me for a loop where I didn’t have a past experience to refer to, nor did I think about the situation as a hypothetical before the interview. So, I was honest and told the committee my process. I said that I wasn’t sure exactly what I would do in this particular situation, but my initial reaction would be to refer to the school’s policies. I would then seek out a colleague and administrator to help with my decision before acting. This was an elaborate way of saying, “I don’t know, but I will take steps to find out.” The committee was satisfied with this answer.

Remember, You’re Not Going to Live on Your Own Island

You’re interviewing to be a part of the overall teacher community in the school. Some music teachers like to be separate from the rest of the school, living on their own island. Education is better when we work together, and administrators see value in candidates who will do their best for the music program while thinking about the school’s overall mission. When discussing your vision for a music program, talk about how you and the program can fit into and benefit the entire school.

Only Tell Them What They Need to Know

Avoid being too forthcoming with details that are not relevant and won’t work in your favor.

Interviewer: “Don, tell us about one of your weaknesses.”

Me: “Well, sometimes I lose an entire night’s sleep because right when I’m about to doze off, I remember how I called my 5th-grade teacher ‘mom’ by accident, and the entire class laughed at me. I then think about this for six to eight hours, slowly pulling the bed covers over my head more and more.”

Interviewer: “Excuse me?”

Me: “My mistake. What I meant to say was ‘conducting.’ I’m always working on improving my non-verbal communication.”

A ridiculous example? Absolutely. But not too far off from what I’ve seen in some interviews. Openness and personality are great but staying on topic is essential during the interview process.

Be Up to Date on Current Focuses

In 2021, you should be up to date on social and emotional learning (SEL), hybrid learning and diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI). I hesitate to call these “trends,” but the reality is that education is constantly changing, and what is today’s focus will likely shift in the upcoming school years. When you interview for a job, it’s assumed that you can teach and describe your content. However, many interview committees will ask questions about current focuses in education. When in doubt, refer to the school’s mission statement or look up the school board minutes to view recent presentations and topics that are important to the district.

Don’t Expect Anyone to Ask for Your Materials — Rather, Reference Them

I’ve had interviews where I brought a portfolio of my work. It was a beautiful binder that had evidence of almost everything significant in education that I had done.

No one looked at it.

This happened multiple times. Eventually, I learned that I had to be the one to reference my portfolio. If I could elevate one of my answers with a piece of evidence, I would then take it out of the binder and show it off. Then, the committee was interested in looking at the rest of my materials.

Some other advice I received was simply asking to leave your portfolio with the committee at the end of the interview. “I’d like to leave this portfolio so you can take a look at some other programs and methods that have benefitted my students. I can reach out in a week to an administrative assistant to pick this up.” In most instances, I got my portfolio back during a second-round interview.

YOU Are also Interviewing THEM!

Don’t forget — the interview isn’t just about them asking you questions. It is also about you and finding out where you fit best. Ask questions, and if you need some follow-up, ask more questions. There have been jobs that I wasn’t particularly interested in, but I took the interview anyway. I found out through the interview process that the position would be an excellent fit for me. I’ve also found the opposite — jobs I thought that I really wanted, but then red flags came up during the interview process.

Figure out what is important to you when looking for an employer. At the start of your career, you probably just want a job. But as you gain more experienced, and if you decide to look for other positions, you can begin vetting potential employers. I’ve always heard that it’s easier to get a job when you already have a job. This absolutely turned out to be true for me. Having the security of an existing job helped me feel more comfortable and confident and allowed me to be more honest in what I was looking for in another employer.

Create Questions Based on the Music Program AND the School

Have questions prepared and ask them! I’ve never walked away from a job interview without asking some questions (read my article, “Changing Jobs, Part 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers.

Start by using data points from the accountability report of the school that you are applying to. When you create questions, you are coming from a place of curiosity and seeing how you can grow, learn and offer your own skillset to this program and school. Avoid coming from a place of judgment. Some schools may appear to be underperforming on paper in academics, for example. Don’t ask, “Why is the majority of the school failing math?” Rather, rephrase the question to: “What interventions are in place for struggling students, and how can the music teacher best support these school initiatives?” Then, move on to questions regarding the music class or program.

If you’re a new teacher, asking “can new teachers serve on faculty committees” shows a genuine interest in wanting to be a part of the entire school culture. Just be careful — if you offer something up during the interview, the school and administration will likely take you up on it!

From a strategic standpoint, asking questions gets the interview committee talking. You simultaneously learn about the position and school while also getting a break from answering questions yourself!

I typed up and printed out my questions when I interviewed for jobs. I had this sheet handy during the interview process and took notes on it because chances are that some of your questions will be answered during the interview process. This helped me to avoid being redundant. I had a few interviews early on where I was nervous and didn’t write much down. I looked pretty silly asking a question that the committee had already spoken about earlier in the interview.

I’ve found that 10 prepared questions work well. Once you have your questions, consider organizing them from most to least important. Then, select the question you will ask last (your closer). During the interview, three or four questions will probably get answered. When it’s your time to ask questions, select three. Take notes on the answers and ask any quick follow-up questions if necessary. Finally, ask a closing question that makes it clear that your are interested in the position.

Ask for the Job

Do you want the job? Then ask for it!

At the end of the interview, consider a closing statement. It can be short (“Thank you for the opportunity to interview. I hope I have made it clear that I would love to be a part of this learning community”) or a little more detailed (“Thank you so much for meeting with me today. I was especially impressed by your dedication to including the music program alongside other academic disciplines in the school. If I were to be fortunate enough to work for your school and community, when would I be able to begin preparing?”).

interview practice pexels 1181715Practice, Practice, Practice

Just like practicing an instrument, the more you interview, the more comfortable you will become with the process.

Find time with a trusted colleague or two to practice your interview skills. My best friend and I would help each other out by cold-calling each other when we were interviewing. I would randomly get a call from him, asking, “Mr. Stinson, this is generic music program calling you for an interview. Please tell me how you might incorporate new techniques to include all types of learners in your performance music classroom.” I would answer, he would say “thank you” and hang up. Later that day, I’d get another call from him with some feedback.

In-person practice can help immensely. I’ve always had trouble with eye contact and body language. So, for a particularly exciting job prospect, I had some friends run a mock interview for me. The stressful part? I had them seated extremely close to me, and they hit a buzzer every time I broke eye contact for more than a few seconds. This got me on track quickly (although I tricked them a few times by simply looking at a spot on the wall behind them).

Silence is OK

You don’t have to fill every second of silence with words or sounds. When practicing for your interview, take a pause of two to three seconds before answering. This will feel like an eternity at first, but it’s one way to become comfortable with the silence. Think of this in terms of music — have you ever heard a phrase that just had too many notes? Rests are not only OK, but they are necessary! I’ve even asked the interviewer if I could have a few seconds to write down some notes before answering. They were always OK with this. After 20 seconds, I replied with a much more cohesive answer than what was previously in my head.

Saying Thank You

My personal preference is sending a handwritten thank-you note after the interview. However, email is much more timely and reliable when sending a follow-up. I learned from being on committees that there can be a quick turnaround in some cases. Within a few hours of the interview, I would send a quick email to each committee member (how did I remember who was on the committee? I wrote their names down on the notebook I mentioned above). I triple-checked the spelling of their name and sent an individualized email.

Dr. Johnson:

I appreciate the opportunity to interview at your school today. I was especially impressed by the student greeters at the office and how proud they were of their community. I was very interested in this position before, but after meeting some faculty, staff, and students, your school is one that I would be very fortunate to be a part of.

Sincerely,
Don Stinson

Rejection

You put in all of the prep, you practiced and then you interviewed. One of two things will happen — you either get the job, or you don’t. Now what? Either way, you’ve gained interview experience.

Rejection will come in a few different ways. In some instances, you’ll receive an email or a phone call saying, “thanks, but no thanks.” If there is an opportunity to ask some follow-up questions, by all means do so, but focus on yourself. Don’t ask questions about other candidates. Hiring processes are usually strict and confidential, and employers open themselves up to legal trouble if they say certain things. You can certainly ask, “Do you have any feedback for me that I could use for future job interviews?” or “Was I missing certain skills or experience that would have been beneficial for this position?”

Rejection may also come in the form of silence. I’ve been on the receiving end of this before, and it’s not fun. Two weeks went by after an interview, and I didn’t hear anything. I knew deep down that I didn’t move on in the process but had trouble accepting it. Eventually, I heard on social media that another candidate had moved on.

Although I wish that every hiring committee would contact candidates with a “yes” or “no,” the reality is that many committees don’t. Most committees have a timeline in place but avoid calling or emailing their final candidate(s) until at least a few days after this deadline. Remember, while the interview and hiring decision are essential to you, the callback goes down the administrator’s to-do list when something like a fire drill or contact tracing comes up.

Rejection hurts at the moment. You’ll have questions and maybe some anger or self-doubt. I do a little planning ahead of time. If I get the job, I’ll go out to dinner. If I don’t get the job, I would still go out to dinner. Either way, I treat myself not for success or failure but rather as a resolution.

Acceptance

On the other hand, you get a call saying, “Congratulations! We’d like to offer you a position in our school district!” If you are dead set on this position and have all of the information you need, it’s an easy decision!

Otherwise, consider saying thank you and asking if you could have some time to think before accepting. You may get a little pushback from an administrator who wants to get a candidate to the upcoming board meeting, but if you are not 100% sure, take the time to consider. This is your time to ask for clarification on years of service credit, benefits, schedule, etc. Then, once you’ve mulled it over, you can call the school back with your decision. If it’s a yes, it’s an easy phone call to make. If you decide that the school is not a great fit for you, a simple “thank you, but at this time, I’m going to have to respectfully decline the offer” will work.

Do you have other tips or recommendations on interviewing for a job? Email them to us at educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 1: Tips to Improve Your ResumePart 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers and Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs.

Changing Jobs, Part 1: Improve Your Resume

A good resume is the first step in landing a job interview. Below are some tips to improve your chances of standing out in a pile.

List the Most Important Things First

An old journalism rule is the inverted pyramid where the most important facts are presented first, and relevant but least important information is written about last.

That’s what a solid resume should look like. What are the top three to five most impressive parts of your career? Put them at the top quarter of the first page of your resume. These could be things like a prestigious school you attended, an important certification you received, a new program you started or a big performance.

Decide on a Format

I format my resume in this order:

  • Credentials
  • Professional Teaching Experience
  • Accomplishments & Distinctions
  • Education
  • Related Experience
  • Memberships
  • References are available upon request

Under each header is the relevant experience with some bullet point descriptors. My format is not the right way, but simply one way to do it. I currently have 15 years of professional teaching experience — that’s why this is near the top. If I was in my first five years of teaching, I might move “Education” closer to the top. You could always combine sections and list any accomplishments under Professional Teaching Experience regarding the relevant employer.

For a more descriptive sample, this is what my “Professional Teaching” section might look like:

2016- present      Professional Teaching: Director of Bands, Joliet Central High School, Joliet, IL  

  • Director of two curricular band ensembles; AP Music Theory instructor; Jazz Band director; Marching Band director; Pep Band director; Chamber Ensemble director.
  • Created and coordinated a Guest Artist Series of national and international performers, including Dr. Leah Schuman, graduate of the Eastman School of Music, and Omar al Musfi, Syrian Recording Artist.
  • Coordinated major travel and performance events to Gatlinburg, Tennessee, Chicago, and NYC.
  • 2020: Joliet Central Symphonic Band invited to perform at David Geffen Hall in Lincoln Center in New York City; national invitation, solo act performance.
  • Created, proposed, and received approval for “Introduction to Band” course for 2020-2021 school year.
  • 2017: Marching Band selected to perform at the Chicago Thanksgiving Day Parade.
  • 2019: Symphonic Band: Superior Rating at IHSA; Awarded Best of Day.
  • 2017, 2018, 2019: Symphonic Band selected to perform at the University of Illinois Superstate Band Festival.
  • 2017, 2018, 2019: Selection to perform at the Chicagoland Invitational Concert Band Festival.
  • 2016: created second jazz group, Jazz Lab, due to student interest.
  • 2016 to present: Community events, including planning and participation in the Veteran’s Day Ceremony.
  • Launched Commissioning Project for 2018-2019 to create new band music; launched fundraising campaign called “Buy the Sound.” Project was fully funded in less than three weeks with Hollywood composer and Central Alum Jermaine Stegall.
  • 2016, 2017, 2018: Recipient: JTHS Foundation Grants.
  • 2016: Recipient: Give a Note Foundation Grant, including $2,500 and a visit from a Radio Disney Artist. Matching grant from the Country Music Awards Foundation.
  • 2016: Recipient of Music Technology Grant from Ableton, Inc.

Be Mindful of Putting Your Contact Information

I list my name, phone number and personal email address on my resume — I do not include my address. Including your home address can either make you more desirable if you’re an out-of-state candidate, or it can make an employer apprehensive about interviewing you based on location. When in doubt, it’s OK to leave it off.

Do NOT use your current work email to apply for other jobs. And be mindful of your personal email address — yourname@email.com will work fine, but if your email address is  2Cute4You@puppycuddles.email, you should change it to something a little more generic.

resume friend pexels 4063797Have Someone Look It Over

Once you have completed your resume, have two or three people look it over — close friends who know you and your work will offer valuable feedback. Also, consider reading your resume out loud to catch typos and any awkward wording. It’s essential to ensure that your presentation and grammar are consistent and free of misspellings. Believe it or not, I’ve seen resumes where candidates misspelled their current employer!

Constantly Update Your Resume

Constantly update your resume even if you’re not looking for a job. It’s a lot easier to keep track of what you are doing or have done if you regularly update your resume.

I recommend having a long-form and a short-form resume. My long-form version includes everything I’ve done that is related to my career. Every job, committee, teaching lesson, side work, etc. is included in my long-form resume, which is over 10 pages long. Think of the long-form resume as a written scrapbook of everything you’ve done.

If I’m applying for a job, I can pull relevant information from long-form resume and summarize it onto a new file that I can personalize and tailor to the job that I’m applying for. This new file becomes my short-form resume and the one that I submit

For example, If I’m applying for a high school job, I put more information regarding what I’ve done that relates to high school teaching, such as relevant job experience, working with marching bands and judging high school association auditions.

resume brag pexels 5915239Brag About Yourself

This is your shot — your resume should showcase how great you are! You are literally competing for this job, so do what you have to do to ethically and morally win a chance at the position. Related to listing the most important items first, are you exceptionally good at something? List it!

I’m a fan of letting your work speak for itself, but you have to let potential employers know what you can do and have done. The goal is to get an interview where you can talk about your accomplishments, but you have to “wow” them with your resume first!

I pride myself on community service and having our ensembles contribute to our community. So I list that we perform at multiple community events each year. Another item I’m particularly proud of is that my students have the opportunity to play with some nationally known guest artists. Both of these brags go near the top of my resume. Think about what you do well and include them in your resume. Maybe it’s related to recruitment (include numbers and percentages of how much your program has grown), after-school programs (include any obstacles or problems you solved to get these started) or relationships with colleagues and students (include the impact of these relationships to your program).

Don’t Overthink Length

Ask 10 people about how long a resume should be, and you’ll get 10 different answers. So here’s the 11th opinion: Focus more on the content. If you have so many experiences and initiatives that take up three pages, go for it. It’s also OK if you have a tight one-page resume that summarizes and showcases your career and accomplishments. I haven’t found many administrators with a hard rule on resume length.

Sometimes, More Words Are Better

Which of these options sounds better?

  • “Coordinated major performance and travel events involving students, parent groups and travel companies. Worked with district officials to ensure safety and logistic protocols, including overnight regulations, transportation logistics and rehearsal schedules.” OR “Planned a band trip.”
  • “Guided and provided high school students with authentic leadership experiences through leading sectionals and rehearsals with sender school students.” OR “Led a summer music camp with student involvement.”

resume update pexels 5915152List Other Relevant Information

Do you hold Google educator certificates? List it! Or did your district require you to participate in restorative practice circle training, response to intervention (RTI) or Creating Independence through Student-owned Strategies (CRISS)? List these as well.

I also have a short list of professional memberships at the bottom of my resume, along with some relevant experience such as ensembles I’ve performed in or educational writing that I’ve done. My self-imposed rule is that whatever I list must be relevant to education or music. Some people put personal items or hobbies on their resumes. I don’t, but this shouldn’t hurt if you include them.

To List or Not to List: Your Student Teaching Experience

This depends. In my opinion, include your student teaching experience if you have had only one job or if you are in your first few years of teaching. By year five, you can leave off student teaching.

An exception would be if your student teaching placement has some connection to where you are applying. For example, if an administrator at the school you are applying to worked at your student teaching placement, or if you are applying to the school where you student taught, then definitely include your student teaching information.

There Are No Rules

The big takeaway is: There are no official rules when it comes to resumes. There are certainly some norms and expectations but avoid stressing out about the perfect format. You can choose to present your resume in chronological order or organize it by project. The key is to ensure your resume includes accurate information that sells your skills in a consistent and organized fashion.

Do you have other tips or recommendations on improving your resume? Email them to us at educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 2: Interviewing TipsPart 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers and Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs.

How to Play Electric Piano, Clavinet and Organ Sounds

There are many instruments that feature the familiar black and white keys of the piano. But don’t be fooled into thinking that, if you can play one, you will sound good playing all the others. Each instrument has its own design and sound, and requires some adjustment to your technique and style of playing.

The Four Main Food Groups

When it comes to keyboard instruments, there are four main “food groups,” as follows:

1. Acoustic Piano

The center of this universe is the acoustic piano, invented over 500 years ago and a mainstay of many genres of music, including classical music as well as jazz and pop. There are two main types: grand piano and upright piano. Check out this blog article to learn the difference between them.

2. Electric Piano

The electric piano is an electro-mechanical derivation of the acoustic piano with a thicker, more “chimey” type of sound due to the fact that its hammers strike metal bars or reeds instead of strings. Although it was invented in the 1920s, the instrument came to prominence in the 1970s, where it became a staple of many forms of popular music, including jazz-rock and fusion.

3. Clavinet

The Clavinet is another electro-mechanical instrument, but one that is more closely related to the clavichord that had a distinctive metallic sound and was used widely in the Baroque and Renaissance eras. Clavinet sounds became a staple of the funk music of the 1970s, and, while not as popular today, can often come in handy when playing cover songs of the era.

4. Organ

Organ describes a family of keyboard musical instruments characterized by their sustained tone. There are many different types of organs, including pipe organs (mostly the domain of liturgical and secular music), “combo” organs (featured prominently in some pop and rock records of the 1950s and early 1960s) and tonewheel organs (used extensively in blues, jazz and rock — especially the prog rock of the 1970s and 1980s). If you’re learning a specific song, you can research it on the internet to find out what particular organ was used on the original recording.

Most current digital keyboards, digital pianos and stage pianos include sounds that were sampled from these four instruments, and learning how to play them correctly will help your music sound better. Since previous “Well-Rounded Keyboardist” blog posts have covered piano technique in some detail, I’ll assume you already have some familiarity and experience playing piano. In this article, I’ll provide some tips for adapting your playing style to electric piano, clavinet and organ sounds.

Playing Electric Piano Sounds

The electric piano has a thicker tonality than acoustic piano — especially “Rhodes”-style sounds — so you need to consider playing smaller chord voicings, using fewer notes. You should also avoid playing octaves in your left hand — something you’ll often do on acoustic piano. For example, here’s a basic, powerful way you might play a C Major chord on an acoustic piano:

Musical annotation.

When playing an electric piano sound, however, it’s better to simplify the voicing, like this:

Musical annotation.

In addition, when playing solo acoustic piano, it’s common practice to adopt a broken left-hand “stride” style, where you play a low bass note, sustain it using the damper pedal, and then jump up with the left hand to add a chord in the range below middle C, like this:

Musical annotation.

This doesn’t translate well to electric piano, however, so it’s better to lift the pedal before playing the chord:

Musical annotation.

In general, you should avoid holding down the sustain pedal during long passages when playing electric piano sounds, period. Doing this on acoustic piano produces a nice dreamy wash of sound, but on electric piano everything can quickly get jumbled and muddy-sounding if you’re not careful, so you need to pedal more often to keep the sound from becoming overbearing.

Electric pianos can vary tonally quite a bit, and the more earthy and hollow “Wurly” varieties work especially well when playing bluesy riffs and licks. In addition, those sounds “speak” nicely when played in a rhythmic and dynamic fashion, like this:

Playing Clavinet Sounds

The clavinet has a much thinner and string-based sound that is not unlike that of an electric guitar. Players of the original instrument back in the ’70s developed a very rhythmic, busy 16th-note style to get a super-funky feel (think Stevie Wonder’s “Superstition”). If you picture how bass lines are crafted for R&B music and then include some right-hand rhythmic figures, you’ll be on your way to playing clavinet sounds realistically.

Musical annotation.

In general, the chords you’ll base your parts on should be simple ones: mostly minor sevenths and dominant sevenths (with either a sharp ninth or natural one). No other alterations or color tones are needed.

Playing Organ Sounds

The organ is the most different keyboard out of the group that we’re discussing here. That’s because it sustains indefinitely, while all the others decay over time. Because of this, in general you should play more open and less busy parts when playing organ sounds.

Organ is used in many genres of music, so I won’t make any general recommendations about types of chords — just use the harmony that is appropriate for the genre you’re playing. Here’s an example of how a basic chord progression can be played using the kind of classic “combo” organ sound you’d find in the pop and rock records of the 1950s and 1960s:

Musical annotation.

Note: This audio clip played using a software emulation of a vintage Yamaha YC-10 combo organ.

As a rule, you should never use the sustain pedal when playing an organ sound. Organists connect chords and phrases together using smooth fingering choices only and will sometimes slide across the keys to get to the next chord.

Since organ is a sustaining sound, you should consider not playing down too low if you’re performing with a bass player — leave them some space so your instruments are not fighting one another in the same frequency area. That’s why you’ll sometimes see the organist playing with their right hand only, while using their left hand to operate other controls or to play another keyboard. That said, in jazz and blues it is common for the organ player to also cover the bass part, so the only chording will be done with the right hand. These genres will also at times use voicings that require you to stretch your hand a little, like this:

Musical annotation.

Note: This audio clip played using a software emulation of a tonewheel organ.

If you’re playing a sample of a tonewheel organ, you need to be aware that a big part of the sound is that of the rotating speaker that it is usually played through. These rotating speaker systems offer two speeds — fast and slow — and it is common for the organist to change between them while playing held chords. Your keyboard will most likely have a control like a footswitch or a button to allow you to “virtually” change speeds as you play. Here’s an example of what switching from the slow to fast speed and then back down sounds like.

Note: This audio clip played using a software emulation of a tonewheel organ.

Notice how it takes a little bit of time to spin up to full speed, and how the return back to slow speed occurs quicker — something that’s typical of the way the motors in a physical rotating speaker system work.

 

Coming next month: Layering Sounds Together

All audio clips played on a Yamaha P-515 except where noted.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

The History of Marching Drums at Mardi Gras

Drumming is a vital part of any marching ensemble and is especially important for the bands in New Orleans — a city that has been a cultural melting pot throughout its history. Nowhere is that more evident than in its music, which evolved from African, European, Caribbean and Native American influences.

One of the most visible examples of the city’s musical diversity is its marching band tradition. Such bands and “Second Lines” — a type of musical procession unique to New Orleans — are ubiquitous year-round in the Crescent City, but are most visible during the Mardi Gras season.

In case you’re wondering, “Mardi Gras” is French for “Fat Tuesday,” which falls each year on the day before Ash Wednesday, the start of Lent. The term is said to have derived from “Boeuf Gras,” which means “Fat Ox,” and referred to the 17th-century French tradition of eating fattened farm animals on the day before Lent. Fat Tuesday marks the end of two weeks of intense partying, with parades and marching bands abounding. It’s a celebration of the end of Carnival, which begins each year in early January and is celebrated in many countries throughout the world.

Multicultural Roots

Nearly fifty years after its French founding in 1718, New Orleans became a Spanish territory. It remained that way until 1800, when Spain ceded it back to France. Just three years later, the region became the property of the United States as a result of the Louisiana Purchase.

New Orleans was a busy port that was integral to the slave trade until the end of the Civil War. During the Spanish colonial period, slave laws were not as onerous as they would later become. Enslaved people were often given Sundays off and allowed some freedom of movement. Many would gather in Congo Square — a plaza located in the neighborhood that’s now called Tremé — to play and dance to the music from their home countries.

Congo Square played a significant role in developing the musical traditions of New Orleans, particularly drumming. The syncopated rhythms played in those gatherings, such as the “Bamboula,” are considered a foundation of what we think of today as New Orleans-style beats.

On the March

Closeup of a saxophone player in a marching band on a New Orleans street.
A New Orleans jazz funeral band.

Marching bands have long been a staple of New Orleans music. Their origins go all the way back to the 1830s, when they were primarily military-style ensembles. After the Civil War, emancipated African Americans began forming marching bands, which typically featured brass instruments and usually a pair of drummers: one on bass drum and one on snare.

Such bands became a staple of African American funeral processions, later known as “jazz funerals,” a tradition that continues today. The musicians would play slow dirges as the mourners marched to the cemetery along with the rolling casket. Then they’d play upbeat music on the way back, and the people would dance to celebrate the deceased person’s life. The rhythms they played had a heavy West African influence, as did the dancing of the marchers, which came from West African circle and ring shout dances.

The Second Line

Marching bands performed at many different social events in New Orleans, but the type of procession they formed at funerals became adopted at parades and eventually became known as the Second Line. (The “First Line” is the main section, featuring a full brass band.) The Second Line consists of additional musicians and assorted other marchers who dance and engage with bystanders — a style called “second-lining.” Some have termed this “the quintessential New Orleans art form — a jazz funeral without a body.”

Second Line drumming, particularly for the snare drum, is improvisational, which sets it apart from the highly regimented snare parts in traditional marching bands. At small Second Line parades, the person on bass drum will typically set a steady rhythm, emphasizing the first and third beats of a measure, while the snare player adds syncopated counter-rhythms. At larger parades like those held at Mardi Gras, a second line snare drummer typically follows the brass band, playing off of the marching beat with improvised polyrhythmic figures that can inspire the second line dancers or even the band itself.

Brightly colored individual Yamaha snare drums in staggered rows.
Yamaha MS-9414 marching snare drums.

Mardi Gras Celebrations

Up until the late 1800s, the inner-city population of New Orleans was largely shut out of Mardi Gras festivities, which had traditionally been a province of the upper class and consisted of fancy dress balls featuring classical musicians and ballroom dancing.

But at the turn of the 20th century, especially in poorer neighborhoods, people started their own Mardi Gras celebrations. They formed their own Social Aid and Pleasure Club organizations (better known as SAPCs or “krewes”), which began sponsoring parades and other events. Thus began a tradition that’s still a big part of the African American Mardi Gras experience: dressing up in costumes and trying to outdo rival krewes in both music and regalia.

Mardi Gras Music

At around the same time, Dixieland jazz and ragtime were developing as popular musical forms, and both had a major impact on the music played at Mardi Gras. Over the years, additional musical styles have become integrated into the festivities, including jazz, R&B, gospel and funk.

Today, if you’re lucky enough to visit New Orleans during Mardi Gras, you’re sure to see and hear lots of bands of all varieties — everything from small Second Line ensembles to full traditional marching bands with complete brass and marching percussion sections that include multiple snares, bass drums, toms and other marching instruments. High school and HBCU (Historically Black Colleges and Universities) marching bands from as far away as Kentucky, North Carolina and Virginia regularly perform at Mardi Gras parades in The Big Easy, with many incorporating Second Line rhythms into their material.

But Mardi Gras isn’t the only time of year you can enjoy New Orleans’ rich musical offerings. On any given Sunday afternoon, you can visit Congo Square and listen to (or even participate in) drum circles playing traditional West African polyrhythms and Second Line beats on hand drums. Or you can go to famous Bourbon Street in the French Quarter, where many bars offer live music nightly, featuring bands with drummers who interpret infectious New Orleans rhythms on standard kits instead of drumlines.

Whether you play drums or just like to listen to great music, the vibrant New Orleans music scene offers something for everyone!

Photographs by Deborah Gremito and Getty Images / Philip Gould

 

Yamaha offers a wide range of marching drums. Click here for more information.

Reducing Performance Anxiety

We’ve all seen it happen and have even felt it ourselves — that feeling in the pit of your stomach, the shakiness, the nerves. As directors, we have learned to live with performance anxiety, but what can we do to help our students deal with it?

What is Musical Performance Anxiety?

Musical Performance Anxiety (MPA) is the clinical term for what is commonly referred to as stage fright. Fueled by anxiety, excitement, fear and self-pressure, it’s a factor that can have a huge effect on the success of our students in performance. To better help students deal with MPA, we need to first understand it.

We want our students to be excited about performing, but not to the point where they are freaking out. This type of anxiety is natural and normal and at least 16% of our students experience it, probably more early on. Anxiety is defined as “anticipation of an upcoming event,” which is not a bad thing in itself. For some, this is driven by fear — in particular, fear of the unknown (“What’s performing on stage going to be like?” and “What will happen?”). Students’ perception of what is expected of them, and how they are taught to deal with the pressure of success versus failure is also a factor in MPA.

So how do we help tame this beast in our students? Let me suggest tackling the three main roots of the issue:

  1. The individual student
  2. The task at hand
  3. The performance situation

1. The Individual Student

female cello Reno Retouched DSC00331Which of your students are extroverts, and which are more introverts? Typically, it’s usually the introverted students who are more visibly shaken by the prospect of performing in public. However, some of my biggest extroverts also become quite openly anxious in the face of performing.

To quell these nerves from the get-go, provide opportunities in class for students to be more publicly visible. For example, simply ask students to answer questions out loud in class more often, ask them to stand up in class (especially when responding to a question or when performing) and provide performance-like opportunities for them on a regular basis.

One very simple way to ease into performance mode is to hear students play in smaller groups. Start with one side of the class playing while the other side claps and counts or fingers along. Then narrow it down to a row or section at a time. Or, number students off in groups of four and have just the even numbers play, then just the odd numbers, then just the ones, then the twos, etc. In as many ways as you can, start with a larger group then work down to smaller ones — this will build confidence in performing.

You can also boost confidence in your students by having them stand when playing, introduce themselves (always a fun exercise in public speaking!) or introduce others. Always have the rest of class involved in either following along physically or engaged in evaluating how the performing group did. Solicit student feedback from the class on group performances. I like to ask them to look for specific things, such as “tell me what you heard in their blend,” “who had the best tone?” or “who looked most confident to you?” Before asking for feedback, I always tell students to “be kind” in their remarks, and the students really seem to respond positively in their critiques.

Exercises like this provide students with opportunities to simulate performance in a much less threatening environment. Pointing out what they’re being successful at, rather than first focusing on what needs improvement builds confidence and can reduce the pressure they put on themselves.

Another way to build confidence and encourage students to take musical risks is to utilize improvisation in the classroom. In a game where there are no “wrong” answers, provide students with two notes, then demonstrate several combinations of them. Go around the room, row or section and have each student create their own. Put a rhythm track behind it and use it to reinforce a new rhythm concept as well, if you like. Just let the students create – make no corrections or praises. You can expand this type of game in many ways to include various note combinations (even from a piece you’re working on), scale segments, rhythmic motifs, etc., all the while just allowing your students the opportunity to play with music. You might think that “this takes time away from polishing our performance.” My response? This is time well spent on the art of performing!

2. The Task at Hand

Tackling the task at hand and becoming proficient at what will be performed is, of course, one of the biggest confidence builders. The responsibility for this lies on the shoulders of both the director and the students. It is the director’s responsibility to select literature that is attainable in the amount of time given, to utilize rehearsal time in the most effective manner and to provide the students with a structured regiment for how to build their proficiency. It is the student’s responsibility to put in the focused practice time (or be focused during guided practice time) to build the necessary skills and technique.

Program and Plan Well: From a director’s standpoint, as well as that of a contest adjudicator, over-programming is a key factor in increasing students’ MPA (not to mention the director’s!). Over-programming is the result of overestimating your students’ abilities, their determination or the time you have to work with your ensembles. I’ve heard quite a few directors justify their choices by stating, “I like to keep my ensemble on the edge, so their only real run-through is on the concert.” However, the reality is that they haven’t managed their rehearsal time or literature selection well enough. And what are they actually teaching their students in this example? To cram and underprepare for a performance, which in turn increases performance anxiety!

Would any professional musical organization take such risks? By the time the date of the performance arrives, your students should have already played that performance several times. Make literature choices with the students’ needs (technical growth, musical growth, enjoyment) and available time in mind, and you won’t over program.

Get Students Involved in the Plan: Sharing your rehearsal goals — daily, short term and long term — with your students is one of the best ways to help them to prepare material in an efficient and timely manner. Spend time regularly asking students to assess how well they’re attaining these goals, which will provide a starting point for planning out practice time (whether that’s on their own or during class). Ask your students for feedback on which sections of the music they feel the least prepared on — this will also help you serve them well and increases student engagement in rehearsals.

Record a section of rehearsal time, and assign students to listen for specific things, such as “how does the pulse feel here?” or “how would you describe the intonation here?” or “what do you think is the weakest element between measures 17 and 25?”, etc. To avoid surprises the week of a performance, plan regular “check points” prior to a concert and assess if your band is ready to move on.

3. The Performance Situation

Remember the 1984 movie “Gremlins” where a man visits a Chinese antique shop and buys a strange creature called a mogwai as a Christmas gift for his son? The shop owner gives the man three important instructions: 1) do not feed the creature after midnight, 2) do not get it wet, and 3) do not expose it to sunlight. The man relays these instructions to his son who, of course, breaks the first two rules immediately (spoiler alert!), resulting in the cute little mogwai spawning several evil and destructive gremlins. All sorts of terror ensue as a result.

orchestra performing Reno Retouched DSC00391The point I make to my own students is this: I know what is going to happen musically at a performance because we have been preparing and practicing daily. What concerns me is how they will deal with all the unknowns. Will I get well-behaved mogwais or mischievous gremlins on concert night? Lack of familiarity with the performance situation is probably one of the biggest sources of anxiety for even a well-prepared ensemble.

Unlike the boy in the movie, we should heed the shop owner’s instructions and not do certain things. To help my students maintain a sense of normalcy before the concert, here are some of my rules: 1) avoid doing things on concert night that aren’t in your usual routine, 2) warm up in a similar manner, 3) expect students to enter the room in the same way and 4) maintain a calm tone.

The Walk-Through: Knowledge of what to expect is a huge factor in reducing MPA, especially in elementary and middle school performers. Practice your entry and exit, as well as how you’re going to acknowledge the audience during class several times. Help your students prepare for concerts by describing exactly what the venue will look like. I use drawings and diagrams on the board to describe what our gym set up might be for the concert, the traffic flow from warm up to the room, designate areas for instrument storage, etc.

For off campus events, I’ll show my students photos of the venue whenever possible, including what the entrance/outside of the venue looks like, as well as pointing out the warm up, performance and audience seating areas. This helps students develop a sense of familiarity with the venue before they’ve even set foot inside!

We regularly go over a detailed timeline of the actual concert, and I’ll frequently ask students random questions about it, until they get to the point where they could easily describe what’s going to happen to anyone else. Yes, you may still have students who have trouble remembering where to be and when, but if most of your band is informed, they can help those who are not! And students who know what to expect are less likely to be anxious.

By addressing the three root issues of MPA — the individual student, the task at hand and the performance situation — you will help your young students (and you!) to have less stress before and during performances!

The Music and Work of Omar Thomas

It’s no surprise that Omar Thomas has become an educator, arranger and composer of renown. Born to Guyanese parents in Brooklyn, New York, he pursued opportunities to play music like an athlete drawn to competition, taking up trombone in the fourth grade and writing original music by the eighth. In high school, he participated in the marching band and sang in the choir. “I was the kid who the director would ask to run a rehearsal if they weren’t around,” he says with a laugh.

Marching band leader in uniform with his band on field.
Omar Thomas in his marching band days.

Today, Thomas’ musical offerings shift comfortably between jazz and classical idioms, thanks to his broad exposure to multiple genres and a fervent desire to continually push the boundaries and blaze new trails.

FORGING A MUSICAL IDENTITY

In his early years at home with his parents, Thomas was exposed to a steady diet of classic soul, Soca, Calypso and Reggae that shaped his musical DNA. “All of that just kind of sat with me and I’m really proud that I was able to take that part of who I am and put it into my own music,” he says.

Omar Thomas and his mother at his graduate school graduation.
Omar with his mother.

“When I first started writing,” he continues, “I was really drawn to chords and to harmony, and I think that’s why jazz and R&B were such strong entry points for me because they were doing things harmonically that really spoke to me. I just sought to explore that as fully as possible … I wasn’t thinking too much about emotional catharsis or diving deep into issues and topics in those early days; I was feeling the harmonies and was really inspired to dig down and learn more from them. I would hear something and say, ‘What is that chord? What is going on there?’ I’d want to work with that chord progression and understand how it worked and see if I could manipulate it for my own uses.”

Thomas would eventually shift his interests in musical styles to more formal settings. After studying Music Education at James Madison University in Harrisonburg, Virginia, he moved to Boston in 2006 to pursue a Master of Music in Jazz Composition at the New England Conservatory of Music. While still a student at the conservatory, he was named assistant professor of Harmony at Berklee College of Music in Boston. He later joined the faculty at the Music Theory department at the Peabody Institute of Johns Hopkins University in Baltimore and is currently an assistant professor of Composition at the University of Texas at Austin.

MUSICAL HEROES

Thomas, like many artists, was deeply influenced by his musical heroes. For him, the real dynamic duo is Duke Ellington and Billy Strayhorn. “They were always so ahead of their time,” he says, “and were so prolific and had a deep love and appreciation for all art; you could hear that in all of their music. They were always searching for something; they had really deep and unique things happening orchestrationally that were just decades ahead of their time.

“I’m also inspired by who they were … You look at these old pictures of the Ellington big band, and it was very much integrated and people were hugging on each other and loving on each other.”

Duke Ellington, right, and Billy Strayhorn, left.

Thomas remains impressed by Ellington and Strayhorn’s resilience to create in an environment that was, at the time, openly hostile to Black people. “It just seemed like there was such a positive spirit about who they were and the situations in which they’d put themselves, even though they had to deal with a segregated country,” he says. “They were in situations where members of the band couldn’t walk through the front door … Despite that, they were able to maintain their class and their inspiration and their talent and their effectiveness and their reach.”

Sometimes things come full circle. In 2019, the National Band Association presented Thomas with the William D. Revelli Award for his composition Come Sunday, named as a nod to Ellington, making him the first Black American to receive that honor.

OF OUR NEW DAY BEGUN

The Black Experience can be painful and dark. In those moments, many turn to music for comfort and understanding. In 2015, Thomas was asked to write a piece of music to honor the nine victims of the mass shooting inside Mother Emanuel Church in Charleston, South Carolina. It proved to be a profoundly meaningful experience and a memorable musical journey.

Man in suit and tie hugging his son as they both smile for the camera.
Omar and his father.

Thomas’ first instinct was to say no. “It seemed like such a daunting task,” he recalls. But after receiving gentle encouragement from his father, he embraced the challenge and decided to title the piece “Of Our New Day Begun.” When Thomas learned that church members would be in the audience at the premiere, he realized that their attendance would help him in making decisions about how the piece should sound. “The most important thing to me was that they would hear themselves and their experience coming from the stage; to know that they were seen and they were loved and that this piece was about them.”

For that to happen, the music had to be authentic in its melodic and vocal presentation. To achieve this, Thomas used the Black National Anthem, “Lift Every Voice and Sing,” as a cornerstone melody, and instructed the choir director to leave the African American English vernacular in place, telling them, “Don’t teach the singers how to pronounce their T’s and their D’s, and how to make the vowels round, because that’s not what this is supposed to be.”

Inspired by trumpeter Terence Blanchard’s scores for Spike Lee’s films, Thomas decided to go for “something a bit cinematic.” He also wanted to make sure that there was a clear journey throughout the piece. “I had to think about what I wanted people to go through and how I wanted them to feel at the end of the piece specifically,” he says. “And so it made sense to end on the entire band playing the same note, growing and growing and growing and bringing back the stomping and the clapping as kind of one voice becoming many voices and the resilience in saying ‘this will not defeat us, nor will it define us.’”

Check out this video of the Dallas Winds performing “Of Our New Day Begun”:

CARIBANA

Some of Thomas’ earliest and fondest memories are those of carnival parades on Eastern Parkway in Brooklyn, which he remembers as being “loud, joyful and colorful,” speaking poignantly of “flatbed 18-wheeler trucks with massive rigs of speakers blasting this music out to the point where it’s literally shaking your body, overwhelming you in the best possible way.” This experience would serve to inform him when he was recently commissioned to write a celebratory piece for the 75th Midwest Clinic, which came to be titled “Caribana” — an exploration of the Caribbean music of his youth that would serve to honor his family and heritage.

Young boy with Carnival dancers.
A young Omar attending carnival in Brooklyn.

“For years I had been batting around the idea of exploring Soca and Calypso music in a symphonic setting, and this seemed like the perfect opportunity to do that,” he says. The name of the piece is taken from the annual festival held in Toronto — the largest Caribbean carnival outside of the Caribbean itself.

“I built everything off of the groove. The rhythms had to be very loose and free and over the bar line, and then the harmony underneath had to have this folksy intention.”

Despite his strong grounding in Soca/Calypso, Thomas found the composition process challenging because he didn’t have any models for how to express those rhythms and emotions in a symphonic setting. Convinced that the piece had to be conversational yet timeless, he made the decision to rely heavily on percussion, known in this style of music as the “engine room.”

“I built everything off of the groove,” he explains. “All of the rhythms were derived from what was happening in the engine room,” which in this case included glass bottles to simulate the sound of a car brake drum being struck — an element that’s specific to Soca music — as well as cowbell, wood block, congas and bongos. “The rhythms had to be very loose and free and over the bar line,” he says, “and then the harmony underneath had to have this folksy intention.”

The experience, according to Thomas, forced him to stretch and grow as a composer. “Walking that tightrope from beginning to end was really difficult,” he reports, “but I’m extremely happy with how it turned out.”

Check out this brief excerpt from “Caribana”:

 

 

View this post on Instagram

 

A post shared by Omar Thomas (@omarthomasmusic)

BLACK HISTORY ISN’T LIMITED TO FEBRUARY

Omar Thomas in a stylized photo shoot wearing a combination of a Western business suit with a brightly colored cloth over one shoulder and ceremonial face painting.
Omar Thomas today.

Thomas continues to contribute to Black History, building a legacy for young black composers to follow. But this stretches well beyond any one particular month. “I can’t speak for everyone, but I don’t think Black History Month is as big of a thing in Black households because we live Black history every day,” he says. In Thomas’ view, Black history is celebrated year-round in how “the Black experience … helped to shape this country.”

Looking ahead, Thomas plans to focus on themes related to the Black experience that aren’t rooted in trauma and pain — to paint sonic tapestries in brighter hues so as to convey the fullness and joy of Black life.

“The reason there aren’t more pieces like Caribana speaks specifically to issues of representation,” he says. “There are almost no composers out there who come from the Caribbean. [But] people need the opportunity to be able to tell their stories. Space needs to be made for them to be able to share with the world who they are. I hope that my presence in the field gives others permission to create music and tell their stories.

“I don’t believe that music just breaks down barriers; I believe that music phases through barriers as if the barriers are not even there.”

“I don’t believe that music just breaks down barriers; I believe that music phases through barriers as if the barriers are not even there,” Thomas concludes. “You may come to a concert feeling a certain way, but you’ll leave feeling a completely different way if there is a message behind that music, no matter how high your defenses were when you walked in the door. I love, and I take very seriously, having that kind of power to effect change and to move hearts.”

Photographs courtesy of Omar Thomas and Getty Images / Afro American Newspapers/Gado / Contributor.

 

For more information, visit www.omarthomas.com

How (and Why) to Set the Volume Limiter on Your iPhone®

Did you know that listening to headphones or earbuds at loud levels can damage your hearing over time? The threshold for injury is based on a combination of how loud you listen and for how long.

If you’re in a noisy environment like a train or plane, it’s easy to inadvertently turn up the volume above safe levels. If you listen to headphones a lot, particularly in such environments, you could be putting your ears in danger. Excessive volume over time can injure the hair cells in your ears — which are critical for your hearing — and is irreversible. Damage enough hair cells, and you’ll start to permanently impair your hearing.

Fortunately, if you’ve got an iPhone®, you can use its Headphone Safety features to help preserve your hearing. In this article, we’ll describe what it is, and how to access it.

Hearing Is Not Linear

Human hearing is sensitive to a wide range of sounds. We can hear something as quiet as the rustle of a leaf or as loud as a jet taking off — and everything in-between.

To quantify such a wide range of sonic energy (referred to as sound pressure level or SPL for short), scientists and audio professionals use the decibel (dB) scale, which is logarithmic rather than linear. Raising the level by 3dB doubles the energy of a sound; raising it by 10dB increases it by a factor of 10; raising it by 20dB by a factor of 100.

With that in mind, here’s a list of common sound levels, sourced from a document published by the Centers for Disease Control (CDC):

List of sounds and their related decibels.

Mobile devices typically output music at up to about 110dB SPL, but anything over 85dB is considered unsafe. The longer you listen at unsafe levels, the more likely that hearing loss will occur, and the higher the SPL, the shorter the time in which that damage can happen. For example, impairment can occur after eight hours at 85dB, after two hours at 91dB, after 30 minutes at 97dB and after just 15 minutes at 100dB.

The bottom line is this: Whether you’re concerned about your long-term hearing safety or that of your child, or even if you just have sensitive ears, setting volume limits and monitoring your time of exposure is a good idea.

Your iPhone to the Rescue

Fortunately, the iPhone has an internal signal processor called a limiter, which allows you to set a volume threshold above which sound can’t go. Any audio that tries to exceed the threshold has its level automatically reduced — in layman’s terms, the signal is “squashed down.”

Even if you don’t use the limiter, your iPhone can track your exposure to audio through headphones over time, and you even have it notify you if you’ve exceeded safe limits. To make all of this work, you need to configure things correctly in your iPhone settings.

Setting Up Headphone Safety

To access the Headphone Safety features on an iPhone, follow these simple steps:

1. Open Settings.

2. Tap either Sounds or Sounds & Haptics, depending on your iPhone model.

2. Tap Headphone Safety:

Screenshot.

3. In the Headphone Safety screen (shown below), turn on Reduce Loud Sounds and set the limiter. If you listen less than eight hours a day, you can keep it at 85 decibels. Otherwise, turn it down to 80 decibels.

Screenshot.

4. In that same screen, turn on Headphone Notifications so that you’ll get a warning if you listen too loud for too long over a 7-day period.

Track It

Your iPhone keeps track of your exposure to loud sounds over time through the built-in Apple Health app. If you want to see how much exposure you’ve had over the last week, it’s easy:

1. Open the Health App.

2. Tap the Browse button at the bottom right.

3. Tap Hearing:

Screenshot.

4. Tap Headphone Audio Levels:

Screenshot.

On the Headphone Audio Levels page, you’ll see your exposure for the week in decibels and whether you’ve exceeded healthy levels:

Screenshot.

More Solutions

We’ve focused here on the iPhone’s Headphone Safety features, but Android™ phones also offer a similar limiting function. Called Media Volume Limits, it too lets you set a maximum audio level for listening on headphones.

Yamaha has tackled the issue of safe levels differently. Its newest wireless headphones and earbuds feature Listening Care technology, which allows the user to hear the music clearly at lower volumes. Humans hear midrange frequencies louder than lows or highs. Because of that, people tend to turn up the volume to better hear the bass and treble elements. Listening Care compensates for that by using equalization (frequency changes) to automatically make sure that you’re hearing an even tonal balance at any volume.

Listening Care is even more sophisticated on products like the Yamaha EP-E70A earphones or YH-E700A headphones. Those models factor in not only the level of the music you’re listening to, but also the amount of background noise around you to create the ultimate tonal settings.

Wireless banded over headphones.
Yamaha YH-E700A headphones.

Use the Tech

Whether it’s Headphone Safety on iOS, Media Volume Limits on Android or Yamaha Listening Care, technical solutions are available to help you preserve your hearing when listening on headphones or earbuds. Take advantage of these sophisticated technologies so you can enjoy your music worry-free.

It’s also a good idea to get a hearing test. Not only will that show any problems you might have now, but it will serve as a good baseline to compare to when you get future tests.

The Teacher’s Role in Developing Good Practice Habits

In “The Different Types of Practice,” I presented several practice types, which teachers must understand in order to help their students develop effective practice habits.

From the very first piano lesson, it is the role and responsibility of the teacher to assign the work to be prepared between lessons and to provide students with the necessary tools to practice effectively at home.

For younger students, parental supervision, guidance and support during practice sessions are essential if they are to make good progress. Few students love to practice in the beginning, however, if parents and teachers are able to help students form good and regular practice habits, students are much more likely to achieve success in their music studies.

teacher watching student playing CLP 700 Upright Piano 1In the article “Not All Practice Makes Perfect: Moving from naive to purposeful practice can dramatically increase performance,” Dr. K. Anders Ericsson (1947–2020) and Robert Pool note the importance of the role of an expert teacher or coach in helping accelerate a student’s progression to expertise. In their view, having a teacher who is already familiar with the obstacles a student might encounter is invaluable to student success because the teacher can suggest ways to overcome such challenges. However, novice music teachers often assign homework to be practiced without offering any practice strategies or much in the way of practice advice to their students.

In the article, “Productive Practicing,” eminent piano pedagogue Robert Pace (1924–2010) outlines a number of excellent suggestions aimed at guiding teachers to better help their students accomplish more during practice sessions. Teaching our students to do more than simply practice using repetition but to play with musical thought and concentration can make a huge difference.

In my experience, ineffective practice can lead to mediocre playing as well as a general lack of enjoyment as a result. As such, I have found that students often give up music study altogether because they do not know how to get over the next hurdle or plateau in their practice. How do we get our students to practice? What do we get them to do during their practice time in order to make progress?

Perfect Practice Makes Perfect

In their oft-cited study, “It’s Not How Much; It’s How: Characteristics of Practice Behavior and Retention of Performance Skills,” music educators, Robert Duke, Amy Simmons and Carla Davis Cash make it clear that it is the proportion of correct repetitions in relation to total number of repetitions undertaken during a practice session that translates into playing accurately with consistency.

To this point, we might have a student who plays poorly during the lesson say, “I played it much better at home.” I respond by asking, “Which time was it better, and how many times did you play it to its best?” More often than not, the student made many errors in his or her practice, often through trial-and-error, or naïve, repetitions, only to finally arrive (often by luck) at an accurate rendering of the passage in question. As such, the student believes that “practice makes (or has made) perfect.”

Teacher Female Student

However, this old maxim is untrue. Let’s say the student played the passage 20 times with the first 19 times being inaccurate and the last iteration was finally played cleanly. The chances that the student will play this passage correctly again, especially in the context of a lesson where he or she is more self-conscious than at home, is exceedingly unlikely. As such, “practice makes (or has made) the inaccuracy permanent.”

With this in mind, the old maxim should perhaps be amended to more correctly state that “perfect practice makes perfect.”

Craft a Practice Plan

One of the most effective ways to improve the quality of our students’ practice is to help them craft an effective practice plan. Such a plan should not only include all of the materials to be practiced and activities to be undertaken, but also the structure or organization of each practice session, time spent on each item or activity, as well as the specific practice goals and strategies to achieve them to be implemented in every instance. In fact, the quality of the practice to be done is more important than the quantity or amount of time spent practicing in total.

To help my students foster productive practice habits more consistently, I have created a practice planning template with sample strategies and more that I use in my studio. When I first use this with my students, we fill it in together. Over time, I encourage my students to create their weekly practice plan by themselves because my goal is to instill independence and empower them to be self-reliant. Pace wrote, “The best teachers help students learn to teach themselves, enabling them to progress beyond their mentors’ expertise and to continue learning for the rest of their lives.” Indeed, this is certainly a noble goal, and one I am hoping to achieve with my students.

For additional ideas about creating effective practice plans, Réa Beaumont’s article “Take Note: Developing an organized practice system for piano lessons” in Clavier Companion magazine is a superb resource.

Geoffrey Tankard provides excellent examples of practice time tables and how to effectively distribute a student’s practice time in the chapter on “Practicing” in his book, “Pianoforte Diplomas & Degrees” (see pages 49-50). In addition, Tankard provides a “suggested practice chart for covering 1 hour a day [of technique] for six days [per week]” on page 3 of his comprehensive technical exercise manual written with Eric Harrison, “Pianoforte Technique on an Hour a Day.”

Teachers can also find innumerable online templates and utilize countless apps to help their students better structure and organize their practice sessions.

Monitor Practice Sessions

Another way that teachers can help their students improve their practice habits is to monitor their students’ actual practice sessions. Due to the COVID-19 pandemic, it is easier than ever for teachers to check in with their students via Zoom, Skype or FaceTime. An occasional practice check-in during the week is brief and helps keep students accountable and considerate of their practice habits. Similarly, at monthly group lessons at my home, I always incorporate a portion of time specifically dedicated to supervised practice. I am able to do this easily with a small group of students using one acoustic and two digital instruments.

Perform as Much as Possible

In addition to utilizing practice plans and monitoring and supervising students’ practice time, I am a big proponent of having my students perform as much as possible in order to develop confidence on stage and a performance mindset. Since it can be hard to find and secure an audience, a simple way to simulate the sense of a performance is to record ourselves.

Teacher with 2 girls

In preparation for a recital, competition or music exam, my students will sometimes send me daily videos or audio recordings of themselves playing for several weeks in advance. Not only do I send them feedback, I also have them listen and critique themselves. In these ways, they become increasingly used to performing while honing their own critical listening and analytical skills.

Regularity versus Time

And finally, it is important that I make it clear to my students that the regularity of their practice is more important for their progress than the total amount of time they spend practicing during a given period. Building regularity helps to foster a habit.

If students practice at a similar time each day, the practice habit is much more likely to stick. In addition, less time spent practicing in total every day will probably yield better results than one long day of practice each week. The analogy of physical exercise can be helpful in this regard: If we only work out for two hours one day per week there will be some benefit. However, if we exercise for 10 minutes each day for a total of 70 minutes, wouldn’t the physical benefit be greater even though we have spent less time exercising in total?

In my article, “12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies,” I present practical guidelines that music educators can employ to help students practice more effectively.

Sources and Resources

Concert Black Do’s and Don’ts

When marching band season is over, it may be time to consider refreshing your ensemble’s concert black. After all, the first thing judges see at band festival is your students’ appearance.

It may sound cliché but looks really do matter in the performing arts. So how do you get your band to look modern and timeless? It isn’t quite as easy as it seems.

Here are some do’s and don’ts when it comes to concert band apparel.

Don’t: Add Ties of the School Colors

Ties of the school colors are things of the past. The dual striped statements make your band look outdated. Mixing two more colors on top of the black and white will look way too busy. To keep your band looking elegant and timeless, don’t add too many colors. 

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

Do: Consider a Tiny Splash of Color

While mixing two or three colors with your concert black is distracting, choosing one small splash of color can really bring the look alive. It doesn’t necessarily have to be one of your school colors. Sometimes, it shouldn’t be. If your school colors are yellow or dark purple, you may find your group looking like striped bumblebees, or completely contrast-less. Burgundy or scarlet red accents always look beautiful with black. There are several ways to add one bit of color, such as student-chosen jewelry, cummerbunds or cufflinks.

cello male tux pexels roxanne minnish 9660813Do:  Offer Suits or Tuxes

Full-length dresses and suits are traditional, and there are many great ways to do them. You can try a plain suit, notched lapel jackets and tuxedo pants, or a traditional tux.

If suits and tuxedos aren’t in the budget, try black button-down shirts and dress pants instead. To make this look appear to be an ensemble uniform, make sure all the button-downs are the same style and brand.

Do: Keep it Simple for the Ladies

For female-identifying students, consider the following combinations:

  • Black tops and wide-leg palazzo pants
  • Long dresses
  • A blouse top and long skirt

Blouses and dresses can get pretty complicated, with sashes and sparkles, straps and peplums. Less is often more when it comes to finding something that is universally flattering on women. Dresses with square/sharp geometric necklines are classic and are a great way to add shape to an outfit.

Do: Let Your Students Choose the Uniform They are Most Comfortable With

Having students feel confident in what they are wearing is important. You may have students in your class who do not feel comfortable with the gender they were assigned at birth. Or, non-binary students may prefer one option over the other. Don’t be afraid to offer suits and dresses as the two choices for everyone. Just make sure to do an online form so students can choose their option before you place the order.

YOB-441IIT INTERMEDIATE OBOE: Features a modified conservatory system for advancing students!

Don’t: Let Your Students Choose Their Own Concert Black

Concert black without much specification is fine for middle school and non-audition high school bands. But if you plan to take your ensembles to festivals for ratings, make sure that you have a proper concert uniform and clearly lay down the ground rules. And, even if it’s not in the budget to buy uniforms, be sure to create a document of what students can and can’t wear from head to toe (see below).

Do: Spell Out All the Specifics

strings black top black skirt pexels cottonbro 7097468Even if you have a standard uniform, many things can go wrong. Consider the following:

  • What color socks should students wear?
  • If students wear dresses, should they also wear stockings? If yes, what color?
  • What limitations are there on footwear?
  • What personal accessories will be allowed?

It’s easy to see how something that seems so basic can go very wrong. One time, I was at a symphony concert and I couldn’t listen to the music because I was far too distracted by one particular cello player’s purple socks. Don’t be the band director who has a kid with purple socks in her ensemble!

As for socks and stockings, choose black because it makes everything easier (and, it looks good).

Shoes are something that also can go very wrong, especially for the ladies. Flats and heels are both fine, but consider setting a limit on the height of the heels. You don’t want one instrumentalist who shows up in 6-inch bedazzled platforms! As for the guys, any black, leather dress shoes will do.

Last but not least, consider what accessories will be allowed. While it might be easiest to say no to all jewelry, you do want to allow your students some option for personal expression. Consider putting limits on the accessories, such as dainty, neutral jewelry like gold, silver and clear crystal earrings, necklaces and bracelets. Otherwise, you might end up with a student wearing a big yellow beaded statement necklace on top of your carefully planned concert black.

Make sure to spell out what is and is not allowed in a form, put it up on Schoology and send it home to parents!

Don’t: Order Satin

Not all fabrics are made equally. Low-quality polyester tends to pill after 10 or 12 washes. Some common fabric types you will find on uniform sites include satin, crepe and stretch velvet.

clarinet white shirt pexels joanjo puertos 8900200Satin looks great, but keep your flutists and percussionists in mind. They will need extra give in the shoulders. In the case of concert bands, skip the all-satin uniforms. Crepe and polyester allow for more motion, but they can appear thin and cheesy if you don’t choose the right blend. Instead, go for a mix of poly and cotton, or a heavy crepe fabric.

Do: Check Out Group Prices

You can often get a set of uniforms for your entire ensemble between $30 and $60 dollars per student if your order is large enough. Group prices are a great way to save some money in your budget! Some places even offer group prices for rental uniforms.

Final Notes

If you work at a school that has a tight budget or possibly no budget at all, consider a large fundraiser specifically for uniforms. Another possibility is to ask students to bring their own uniforms but give very strict guidelines. For example, all students must wear black dress shoes, flats or kitten heels, black socks, black pants and a black shirt with three-quarter sleeves or longer.

While concert black may seem much simpler than marching band uniforms, there are a surprising number of factors to consider. It may take some trial and error, but your concert band will be looking sharp in no time!

12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies

We have looked at “The Different Types of Practice” and “The Teacher’s Role in Developing Good Practice Habits.” Now, I would like to share some practical guidelines that have benefitted my students in their development as performing pianists.

1. Make it Harder

Boy Playing CLP 700 Upright Piano

One main principle that governs my philosophy on practice is “make it harder (to make it easier).” If a passage contains difficult leaps, making the leaps harder by placing them farther apart on the keyboard, or playing them with eyes closed can actually make the original leaps feel easier to navigate and play. Similarly, a one-octave, double-note chromatic third passage could be turned into a two-, three- or four-octave passage instead. A tricky passage over the keys could be transposed to feel even more awkward and uncomfortable in the new key. In these ways, the original passage or technical hurdle will come to feel and be easier, and mastery can be achieved.

2. Repeat with Variety

Another principle I advocate when practicing is “repetition with variety.” Mindless repetition can become unproductive or worse, reinforce permanent bad habits or inaccuracy. Constantly varying the strategy or procedure utilizing variable practice invites mental stimulation and engagement. As such, my students and I try to come up with as many conceivable ways to practice a given passage or piece as possible. When drilling a piece for technical surety, for example, a student can vary the procedure in innumerable ways, including playing in different rhythmic patterns, with various rhythmic accents or in assorted rhythmic groupings. Certain notes can be played repeated, passages can be played backward and forward, with hands reversed, etc.

Below are 10 additional practice tips and strategies that were originally included in an article I wrote for the California Music Teacher, which I have revised and updated here.

3. Set a Goal for Each Practice Session

According to Anastasia Tsioulcas in her article, “10 Easy Ways to Optimize Your Music  Practice,” practice sessions are often more effective when the player sets out with a specific goal in mind. Pianists can accomplish a great deal more in less time if the session is focused on achieving a particular objective. This can be as simple as aiming to learn a certain number of measures of music or being able to play a target passage at a specific tempo. In my own experience, I am able to accomplish far more during my practice time if I begin with a goal in mind. Even a short 5- or 10-minute practice period can be effectual when approached in this way.

 

practice journal pexels nataliya vaitkevich 5070026

4. Use Post-it Notes for Reminders and Distracting Thoughts

It is easier than ever to become distracted while practicing. Thoughts about homework, daily chores, etc. can become all-consuming and curb students’ ability to focus. As a result, the quality of their practice is negatively affected. Jotting down a reminder on a Post-it or notepad can help them keep their mind free of distractions so they can concentrate on the material at hand. I borrowed this idea from Robert Pace in his article “Productive Practicing.”

5. Keep a Practice Journal

A practice journal can help bring about greater awareness with regard to practice habits and tendencies. Regularly journaling, with student reflection and teacher discussion and oversight, can help students develop better practice routines and more effective practice habits in general. This journal can complement a practice record book, or both items can be merged into a single practice resource.

6. Utilize Score Study and Mental Practice

Incorporating mental practice in which students spend time studying the works they are playing away from the piano can be enormously beneficial for successful learning to occur, according to Tsioulcas. As discussed in my article “The Different Types of Practice,” mental practice, including visualization techniques, can aid in the process of learning music at and away from the instrument, as well as memorizing music and preparing for performances.

In addition, Pace explains how score study is invaluable to the learning process when students utilize some initial score study prior to trying to play a new piece at the keyboard. Students develop their inner ear and begin to acquire important analytical skills in this way.

7. Avoid Hands-Separate Learning

This point is slightly contentious as hands-separate learning is so ubiquitous and a go-to learning and practice strategy at the elementary level for many teachers. Hands-separate and voice-separate practice, especially in contrapuntal works, are two indispensable practice tools for pianists. This kind of practice allows pianists to focus on one hand or part at a time and listen intently and fully comprehend what each is doing.

Hands-separate learning is another matter entirely. When students always learn their pieces in this way, they do not conceive and understand the two parts together as a whole. Furthermore, their visual modality is diminished because they become used to focusing on only a single staff of music at any given time. In my experience, this leads to poor sight-reading ability at the piano and should therefore be used sparingly and avoided as the default strategy for learning all piano music.

8. Add Musical Details as Early as Possible

Many students practice the notes and rhythms of a piece divorced from the musical expression. Similar to hands-separate learning, such practicing leads to a compartmentalized understanding of music. Based on research by Robert Duke, Amy Simmons and Carla Davis Cash in “It’s Not How Much; It’s How: Characteristics of Practice Behavior and Retention of Performance Skills” (and rearticulated in Noa Kageyama’s article “8 Things Top Practicers Do Differently”), the sooner students are able to observe and internalize musical details such as dynamic markings in the learning process, the more efficient and effective their practice will be. Teachers might encourage their students to instill a habit of observing more of the musical details in their learning by assigning a new quick study to their students at every lesson. Such a piece should be two to three levels below the student’s other repertoire in difficulty. As such, students should be charged with learning these pieces independently with the aim of preparing them to the highest artistic level.

9. Tackle and Correct Errors Immediately

hands playing piano elijah m henderson KoQxb6taoLA unsplash

Many students expect to make errors and spend much of their time fixing learned mistakes. Mistakes are simply bad habits repeated over and over. In their research, Duke, Simmons and Cash showed that the best practicers were the ones who played with the least amount of inaccuracy and who addressed and corrected errors immediately. In reference to this study, Kageyama states that “strategically slowing things down” is the most impactful strategy for achieving absolute accuracy.

In my studio, we often talk about Cora Ahren’s and G.D. Atkinson’s idea of “making haste slowly” (see page 49 of their 1955 book, “For All Piano Teachers”) just like the slow and steady tortoise in Aesop’s famous fable who was able to beat the agile but undisciplined hare.

10. Repeat Target Passages with Variation Until Errors are Corrected, then Practice in Context

Focused repetition of targeted passages is an important element of practice. It helps to build neural pathways and develop muscular reflexes and responses. Mindless repetition is less effective and can actually do more harm than good when bad habits are reinforced during reiterations of a target passage. Repeating a target passage, or what I call a “bite-size chunk,” and utilizing variable practice so that some aspect of the music such as the rhythm, tempo, articulation, direction, metric accent, etc., is varied can be highly effectual. In this way, the mind must engage to ensure each variance is accurate, while the muscle memory is solidified through repetition. It is then important to put bite-size chunks together and practice these targeted passages in context.

11. Practice at a Variety of Tempi

Many pianists practice their repertoire at concert tempo, as well as under tempo. Slow, mindful practice, or what I call “slow-motion practice” or “tortoise tempo practice,” in which all musical details are heightened in a much slower tempo can help to secure a piece as it allows for careful listening and engagement to take place. However, pianists would do well to develop the technical and listening skills needed to be able to play repertoire with mastery at a variety of tempi including: very slow, slow, slightly under tempo, at tempo, a little faster than tempo and much faster than tempo.

12. Take Advantage of Technology

I agree with Anastasia Tsioulcas that technology can be a wonderful practice aid. There are all kinds of apps that can assist pianists during practice sessions from metronome apps, to apps that can slow down or speed up YouTube clips or MP3 files, to online practice logs and journals. It should also be noted, however, that technology is able to severely disrupt practice sessions. Text messages and other alerts are distracting and break students’ focus. Pianists might do well to place their phones on “do not disturb” or in airplane mode when practicing. Some of my students have now moved to using old-fashioned metronomes instead of a metronome app with this in mind.

For a useful list of additional practice tips and suggestions, take a look at “Hints on Practicing” on page 2 of Tankard and Harrison’s book of technical exercises, “Pianoforte Technique on an Hour a Day,” as well as Ahrens and Atkinson’s “Fundamental Rules of Practice” on page 49 of “For All Piano Teachers.”

Sources and Resources

Bridge the Gap Between “Knowing” and “Doing”

Every band director struggles to find strategies to bridge the gap between providing information to students and getting them to achieve the desired result. How do you get students to actually do what they have been told to do?

Below are some ensemble and practice strategies that I use to help students listen to the information and implement it. Some of it begins with students buying into what they are doing and believing in it. A lot of it is assisting students realize how much it takes — physically and mentally — to achieve great music-making.

Move from Conceptualizing to Actualizing

Many of the band members at Claudia Taylor Johnson High School are masters of the “essay test.” They can take a topic and often regurgitate all the information they’ve ever heard about it to hopefully hit a homerun somewhere in there.

CTJ band wearing masksIn music, the performance is the essay, and students knowing what to do and doing it are two very different things. The knowledge often doesn’t translate. How beautifully and musically our students play hinges on their ability to move from conceptualizing to actualizing, and the gap often appears in the results of their performances. For example:

  • Students know it takes practice to be great, but they don’t always practice.
  • Students know they should listen to their neighbor and match, but they don’t always remember to do it.
  • Students know they should play with their best sound, but they don’t always know how to take what they have been told and physically achieve it. Or, what they hear sitting on one end of the instrument is different than what their director hears on the other end.
  • Brass students know they should “keep their eyebrows out of their lip slurs,” but they’ll do just about anything to move from pitch to pitch when things get stressful.
  • Woodwinds know they should have newer, quality reeds for their instruments, but they enjoy re-living the taste of those enchiladas from last Tuesday far more than they can fathom breaking in a new reed.
  • And of course, all band members know they should not throw a football around inside the band hall, but … well, you get the point.

Sometimes students make choices. Sometimes students are lazy. More often than not, when it comes to making beautiful music, students either forget what they have heard or have to remember the correct information — in other words, they struggle to bridge the gap between “knowing” and “doing.”

Listening Skills and Self-Awareness are Learned Skills

A big piece of connecting knowing and doing is to develop students’ awareness. We ask students to listen and “use their ears,” but sometimes the results still fall short.

listening hand to ear dylann hendricks oxaBYAbpWgI unsplashGuiding students to listen beyond their ears and react to certain stimuli is no different than training students to form an embouchure or take a proper breath. In other words, provide clear information to students, have them practice, give them feedback — then repeat. Keep in mind that students will only fix what bothers them. Until they are as bothered by a problem as their coach, they will be limited in the amount they can improve.

So, how do you transition listening skills into learned skills?

  • Constantly reinforce that students should have an opinion. After a musical segment during rehearsal, after a performance or after listening to anything, ask students what they think about what they heard.
  • Ask simple questions like: “Should they play long or short?” or “Should they play smooth and connected or more detached?” Then follow up by asking them “why” to jumpstart conversations.
  • Eventually, you can move into more advanced questions, such as: “What did you think about the clarity of the tone quality?” or “What did you think about the consistency of style?” or “What did you notice about that phrase ending?”

“I Don’t Know” is an Acceptable Answer

Tom Bennet and Joe DixonTrain your students to respond in one of three ways: “Yes, I think so,” “No, I don’t think so” or “I don’t know” —  which may sound surprising.

One of our brass instructors, Joe Dixon, tells students that he had a former teacher who questioned him about some things in his playing. “My teacher complimented many aspects of my playing then told me to listen carefully to the end of one of the notes,” Dixon says. “I shared that I could not hear what he was talking about, and he responded, ‘That’s OK, just remember I said it.’”

This story resonated with our students in helping them learn to distinguish between what they can or cannot hear, as well as helping them hear what we do to improve their playing.

Knowing that a note should be performed with a particular style or length and hearing if it is happening hinges on a student’s ability to recognize the difference.

Students Must Learn to React Without a Director

In our program, we spend time in smaller group sectionals identifying “out-of-tune” versus “in-tune” unisons, which sounds like a single player on an instrument. We each have different ways of approaching “in tone, in tune, in time,” but getting each student to react centers on the director’s ability to develop reactions from the performers.

Earlier in my career, my students reacted to problems by reading the expressions on my face or, worse, when I would yell during rehearsal. I was surprised to learn that most of the time, students did not hear what I was angry about but only tried harder when they sensed the energy in the room getting more intense. Developing critical listening skills has resulted in students fixing and reacting to things faster — before I get frustrated.

Questions to consider to help students develop critical listening skills:

  • How can students tell if it’s out of tune?
  • How can they hear if it’s out of time?
  • Are they only reacting to what you do?

Students Must Have Listening Role Models

Tell students to have three role models on their instrument. Provide examples for students who are unsure of which artists to listen to.

Ask students to identify and write about one piece per musician, what they hear and what they like. Ask students to compare their sounds to the professional.

Fundamental vs. Musical Issues

Our clarinet teacher, Philip May, regularly tells our students that there are two distinct challenges they face as musicians: 1) how well they play their instrument and 2) how well they play the music.

Although the two share similarities, May’s point is that students need to invest as much time and attention to mastering their instruments as they do to learning the music for band rehearsal. Students who have better control over their instruments will have more skills to perform music at a higher level. One of the fastest ways we help our students improve their playing is connected to their breathing.

breathing in field tracey hocking dIceRhMFTJI unsplashBreathing to Play vs. Breathing to Live

Periodically, we ask our students, “Why do we practice breathing exercises?” As you can imagine, we receive a colorful assortment of answers ranging from the bizarre to the sublime: “To learn to take a full breath,” “So we can sound good on our instruments,” “So we can play longer phrases,” “So we know how to breathe in music” and, my personal pet peeve, the blank stare.

How many of us spend a few minutes each day during warm-ups working on how to take the proper breath to produce the most characteristic sound only to get into the music and find that students aren’t breathing properly? Just watch young players during their breathing exercises and then see what they do while playing — you’ll be surprised at the variety of breathing methods. Some students breathe correctly, others maybe not at all, and some fall somewhere in between.

In the article, “Improve Student’s Tone,”  I discuss how our ultimate purpose in practicing breathing with our students is so they “remember to do it when they get to the music.” One of my mentors, Tom Bennett, who was the director of bands at the University of Houston, guided my focus early in my career to understand the difference between a “playing” breath and a “living” breath. The type of breath students use when sitting (not playing), walking to class or hanging out is entirely different from the type of more athletic breath needed to produce a characteristic sound.

Students must practice “playing” breath exercises in class, so that when they get into the music, they know how it should feel. Most students will revert to taking “living” breaths, especially before they play after a silence. Train students to take a type of “replacement” breath during these transition times.

We teach the concept of “phrase breathing” versus “catch/replacement breaths.” A phrase breath would be in between longer musical phrases and might occur in unison across the ensemble, whereas a catch/replacement breath is quicker and should minimally disrupt the phrase. Students should plan catch/replacement breaths in a way that you can’t tell when they are entering and exiting, also known as “stagger breathing.” A catch/replacement breath must happen quickly and should not affect the tempo of the music, whereas a student or ensemble may slow down or speed up coming in and out of a phrase breath.

Training students on a few breathing rules can make a difference in the quality of sound during performances, but only if they actually follow through with those rules. To get the rules’ fundamental message across to students requires some rephrasing and training.

  • winds ensembleRuleStudents should avoid breathing in predictable places such as at bar lines.
  • Bridge the gap: Ask students to mark where they will breathe instead, then practice this breathing plan with them in context.
  • Rule: Students should avoid breathing at the end of a crescendo.
  • Bridge the gap: Practice the music before, during and after the crescendo, training students to breathe in the middle of the crescendo or in another section.
  • Rule: Students should avoid breathing before rhythmic activity.
  • Bridge the gap: Train students to avoid breathing before music becomes more rhythmically active, i.e., before 16th note or triplet rhythm that they may subconsciously want to “tank up” and create holes in the sound/phrase.
  • Rule: Students should work to stagger breaths with students around them and not breathe when their neighbor does.
  • Bridge the gap: Ask students to perform the segment and listen to see if there are “holes in the sound.”

Remember, students want to do what is most comfortable, and “breathing to play” is rarely comfortable. You must provide students with information, as well as reinforce proper “playing” breath techniques to bridge the gap between knowing and doing.

Other Bridge-the-Gap Strategies

Help us help you” —  We use this phrase often because we want students to learn to self-advocate or come to rehearsals prepared so they can be successful. The students at CTJ require daily reminders to use tuners or metronomes in individual practice, as well as to bring pencils or highlights to rehearsals.

Hold up your pencils and highlighters” — For many years, Emily Gurwitz, the band director at one of our feeders, Bradley Middle School, would begin each rehearsal by asking students to “hold up your pencils and highlighters.” No rehearsal began without this step, and students could not rehearse without them. The result? Students had pencils and highlighters during rehearsals as needed. This habit, formed early, transferred to high school, and students were more likely to show up to rehearsals with a pencil and a highlighter. What seems like a simple process that took only a few seconds each day required persistence on Gurwitz’s part. She is now a band director at Judson High School in San Antonio, where she still begins her rehearsals with this timeless tradition.

Accountability strategies

  • Practice records with focuses rather than just minutes on the instrument.
  • Use pass-off or star charts. Consider breaking the music down into chunks that students must “play-off” for a director, student teacher or even a student leader. List all of the students’ names on a chart going down the left side and the chunks of music going across the top. As the student passes-off the segment, they get to put a sticker under that segment next to their name so other students can see everyone’s progress. This incentivizes students to pass-off their music so their peers see that they are working hard.
  • Utilize software to break down assignments into smaller steps. Programs like SmartMusic and MusicFirst help students practice music with the computer for instant feedback. Consider minimum score requirements before students can submit an assignment.
  • Regularly check woodwind reeds during band rehearsals or sectionals by asking students to hold up extra/replacement reeds that they have on hand.

Structure practice for students

  • Provide students with exercises specifically to help improve their playing so they can achieve music.
  • Teach students ways to improve technique like utilizing broken rhythms, metronome games or practicing tonguing slurred notes passages (or slurring tongued note passages).
  • Introduce brass players to pitch bends and coach them on how they can improve their ability to move gracefully from note to note.
  • Emphasize the importance of students recording themselves and listening back, show them how to do this or what software to use.

metronome g904e63346 1280Tuners and metronomes

  • Teach students how to properly use tuners and metronomes.
  • Define the parameters and purposes for these tools.
  • Show students specifically how you expect them to use tuners and metronomes
  • Teach them that sometimes it can get worse to use a metronome before it gets better.

Tackle Issues Individually … Literally

Another of my mentors, Dr. Lawrence Markiewicz, director of bands at Independence (Kansas) Community College, taught drum corps for many years before moving to the collegiate level. He is a master at bringing out the highest level of performance from his students. His hornlines at the Cadets and Glassmen were remarkable for their musicality, energy and clarity.

One of his primary strategies to achieve clarity was the individual performances “down the line,” where students would play passages of music for feedback and sometimes accountability purposes. Markiewicz believed that by getting into the weeds and listening to students individually, he could better diagnose articulation or technique problems. Students could hear better when they played individually. They would also become more aware of things as they listened to others perform. While the technique can be stressful for students, maintaining a positive environment and having students play by themselves frequently can alleviate that anxiety and result in rapid improvement.

The same applies to “group rhythm counting” — ask students to individually count rhythms aloud during rehearsal to eliminate rhythm problem. Students learn how things sound by listening to their neighbors rather than just reading the music on the page. Helping students learn to function and react independently can only help them improve.

Tying it All Together

Our end goal is for our students to learn to listen like professional musicians to create and experience music at the highest level. Students who understand how to connect the dots stand a far greater chance of enjoying magical musical moments early in their journeys that can propel them to continue to play for the rest of their lives.

We understand that not all our students will pursue a career in music, but we want them all to have the tools to be successful performers in any capacity. By developing their performance and listening skills, we hope they will be more apt to continue performing beyond their days at Claudia Taylor Johnson High School.

The Different Types of Practice

In order to make progress on any musical instrument, or frankly to improve at any skill, a combination of discipline, hours of concentrated work and an effective set of practice strategies is required. All too often, students fail to make progress in their music studies due to a lack of utilizing productive practice habits.

Before we can discuss how teachers can help students learn to practice efficiently, it is necessary to first understand the various types of practice.

Naïve and Purposeful Practice

Dr. K. Anders Ericsson (1947–2020), a Swedish-born psychologist and professor of psychology, was world-renowned for his research in the field of peak performance and expertise. In an article with Robert Pool, “Not All Practice Makes Perfect: Moving from naive to purposeful practice can dramatically increase performance,” Ericsson makes a distinction between two kinds of practice, as follows:

  • Naïve is what we might think of as traditional trial-and-error practice. It essentially involves mindless repetition or doing or playing the same thing in the same way continually.
  • Purposeful practice, by contrast, is more productive and requires that we get out of our comfort zone by attempting to do things we were unable to do previously. It is focused, goal-orientated, systematic and in it, we must respond to feedback in order to make improvements.

According to the authors: “This is a fundamental truth about any sort of practice: If you never push yourself beyond your comfort zone, you will never improve. The amateur pianist who took half a dozen years of lessons when he was a teenager but who for the past 30 years has been playing the same set of songs in exactly the same way over and over again may have accumulated 10,000 hours of ‘practice’ during that time, but he is no better at playing the piano than he was 30 years ago. Indeed, he’s probably gotten worse.”

Deliberate Practice

Woman Playing Polished White CLP 700 Upright Piano Close UpThe article referenced above contains excerpts from their book, “Peak: Secrets from the New Science of Expertise,” in which Ericsson and Pool provide greater detail about each kind of practice and make a distinction between deliberate and other kinds of purposeful practice. They describe deliberate practice as a highly focused kind of purposeful practice that is essential for developing the highest level of expertise or command in a specific field, including mastering a musical instrument.

This kind of practice entails strategies and activities in which students must constantly challenge themselves during practice sessions in order to improve. It also requires a high degree of already acquired competence in the specific skill area, and an expert teacher or coach who is able to assign specific practice tasks and strategies to the student who seeks to become an expert. To this point, the teacher must be familiar and have prior experience in training others to the desired expert skill level.

Varied Practice

Ericsson and Pool also believe that the solution to making progress and improving is generally not about trying ever harder but rather about doing something different instead — what is referred to as varied practice, which is also called variable practice.

Gerald Klickstein, a guitarist and author of “The Musician’s Way: A Guide to Practice, Performance, and Wellness,” defines varied practice as encompassing a practice technique that sees musicians “working on a musical passage from diverse angles.” He further asserts that “the key is to mix up our practice approaches so that we cultivate easeful control as well as broad awareness of the music and our execution.”

Long before I knew about any scholarly research in the area of practice, I found that changing up my practice strategy or procedure, or what I call implementing “repetition with variety,” benefitted my progress at the piano tremendously. In fact, this notion of varying the procedure during practice has been so effective in helping me improve that it is one of the core tenants of my philosophy on practice. It is therefore a principle I like to share with my students early on. In my article, “12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies,” I provide more detail about this.

Blocked and Interleaved Practice and More

Dr. Barbara Fast is director of piano pedagogy at The University of Oklahoma and an expert in the field of music practice research. Like Ericsson and Klickstein, her research has shown the importance of changing things up during practice in order to improve and develop music proficiency. In the article, “Change It Up!: Interleaved Practice – What It Is, Why It Works,” Fast makes a distinction between blocked and interleaved practice.

Blocked practice can be described as skill acquisition by “work[ing] on improving one skill at a time, usually with much repetition, until gains are made” in an environment that does not change. She illustrates blocked practice as AAABBBCCC with each letter representing one specific skill or task practiced in a block of time. Fast asserts that musicians “often return to the practice room the next day to find that the skills learned yesterday with much repetition [through blocked practice], did not stick.” Blocked practice is also sometimes labeled fixed practice.

male piano pexels cottonbro 10251756In interleaved practice, “a student practices an identified problem area for a brief amount of time, leaving it to begin practicing a different skill area. The performer is alternating and intermixing the practice tasks. The long-term retention is better with interleaved practice, even though the short-term satisfaction isn’t as great.” She illustrates interleaved practice using the letters ABCBACACB. In other words, in interleaved practice, certain material is practiced, then left alone but interspersed with, or revisited back and forth, between other practice material.

Two further types of practice bear mentioning here. Similar to blocked practice is massed practice in which one skill or task is practiced repeatedly but without rest or breaks. As such, massed is different to spaced practice. According to the article, “Student Practice: Spaced vs. Massed,” spaced practice “refers to conditions in which individuals are given rest intervals within the[ir] practice sessions.”

Dr. Bill Moore is a performance psychology consultant who has helped musicians, athletes and others overcome self-doubt and performance anxiety to achieve high levels of performance and expertise. In his book, “Playing Your Best When it Counts: Mental Skills for Musicians” (see pages 69-70), Moore describes his 80-20 rule as it relates to blocked and variable practice, and how to practice for a performance mindset versus practicing for skill acquisition. Moore states that early on in the process of learning a piece in which we are developing certain technical skills and refining musical details, a maximum of 80% of practice time should be spent utilizing blocked practice and a minimum of 20% spent on variable practice.

As the date of the performance nears and the repertoire has been thoroughly learned and memorized, the amount of time spent on the two kinds of practice should switch so that 80% is spent doing variable practice and 20% on blocked practice. Moore asserts that unlike athletes, many musicians simply do not practice performing enough (i.e., playing through their pieces in a performance setting) and that implementing more of this kind of practicing is vital for developing the needed confidence and mental skills to perform well under stress. Dr. Fast calls this kind of practice for performance in which we run through a program “the cold start.” It could be viewed as a type of massed practice in which students play through a recital program once or possibly more times in a single practice session without a break.

Distributed Practice

A further practice type is what Klickstein calls distributed practice, which he describes in his article, “Varied, Distributed, and Interleaved Practice,” as follows: “Instead of focusing on a single piece in one extended practice session (blocked practice), with distributed practice, we practice the same music in separate sessions, perhaps over the span of a day.”

As such, we might work on a specific movement of a Beethoven piano sonata and first practice it under tempo in the morning using various strategies (varied practice), review the piece in the early afternoon and continue working on building up the tempo later on in the day (using further varied practice strategies). A benefit of distributed practice is that we can take breaks in our practice, rest and receive extrinsic or external feedback on the quality of our playing or practice from a teacher, coach or mentor.

In short, there is evidence that changing the sequence or organization of our practice sessions through interleaved or distributed practice — or the practice strategies themselves, utilizing varied or variable practice — enhances the quality of our practice and benefits our development and proficiency as musicians.

Mental Practice

Girl Playing PianoA final type of practice is known as mental practice. This kind of practice is undertaken away from our instruments and does not entail any playing whatsoever.

One subtype of mental practice that has been used successfully by various musicians to learn and memorize music quickly is known as mental visualization. This kind of practice takes place before we play a piece on an instrument, or rather instead of learning and memorizing at the instrument. It is described in the book “The Shortest Way to Pianistic Perfection” (contained in the Dover publication, “Piano Technique”) by the great French-born German pianist Walter Gieseking (1895–1956) and his teacher Karl Leimer (1858–1944). While this practice method of learning and memorizing music away from the piano seems daunting to those of us who are used to learning and mastering music by first practicing at our instrument, the proponents of learning through visualization swear by its effectiveness and efficiency.

When I am learning a piece, some initial mental score study as described by celebrated American pedagogue Robert Pace (1924–2010) in his article, “Productive Practicing,” is invaluable. In addition, when committing a work to memory that I have already learned and polished at the piano, visualization of the score to cultivate the visual memory as described by Cora B. Ahrens and G.D. Atkinson in “For All Piano Teachers” is an indispensable memorization practice technique.

Another subtype of mental practice encompasses what is sometimes called mental rehearsal. This type of practice involves spending time imagining ourselves performing to our best on stage as well as sometimes mentally rehearsing for the worst-case scenario. We know that sports superstars like swimmer Michael Phelps have used this technique to achieve exceptional results. Phelps’ coach Bob Bowman was interviewed by Dr. Laurie Santos, a Yale psychology professor, on her podcast, “The Happiness Lab” (episode “Don’t Accentuate the Positive”). Santos shares how Phelps actually improved his practice and swimming technique through mental training and the art of visualization to achieve his unprecedented Olympic record. She goes on to say that research done on the brain indicates that mental practice, in which we imagine ourselves playing etc., can have the same beneficial effects on our learning as when we actively practice at our instrument.

To help achieve this type of benefit from mental practice, Dr. Bill Moore advocates for the use of performance scripts in his book “Playing Your Best When It Counts.” Crafting a written performance script entails describing the ultimate or optimal musical performance of a specific recital, audition or competition program in rich sensory detail. Creating and then reading a completed performance script regularly in preparation for a performance has certainly proven beneficial in my studio.

Sports psychologist Dr. Don Greene has worked with the U.S. Olympic Diving Team and with musicians, such as conductor Michael Tilson Thomas. Greene provides valuable suggestions about how musicians can develop the necessary mental skills in practice to best prepare for high-pressure performances in his various books, including “Performance Success: Performing Your Best Under Pressure,” as well as on the “How To! podcast (episode “How To Perform Under Pressure”). Greene asserts that “musicians can learn a lot from the world of baseball. Auditioning musicians, like major league baseball players, need to anticipate routine circumstances as well as the unexpected and prepare [in their practice] properly for both.”

Put It All Together

It is important that we make it plain to our students that naïve practice is ineffective, if not detrimental to their progress. Students should also understand that while blocked practice can feel good and satisfying, the research shows that it is not as effective as interleaved practice. In addition, students need to know that varying the procedure or the activity itself utilizing varied practice can be highly beneficial and enhance mental engagement during practice sessions. Moreover, deliberate practice in which we constantly strive to challenge ourselves to achieve expertise using the expert guidance of the teacher might be the goal. Furthermore, mental practice away from our instrument not only helps us learn and memorize music quickly and more effectively, it can help better prepare us to perform with success. Lastly, practicing for a performance mindset versus practicing for skill acquisition are different and therefore necessitate distinct approaches and types of practice.

In writing this article, I wish to thank Dr. Barbara Fast for sharing her expertise on the various types of practice with me.

In my article, “The Teacher’s Role in Developing Good Practice Habits,” I provide ways in which teachers can help their students improve the organization and quality of their practice sessions. In “12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies,” I present practical guidelines that music educators can employ to help students practice more effectively.

Sources and Resources

122 Tips for First-Year Music Educators from the 2022 “40 Under 40”

Starting a new job is exciting, but it’s also stressful! You must familiarize yourself with your new school and forge relationships with administrators, staff and fellow faculty members, not to mention your students, parents and the community. Then there’s concerts, competitions, lesson plans, assessments — the list is long.

Our 2022 “40 Under 40” educators offer tips to first-year music educators. Heed their advice as you start your career and remember that as demanding as the work may be, the rewards are limitless, especially when you consider the lifelong impact you will have on a generation of music students.

 

David AmosDavid Amos, Director of Bands at Heritage Middle School in Painesville, Ohio, offers these three tips to first-year music educators:

1. Don’t get stuck focusing on the little things. Mistakes happen in performances and in classrooms. Teach students how to recover, regroup and try again. It’s easy to become myopic but when you’re running a music program, remember to look at the big picture.

2. Teach with compassion. Students come from every walk of life to your music classroom. Each student is dealing with something that you may not know about or understand. Let music class be a place of respite.

3. Show your students how you love music. If you demonstrate your passion for music, students will buy in. My college band director, Dr. Stephen Gage, always said to “LOVE MUSIC.” Not all students will play after they graduate or pursue careers in music, and that shouldn’t be the end goal. If you live with that love of music, students will learn it from you and carry it with them for the rest of their lives.

Antos JustinDr. Justin Antos, Director of Bands and Orchestras at Dwight D. Eisenhower High School in Blue Island, Illinois, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Worry less about what other music educators have done with their programs. Instead, channel your energy into discovering your niche and realizing how your attributes can foster a love of music-making in your students.

2. Being a content expert is fundamental to your success as a music educator, but it is not as important as being creative in your lessons, empathetic toward your students and inclusive in your teaching.

3. Do not let the rigors of the job consume you. Carve out time to relax, do something you love outside of teaching music, and spend time with friends and family to keep a healthy balance in your life.

Bechard CassandraDr. Cassandra Bechard, Director of Bands and Assistant Professor of Music at the University of Northwestern St. Paul in Minnesota, offers these three tips:

1. Set a time that you stop reading and returning emails. If there is a true emergency, your administrator will call you. Emails will ALWAYS be better composed after you take a break.

2. Realize that you cannot — and in most cases should not — change everything during your first year. Instead, create a working to-do list and slowly chip away at it over the years.

3. We all make mistakes on and off the podium. My greatest advice is to own your mistakes, apologize when necessary and reflect on what/why the mistake happened to gain clarity and hopefully not repeat the same mistake again.

Blanco StephenStephen Blanco, Director of Mariachi Studies at Las Vegas High School in Nevada, says:

1. Work hard ­— nothing can replace that. I often get asked by peers, “What’s your secret? How are you doing what you are doing with this new mariachi program?” My answer is always that there is no secret. There’s just hard work. I instill that in my students as the only way to be successful because even winning the lottery can’t replace working hard and succeeding at your goals … Although the beach sounds nice sometimes!

2. Find out what drives you— that’s what will get you through the dark times. A few months ago, I was being interviewed for a new podcast by Mickey Smith Jr., discussing my recent semifinalist status for the 2022 Grammy for Music Education (Smith was a previous winner). We discussed that not every day is going to be a great day, but that by finding the things that can “get you through,” the hard days can be easier to manage. For me, it’s an afternoon coffee, listening to new music or taking a quick walk outside during lunch.

3. Be kind — your kids need you. This is something I often forget. We never know what our students are going through. My expectations of them are so high that sometimes I forget that they have many other things flooding their brains or fueling their emotions. I often have to ground myself and remember that a little bit of compassion goes a long way — yes, even for that kid who forgot their field trip paperwork for the 10th day in a row — because honestly, that kid was me 10 years ago!

Bryant RobertDr. Robert Bryant, Music Education Coordinator and Assistant Professor of Music at Tennessee State University in Nashville, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Know your purpose. Understanding the “why” behind your motivation to teach music can help you to focus on what is really important, mitigate distractions and inspire others toward greatness.

2. Know your students. Our students must be our top priority. Know your students’ names, their interests, fears, hopes and dreams. This helps to build trust and inspire confidence, which is critical to success as a music teacher.

3. Know your craft. Be actively involved in as many professional associations as possible. Make friends with colleagues and collaborate with them. Seek out opportunities for leadership in your school, profession and community.

If you are intentional and work on these aspects of your job consistently, not only will you be successful and enjoy a satisfying career in music education, you will also change the world for the better in more ways than you could possibly imagine.

Calus AdamAdam Calus, Executive Director of Education Through Music — Massachusetts in Boston, offers these three tips:

1. There is no magical curriculum out there that will help you be good at teaching music. There are lots of tools for the toolbox and it is up to YOU to find which ones work best for you by studying many and synthesizing your own style based on what you have learned.

2. Pace yourself mentally, physically, spiritually, etc.

3. Everyone makes a lot of mistakes during their first year. Go out there and fail. Fall super hard and learn what it takes to get back up.

Chandler KristopherKristopher Chandler, Director of Bands at Gautier High School in Mississippi, says:

1. Surround yourself with successful people. Study their practices and enjoy being a life-long learner!

2. Never be afraid to ask questions about ALL aspects of your career — not just pedagogy. Ask about organization, choosing literature, even maintaining a healthy work/personal life balance.

3. Find your person — or a small group of people — who you consider your biggest mentors/band family. These people need to be successful in their own careers, but also genuine friends who can help you no matter the situation. Every day will not be “sunshine and rainbows,” and you will need this support system to help you keep your passion for teaching!

Collins DanielleDanielle Collins, Director of Music, Media, Entertainment Technology Department at the Academy for the Performing Arts at Huntington Beach High School in California, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Breathe! You will make mistakes — learn and grow from them. Things are hectic around change. Breathe through it and take things in small bites.

2. Balance. Make sure you create time and space to get outside and spend time doing other things you love. Spend time with friends or family, even if it’s virtually. Balance is very important for our well-being, and our students will model it back to us!

3. If a door opens, take it, even if it isn’t the door for which you waited. Sometimes life nudges you in a different direction for which you planned — the door you’ve been waiting on may never open, so when a door opens, take it!

Dame NathanDr. Nathan Dame, Director of Choral Activities and Fine Arts Department Chair at Wylie East High School in Texas, says:

1. Seek out a mentor who you trust, aspire to be like and with whom you can be open without fear of judgment.

2. A growth mindset is everything.  Go to conferences and conventions, network with others, arrange and advocate for professional development days where you can observe exemplary music educators.

3. Instill the important values in your students that will inspire them for whatever future that will meet them. Remember that we teach kids music (in that order).

Felder BrandonBrandon Felder, Fine Arts Music Director at SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy in Landover, Maryland, and Music Director at Georgetown University Gospel Choir in Washington, D.C., offers these tips:

1. Take your time: Know that music education is a marathon and not a sprint. You will not see results immediately but just stay consistent and stay the course!

2. Assess your strengths and weaknesses quarterly: Assess your needs, take stock of your resources to utilize your assets to address your needs as a teacher.

3. Be the solution: There are challenges in learning the culture of a school. My toughest class in my first year of teaching was a 5th-grade class, but I learned to teach them. I taught that class consistently every day like I was being observed by the principal and the state department. Within a few months, it became my favorite class and the students didn’t want to leave my classroom! Be the solution!

Finney BrysonBryson Finney, Artistic Director of We are Nashville Festival and Learning Technology Specialist at metro Nashville Public Schools in Tennessee, recommends that first-year educators:

1.Be your authentic self — this may take some time to find, but don’t ever try to be someone else in your classroom because your students will always be able to detect a “phony.” Be YOU, it’s the most effective way to teach!

2. If you’re not enjoying your lesson, neither are your students — remember your students will always “play” off of you. If you seem uninterested or you don’t enjoy your lesson, how can you expect your learners to stay interested and learn anything? Be creative and teach in a way that you enjoy! I promise it will communicate much more effectively.

3. Dream big! Don’t settle for where you are. If you have aspirations and goals, hold on to them and keep working at them. Even when today looks so far from where you may want to be, take a step/do something, even if it’s a little something each day and keep your dream in front of you!

Goindoo AlainAlain Goindoo, Director of Bands at Jeaga Middle School and Executive Director of Hope Symphony in West Palm Beach, Florida, says:

I’ll give you 5 tips.

1. Identify the areas you place your personal value. If your value is based on how well the students perform, you are not loving yourself enough.

2. Find out your students’ favorite foods. Conversation centered around FOOD is a doorway to learn more about your students, such as their likes and their cultures.

3. Make it fun. Students who are having fun will progress further and recruit their friends to join, and as a side benefit, tell their parents how much fun they are having, which encourages parental participation.

4. Build relationships with current and retired band directors. No one is an island.

5. Make it about the students. Music proficiency is important, but investing in your students’ passion for music, their cultures and their personal growth will yield dividends. When you invest in children, you never lose.

Hayes JaymeJayme Hayes, Director of Bands at Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts Magnet Middle School in Wichita, Kansas, offers these tips:

1. Love yourself first and keep your family at your center. When you love yourself and can keep those most important to you as your priority, you will have more to give to your students because you will be grounded and happier. Fill your bucket with joy first, then you can share it with others.

2. Be true to your own way of teaching, don’t try to be someone else. Learning from veteran teachers is vital but finding ways to tailor that knowledge and advice to fit your classroom is when it is the most beneficial.

3. Be honest, transparent, consistent and forgiving. If you make a mistake, admit it and move on. If students make a mistake, address it and then move on. Mistakes are part of the learning process. Just as you are learning and will make mistakes, so are they. You wouldn’t want your principal to dwell on a mistake you made, so don’t dwell on theirs.

Helmick JonathanDr. Jonathan Helmick, Director of Bands and Associate Professor of Music at Slippery Rock University in Pennsylvania, says:

1. “Hug the cactus, embrace the vulnerability.” You will make mistakes. Making mistakes in front of students is an excellent opportunity to teach students how to make mistakes and grow gracefully.

2. Put your first year in perspective: Treat yourself with the respect and understanding that you give to your students. This means taking care of your own needs. It also means monitoring your own self-talk, goals and expectations. So, be realistic and kind. Offer grace to yourself and celebrate the small things. This is a marathon, not a sprint.

3. Become part of an “us.” Develop relationships, grow community and make friends fast. This is true for your classroom, your colleagues and the community outside of your school. The first year is very much about listening to others. Furthermore, being a part of an “us” will make that first year more fulfilling and help you to find balance.

Homes AnastasiaAnastasia Homes, Director of Bands at San Elijo Middle School in San Marcos, California, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Set small achievable goals during your first couple years of teaching. You will fail more than succeed, but it gets better.

2. Be organized with not just your lesson plans but all aspects of your program. This could be boosters if you have them, scheduling concerts/performances or the setup of your room and storage areas. When you are not organized, kids misbehave  because they like structure and knowing the plan.

3. Laugh with your students and get to know them. I hate that old saying “don’t smile until Christmas.” Your students need to trust you before you can get them to respect you, and it starts with creating that bond. I joke with my students all the time, but they also know when it is time to work. Find a balance that works for you.

Jones AmirAmir Jones, Director of Bands at Thomas W. Harvey High School in Painesville, Ohio, offers these tips:

1. Regardless of where you are, you are not constrained.

2. Do not be intimidated by larger programs

3. Place emphasis on the environment you create. Your students are capable of so much when they are in a good environment.

Knepper DamonDamon Knepper, Director of Bands and Orchestras at Ironwood Ridge High School in Oro Valley, Arizona, says:

1. Don’t be afraid to ask questions.

2. Expect the unexpected. You will not have classes that teach you about many of the daily occurrences you will have in a classroom. These new experiences will change you as a teacher, and THAT IS OKAY!

3. Remember why you got into this profession. That initial dream will keep you going during hard times.

LaBrie KatieKatie O’Hara LaBrie, composer, conductor and clinician from Fairfax, Virginia, offers these tips:

1. The best thing you can do is make memories for the students. It doesn’t always have to be a musical memory — it could be having a bonding day, a pizza party or a concert that they organize from start to finish.

2. Teach students tools and then let them lead the way. If you teach them how to practice and how to rehearse you can create amazing rehearsals and amazing student leaders.

3. Rotate your seating. You never know what you can learn from that kid in the back row.

Lowe WesleyWes Lowe, Director of Instrumental Arts at The King’s Academy in West Palm Beach, Florida, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Be authentic: Students don’t care how much you know until they know how much you care. Be genuine and honest even when you don’t know all the answers. It’s okay not to know everything as long as you continuously strive for excellence.

2. Be team-oriented: Surround yourself with a great team of people to support you, your program and your vision. Be proactive in inviting guest artists and clinicians to work with your students. Watch other professionals teach and instruct — thisis one of the best ways to improve your own craft.

3. Be creative: Look for new and innovative performance opportunities and experiences. Stay modern with your approach. Find the best experiences that will benefit your students’ growth as musicians and people. Here’s a quote by Ellen Johnson Sirleaf, the former president of Liberia (and Africa’s first female head of state), that I strive to live by: “If your dreams do not scare you, then they are not big enough.”

Meldrum Tracy 1Tracy Meldrum, Director of Bands and Fine Arts Department Chair at Verrado High School in Buckeye, Arizona, says:

First, find your own voice. Don’t try to be someone else. It’s AMAZING to have a mentor, but you are you. Use your own voice to teach, not your mentor’s. It is far more authentic and students will respond far better to it.

Second, have that mentor or someone you can trust to bounce ideas off. This is far more helpful than you realize. Not only for your teaching, but your mental health.

Third, have fun! If you love your job, and you love your music, and you are having fun, your kids will too!

Miller TammyTammy Miller, Artist Faculty of Piano, Omaha Conservatory of Music in Nebraska, offers these tips:

1. Love your students as much as you love the music you are teaching them.

2. Continue to learn new things! This can help you relate to your students and is important for your own growth as a musician and educator.

3. Be creative and think out of the box! There is more than one way to teach a concept and some of the most memorable and impactful teaching moments come from a creative approach!

Molina Gabrielle2Gabrielle Molina, Executive Director of Project Music in Stamford, Connecticut, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Be ready for a lot of work! Aside from being in the classroom, which is exciting but also very tiring, there are a lot of other responsibilities that come along with the job, even more so now with COVID.

2. Be able to advocate for what you do. Part of being a music educator is being able to speak to the importance of music, the impact it has and why it’s a VITAL part of a well-rounded education.

3. Be able to shape shift and code switch. You will have to be a teacher, coach, advocate, administrator and so much more in your role as “music educator.”

Moniz JustinDr. Justin John Moniz, Associate Director of Vocal Performance and Coordinator of Vocal Pedagogy at New York University — The Steinhardt School of Culture, Educator and Human Development in New York, says:

1. When you find yourself in a moment of uncertainty (there will be many!), pick up the phone. Reconnect with those teachers and mentors who have enabled you to follow your own path and pursue your passions.

2. Prioritize your own mental and physical health. For me, it means an early morning workout to clear my mind before jumping into course content, lecture material or grading. My ability to be an effective communicator is reliant upon my capacity to maintain balance and clarity for myself.

3. Be flexible. No matter how well you plan, good teaching is often dependent upon one’s ability to reroute, sometimes mid-flight.

Montalvo BryantBryant Montalvo, music teacher and Choir Director at Central Falls High School in Rhode Island, offers these tips:

1. Connect with your students in ways that exist outside of the curriculum. When you take a step back from drilling the foundations of music literacy and sight singing and musicianship, you will see your students as individuals which will strengthen your teaching and the students’ learning.

2. Establish your own support system and connect with different teachers across multiple disciplines. Many times, music is “othered” in schools and put in a side category instead of being included with the “core” subjects. Sometimes you may be the entire music department. Whatever the case may be, it is necessary for music teachers to feel supported if you want the program to succeed. Sometimes, administrators do not know how to support music teachers. Therefore, it is essential that new music teachers guide not only their administrators, but other faculty and staff members on how best they can support them and their music program (especially if music is new to the school). It is also helpful to establish connections with other teachers in other disciplines within your building. You will come to find many cross-curricular connections which will help other faculty to see and understand the importance of music education.

3. Try everything! Find what works best for you AND your students. Just because you read it out of a methods book or learned it as part of your music education teacher training program does not necessarily mean it’s the best fit for you and your students. There is no one-size-fits all approach to teaching music. Even the most well-known and popular methods within music education will show their limitations in your classroom. Take a bit from everything until you find the way that not only allows you to be your most authentic self but also the way that is most accessible to your students.

Newman CodyCody Newman, Director of Bands at Forney High School in Texas, recommends that first-year educators:

1. You MUST, repeat MUST, get a trusted mentor to work with you. There are so many great organizations that provide mentorship, many for free, so use those resources! MANDATORY!

2. You WILL, repeat WILL, make mistakes in your teaching. We don’t ask our students to be mistake free — why should you ask that of yourself? Recover from errors, modify and adjust, just as if you were performing on your instrument.

3. You NEED, repeat NEED, to keep your eyes focused on the real reasons we do this job instead of being seduced into the chasing of trophies and medals. Those are all great, but they are hollow inside. Find your true reason for going to work each day and remind yourself of it often!

Nguyen TerryTerry Nguyen, lecturer at the University of California, Riverside, offers these tips:

1. You can learn a lot from your students! In such a diverse music program at University of California, Riverside, I have met students who are talented composers and audio engineers. My students have helped me with audio set-ups for recording music as well as navigating hybrid, online teaching.

2. Talk to your colleagues. Ask questions. It’s always good to stay on top of professional development opportunities — for example, requesting funding to continue to grow your own skills as a musician and educator.

3. Keep more seasoned students engaged by giving them opportunities to teach new students. Giving students a sense of investment and ownership in the program really elevates the experience for all involved.

Otto TannerTanner Otto, Orchestra Director at Sycamore Community Schools in Cincinnati, Ohio, says:

1. Set your classroom routine and expectations from day one, it will save you a lot of time later on. Your students should know exactly what they need to do when they come in the room. Continue to look for ways to make the start of class as efficient as possible.

2. Really get to know your students — relationships are everything. Make a point to have at least one meaningful conversation with a student each day. I find that there is usually time while students are coming into the room and getting settled.

3. Strive to be the best teacher you can be by finding areas for growth, while also giving yourself lots of grace. Your colleagues and mentors are there to answer questions and to help you improve. Having at least one person to bounce ideas off of may ensure that they are well thought out and ready for your program and your students. Having a “go-to” list of colleagues and mentors will help you throughout your career.

Perkins KennethKenneth Perkins, music teacher at Joseph Keels Elementary School in Columbia, South Carolina, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Always be open to try new things.

2. Remember that iron sharpens iron so surround yourself with teachers who are amazing role models, and find success in simple things.

3. Don’t be afraid to ask for help or say plainly, “I don’t know how to do this thing.” That is perfectly fine — in fact, it shows that you are always willing to learn. Your students and colleagues will respect your honesty.

Pohland JoelJoel Pohland, Band Director (8-12) and Assistant Band Director (5-7) at Pierz Healy High School in Minnesota, says:

1. Build relationships: Take time to get to know your students beyond their instruments and the music classroom. Ask what they like to do and try to connect, even if it means trying something new as a teacher/person. Students love when you are invested in them as people and go out of your way to make connections beyond music, especially when you remember their activities or interests out of the blue.

2. Have fun with your students: This goes with Tip No. 1 above — building relationships. Joke with students and make them know you are human. Read the manga comics they talk about, play Spikeball with them, shoot hoops as you pass by, play video games with them before events when the entire band is hanging out in the music room. Students want to see us as human beings and the more we can be on their level, the more they will get on our level when we want to work hard and make music together.

3. Go home (work will always be there tomorrow): This took me the longest time to learn, and I am still not great at it. The lesson plans, the trip planning, the schedules, the information for events, it all must be done, but it must be done at work and not at home. When you go home, disconnect. Do the things you enjoy, and you will find that you are way more refreshed and ready to take on the tasks to be done the next day. You, your family and your students will all benefit.

Powell AlecAlec Powell, Director of Choirs at Mountain Ridge Junior High in American Fork, Utah, offers these tips:

1. Make sure your artistic bucket is filled with things that make you happy. It is easy to get lost in the devotion to your program. I find I have the most fulfilling teacher moments when I pursue artistic endeavors outside of the classroom.

2. Know the value of your time. My students know that I will never answer an email outside of school hours unless it is a true emergency. I don’t take work home with me, and that means redefining what are the most essential elements of my curriculum. Don’t let teaching become your personality trait. That is just one facet of your life — you are so much more than that.

3. Failure is the mark of someone who is trying. Whether that is lessons, concerts, festivals, etc. This not only applies to you, but your students and program as well. Give yourself grace when things don’t go exactly the way you envisioned. Allow yourself to laugh off a bad lesson, remember the growth that happened in the weeks leading up to a poor rating. This mindset has greatly enhanced my experience as a teacher and made for a fulfilling career.

Rogers BenjaminBenjamin Rogers, Director of Choirs at Liberty Middle School in Spanaway, Washington, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Make self-care a part of your weekly schedule. Our nation’s mental health crisis has affected teachers, and I see many leaving the profession every day. Just like our students, we need to consider our own needs in Maslow’s Hierarchy because we cannot enrich others if we don’t take care of ourselves.

2. Teach the students first. Take time to get to know them. Build community first. Great literature is great literature, but first and foremost, you are teaching people. My students do a community circle every week and activities like these help foster a collaborative spirit while supporting each other in the classroom.

3. This may be more of a tip for a future educator: If you get a chance, work a job in customer service. Nothing prepares you for talking with parents more than working on the front lines of customer service.

Schoolland AmandaAmanda Schoolland, Music Director and computer coding instructor at Metlakatla High School in Alaska, says:

1. Relationships are everything! Make positive connections with students, families and colleagues. Be genuine and always assume the best intentions.  Everything else will fall into place.

2. Have a sense of humor! Laugh with your students as much as possible. Tell anecdotes, listen to their stories, have class jokes. Not only will your students be more comfortable, but you will enjoy your role so much more.

3. Be flexible. Students, staff, admin and parents will constantly throw curveballs. Try not to stress about it.  Go with the flow and adjust, that way when you ask colleagues/students/staff to adjust for a concert or extra rehearsal, you have a bank account of positive interactions to draw on.

Stadler JenniferJennifer Stadler, independent piano teacher at Jennifer Stadler’s Piano Studio in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, offers these tips:

1. Learning doesn’t end when you finish school. Continue to hone your craft as a teacher and musician. Find an experienced teacher to keep you accountable. And, apply for grants to help cover the cost. In my first year of teaching, I received a grant from my local chapter of MTNA toward a mentorship with Dr. Rebecca Johnson, who helped me write lesson plans, troubleshoot issues and hone my studio policies. She provided constructive criticism of my teaching and connected me with seasoned teachers to observe. Our work together was invaluable in establishing a successful studio. I also continued private piano lessons with my undergraduate teacher Dr. Christopher Durrenberger. The pace of our work was slower than in an academic setting, but it helped me maintain my skills and, more importantly, stay connected to the experience of being a student.

2. Carve out uncompromisable time for yourself each week outside of work. Spend time with family and friends, pursue recreational activities and try new things. It may seem counterintuitive to take a break when you have a massive to-do list, but it’s important to rest so that you can be more productive when you are working. And, although it may be tempting to center your life around music, spending time outside of your field will broaden your knowledge and increase your creativity as a teacher. Some of my best lessons in the classroom were learned outside of it. For example, comedy improvisation taught me how to get out of my head and into the moment, which translated into exercises to help my students struggling with performance anxiety. And, my current hobby, rock climbing, has increased my bodily awareness and problem solving, which has helped me troubleshoot technical challenges with my students.

3. Document your successes in a way that’s meaningful to you. For example, create a folder for student thank-you notes, composition projects, awards, etc. Or, keep a journal of positive experiences or simply make a photo album of memorable moments. Make sure that these items are easily accessible and refer back to them often, especially on difficult days to counteract your brain’s negativity bias. I implanted this practice three years ago and I wish I had started sooner because it has had a tremendous impact on my confidence as a teacher.

Stanford Mark 2Mark Stanford, Director of Bands and music teacher at Springfield High School in Pennsylvania, says:

1. Avoid making major program changes in your first year. You are an outsider stepping into the community. Change will be most impactful when you are able to create it as a member of the organization and culture.

2. Seek advice from your colleagues. Experienced music educators are not just a resource for pedagogical practices, they can help you better understand your community and how your decisions will be received.

3. Build positive relationships with students, colleagues, administrators, community members. While our job is to teach music, we must remember that we teach music to and with people.

Tambellini BrandonBrandon Tambellini, Band Director at Blackhawk High School in Beaver Falls, Pennsylvania, offers these tips:

1. Inspire your students to love music instead of instructing them to. Students who are inspired to create music are stronger musicians.

2. Know three facts or interests about each student you teach. The more you are able to connect and relate with your students, the easier it is to educate them.

3. As a music educator, you have an obligation to possess and demonstrate strong musicianship to your students. Perform the musical details you are rehearsing instead of verbally explaining them.

Taylor Heather2Heather Taylor, instrumental music teacher at Lakeshore Elementary School in Rochester, New York, says:

1. Don’t be afraid to ask for help! There are so many people willing to offer their guidance and expertise!

2. Observe other music teachers! I found my own style of teaching by watching what worked and didn’t work for others.

3. Build relationships with students! I have worked in seven different buildings in my district, and I always start by building relationships with my students first. When you win over your students the rest will follow (staff, parents, etc.).

VanDoren KatieKatie VanDoren, Associate Director of Bands at Vandergrift High School in Austin, Texas, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Plan: Always have a plan for how you are going to teach something, your timeline and your goals. When we look at contest prep, a concert cycle or a full year of band, it is very easy to become overwhelmed or lost in where to begin. I always start with my long-term goals by writing them down and then build my short-term goals off of them. This helps me break a large goal into smaller, more manageable chunks to achieve benchmarks. Spreadsheets can help organize this and show you where you are, where you want to be and how long you have to get there.

2. Ask Questions: We never want to feel uneducated or “less than,” but the only way to grow is to put yourself out there and ask. No matter how many years you’ve been in the classroom, there is always something new to learn. This is especially true for young teachers, and the more questions you ask, the more you will learn. Ask questions about anything and everything (timeline, lesson planning, sequencing, pedagogy, classroom management, team teaching, etc.). As uncomfortable as it is and as difficult as it may seem to find someone to help with all these things, there are people who would love to help you and answer these questions — all you have to do is ask!

3. Get Help: Find mentors and get their help! Not everyone has a built-in mentor within their program. However, everyone came from somewhere and is a teacher because someone inspired them to do so. Start there! Use your previous teachers as mentors, to ask questions of and to listen to your groups. If there are other teachers in the fine arts department, ask them for help with classroom management and lesson planning. There are also incredible online resources these days with veteran teachers who would love to help you with sequencing, pedagogy, music selection, etc.

Vitale ChristopherChris Vitale, Director of Bands at Westfield High School in New Jersey, says:

1. Never put the product over the process. The process drives the student experience, and nothing is more important than the experience you provide your students.

2. Invite mentors into your rehearsals. Feel comfortable admitting that you have a lot to learn and be open to getting help from anyone who will offer it.

3. It’s OK to admit when you are wrong, especially to your students.

Walter ArmondArmond Walter, Director of Instrumental Music at Meadville Area Middle School and Meadville Area Senior High School in Pennsylvania, offers these tips:

1. Communicate. Don’t be afraid to ask for help. Mistakes are going to happen.

2. Student success must be a priority. Measuring success will be different for each individual student. Make sure your students feel and see their success.

3. Be yourself and have fun! Let your students and colleagues get to know who you are. Be involved with your school and public community.

Wilga AlexanderAlex Wilga, Director of Bands at Davenport Central High School in Iowa, recommends that first-year educators:

1.Ask for help. There are a lot of things that you don’t know. Ask those around you for answers to the things you don’t know. Don’t worry, as soon as you learn what you don’t know there will be a lot more that you don’t know. I don’t know if that ever ends.

2. Make sure you are creating a program that you would want to be in and not one that you think others expect you to have. Your students will have a lot more fun if you are having fun.

3. Don’t try to compete with others, just be you. You know what is best for your program and your community, and if you ever get stuck, refer to tip 1.

Read tips for first-year music teachers from the 2023 “40 Under 40” and 2021 “40 Under 40” educators for more invaluable advice.

MTNA Conference

Yamaha grand piano

Music Teachers National Association 2023 Conference

Welcome music educators! 

Our team is looking forward to meeting you at this year’s MTNA Conference in Reno, Nevada, and serving your professional needs in any way we can.

SEE OUR SHOWCASE AT MTNA

The Music Teachers National Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

Yamaha is committed to supporting music education and organizations like MTNA. Please email us at educators@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

See our Product Videos

Yamaha Showcase at MTNA

Demystifying the Remote Lesson: Three Ways to Help Connect with Your Students

March 27,  8:00-9:00 a.m.

Presented by Mona Wu DeCesare, Yeeseon Kwon, Pamela Pike and Heratch Touresian

During the pandemic, remote lessons exploded in popularity as many music teachers became experts in new technology. As we all know, distance learning is not going away. In this showcase, we have assembled a panel of experts to demonstrate three ways to conduct remote lessons utilizing three types of pianos.

Yamaha Artist Presentations at MTNA

Saturday, March 25

  • 9:15 – 10:15 a.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Omar Roy: What Autism Looks Like (Southern Pacific CD)
  • 9:15 – 10:15 a.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Angelin Chang: Keys to Unlock Musical Mastery and Wellness (Sierra 2)
  • 2:15 – 2:45 p.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Omar Roy: Appropriated or Authentic?: Unlocking Cultural Engagement (Cascade 4 and 5)
  • 3:30 – 4:30 p.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Omar Roy and others: New Faculty Panel (Cascade 3)

Sunday, March 26

  • 8:15 a.m. — National Finals: MTNA Senior Piano Competitions (Sierra 5)
  • 9:15 – 10:15 a.m. — Lara Downes: Keynote Address (Nugget Grand Ballroom 1)
  • 2:15 – 3:15 p.m. — Rochelle Sennet: Bach to Black: Piano Suites by Composers of African Descent (Sierra 2)
  • 5:00 – 6:00 p.m. — Announcement of Senior Performance Competition Winners (Cascade 3)

Monday, March 27

  • 8:00 – 9:00 a.m. — Yamaha Showcase with Heratch Touresian, Pamela Pike, Yeeseon Kwon and Mona Wu DeCesare (Sierra 2)
  • 9:15 – 9:35 a.m. — Andrea McAlister: Building Better Habits: Consciously Choosing our Unconscious Behaviors for Successful Practice and Performance (Redwood 6)
  • 9:15 – 9:35 a.m. — Christopher Creviston: Branded Degenerate: Voice Silenced (Southern Pacific CD)
  • 11:45 a.m. – 12:05 p.m. — Pamela Pike: Musical Star or Supernova? Preventing Burnout of 21st Century Professionals (Cascade 3)
  • 2:15 – 3:15 p.m.— Ka Man “Melody” Ng: Discover Hidden Abilities: How You Can Use Everyday Psychology to Unleash Students’ Potential to the Max (Cascade 3)
  • 2:15 – 3:15 p.m.— Omar Roy: Setting the Foundation: Strategies for Addressing the Unique Needs of Adolescent Beginners (Southern Pacific EF)
  • 3:30 – 5:00 p.m.— Winners Concert: National Winners of the MTNA Senior Performance and Composition Competition Winners (Sierra 5)

For a complete schedule, please check the MTNA Conference page.  

Professional Development Resources

Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

PRODUCT SHOWCASES

Yamaha Disklavier with Dan Tepfer

Yamaha AvantGrand Concept Video

Yamaha Concert Grand Piano

CVP-800 Overview


PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System

Remote Music Education and Live Streaming


SOFTWARE

Dorico for iPad

Cubase Recording Software

Dorico Music Notation Software

Introduction to Dorico for iPad

Continue reading

How to Cast Oculus Quest to Your TV With Sound

Ah, virtual reality. The most immersive sensory experience for the person wearing the headset. And, arguably, the goofiest spectacle to witness as a bystander.

Long have we waited for a friend’s turn to be over so they can relinquish the headset and give us the opportunity to try our own luck in the virtual realm. Perhaps a demon is waiting around the bend, or a welterweight is warming up in the corner (almost literally!). It’s a different world altogether once you don the goggles, but it doesn’t need to be an exclusionary action.

By streaming (“casting”) your Oculus Quest experience to your TV with sound, the incredibly personal experience becomes an activity where everyone can be involved. There’s a reason the functionality is built in. Here’s how to activate it.

Casting with Oculus Quest 2

It’s simple to stream from the headset to your TV. Just follow these three steps:

1. Ready Your TV

Your TV needs to be connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your phone and headset. Before you try to cast from your Oculus, make sure you can stream any video content from your phone to your TV. That will confirm you’re ready to stream from your headset to the TV:

  • Smart TVs and Chromecast-enabled devices are your best bets for casting to a TV from an Android™ phone.
  • For Apple® devices, the most seamless screen mirroring will be with an Apple TV® or a smart TV enabled with AirPlay®. If you don’t have either, there are streaming options available from other connected devices, such as AirScreen on Firestick.

2. Cast from Oculus

You can turn on casting from both the headset and the Oculus App. If you’re already wearing the headset, it’s easier to do it from there, since it’s covering your eyes. Here’s how:

  • Start by going to the home screen and opening the menu at the bottom of the screen.
Screenshot.

This is where you open new apps, see which friends are online and adjust settings. It’s also where you can access Sharing functions via this icon:

Graphic of three balls with two connected to one central one.
  • Click the Sharing icon to open sharing options. Click the one called “Cast.”
Screenshot.
  • A “Cast From This Headset” menu will appear. Select the TV / device you want to stream to and click “Next.”
Screenshot.
  • Check your TV screen to confirm that the casting was successful.

If you instead want to cast from the Oculus App, follow these steps:

  • Open the Oculus App on your iOS or Android smartphone.
  • Click the screen mirroring icon in the upper right corner of the app.
Screenshot.
  • Press the dropdown arrow to cast to a different device other than your phone, such as your TV or a streaming device.
Screenshot.
  • Select the TV / streaming device you want to cast to.
Screenshot.
  • Return to the main casting menu above, confirm your casting device / TV is selected, and click “Start.”
Screenshot.
  • Check your TV screen to confirm the casting was successful.

To stop casting, return to the share menu on the headset or casting menu on your phone and click “Stop Casting.”

3. Adjust the Audio

As with any video streaming between devices, there may be a lag between what’s seen (and heard) on the headset and what’s cast to your TV. Depending on the game and level of involvement of those in the room, you’ll probably want to drop the volume of one of them (likely the headset) so others can hear just one audio stream.

For the best audio playback from your TV, the following are recommended:

  • If using a sound bar with your TV, choose “Stereo” or “Gaming” sound modes.
  • If using an AV receiver, choose “7 Channel Stereo” or “Gaming” sound modes.

Recommended Party Apps

Not all Oculus Quest 2 apps are fun to play with an audience watching, but some are fantastic additions to a party. Try these five games for starters:

  • Beat Saber
  • I Expect You to Die 2
  • The Room VR: A Dark Matter
  • Keep Talking and Nobody Explodes
  • Vader Immortal

A Song for You

Whenever Valentine’s Day rolls around, I can’t help but wonder if there’s a better way to tell a partner how we feel, a friend how special they are, a secret love how we cherish them from afar, than with flowers, candy or a card.

How about sharing a song?

We can press play when we’re out for a drive, slip a pair of headphones over the ears of our beloved, serenade the unsuspecting before dinner, or compile a playlist of the songs that say it best. I’d never turn away a dozen roses, but let’s face it: Flowers die. Music doesn’t.

Songwriter/producer Darrell Brown, who was a recent VIP guest in a class I teach, said it best when he told my students that there are three hard and fast ways we look at love when expressing it in song: you either have it, lost it, or want it.

This made me smile. I never thought about it that way!

Another colleague — “songwriting whisperer” Marty Dodson — has observed in his online Songtown Newsletter that, “In many ways, love is the simplest and yet [most] profound human emotion or feeling. From the love we first feel for our mother as an infant to the love that first breaks our heart and beyond, the story of love is the one we all chase in the pursuit of a hit song.”

Even though I write ’em, I listen to them (and for them) too, and as I listener I seek a story that describes the feelings I’ve experienced in love or loss so that I feel understood. There are a spectacular range of classic examples to choose from. The magnificent “At Last” and the poignant “Song For You” have been serenaded and danced to at weddings for decades. Then there are more obscure ballads like Katie Melua’s “The Closest Thing To Crazy,” in which the singer becomes aware that she’s acting more like a teenager than her age in being unable to control her romantic feelings. I discovered this beauty while on eternal hold with an airline. True, it played over and over again because the wait was so long, but it was actually the very first listen-through that caught my heart off-guard. And despite the frustration of that endless call, it was the only song I listened to for weeks.

The sweet thing about sharing a song that’s new to the palate is that it tells someone that your feelings for them are also unique — not just words that have been sung to thousands of brides. Or grooms.

One of the most stellar three-minute confessions I’ve heard recently is Gary Barlow’s “This Is My Time.” From the title, one might think the song is a narcissistic brag about reaching stardom or fame but it is anything but. In the stunning lyric, Mr. Barlow confides that if he is to be done in by love, then it’s his time to perish, to die by the sword, to drink the poison.

Your choice of share doesn’t necessarily even need to have words as long as the music does its job. Take Santo And Jonny’s whimsical “Sleep Walk.” My husband (then boyfriend) won my heart when he strummed it into my answering machine (there was no such thing as voice mail in those days) so that when I came home from the world’s frazzled pace, I’d feel his love.

It worked.

Whether it’s unrequited, undecided or misguided — even if you don’t know if someone could ever love you back — a song-share can be a most charming, flirty, clandestine, brave moment of truth.

Or, as Indie artist Hotel Mira once said, “Dig deep and pinpoint something beautiful, ask a hard question, take a stand.” So put it out there. Start a fire. And if you feel certain the object of your affection truly is the one you would take a bullet for, I don’t see how you can miss with the gift of some music that has deep meaning to you.

Happy Valentine’s Day, lovebirds. If you’re a bird who doesn’t currently have a love, I hope that you find a song that brings you closer to it.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

What’s the Difference Between Alto, Tenor and Bass Trombones?

Trombones are one of the more interesting and unique instruments that you’ll see anywhere. Unlike saxophones, pianos, guitars or virtually any other musical instrument, trombones have no reeds, keys or strings. With trombones, it’s all about moving their long slides.

That said, like trumpets, cornets and other brass instruments, the sound that trombones make is largely dependent upon the intricate tubing that comprises the horn. Also significant to the instrument’s sound is its bell size and the shape of its bore (interior chamber). In this article, we’ll explore the things that differentiate the three most popular types of trombones: alto, tenor and bass. But before we do, let’s talk about some of their history and commonalities.

Origins of the Trombone

Originally developed in the mid-15th century, trombones have changed rather significantly over time. Until the 18th century, the instrument was called a “saqueboute” (in French) or a “sackbut” (in English). Some sources suggest the name comes from the French “sacquer,” which means “to draw out” (as in a sword from its sheath).

The current name simply means “large trumpet.” In German, it’s called a “posaune,” which was also an early term for trumpet. The two horns are relatives and share the same early predecessor. Throughout history, the trombone has been used in many different musical settings, from concert halls to churches to basement jazz clubs, though when it first rose to popularity, it was primarily found in the courts of aristocrats and used by military bands. Beethoven is credited as the first composer to use trombones in a secular symphony (in 1808). Today, the trombone is a mainstay of myriad musical genres, from classical to jazz, marching bands to Afrobeat.

Similarities

The three most popular types of trombones in use today — alto, tenor and bass — were all designed to mimic the range of the human voice. (There are also higher range soprano trombones, but they are less common). As mentioned previously, with trombones, it’s all about the slide; moving it serves to lengthen or shorten the tube, thus changing the note. (The tightness of the players’ lips in the mouthpiece — the embouchure — also has an effect on pitch, though it’s more subtle).

While each of these three trombones look much the same and act in a similar fashion, there are some significant differences too. Let’s take a closer look.

Alto Trombone

Alto trombones are somewhat less popular than their tenor and bass counterparts; for the most part, they are employed to perform the symphonies of yesteryear with historical accuracy.

As the name would suggest, alto trombones play higher notes than tenor or bass models. To accomplish this, their bodies, bells and bores are smaller. And because they (and their slides) are shorter, the slide positions used to make notes are also different from other types of trombones. Alto trombones are pitched in the key of E-flat.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-872 alto trombone.

Tenor Trombone

The most common type of trombone is the tenor — so much so that it’s considered the “standard” trombone. Tenor trombones are tuned in B-flat and have a characteristic piercing, bright sound that pokes through in even the densest musical sections. This makes them perfect for large jazz ensembles where the playing involves strident accents and raucous solos, as opposed to the more subtle demands of classical music.

That’s also why tenor trombones are often a staple of marching bands, though in recent years there has been a trend to replace them with baritone horns, which are more maneuverable (since they don’t have slides, less space is needed between players) and can be easier for young students to learn.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-881 tenor trombone.

Tenor trombones are sometimes made with F-attachments (sometimes called F-triggers.) These are levers that increase the inner length of the instrument’s tubing, allowing players to more easily play lower notes, with decreased wind resistance and without the time and effort it takes to extend the slide all the way out. Yamaha offers several tenor trombone models with this feature.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-882OR Custom Xeno tenor trombone with F-attachment.

Bass Trombone

To the untrained eye and ear, tenor and bass trombones are essentially the same instrument. They look similar and are the same size in terms of total length (both are 2.7 meters); in addition, both are tuned to B-flat, and their lowest and highest notes are the same.

However, there are two important differences, the most significant of which is their bore size (the diameter of the interior tubing that blossoms up to the bell of the horn). Bass trombones feature a wider bore than tenor trombones, making it easier to to play low notes. In addition, they have a bigger bell. For these reasons, bass trombones produce a lower, mellower tone than tenor trombones. As a result, they are more often employed in orchestras than jazz ensembles and are typically used to play classical music instead of jazz.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YBL-421G bass trombone.

Valve Trombone

A variation on the tenor trombone is the valve trombone, first developed in the early 19th century, around the same time that valves were first incorporated on the trumpet. Instead of a slide, valve trombones use a series of three piston valves (similar to those on trumpets) to change pitch. This makes it easier for student trumpeters and euphonium players to learn and also makes fast, difficult passages easier to perform. As a bonus, valve trombones match visually with standard tenor trombones since they have the same type of bell, mouthpiece and overall length. The tradeoff, however, is that they have a slightly less “open” tone than traditional slide trombones.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-354V valve trombone.

Interestingly, a hybrid instrument called the “Superbone” was developed in the 1980s for legendary trombonist Maynard Ferguson. This was a combination valve and slide trombone that had both a complete valve section and a working slide. The Superbone can be played as a slide trombone, a valve trombone, or in combination; alternative slide positions are available when valves are depressed.

Trombone Mouthpieces

One final note: When it comes to trombones, not all mouthpieces are equal. Generally, larger trombones require larger mouthpieces. If the bore of an instrument is wider, then the shank or “arm” of the mouthpiece must be larger as well … and so must be the cup of the mouthpiece, where players put their tightened lips. Conversely, the smaller the trombone, the narrower or smaller the mouthpiece. For more information about brass mouthpieces, check out this blog posting.

 

Yamaha offers a wide variety of alto, tenor, bass and valve trombones. Click here for more information.

Creative Vocal Tricks, Techniques and Tracks to Listen to on Vinyl

The analog smoothness that only vinyl can offer really lends itself to vocals. The more complex the harmonies and styling, the better. Here are a few of my favorite vocal-centric tracks for you to investigate. Curl up in your listening chair, relax and get in the mood for some deep listening … and by all means, sing along!

The Beatles – “Because” (Abbey Road)

Beyond their obvious flair for writing memorable songs, John Lennon and Paul McCartney (along with, sometimes, George Harrison) had a remarkable ability to blend their voices together. From the Everly Brothers-like tight harmonies of “Please Please Me,” “This Boy,” “If I Fell” and “Two of Us” to the soaring countermelodies of “Help” and “I’ve Got a Feeling” (not to mention the astonishing 6th-chord “yeah” that ends “She Loves You”), The Beatles combined and refined their influences — primarily English music hall music and 1950s R&B — in unusual and sonically challenging ways, in the process redefining rock vocals for all time.

Perhaps nowhere is this more in evidence than on the track “Because” from the group’s final album, Abbey Road. Nearly completely a cappella (the only accompaniment is a harpsichord playing arpeggios derived from the chords to Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony played backwards), the track consists of nine gorgeously intertwined vocal lines, sung to perfection by Messrs. Lennon, McCartney and Harrison. Amazingly, according to their engineer Geoff Emerick, they recorded these vocals live in just five hours, with the three Beatles gathered in a semi-circle singing their different parts simultaneously (with Paul giving hand signals to ensure proper phrasing and drummer Ringo Starr sitting on a nearby stool lending moral support), then repeating the process twice more. If you want to dig even deeper into this stunning display of vocal mastery, you can find remixed (and completely a cappella) versions of “Because” on the 1996 outtakes compilation Anthology 3, as well as on 2006’s Cirque du Soleil mashup Love.

The Beatles – “I Am the Walrus” (Magical Mystery Tour)

This track stands out not so much for the Beatles’ vocals (though John Lennon, who reportedly hated the sound of his voice, insisted on singing his lead into a cheap microphone put through a fuzz box) but for the histrionics of the Mike Sammes Singers, hired by producer George Martin to liven things up by adding assorted “whoo”s,” “ha ha ha hee hee hee”s and pig snortings. Towards the end of the (very long) fadeout, Lennon had the idea of superimposing the sound of a radio broadcast, and you can hear various snatches of dialog from the Shakespeare play The Tragedy of King Lear as Ringo twiddles the dial, further adding to the wash of psychedelia. Turn on and tune in, man!

The Rolling Stones – “You Can’t Always Get What You Want” (Let It Bleed)

While many associate the Beatles with studio creativity, the Rolling Stones were no slouches in that department either. This legendary track, long a Stones concert staple, opens with a chorus sung by a choir of 60 schoolchildren, double-tracked for a huge, expansive sound. The female backing vocals that later soar in and out of the mix lend an atmospheric effect that flattens out when merely streaming this classic or listening to it on CD.

The Beach Boys – “God Only Knows” (Pet Sounds)

Brian Wilson is the unquestioned modern master of vocal harmony and arrangement, and with such a broad catalog of work, it’s hard to know which Beach Boys song to choose. But I’m going to go with “God Only Knows,” not because Paul McCartney considers it the best song ever written, and not even because it comes from Pet Sounds, which many critics consider to be one of the greatest albums ever recorded, but because of the clever way it makes use of the centuries-old musical device known as a round. (Think “Three Blind Mice” or “Frère Jacques,” where a simple melody is repeated but at different starting times so as to create varied harmonies with each occurrence.)

Here, Wilson not only has the first line of the chorus sung repeatedly during the fadeout, each time staggered by a few beats, but he has a different group member singing it — even little-used Bruce Johnston, whose voice is rarely featured so prominently on Beach Boys records — adding a striking tonal variation to the ever-shifting harmonies. For an example of more Wilson wizardry on that same album, check out the sudden, and stunning, a capella breakdown in the middle of “Sloop John B.”

Crosby, Stills & Nash – “Helplessly Hoping” (Crosby, Stills & Nash)

CSN’s debut record, released in 1969, is a marvelous example of how three voices can blend together so seamlessly, the whole becomes greater than the sum of the parts. In numerous interviews, Messrs. Crosby, Stills and Nash have talked about the first time they heard themselves sing together, and the magic that ensued. When you listen to “Helplessly Hoping,” you can hear it! All three sing lead, with equal volume and presence as they enter in turns before singing together to create a big wall of sound. This track lends itself especially to vinyl, because a great analog setup illustrates the nuances in each of their voices, instead of just sounding like one big, fat, overdubbed vocal.

Michael Jackson – “Billy Jean” (Thriller)

Thriller is one of the biggest selling records in history for a reason — it’s that good, and Michael Jackson was a supreme sonic craftsman as well as an amazing vocalist. (Fun fact: Even though recording engineer Bruce Swedien did 91 separate mixes of “Billie Jean,” the second take is the one that appears on the album.)

Like a great movie that reveals more nuance with repeated viewings, this track is loaded with musical tidbits. Take, for example, the strident “don’t think twice” echoed vocal you hear answering Michael’s lead at around two minutes in. Producer Quincy Jones had MJ sing it through a six-foot long cardboard tube. Once you hear it, you’ll never be able to un-hear it! Crazy.

Squeeze – “Tempted” (East Side Story)

This Brit band hit the scene in 1974, featuring signature harmonies from co-founders Glenn Tilbrook and Chris Difford, where Tilbrook goes way up high and Difford goes way, way low. By the time Elvis Costello took the reins to produce their fourth album, East Side Story in 1981, the music press was calling the pair “the next Lennon and McCartney.” Every track on this record offers interesting vocal work, but “Tempted” is the jewel. New recruit Paul Carrack sings the lead vocal, with Difford and Tillbrook solidly backing him up. If you listen really closely, you can hear Elvis Costello singing backup as well.

Shriekback – “Underwaterboys” (Big Night Music)

Old-school rock magazine Trouser Press once said Shriekback records “always featured insidiously weird vocals.” They came by it honestly, with lead singer Barry Andrews having worked with the likes of XTC, Robert Fripp and Gang of Four.

Andrew’s voice is heavily processed here, layered over the main vocal, along with at least two female vocal tracks above him. The better your system, the more nuance you’ll hear, and you can’t stream this one, at least not at the time of this writing. The CD versions are only mediocre, so a vinyl pressing is the way to go … or, if you’re in a totally ’80s mode, choose the cassette instead. Don’t laugh: Cassette copies of Big Night Music fetch over $50 each if you can find them!

Laurie Anderson – “O Superman” (Big Science)

This was the song that launched Laurie Anderson’s career. She put multiple layers of her voice (some recorded through the then-new Vocoder) over a looped “ha, ha, ha, ha,” then added a harmonizer effect for a totally weird yet compelling sound. Though this track is packed with layers of information, it manages to still have a lot of space and ambience. It’s hard to believe that it was produced on a $500 budget and recorded in Andersons’ hallway.

Joni Mitchell – “Car on a Hill” (Court and Spark)

Court and Spark is Joni Mitchell’s most successful record in terms of airplay, record sales and critical reviews. This album, her sixth, also marks a solid transition from Mitchell’s folky beginnings to a jazzier, more experimental path.

Always known for having a wide vocal range, Mitchell hits some of the highest notes of her career in the chorus of “Car on a Hill.” She also employs a harmonizer effect extensively, along with major multitracking to thicken the presentation. Graham Nash, David Crosby, and even the comedy duo Cheech & Chong provide backing vocals elsewhere on the record, but this track is all Joni.

How to Keep Falling in Love with Guitar

My love affair with the guitar began in my early teens. I was initially drawn to the physical shapes and vibrant colors, but I think the sound of the instrument is what really got to me. The fact that a plank of wood with six strings stretched across it could evoke so many tones, musical styles and emotions was mind-blowing!

Yet it wasn’t until I picked the instrument up for the first time that I realized it could not make a harmonious sound until my hands coaxed it into doing so. Over many years, and with concerted effort, those sounds would eventually work together to form progressions, songs, and a wonderful career in music for this wide-eyed newbie.

I remember being absolutely intrigued by the symmetry of the chord shapes. I’d take a D major triad shape, then move the same triangular shape along the strings to create new sounds, new chords, new melodies … and new emotional content.

Chord chart for guitarists.

Sometimes I’d add or subtract a note from that basic shape and be amazed at how big a change that simple alteration made to the overall sound. My untrained hands and mind then went in search of new shapes and music along the length of those pain-inducing wires. I felt like an explorer, roaming the fretboard wilderness for an oasis of repertoire and harmonic vistas, and along the way, I discovered that some positions and shapes created pleasing “happy mistakes,” while others were downright cringe-worthy. I remembered the successes and learned to avoid the minefield of dissonant explosions.

The Challenge

I was brought up to work hard, honor my word and complete projects and tasks to the highest possible standard. So when I started to learn the guitar, I had the distinct feeling it would be a lifetime investment in time, money, and above all, myself. I didn’t think it would turn into a career, but life has a funny way of taking you on a journey … especially if you are listening intently and allowing opportunity to present itself to you.

Sometimes we also need to take the initiative and make the decision to improve by taking lessons, going to music school and working on our craft. None of this can be done for you, so you have to be proactive, make a commitment and prioritize your time.

Even when I was training to be a visual artist, I would keep coming back to the guitar. It soothed me, intrigued me and gave my fingers a constant challenge that could not be found by holding a brush, decorating a surface or completing an interior design. It’s that chance to improve that keeps me returning to the strings and constantly drives me forward to be a better musician.

Sometimes It’s Okay To Say No

I feel extremely blessed and fortunate to play the guitar for a living. But this also means that, sometimes, the last thing I want to do is see a guitar, play one, or even listen to music.

I’ve realized over the years that this is normal. So when a friend asks me to go and see their band — something I equate to asking a dentist to watch someone pull teeth after a day at work — I’ve learned that, at times, it’s okay to say “no thank you.” Taking time off from the instrument can be extremely helpful. No one wants to eat sushi and drink carrot juice every day. Take a break and renew your passion for the familiar flavors again.

New Discoveries

Nothing ignites my passion for the guitar more than discovering a new concept, approach or epiphany that I can share with my students. I often think of these ideas while lying in bed. I try to do all the theory in my head that very night; in the morning, I take a few hours to prove to my satisfaction that this new concept actually works on the instrument. This can often lift me from a playing “funk” (no pun intended) and inspire my next phase of enlightenment on the guitar.

Another great way to exit a rough patch in your playing progress is to simply take your guitar out of your typical playing environment or practice room and let new surroundings inspire you. Trust me, it works.

The Video

During the first half of this video, I’m using double-stop sixths and thirds to outline the chord changes of a popular (but very complex) blues progression. This demonstrates how shapes can make musical sounds that keep me inspired to learn even more simple symmetrical fingerings.

The second half of the video shifts to improvising with arpeggios (chord tones played as single-note melodies). I’m using these to outline each of the chord changes in order to solidify the harmonic structure underpinning the top-line melody. Think of arpeggios and chords as smaller shapes within the larger shape of a scale — something I like to call “shapes within shapes.”

The Guitars

The CSF-TA is the smallest (parlor-size) member of the Yamaha TransAcoustic lineup of guitars. This tiny powerhouse is perfect for fingerstyle blues like the tasty double-stops you see and hear in the video. It features a solid spruce top, mahogany back and sides, plus a wonderful array of onboard chorus, room and hall reverb effects, all without the need for external amplification.

Acoustic guitar propped on leather couch in masculine living room.
Yamaha CSF-TA.

The Yamaha Pacifica 612VIIFM takes the lead guitar role in this video. It features an alder body with a flame-maple veneer top (in this particular instrument, finished in translucent Indigo blue). The neck is a medium profile maple with a rosewood fingerboard. I’m using a blend of the Seymour Duncan neck and middle single-coil pickups to create the authentic blues tone you hear.

Closeup of body of a blue electric guitar propped up on a blue leather couch.
Yamaha Pacifica 612VIIFM.

The Wrap-Up

We all fall in love with the guitar for different reasons: the way the wood resonates with our body, the feel of the instrument in our hands as we coax new sounds out of it, the roar of the strings when we play amplified. Many of us stay infatuated and committed to the relationship, while others may take some time away from the connection to explore other desires of the heart.

The flame burns bright at first and may flicker at times, but I truly believe it never burns out. Sometimes we just need to find new ways to fan those musical embers in order to spark a passionate new love affair with guitar.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha CSF-TA TransAcoustic guitar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha Pacifica 612VIIFM electric guitar.

Top 10 Romantic Movies to Stream … That Aren’t Too Sappy

If you’re staying in this year for Valentine’s Day, you might be at a loss for what to watch. We’ve gathered our list of the 10 movies you should check out for date night — some that are funny, some that are thought-provoking, but none that are overly sentimental. (Warning: spoiler alert.)

1. 50 First Dates (2004)

Here’s a movie that offers a different take on romance. Adam Sandler plays the role of a veterinarian who’s living on Oahu, studying marine animals. He’s your typical bachelor, whose standard has become a slew of one-night stands. However, when he falls for a local art teacher named Lucy (Drew Barrymore), she presents a unique challenge: a car accident from the year before has left her with short-term amnesia. Because she forgets him, he has to figure out how to win her over every day. Find out where to stream it here.

2. The Notebook (2004)

No Valentine’s Day is complete without this cult classic. Based on Nicholas Sparks’ 1996 novel of the same name, this romantic drama stars Ryan Gosling and Rachel McAdams, who play a young couple from the 1940s. While McAdams’ character Allie Hamilton comes from a wealthy family, Gosling’s Noah Calhoun decidedly comes from the wrong side of the tracks, which causes the couple to part ways. However, they find their way back to each other years later, as a testament to the undying nature of love. Find out where to stream it here.

3. Pretty Woman (1990)

This film is equal amounts romance and comedy. Julia Roberts’ character Vivian Ward is a sex worker who meets wealthy businessman Edward Lewis (Richard Gere). While Ward is initially hired to accompany Lewis to just a few functions, the two grow close over a week’s time, revealing exactly where their similarities and differences lie. Named after Roy Orbison’s 1964 hit song “Oh, Pretty Woman,” the movie is also the source of the famous line, “Big mistake. Huge.” It’s what Ward says to a high-end retail store worker on wealthy Rodeo Drive after the employee turns Ward away for how she’s dressed. Find out where to stream it here.

4. The Proposal (2009)

This is a tale of a green card marriage gone right. The movie follows an overbearing book editor named Margaret (Sandra Bullock) and her assistant Andrew (Ryan Reynolds), who embark on a sham engagement so that Margaret won’t have to face deportation back to Canada. They initially start out as an unhappy couple, forced to be together for Margaret’s benefit, but things fall in their favor and Margaret’s tough exterior surrenders. Find out where to stream it here.

5. The Big Sick (2017)

The Big Sick is one big, romantic culture shock. The story centers on an unexpected relationship that unfolds between Kumail Nanjiani and Zoe Kazan’s character Emily. After the pressure from Kumail’s family to have an arranged marriage leads to the couple breaking up, Emily becomes hospitalized for an illness. Her parents arrive and they tell Kumail his presence isn’t necessary, but he sticks it out and slowly wins them over while continuing to stand firm against his own family’s wishes. Will the battle he wages to make his own choices prove worthwhile in the end? Find out where to stream it here.

6. The Apartment (1960)

Here’s the perfect throwback film to watch on Valentine’s Day. It’s the story of an insurance clerk named C.C. “Bud” Baxter (Jack Lemmon) who climbs the corporate ladder by allowing his managers to use his New York City apartment for their illicit affairs. Bud ends up falling for Fran Kubelik (Shirley MacLaine), an elevator operator in his office building. There’s just one thing: She’s taken, by his boss no less. Now Bud has to figure out whether she’s worth fighting for. Find out where to stream it here.

7. Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind (2004)

Love isn’t always perfect and this movie is proof of that. Here, we follow the erstwhile couple Clementine Kruczynski (Kate Winslet) and Joel Barish (Jim Carrey), who, in a science-fiction twist, have their memories of each other erased. Yet they somehow find each other again and have an iconic date where they ponder their fates as they lay on their backs on the frozen Charles River in Boston. Is it too late for love to return? Find out where to stream it here.

8. Crazy, Stupid, Love (2011)

This film tells the timeless story of a married couple who find themselves in a rut and eventually divorce. After Cal Weaver (Steve Carell) gets his wife Emily (Julianne Moore) to admit that she is cheating on him, he moves out, only to meet Jacob Palmer (Ryan Gosling), who teaches Cal how to flirt with women at bars and gives Cal the boost of confidence he needs. The movie closes with a glimmer of hope: Will Cal and Emily find their way back to one another? Find out where to stream it here.

9. Just Friends (2005)

Reformed playboys are often at the heart of romantic comedies like this one. It starts with an overweight New Jersey high school student named Chris Brander (Ryan Reynolds) who is in love with his best friend, Jamie Palamino (Amy Smart) even though she ultimately friend-zones him. Years after leaving his hometown with his tail between his legs, Chris returns, having shed the excess pounds and with a cushy job in hand. He reconnects with Jamie and, while he wants to treat her like all the other women before her, he ultimately stops himself when he realizes her friendship is important to him. Find out where to stream it here.

10. The 40-Year-Old Virgin (2005)

While this film isn’t your typical romantic fare, it will have you laughing. It stars Steve Carell as Andy Stitzer, a 40-year-old virgin who works at an electronics store. Once his coworkers — played by Paul Rudd, Seth Rogen and Romany Malco — find out, they’re determined to help him lose his virginity. While he picks up some game from them, he seems like a hopeless case … until he meets Trish (Catherine Keener). Find out where to stream it here.

How to Create Flowing Keyboard Accompaniments

If you’re a keyboardist looking to create a flowing backdrop for supporting a vocalist or instrumental player, you’ve come to the right place. Let’s explore how to develop this technique, which can be a valuable addition to your musical vocabulary.

The fundamental building block of this playing style is the use of arpeggios, which are chords played one note at a time. For example, here’s a C major chord arpeggiated across both hands:

Musical annotation

(Note: You should use your sustain pedal when playing in this style in order to create a “wash” of sound. But you should always re-pedal [that is, release and then re-press the pedal] when changing chords, or when the sound gets too muddy. The first time through in this audio clip is played without pedal; the second time through uses pedaling.)

Learning to play arpeggios this way is the first step in developing this style of accompaniment, so be sure to practice it across all different chord qualities and in all twelve keys. When you are comfortable with that simple version, try expanding the range covered by each hand like this:

Musical annotation.

Note that the fingerings shown require you to be able to pass your thumb under your hand, and to cross over fingers as well; these skills are developed in traditional piano teaching. Watch this video for a good primer on these techniques.

Just playing root position chord arpeggios is pretty basic. But if you use a wider interval in the left hand, you’ll get a fuller sound:

Musical annotation.

The first two bars use an octave in the left hand, the next uses a fifth in-between the octave; and the last one uses a wider jump after the fifth.

Now we’ll apply this style to an example where the chords change:

Musical annotation.

This works okay, but the right hand is a bit choppy since it is always changing position. Using chord inversions instead (something we covered in this blog posting), allows you to use closer note choices to keep the right hand sounding smoother:

Musical annotation.

To get a fuller sound, try extending the right-hand range to cover beyond where the three-note triad sits:

Musical annotation.

More Sophisticated Two-Handed Styles

To create an even bigger sound, try working on playing left-hand arpeggios such as these:

Musical annotation.

Once you are comfortable doing this, you can start to add some right-hand parts to your playing. Here’s one of those left-hand patterns, and some right-hand parts that work nicely against it:

Musical annotation.

In the second bar, I chose some notes that complete the chord, so when the hands play together you are clearly outlining the harmony. In the third bar, I was not that strict, and moved instead into a melodic figure to finish the phrase. In the last bar, I played broken arpeggiated figures in both hands, with a small melodic pick-up at the end. Note how the right-hand rhythms help to give each a different feel. The second bar has a little syncopated push into beat 3; the bar that follows is almost all offbeats in the right hand. Compare that to the last bar, where everything occurs on the beats, making it more relaxed. (Note that each bar repeats twice.)

Now let’s apply this concept to our chord progression:

Musical annotation.

If you use more complex chords than just triads, this can sound pretty sophisticated. Staying in a pop vein, we can add a few other notes to a chord to add some nice color, as described in this posting. For a major chord, adding the 2nd is a great choice, and sometimes the 6th or major 7th will work nicely as well. On minor chords, both the 2nd and the 4th work beautifully, as does the 7th. On a suspended fourth chord, adding the 2nd works well, along with the 7th.

Using these additional colors we can develop this flowing accompaniment style even further. Here’s an example that uses some of those color tones as melodic fills between the right hand voicings:

Musical annotation.

This next example makes those added notes part of the chord voicings themselves … but let’s also start to explore a different concept for the left hand. By simplifying the left-hand part to syncopated octaves, we can get a stronger sense of rhythm for our accompaniment:

Musical annotation.

Now we’ll add some right hand figures using some of the color tones, this time keeping the rhythm similar in both hands to make it easier to play:

Musical annotation.

Here’s a variation with an arpeggiated figure in the left hand alternated with the octaves:

Musical annotation.

One More Approach

Having an element in your accompaniment pattern that repeats can give your playing a nice anchor. In this example, a repetitive melodic figure has been added to the right-hand voicing:

Musical annotation.

Notice how a little more melodic movement has been added to the left-hand pattern to connect into each coming chord. The effect of the constantly repeating right hand helps to draw your ear to the left-hand part, which becomes a sort of melody.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Recording and Mixing Background Vocals

Almost all recorded songs that have lead vocals also include background vocals — harmony parts, oohs and ahhs, call-and-answer sections, you name it. In this article, we’ll offer suggestions to help make your background vocal recording and mixing as efficient as possible.

Use the Right Mic

Although you often see live performances with multiple singers on separate mics, such a setup isn’t usually practical in a home studio. Beyond space issues, having more than one open vocal mic in a room will lead to a lot of leakage (“bleed”) between the microphones and possibly some phase problems as well. That’s why, in most cases, you’ll get the best results recording background vocals one part at a time after the lead vocal is done. Another advantage to this approach is that it gives you the ability to focus on each part as it’s being recorded and thus make sure the performance, pitch and timing are as good as they can be.

For such overdubs, you want to set up the same way you would for lead vocals, with a pop screen in front of your best quality vocal mic (preferably a large-diaphragm condenser). If that mic offers selectable polar patterns, set it to cardioid (unidirectional) so that only picks up signal from the front. (This is the standard setting for most mics.)

That said, many singers are so used to blending their parts live that can be difficult for them to adjust to overdubbing their parts individually. In those cases, you’ll be best off recording multiple singers simultaneously singing into one mic. Here, the microphone’s polar pattern is key. If there are just two singers, you can get by with the mic set to a standard cardioid pattern, or, if the mic offers a bi-directional figure-8 pattern, you can use that and place each singer on either side of the mic, as shown here.

Two female singers on either side of a microphone.
Place two singers on either side of a mic set to a bi-directional (“figure-8”) polar pattern.

If there are more than two singers, you’ll need a vocal mic that offers an omnidirectional pattern. These mics pick up equally from all sides, so you should be able to get a good balance after experimenting with how far back everyone is standing. Start by positioning everyone about five inches or so away and do some test recordings. If one part sounds too loud, move that person back a little. If they’re too soft, move them forward. Since you’ll be recording this mic on a single track, you won’t be able to adjust the blend afterwards, so make sure it sounds right before going for a take.

Bear in mind that you’ll also need to have enough headphones on hand for however many singers there are, plus one for yourself if you’re in the same room with them (few home studios have the luxury of a soundproofed control room, as you’ll find in a professional studio). Here, devices known as headphone amplifiers or headphone distribution boxes will come in handy, as they not only split a single incoming headphone signal into multiple outputs but often also allow each person to independently adjust their own headphone levels.

Double-Track or More

If you want the backing vocals to be spread across the stereo spectrum (which will make them sound bigger and wider), you’ll need to record them several times on several tracks. Not only does this thicken the sound, it also allows you to create better balances and more interesting panning configurations. The screenshot below shows two harmony parts — one high and one low — each double-tracked and evenly balanced on either side of the lead vocal.

Screenshot showing music levels.
Doubled harmony parts panned symmetrically.

If you’re going for a more minimal sound, you can get by with just one pass of each harmony; however, this gives you fewer options for panning.

Screenshot showing music levels
Here, there’s only one part on each side of the lead vocal.

In addition to harmonizing with the lead vocal, consider doubling it — in unison or an octave up or down — during the parts of the song where the harmonies are. This can add additional heft to the vocal sound as a whole.

Artificial Doubling

If you want to thicken the vocals but the singers are no longer available to do another performance, consider doubling their parts by duplicating the original in your DAW. Doing this isn’t as impactful as using doubles that are actually sung, but it can help fill out the sound.

However, you can’t simply use the Duplicate command on a track, pan it opposite and expect it to sound like an actual double. It won’t. Two of the same parts panned to either side will just sound like a louder mono part panned to center. To make it sound like two separate parts that are panned in stereo, you need to make the duplicated track sonically different by changing its timing or pitch (or both) slightly.

For a start, try delaying the copied track slightly. This can be accomplished by inserting a mono delay on the copy, setting the mix (dry/wet) control to 100% wet and setting the delay time to 40 or 50ms as a starting point:

User interface of Steinberg Cubase delay plug-in.
Use delay to help differentiate an electronically doubled part.

You can also use a plug-in to apply a few cents of pitch shift up or down to the copy. Just don’t shift it so much that it perceptibly affects the tuning.

Clean It Up, Line It Up, Pitch It Up (or Down)

It’s essential to make sure that all vocal parts are cleaned up, lined up and pitch-corrected where necessary.

For the clean-up, edit out any extraneous noises picked up during the recording of each part.

For the line-up, make sure that the harmony parts match the lead vocal’s phrasing. That includes not only when notes start but how long they sustain. You can usually see alignment issues by visually comparing the waveforms of the lead and harmony tracks. If the start- and end-points of lines are inconsistent, you can edit the waveforms to correct them. This might entail sliding the first note of a harmony forward or backward in time to make it starts at the same time as the lead, or it might require shortening the end of a harmony line so it cuts off at exactly the same time as the lead vocal. Steinberg Cubase offers an Audio Alignment feature that can be quite helpful in these situations.

Lastly, pitch correction functions or plug-ins, such as the VariAudio feature in Cubase, can be employed if you hear singers going flat or sharp on certain notes or phrases.

All Together

When mixing harmony parts, think of them as a single instrument rather than as individual tracks. For that reason, it’s helpful to route them — especially if you have a lot of them — to stereo aux channels (called Group tracks in Cubase). That way, you can globally adjust their level and process them, which will help them sound more integrated.

For example, if you have two different harmony parts that you’ve tripled, you’ll end up with six background vocal tracks. You’re going to want to compress them all together to make them more similar from a dynamics standpoint, and you might also want to equalize them the same way, or add the same amount of reverb to all of them. By routing them all to a stereo aux track, you can insert a compressor, EQ or reverb plug-in.

Screenshot showing music levels.
The four harmony tracks here are routed to a single Cubase Group track.

You’ll probably want to do most of your panning on the individual tracks beforehand and leave the vocal bus panned hard left and right (in Cubase, you can switch to the Stereo Combined panner for your bus track, which lets you pull the left and right sides inward).

Listen Up

Here are some audio clips of a three-part vocal harmony (one lead and two harmony parts). First, here’s what the harmony sounds like with the two parts panned wide. Particularly if you listen on headphones, you’ll notice that it sounds a little unbalanced.

In this second clip, the harmonies are panned close to the center. The result feels more glued together.

Now, we’ll add doubles of each harmony part and give them a wide, balanced panning treatment.

Next, we’ll bring the higher harmonies closer to the center.

In this last example, the lower harmonies are panned on the inside and the higher ones on the outside.

To my ears, this is the most balanced approach. Whether or not you agree, one thing is certain: panning placement can drastically or subtly impact the background vocals.

The best way to become adept at recording and mixing background vocals is by doing it. Even if you’re not yet producing final tracks in your studio, try recording songs with separate lead and harmony vocals as an exercise. This will also give you an excellent opportunity to practice your arrangement and mixing skills.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

 

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Wes Lowe

Back to 40 Under 40

Wes Lowe

Wes Lowe

Director of Instrumental Arts
The King’s Academy
West Palm Beach, Florida

Imagine teaching at the school that not only you attended as a child, but where your mother went to school and was the drum major. “I understand and appreciate the culture of excellence that has been established at The King’s Academy (TKA),” says Wes Lowe. “My heritage and ties to the band program here inspire and motivate me to lead the program in a way that continues to have life-changing impact on my students. I love teaching at TKA and want to uphold the legacy of the instrumental arts program.”    

One way Lowe is doing this is by increasing band enrollment numbers. “Teaching at a K-12 school that is housed on one campus has some great benefits, such as being able to streamline the program so I can be involved in each band class,” he explains.

Lowe schedules performance trips to Disney World, Atlanta and Boston to provide motivation and incentives for his middle and high school students. “But the key to have a successful program is to have a strong beginning band program,” he says. “I took the lead in these classes and opened up band instruction for 4th-grade students for the first time. With research and study, I implemented proper fundamentals and training to these beginner band students all while making the class fun and enjoyable.”

Another area that has really taken off at TKA is the jazz program. Lowe credits this growth to three things: 1) He sets the bar for his students to perform at a professional level. “We take recordings of professional jazz bands and aim to play and perform at that level,” he says. 2) “Night of Jazz” concerts are scheduled throughout the school year where the jazz ensemble performs 14 or more jazz charts to sold-out audiences. Special guest artists like Duffy Jackson and Wayne Bergeron have performed with the band. 3) The jazz band consistently performs for the community. “This is a vital part of the program. Performing at retirement communities, charitable events and downtown marketplaces allows us to share the joy of music, and it opens the eyes and minds of my students to fully realize the power and impact that music can have on people,” Lowe says.

Lowe also spends time planning for the marching band’s halftime shows. “My goal with my halftime show is to produce a show that is modern and contemporary while creating an experience that isn’t typical for a high school marching band,” Lowe says. “I plan to the strengths of my program, which change each year. This year, I have an amazing singer, so I designed the show around her.”

The show included pyrotechnics, a specially choreographed dance routine and costumes that fit the style of the music. “I knew we would be compared to a Super Bowl halftime show because that is the standard and level that we aim to achieve,” Lowe says. “This was the first year we did a performance like this, and it surprised and shocked the audience in an impressive way. But next year might be completely different, and I am completely fine with that because it allows me to be creative and modern with my approach and design.”

Continue reading

Wilga Alex

Back to 40 Under 40

Alex Wilga

Alex Wilga

Director of Bands
Davenport Central High School
Davenport, Iowa

The Davenport Central High School band has a 136-year history, and Alexander Wilga is only the school’s eighth head director. “I am incredibly proud and very humbled that I get to work where I do,” he says. “The band program means so much to the community, and we do everything we can to give back to our area and make those who came before us proud. I know that I am just a placeholder, and my job is to make sure the program is in better shape when I am done than when I started.”

One way Wilga is doing this is by growing band enrollment to more than 240 students. “Our biggest recruiting success has been fostering a strong relationship with our junior high band program,” he says. “We participate in our 7th- and 8th-grade band rehearsals, we invite the junior high concert bands and jazz bands to share concerts with the high school, we share a halftime performance during the marching season, and we share our first public performance of the year called the Ice Cream Social, which happens on the third day of school.”

Wilga also focuses on retaining high school students by making sure that every student has a voice in the direction of the program and by providing more participation options for students. “We require every band student to be in concert band but from there they can choose to be in marching band, jazz band, color guard, winter guard, show choir band, brass choir, woodwind choir, percussion ensemble, steel drum band, as well as a whole host of solo and ensemble opportunities,” Wilga says.  

The biggest change that positively affected enrollment numbers was that the financial burden of band participation was taken away from Davenport Central families. “We are a 75% free and reduced lunch district, so asking families to spend money to rent or purchase an instrument can put music education out of reach for many of our students,” Wilga explains.  

He was involved in coordinating a proposal that secured guaranteed funding for music programs across the district. “I can be very persistent when I have to be,” Wilga admits. “I was very fortunate to have an amazing associate superintendent who knew how important the arts are to our students and our community. It was also wonderful — and risky! — to stand as a united district music department and tell the school board that we would no longer be able to provide music programs if there wasn’t going to be district funding.” Thankfully, the gamble paid off. 

Wilga goes on to say, “I am always pushing for my students to have every experience that is possible through band.  I don’t want them to worry about quality instruments, quality facilities, adequate funding or the other administrative things that come with a large program. I don’t want students to have a single roadblock so that they are free to become the best versions of themselves that they can possibly be.”

A final note from Wilga: “The machine that slices bread was invented in Davenport, so you are all welcome!” 

Continue reading

Taylor Heather

Back to 40 Under 40

Heather Taylor

Heather Taylor

Instrumental Music Teacher
Lakeshore Elementary School
Rochester, New York

Working at a Title I school can be challenging, but Heather Taylor isn’t deterred. “My students are amazing! They live in a low-income suburb of Rochester and receive free breakfast, lunch and many other school and family services,” she says. “While some live in a typical family unit, others live with their grandparents, in a foster home or have even been homeless. But even with these circumstances they are THRIVING in music!”

Taylor’s students take the bus one hour before school starts to make it to early morning band. If they miss the bus, they will walk to school in the freezing upstate New York winter weather. “They give up lunch and recess time to help me organize music or sort handouts,” she says. “They make me want to be a better teacher and provide them with the proper materials to succeed!”

Her can-do attitude obviously works because her music program at Lakeshore Elementary School is the largest elementary program in the district. She credits her high enrollment numbers on having high expectations and building relationships with her students. “I hold my students accountable for practicing at home and making music together in lessons and rehearsals,” she says.

Relationship-building comes naturally for Taylor. “I am so fortunate to be able to work with students not only in a large ensemble setting but in small group weekly lessons as well,” she explains. “These small group lessons allow me to get to know my students on a personal level, which basically eliminates any misbehaviors in my classroom. I want my students to know that I am a trusted adult and that my classroom is a safe space for them. They can come down to my classroom anytime — if they need a break, if they want to have lunch, etc. Sometimes that is all it takes for a student to want to come to school, to want to learn, to want to participate in music.”

Taylor did not want finances to be a barrier for students to participate in music. So she looked for ways to get instruments, accessories and classroom materials for her band program. “This continued to grow as I found alternative ways of getting these supplies (other than school/district budgets), such as instrument drives, #clearthelist movement, grants, Donors Choose, etc.,” she says. “All the materials I have received are immediately put into the hands of my students so that we can continue making music together!”

Continue reading

Antos Justin

Back to 40 Under 40

Justin Antos

Dr. Justin Antos

Director of Bands and Orchestras
Dwight D. Eisenhower High School
Blue Island, Illinois

“I believe that being a music educator is less about the ornate spires and more about the individual bricks that build the castle,” says Justin Antos. And he has amassed a number bricks to form a strong foundation for his students at Dwight D. Eisenhower High School, Saint Xavier University where he is the band director and Trinity Christian College where he is an adjunct professor of music.

Antos’ formula for growing his music program? Building morale and establishing a culture of respect and encouragement is an integral first step. “I celebrate little victories constantly to enhance my students’ sense of pride,” Antos says. “I also try to be as visible as possible. I talk with students in the cafeteria during their lunch periods, I walk with them in the hallways during passing periods and I attend their athletic events and non-musical performances. When students see than I am committed to them and that our program provides a safe and familial environment, new students flock to take music classes.”  

Eisenhower’s population is 90% low-income, and most students in the band and orchestra learn an instrument for the first time once they arrive at the school. Antos doesn’t let these statistics deter him. He discovers what they enjoy and then structures his curriculum and classroom activities to align with those interests. “When students contribute to the design of the educational landscape, learning happens organically,” he says.

He has had students earn full rides to competitive music schools and Ivy League universities who go on to become professional musicians or music educators. “On the same token, I have also had students struggle to produce a beautiful sound on their instruments for the longest time to then one day FINALLY be able to play with great tone quality,” Antos says. “In the end, the accolade means less to me than the sense of accomplishment.”

Antos’ musical advocacy goes beyond Eisenhower High School, Saint Xavier University and Trinity Christian College. He donated the honorarium he received as a top 10 finalist for the Grammy Music Educator Award in 2021 to Advocate Children’s Hospital of Oak Lawn’s music therapy department. The hospital provided a wish list of instruments, and Antos purchased hand drums, Gato boxes, wood blocks and pitched handheld instruments.

Continue reading

Amos David

Back to 40 Under 40

David Amos

David Amos

Director of Bands
Heritage Middle School
Painesville, Ohio

After the isolation created by the pandemic, many students “craved a place where they can unwind and express themselves,” says David Amos. “And band might be the only class in which they feel that is possible.”

Amos finds creative ways to introduce his students at Heritage Middle School to the many facets of music. He started a nine-week “Careers in Music” class that looks at various non-performing careers in the music industry. “Students learn about music journalists, concert planners, promotors, radio DJs and sound production,” Amos says. The class also explores job descriptions and the necessary training and qualifications for each position. Throughout the course, students “create songs in AB, ABA and verse-chorus form to learn how the music they hear on Spotify and TikTok is made.”

Painesville is located within a primarily middle-class county, but more than 85% of the Painesville City Local Schools’ students qualify for free and reduced lunch. To allow students to participate in band, 70% of students use school-owned instruments. In spite of these challenges, the PCLS band program is the third largest in the county.

More than half of the district’s population is Hispanic and Latino, and a quarter of the students are identified as English language learners. Amos works hard to include “music pieces that are comprised of folk melodies representative of the cultures in my classroom.”

For the 2021 winter concert, his band performed a piece called “Kwanzaa Celebration” that included a Liberian folk melody and the famous spiritual “Kum ba yah.” Amos and his students looked at the cultures and traditions represented in the music while learning to perform the songs. “I would love to see more middle school repertoire written by composers of color or queer-identified composers. Authentic representation of diverse individuals and the cultures they represent is extremely important to the growth of all students,” he says. 

Amos always finds ways to “push students to be a better version of themselves as an individual and in music,” according to one of his students. 

“Remember, music is worth it. … While music is the content we teach, our first goal must be to teach students the skills they need to be successful in this changing world,” Amos says.

Continue reading

Bechard Cassandra

Back to 40 Under 40

Cassandra Bechard

Dr. Cassandra Bechard

Director of Bands, Assistant Professor of Music
University of Northwestern St. Paul
St. Paul, Minnesota

At University of Northwestern St. Paul (UNW), Cassandra Bechard oversees several bands and ensembles that are diverse in musical backgrounds (including music majors/minors and non-music majors/minors) that come together to create exhilarating concerts. “What I am most proud of is not only the level of music-making, but the community building that the ensembles strive for,” she says. “Band rehearsals end at dinner hour on campus, and as a result there are daily band dinners. The community aspect of the program is strong and filled with kindness, care, respect and love for each other — it’s a very special program.”

Bechard plans to add an honor band day, something she started when she worked at the University of Dubuque in Iowa, where she saw an opportunity for more university-sponsored honor bands in the region. She collaborated with her colleagues in the fine and performing arts department and admissions to create an annual high school honor band day. Students are nominated by their band directors and if selected, they have a day full of rehearsals, a campus tour and a free concert that is open to the public. Bechard says that the University of Northwestern St. Paul will host its first high school honor band day in January 2023.

Prior to joining the faculty at UNW, Bechard taught high school band in South Dakota and encountered a common problem that she and her colleagues around the state faced — finding appropriate repertoire that fit the instrumentation of their ensembles. She tackled this problem head on, and during her doctoral degree, she focused her research on finding and cataloging repertoire for small wind chamber ensembles (8 to 16 players) that are at or below the grade level of IV. Bechard reached out to composers to write music, and she continues to support this area of research through presentations with her colleague, Dr. Melanie Brooks, from Winona State University and by joining consortiums for adaptable music.

Bechard’s proudest moments as a music educator is when former students connect with her to share their accomplishments. “What a privilege to be thought of and sought out to share exciting news with years after they have left my rehearsal space — there is nothing better,” she says.

Continue reading

Blanco Stephen

Back to 40 Under 40

Stephen Blanco

Stephen Blanco

Director of Mariachi Studies
Las Vegas High School
Las Vegas, Nevada

In 2018, Clark County School District welcomed a new mariachi program to Las Vegas High School. This program was “founded for a community that embodies what it truly means to be American, and its members have stepped up to show their families what the American Dream can really look like,” says Stephen Blanco, who was tapped to lead this new program.

In the years since its inception, the group, called Mariachi Joya, has grown and experienced tremendous success, including performing “La Tierra del Mariachi” for the virtual Parade Across America for the 2020 inauguration of President Joe Biden and Vice President Kamala Harris. “We hadn’t seen each other in nearly a year, so the inauguration performance was taped and recorded in seclusion,” Blanco says. “The school gave us special permission to meet in the gym to watch the inauguration. Standing back and seeing my students watching their hard work … well, there is no greater feeling in the world!”

Blanco says that Mariachi Joya “isn’t a normal class that performs four to five times a year. They perform nearly 100 times a year,” including events with Las Vegas Mayor Carolyn Goodman and Nevada Governor Steve Sisolak. The group recently traveled to Washington, D.C. to perform for the Mexican Embassy and to meet with Senator Catherine Cortez Masto.

Blanco spent his first week in Las Vegas at Music Education Consultants’ mariachi conference learning implementation strategies and stylistic nuances of mariachi music. Blanco created a five-year plan that included all the needed materials, curriculum and marketing strategies for the program. He says, “We are now ending year four of that five-year plan, and things are going great!”

Mariachi is more than a specialized ensemble at Las Vegas High School. “My students consistently give me reasons to be proud of them, whether it be laughs during rehearsal or them performing for sold-out crowds of thousands of people,” Blanco says.

According to one of his students, Blanco tells them to “rock that stage no matter where we are at and to release energy into the crowd.” Blanco and his students rally before every performance because they know that they have a job to do. “Every person in the audience is expecting a show, and we give them the best show they’ve ever seen,” Blanco says.

Continue reading

Bryant Robert

Back to 40 Under 40

Dr. Robert Bryant

Music Education Coordinator,
Assistant Professor of Music
Tennessee State University
Nashville, Tennessee

A third-generation music educator, Robert Bryant grew up singing in church and playing several instruments at a young age. “I always knew the power that music had in shaping identity and inspiring hope,” he says.

His passion for teaching others started as a high school drum major and section leader, and in college, that passion became more focused — Bryant wanted to work and serve in those areas that need him the most: marginalized and often forgotten communities of color. While working in urban areas like metro Atlanta and in rural settings like Americus, Georgia, Bryant “found my voice and purpose as a teacher by working with students who I saw a piece of myself in and who saw a piece of themselves in me.” At Tennessee State University (TSU), he helps his students find their voice and gives them the strategies, tools and techniques that will help them thrive as music teachers.

Prior to working at the collegiate level, Bryant worked as a band director at Miller Grove High School and Stockbridge Middle School where he increased enrollment in band by at least 20%. He also had his bands participate in solo and ensemble festivals for the first time.

“I am a data-driven teacher with a personalized approach for each and every student,” Bryant says. “Many of my students have made district and all-state ensembles, and my high school senior classes regularly amassed more than $1 million in music scholarship offers at colleges and universities throughout the country.”  

In addition to his work at TSU, Bryant is a guest lecturer and capstone supervisor for the master’s in curriculum and instruction degree at Florida A&M University, his alma mater. “It is my goal to work with these students to help them continue their education, transform their knowledge and experiences into research-based and data-driven instructional praxis, open their eyes to the possibilities they have with a graduate degree, and help them develop curricula and instructional techniques that allow them be better teachers to their students, as well as leaders within their school,” he says.

Bryant credits his “truly awesome” students for his success. “They have allowed me to push them when others had relegated them to lowered expectations and did not believe in their greatness,” he says. “They have embraced my ideas and approaches that sometimes were different and outside of their experience.”

Continue reading

Calus Adam

Back to 40 Under 40

Adam Calus

Adam Calus

Executive Director
Education Through Music — Massachusetts
Boston, Massachusetts

Adam Calus builds relationships wherever he goes. He founded the music program at Charlestown High School and after six years there, he moved to become executive director of Education Through Music — Massachusetts (ETM-MA) so he  could create more music programs for Boston Public Schools (BPS), especially at the many district schools that do not have them.

ETM-MA is a nonprofit that is committed to keeping music alive in all Massachusetts schools, starting in Boston. The organization partners with principals to create, strengthen and sustain music programs for schools that currently do not have them; and makes music a core subject in its partner schools. Calus says that another ETM-MA goal is to use music as a catalyst to support learning in other areas, including overall general development, motivation toward school and attendance, parent engagement and community investment in the school. 

Presently, Calus oversees the development of three new music programs for BPS at Brighton High School, Dudley Street Neighborhood Charter School and he supports the BPS music teacher at David A. Ellis Elementary School.

Through his prior role as a public school music educator, and his current work at ETM-MA and as a private music instructor, Calus talks and listens to his students, their parents, music teachers and the community. When it comes to repertoire, Calus recommends having a simple conversation with students and their families. “The music that students love and connect with should be one of the core components that drives a lot of learning,” he says. “Parents and students appreciate that they have agency in what happens in the music learning space. The music that students know and love is already inside of them. Parents and students enjoy when the music space taps into that love in order to learn and become proficient musically.” 

He uses that same relationship-building model to find performance opportunities around Boston. “Students should get out into their community and make music regularly because that’s what musicians do,” Calus says. “They go out and perform in places they care about and are connected to. I talk with my students and encourage the teachers I train to do the same with regards to which community spaces mean something to them, then reach out to those spaces and find out how we can facilitate a student performance there.” 

Continue reading

Chandler Kristopher

Back to 40 Under 40

Kristopher Chandler

Kristopher Chandler

Director of Bands
Gautier High School
Gautier, Mississippi

Adapting to changes and being flexible have been essential for music educators during the pandemic, which Kristopher Chandler was forced to do. He came up with some creative solutions — one planned and one not — to help his music students at Gautier High School.

In the spring of 2021, Chandler hosted a Rehears-A-Thon weekend for his wind ensemble students to help them with their performance on their spring assessment literature and to reignite their fire and passion for music that was damaged during the ongoing pandemic. “We invited band directors from all over the state to lead sectionals, and had Dr. Colin McKenzie from the University of Southern Mississippi rehearse the full ensemble segment — all while remaining socially distant and wearing the necessary PPE,” Chandler says. “In total, the students and clinicians experienced approximately 12 hours of intense, yet engaging and enjoyable, learning!”

That summer, Band Camp 2021, was moved to a virtual platform after the first day because Chandler and several staff members tested positive for COVID, despite being fully vaccinated. The band staff and student leadership team devised a plan for the virtual camp including instructional videos, individual practice plans, music and marching fundamentals pass-off videos, and daily check-ins with staff and student leaders via Google Meets. “While we have a talented band staff, our incredible student leadership team was the driving force behind making our virtual band camp a success,” Chandler says.

The Gautier Band Program prides itself on operating each day as a true team, which includes four full-time band directors, one color guard coordinator and one part-time guard tech. “Our team sees every student in our program every day by teaching courses on multiple campuses,” Chandler says. “We truly complement each other and it’s a joy working with these incredible educators every day. But we cannot do our job without great students and a great educational community. The Gautier band program has high goals for the future, and we are eager to continue working!”

Continue reading

Collins Danielle

Back to 40 Under 40

Danielle Collins

Danielle Collins

Director of Music, Media, Entertainment Technology (MMET) Department
Academy for the Performing Arts
Huntington Beach High School
Huntington Beach, California

The Music, Media, Entertainment Technology (MMET) Program at Huntington Beach Academy for the Performing Arts is personalized and student-led, “meaning our students choose a path for the year (or sometimes even the show), and each is responsible for different aspects of the production, beyond performing the songs,” says Danielle Collins, the director of the MMET department.

About 25% of the 150 students in the Pop Music Program in MMET help arrange or record their colleagues’ original songs. According to Collins, students run rehearsal blocks and sound engineer in each of the academy’s studios, as well as oversee production of each song in preparation for live performances, which include three annual mainstage rock shows (each with 12 to 15 groups performing) and three to four dozen community gigs and performances. Through community outreach by Collins and her students, MMET performances run the gamut from holiday parties, parades, street fairs, restaurants and coffee shops, and other events in Huntington Beach.  

“We try to provide students as many options as they may find in the music industry, while still maintaining a level of quality,” she says. These options include recording holiday albums and original songs for which media students design music videos. “We focus on producing, recording, performing and event managing,” Collins says.

According to one of her nomination letters, Collins encourages students to try, fail and eventually succeed. Calling MMET a “program of grit,” Collins says that students hold themselves to such a high standard that failure usually isn’t an option. “We create safe opportunities for healthy fails and the space and time built into productions to recover and succeed,” she explains. “We reflect weekly and ask students to recast what they may feel is a ‘fail’ to merely a ‘try,’ and this mindset helps our students take more risks because they know they’ll be supported through the process.”

In addition to running the Pop Music Program at her school, Collins helps other music educators establish their own programs. She shares that at a previous school, she started her pop music groups during every ensemble class — for example, jazz band had a rhythm section, and those students were given class time to select and rehearse pop songs to perform. She recruited students into concert band classes, planning to have them in the pop music group. According to Collins, this initial enrollment is vital while building your program.

Collins also says that you must have your administration’s support in understanding that not all students on campus have an interest in participating in a traditional music program. “You will absolutely triple your program if you can create space for the other 80% of students on your campus who find passion in popular music.”

Continue reading

Dame Nathan

Back to 40 Under 40

Dr. Nathan Dame

Dr. Nathan Dame

Director of Choral Activities,
Fine Arts Department Chair
Wylie East High School
Wylie, Texas

Described as an “empire builder,” Dr. Nathan Dame says it’s all about inspiring and enabling those around you to find musical success and to become empowered stakeholders throughout the building process. “When I accepted the position at Wylie East High School, my co-director — I am blessed to teach with my wife and better half every day! — and I built a strategic plan grounded in the musical, social and interpersonal values of what we wanted our program to look like, how we wanted our students to sing, how they would hold themselves in the school and community, and how we wanted to involve others in the process,” he says

They revisit the strategic plan each year and make necessary changes as the program grows — which it has! The program now includes 300 students in 10 choral ensembles. A third full-time choral director has been hired at Wylie, and a staff member was added to the feeder programs at the middle schools.

A key to the growth of the choral program is Dame’s recruitment and retention efforts, which are grounded in three main areas: 1) musical success, 2) visibility and 3) strong relationships with students. “I have been fortunate to work in three different schools where enrollment has tripled,” he says. “Our goal is to create an inclusive environment for all students where we create outstanding music, share it with others frequently and purposefully, and care about our students as people before musicians.” 

Each year, Dame creates a theme for the choral program. The first year’s theme was “Elevate,” which focused on the development and expectations of exemplary musicianship. Subsequent themes have been “Ignite” to spark the fuel within each student, and “Odyssey” as everyone navigated the unknown challenges of the pandemic. “Breaking Ground” is this year’s theme as the choral program opens a new facility and will travel internationally for the first time.

The fine arts building expansion was supported by a bond proposal and the district administration. “Our superintendent of schools was quick to say, ‘students don’t come to school for algebra … they come to school for fine arts and other programs,’ and he put his money and actions where his mouth was,” Dame says.

The new facility has a large choir room with skylights, new computers and sound technology, recording equipment, seated risers, equipment and uniform storage, two offices and six practice rooms. Additionally, there is a specific ensemble room where three sections of classes can overlap, which are outfitted with portable risers, and pedagogical and technological tools.

“I am inspired daily with our program and what it has become,” Dame says. “After our recent winter concert, a staff member came up to our team and said, ‘You promote excellence from every student and it is so neat to see.’ This makes me so proud, and I feel that our expectation of excellence at all levels is evident in our program’s results at contests and in concert.”

Continue reading

Felder Brandon

Back to 40 Under 40

Brandon Felder

Brandon Felder

Fine Arts Music Director, SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy
Landover, Maryland
Music Director, Georgetown University Gospel Choir
Washington, D.C.

“Bloom where you are planted” is Brandon Felder’s teaching philosophy. “Music represents time, and like a seed that is planted and takes root, it will sprout, grow and bloom. Music should take form and dissolve as music has the power to transform,” he says.   

At SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy, Felder makes his classroom and rehearsal room safe spaces for creativity, transparency, peace, harmony and respect where his students experience freedom of expression. “If students can feel an educator’s passion, they will gain inspiration and then work toward excellence,” he says.

Intentional music programming is something that Felder takes pride in. “It is a meticulous process in which I consider the culture of the community, sensitivities and student abilities,” he says.  “I envision the end result — performances, end of semester, assessments, etc. — and what skills students need to accomplish these outcomes. Then I weave programs, concerts, recitals and formal and informal performances to support this.”

At SHABACH! and at all his previous positions, Felder first establishes involvement and connection within the school through pep rallies, assemblies, flash mobs and sporting events. Once the music program is visible at the school, he says to seek community involvement and performance opportunities in the community, first at locations (senior homes, hospitals, churches, nursing homes, malls and shopping centers, sporting events and city government events) within a 5-mile-radius of the school. As the school’s music program grows, continue to expand its footprint in 5-mile increments.

“Just as chicken makes its own gravy and bacon makes its own grease, I want to create musical citizens who are a product of my experiences,” Felder says. “I consider myself a teaching artist who continually fuels my own creative experiences through personal performance and objective opportunities. Once I am charged artistically and creatively, it is my responsibility as a music educator to provide innovation and fresh ideas to the classroom experience for students to expand outside of the four walls of the traditional classroom mindset.”

Felder is also the music director of the Georgetown University Gospel Choir. “I oversee the talented student singers who celebrate their spirituality through song and support Protestant Ministry services and special campus events while singing diverse musical selections,” he says.

In addition to his work at SHABACH! and Georgetown University, Felder serves on the GRAMMY Recording Academy Board, Washington, D.C. Chapter and its D.C. Education Committee, which identifies top programs across the region as well as recognizes economically underserved schools and their efforts in music education.

Continue reading

Finney Bryson

Back to 40 Under 40

Bryson Finney

Bryson Finney

Artistic Director, We Are Nashville Festival
Learning Technology Specialist
Metro Nashville Public Schools
Nashville, Tennessee

We Are Nashville is an annual music festival for Nashville area vocal and instrumental programs that takes place in March, during Music in Our Schools Month. Music programs are invited for a “Day of Music,” which was housed this year at the Schermerhorn Symphony Center in downtown Nashville.

“My heart behind the event is to expose students and young aspiring musicians to the array of opportunities that exist in music,” says Bryson Finney, the festival’s artistic director, coordinator and co-founder. “Providing this enriching platform for students can be life-changing. I believe a dream needs three essential steps to grow: 1) exposure (see the artistry), 2) identification (workshop opportunities/learning experiences) and 3) action (joint performance opportunities). This not only plants seeds but also builds our city’s artistic community.”

Finney spent the first nine years of his career as a general music, piano and choir instructor at an elementary school. After earning his master’s degree, Finney embraced music tech and digital music composition and became a Metro Nashville Public Schools learning technology instructional coach. He led district-wide professional development opportunities supporting technology integration. He also worked with the Nashville Symphony as the Accelerando Program coordinator, equipping students from diverse ethinic backgrounds for careers in music.

During the pandemic, Finney worked with the CMA Foundation’s United Voices for Music Education Initiative and collaborated with music educators nationwide, collecting innovative ideas for the music classroom.

Finney returned to Metro Nashville Public School as a Learning Technology Specialist and works with educators to integrate district-approved digital tools and applications into instruction. “Most of my school-based work happens with our elementary schools and involves consultations with school leadership, school-wide/grade-level trainings, co-teaching and modeling,” he says.

The We Are Nashville Festival clearly holds a special place in Finney’s heart. “It’s a wonderful opportunity for exposure, education and engagement with student ensembles and local artists,” he says. In 2020,

In 2020, a We Are Nashville video project was created in collaboration with the Nashville Symphony and its Accelerando Program, which received a 2021 Regional Emmy. Finney was the songwriter.

Continue reading

Goindoo Alain

Back to 40 Under 40

Alain Goindoo

Alain Goindoo

Director of Bands, Jeaga Middle School
West Palm Beach, Florida
Executive Director, Hope Symphony INC.

Alain Goindoo created Hope Symphony to provide access to music, tools and resources to children and families from communities in need. “I wanted to bring hope for the future and level the playing field,” he says. “Hope Symphony brings together a village of difference-makers who provide essential resources, equipment, personnel, camps and life-changing opportunities that would otherwise pass by these children due to lack of access.”

The Hope Symphony Summer Band Camp was established in 2017 and serves approximately 100 Title I students. “The purpose of the camp is to promote more than music proficiency — the camp generates excitement for learning and gives hope for their future one note at a time,” Goindoo says.

Students at camp receive music lessons from qualified instructors, free food, method books and equipment. They engage in successful learning on a college campus with their peers. The camp experience provides college readiness skills and establishes the idea that the pursuit of a higher education is a reality and something that they can achieve.  

In a “40 Under 40” nomination letter, Goindoo, who is also Jeaga Middle School’s band director, is described as a nurturer who is touted for putting children who live in communities affected by drugs and gun violence on a “completely alternate trajectory thanks to music.” 

“We create a safe space for students to learn and grow, as well as set goals that give them ownership, a sense of pride, value in themselves and their work, and, most importantly, a place to belong,” Goindoo says. “As music teachers, we find our students’ passion for music and nurture that passion through  developing effective rigorous programming, building healthy and meaningful relationships, teamwork, leadership development, setting goals, learning to never give up and preparing them for college readiness — all this on top of building music proficiency!”

Goindoo has raised more than $380,000 in grants to support music education. “I pray, then I work diligently outside of school hours writing grants, raising awareness and building community relationships with parents, local universities, city and county officials, and nonprofit organizations to meet the needs of the children. After explaining the needs and showing how the resources will be used, most people want to help,” he says.

Continue reading

Hayes Jayme

Back to 40 Under 40

Jayme Hayes

Jayme Hayes

Director of Bands
Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts
Magnet Middle School
Wichita, Kansas

When the world went into lockdown because of the COVID-19 pandemic, Jayme Hayes tackled online learning with gusto. “I became a content-creating maniac,” she said. “Resources like method books, online theory tools, even YouTube instructional videos were not made for 100% online teaching, and that was the biggest problem I faced at first. I realized I needed to create content that matched my program and me as a teacher. I created practice and assessment tools with Boom Cards, YouTube and Flipgrid for almost every lesson.”

Much of what Hayes learned, experienced and taught during remote and hybrid teaching has now become a central part of her classroom at Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts Magnet Middle School. She effectively reaches students at their level of understanding by providing more resources and chances for them to succeed. “I still incorporate online tools like Boom, Flipgrid and YouTube, but they are more spread out throughout the week or quarter,” she says. “We use iPads for composition projects, tuning activities, aural skills activities and listening evaluation. Students are given multiple opportunities to show their level of proficiency as we learn and develop music skills.”

She was so adept at teaching remotely that the Kansas Music Educators Association (KMEA) asked her to speak at its virtual convention. Her presentation focused on how virtual teaching did not have to be any less effective, impactful or educational than in-person teaching. “It was a session about our mindset when it came to teaching online,” Hayes explains. “We were/are still educators who are passionate about our students and music. I refused to allow the screen to remove that from my classroom, and I tried to empower others to do the same. I do not teach music to young people, I teach young people through music. A camera wasn’t going to stop me from doing that.”

How did Hayes find ways for students to make music remotely? “With comic relief mixed in with high expectations, honesty and transparency,” she says.

Each quarter had a theme and everything was planned around that theme. Hayes used poems and children’s books to learn about improvisation, composition, teamwork and performance. “Every day we played with recordings, metronomes, call and response, singing and playing,” she says. “We played interactive games using rhythms and our instruments like charades, Pictionary, Clue and a very creative version of Among Us that I got from the Band Directors Facebook page because there are other teachers who are a lot more creative than me.”

Hayes admits that honesty was the biggest part of the shared creativity with her students. “I told the kids that I was trying my best with these new crazy ideas, and they were eager to try them out,” she says.

Continue reading

Helmick Jonathan

Back to 40 Under 40

Jonathan Helmick

Dr. Jonathan Helmick

Director of Bands,
Associate Professor of Music,
Slippery Rock University
Slippery Rock, Pennsylvania

Jonathan Helmick’s booming laugh will draw you in — and you’ll be glad that it did because this thoughtful and caring music educator has established a welcoming culture at Slippery Rock University. “Part of establishing that culture is living it,” he says. “I take time to get to know my students and meet their parents and family. I also try to intentionally engineer a culture within the program where current students reach out and connect to first-year members.”

Helmick teaches more than musical skills and knowledge. “It is my responsibility to curate a space where students have the opportunity to grow in the area of their dispositions and embrace vulnerability,” he says. He emphasizes this point by telling his students to “hug the cactus, embrace the vulnerability.“

Helmick explains, “As musicians, we understand how vulnerable it is to make music. Encouraging students to take healthy risks, step into the spotlight and actively own their trajectory and growth always run parallel to the curriculum on paper.”

He also tells students to see music as a game with purpose and to focus on building skills, confidence, independence, self-efficacy that transfers to all facets of their lives.

During the pandemic, Helmick surveyed his students on how to stay connected with each other when they were completely apart. One topic overwhelmingly captured their interest: diversity in the wind band. During the rest of the spring semester, Helmick and his students explored music by diverse composers and music that was connected to themes of diversity.

“When the semester was over, students wrote to me explaining that this unit provided them with the first opportunity to see themselves in much of the music that they listened to and performed,” Helmick says. “This was particularly true for LGBTQ2S+ students.”

Helmick went a step further for the fall 2020 semester and gave the SRU Symphonic Wind Ensemble a special project. “They were to analyze the content of our library to see if the composers in our library proportionally mirrored our ensemble and society,” he says. “The students went so far as to compare the demographics of our music building, campus and country to the composers listed in our library.”

The results of this project are being leveraged to write grants to commission underrepresented composers to write for SRU’s ensemble, “giving our students actionable ways to meaningfully impact equitable programming practices,” Helmick says.

Continue reading

Homes Anastasia

Back to 40 Under 40

Anastasia Homes

Anastasia Homes

Director of Bands
San Elijo Middle School
San Marcos, California

A student in the San Elijo Middle School (SEMS) band described Anastasia Homes as “strict but chill” — and she considers that high praise, indeed. “I have high expectations and standards, but I am always there to encourage the kids, help them through it and try to make light of the mistakes,” she says. “Kids have so much stress these days, music should be a place where they can enjoy being creative and develop skills to a level of their desire. My goal as a music teacher is to teach them about what it is to be a good person through music and give them a lifelong appreciation for the arts.”

Homes has found creative ways to instill music appreciation in her students. She worked with percussion coach Zachary Elliott to start a world music course, an after-school percussion class that meets once a week. In the class, which is supported by an expanded learning opportunities (ELO) grant, students pick out instruments and music to expand on music elements from other parts of the world. “The kids are working on an African piece right now that they plan to perform at a percussion festival later this year,” Homes says. 

Homes saw how well a mentorship program worked for the band at San Marcos High School and worked with the high school band director, Geoff Radant, to develop a step-by-step plan to integrate the mentorship program at the middle school. Homes and her co-director, Shannon McInnis, created outlines for students to follow that included how to first contact their mentee, things they could work on in meetings and just how to break the ice. “High school students mentored our 7th graders, and 8th graders mentored our 6th graders,” she explains. “We tried to pair kids based on personality and instruments. All students volunteered their time and met when it worked for them. It is still a small element in our program, but my hope is that in years to come we can make it something even better. The students involved love meeting with older kids to hang out and improve their playing.”

Homes credits the entire community — administration, fellow teachers, directors throughout the district and parents — for her program’s success. “Our program at SEMS is amazing not just because of one person, but many,” she says. “This is a special place, and I feel lucky every day that I am here, inspiring our musicians to do their best and have fun.”

Continue reading

Jones Amir

Back to 40 Under 40

Amir Jones

Amir Jones

Director of Bands
Thomas W. Harvey High School
Painseville, Ohio

Amir Jones opens the doors for his students at Thomas W. Harvey High School to experience success. “Some of our students come from challenging socioeconomic situations, but this does not stop them from achieving at top levels and rising to every challenge,” he says. “When a student enters this program, they are given the best opportunity we can offer despite what other obstacles they may experience outside of our program.”

Jones makes this possible by taking a lot of the financial burden away from band families. More than 80% of his students are provided with instruments from the district, and the band fundraises as much as possible to help students travel. “We have a group of alumni that gives back through our booster program to help provide additional lessons and instruction so that students who may have a difficult time getting private lessons still have access,” Jones says.

When Jones started at Harvey High, he approached everything “as if we were a larger, more affluent ensemble,” he explains. “We started to travel yearly, we play music that pushed our limits, we purchased quality equipment, we performed on our local news and participated in as many performances as possible.”

Jones’ emphasis on recruitment and experiences has paid off. “The first time we performed at Large Group Contest, we received a superior rating,” Jones says. “As we continue to move forward, we hope to perform at the state level as well as at professional development conferences.”

To address more advanced players in the band, Jones started an Honors Band, which was “initially a volunteer group that met after school,” Jones says. “Then the Honors Band turned into the Wind Ensemble, and the 35 to 50 students in this ensemble play more difficult music and earn honors credit. My top goal for this band is to help students push themselves musically and play high-quality music at levels they have not experienced before.”

Jones is thankful for his community — from district administrators and parents to his music staff, colleagues and local band directors — for their overwhelming support of the arts. He regularly collaborates will all of them “as we continue to find ways to best serve our students.”

Continue reading

Knepper Damon

Back to 40 Under 40

Damon Knepper

Damon Knepper

Director of Bands and Orchestras
Ironwood Ridge High School
Oro Valley, Arizona

Damon Knepper is described as the “king of calm,” which he says comes from watching his favorite leaders and teachers remain strong in the face of adversity. “Remaining strong doesn’t mean ignoring the problem or brushing it aside, but rather to be the rock for your students so that they have somebody to latch onto in times of crisis,” he explains.

Knepper had to rely on this inner strength when he and his program suffered a tragic lost in April 2021 when his brother, Nicholas, who was a percussion director at Ironwood Ridge High School passed away from complications from epilepsy. “I got through this — the most tragic event I have ever faced — by being authentic and vulnerable with my students,” he says. “During this time of immense grief, I needed them as much as they needed me. If students were sad and wanted to talk, I provided a safe and calm place for them to do so.”

Knepper has been a rock at Ironwood since he completed his student teaching there in spring 2016. During this learning period, he formed relationships with students, parents and other teachers in the department, which made the transition to becoming part of the faculty as a percussion director much easier. He then worked alongside Mark Hodge as associate director bands before taking over the program this year.

“The bands culture was already healthy, but I am a believer in reinventing oneself every so often,” he says. “The biggest changes I made this first year as director of bands was a major rebranding of our music programs with a new logo and push to be more visible in our community because it’s the 20th anniversary of our school. I am only in year one of this process, but it has really reinvigorated my students about being part of something bigger than themselves.”

Knepper has brought a unique creativity to Ironwood. “I arrange and compose much of the perfomed music for my pageantry arts ensembles, including marching band and indoor percussion,” Knepper says. “The collaborative design process is one of my absolute favorite parts of my job!”

Two years ago, the show for the indoor percussion team was based on the life cycle of the agave plant. “The Arizona agave plants’ lifecycle is incredibly beautiful, but sadly, it dies shorty after blooming,” Knepper explains. They performed Bon Iver’s 22 (OVER_s∞∞n), which is about “the fragility of one’s existence and how life could be over at any moment, which resonated with our students and audiences throughout the competitive season,” Knepper says.   

He also is on a constant quest to find new sounds for his students. “I am a huge fan of choosing repertoire that exposes my ensembles to extended techniques on their instruments,” he says. “Bowing metallic instruments, muting/muffling surfaces and running live instruments through filters in DAWs [digital audio workstations] are frequent occurrences in my music classroom. I want to expose my students to 21st century technology and how musicians use these tools to enhance their performances. I want my students to be able to not only record themselves, but manipulate sounds to expand their creative sound palettes as artists.”

Continue reading

LaBrie Katie O’hara

Back to 40 Under 40

Katie O'Hara LaBrie

Katie O’Hara LaBrie

Composer, Conductor, Clinician
Fairfax, Virginia

Despite many ups and downs health-wise during the last six years, including some that have taken Katie O’Hara LaBrie away from the classroom, she has remained committed to advocating for music education. “Whether I’m mentoring a fellow teacher, Zooming with an orchestra across the country, creating content for a conference presentation, writing music for colleagues or creating guides to learning, I have kept the creative nature and the spirit of music education close at hand, despite my physical setbacks,” she says. “In some ways, having my own physical hurdles has kept me open to others in a unique way. Understanding that you never truly know what’s going on in someone’s day or someone’s life is a valuable lesson that has changed how I approach students and situations over time.”

When the pandemic started, LaBrie’s band director husband was looking for materials to use during distance learning. “I came up with ‘Distance Duets,’ which is a set of five progressive duets from grades 1 to 4,” she explains. “The idea was to let students create ensemble-based music when live ensembles weren’t possible. Students could record and play along with their own recording or share with a friend. I gave these compositions away for free and was excited to see students from elementary through high school using them both during the start of the pandemic and today.”

At the same time, LaBrie wrote “Epic Quest,” which was commissioned by the Fairfax Arts Coalition for Education in memory of Larry Ferris, who ran the county’s Instruments for All program. “This is a flexible recruitment piece that goes along with a story, ideal for encouraging new young musicians, with versions written for different ensemble types and levels,” LaBrie says.

Early in LaBrie’s career, she discovered that music students often don’t know how to practice, so she put together strategies to help students achieve “OMGs” (Obtainable Musical Goals). “Over time, I developed a method of practicing that focused on quality over quantity which created vast improvement of students’ understanding of the fundamentals of music as well as marked improvement in our rehearsals,” she says.

She  then worked with her band colleague, Tracy Magwire, to further develop practice strategies with “The Big IDEA” (which stands for Identify, Decide, Execute and Analyze). They created a website of free resources to share with the music community at practicewithpurpose.net

“One of the keys to teaching The Big IDEA is to teach the concepts in chunks and provide background knowledge,” LaBrie explains. “Through our resources we ease students into learning how to practice with purpose step by step. One of my big goals as a music educator is to share! Share music, share ideas, share resources.”

Continue reading